Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
10250T Pushbuttons
M22 Modular Pushbuttons
1.1 Toggle Switches—E10
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-2
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-4
1.2 Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-8
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-9
1.3 Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-14
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-16
1.4 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-31
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-32
1.5 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-48
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-53
1.6 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-141
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-143
1.7 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-166
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-168
1.8 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-184
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-188
1.9 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-256
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-262
1.10 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-298
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-300
1.11 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-323
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-326
Learn
Online
V7-T1-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Tog gl e Sw i t c h e s — E10
Toggle Switches—E10
Contents
Description Page
Toggle Switches—E10
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-3
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-3
Product Selection
Toggle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-4
Hesitation Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-5
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-5
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-5
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-6
Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-6
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-7
Product Description
The E10 switches from
Eaton’s electrical sector are
intended for general purpose
light industrial use. Designed
for retrofit and OEM
applications.
Features
General Purpose Toggles
●Various circuit functions
include maintained and
momentary
●Poles include from single-
pole single-throw to four-
pole double-throw
●Spade, screw, and solder
terminations available
●Numerous ratings
●Short 11/32 in and tall
15/32 in bat lever available
●Standard 15/32–32 thd.
●Hardware furnished
assembled
Heavy-Duty Hesitation
Switches
●One-hole panel mount
●Three position switch
offers unique positive
center stop feature to
assure lever cannot be
thrown from one side
through the center OFF
position without stopping
●Design feature is a major
acceptance for motor
reversing and speed
control applications
●Prevents motor damage
resulting from high
current generation by
counter EMF of the
armature at the time of
reversing
●Known as anti-plugging,
hesitation, positive stop
or positive off switch
Non-Illuminated AC Rated
Pushbuttons
●One-hole panel mount
●Medium-duty
●Spade and screw
terminations available
●Various bushing lengths
and button extensions
●Numerous ampere ratings
with horsepower ratings
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
To g g l e Sw i t c h e s — E10
Standards and Certifications
●UL Recognized
●CSA—File No. LR40068
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Toggle Switches—E10 Series
Not to be used for ordering purposes
E10 T 1 06 A S =E10T106AS
Poles
1 = Single-pole
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Ratings—125V
06 = 6 Amperes
15 = 15 Amperes
20 = 20 Amperes
Function
A = ON—None—OFF
B = OFF—None—(ON)
D = ON—OFF—ON
E = ON—None—ON
F = ON—OFF—(ON)
G = (ON)—OFF—(ON)
H = ON—None—(ON)
Termination
S= Screw
L= Solder lug
P= Spade
Series
Lever Length
T= 0.563 in (14.3 mm) lever
E= 0.688 in (17.5 mm) lever
Complete Cat. No.
0.563 in (14.3 mm)
Single-pole
6 Amperes
ON—None—OFF
Screw terminal
V7-T1-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Tog gl e Sw i t c h e s — E10
Product Selection
Toggle Switches
E10 Series—AC Rated—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
Note
1 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V7-T1-6.
Nominal AC Ratings Poles
and
Throw 1
Function—Circuit with Lever In
Screw Terminal
Catalog Number
0.250 in (6.4 mm)
Spade Terminal
Catalog Number
Solder Lug
Catalog Number
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position—
Keyway
Amperes
125V 250V
hp
50V
Single-Pole
6 3 — 1 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10T106AS E10T106AP E10T106AL
15 10 3/4 E10T115AS E10T115AP E10T115AL
20 10 3/4 E10E120AS E10E120AP E10E120AL
6 3 — 1 P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10T106DS E10T106DP —
15 10 3/4 E10T115DS E10T115DP E10T115DL
20 10 3/4 E10E120DS — —
6 3 — 1 P.D.T. ON None ON E10T106ES — —
15 10 3/4 E10T115ES E10T115EP E10T115EL
20 10 3/4 E10E120ES — —
— 10 1/2 1 P.S.T. OFF None (ON) E10T115BS E10T115BP —
1 P.D.T. ON OFF (ON) E10T115FS E10T115FP —
1 P.D.T. ON None (ON) E10T115HS E10T115HP —
1 P.D.T. (ON) OFF (ON) E10T115GS E10T115GP —
Tw o - Po l e
6 3 — 2 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10T206AS E10T206AP —
15 10 3/4 E10T215AS E10T215AP E10T215AL
20 10 3/4 E10E220AS E10E220AP E10E220AL
6 3 — 2. P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10T206DS E10T206DP —
15 10 3/4 E10T215DS E10T215DP E10T215DL
20 10 3/4 E10E220DS E10E220DP —
6 3 — 2 P.D.T. ON None ON E10T206ES — —
15 10 3/4 E10T215ES E10T215EP E10T215EL
20 10 3/4 E10E220ES — —
15 10 1/2 2 P.S.T. OFF None (ON) E10T215BS — —
2 P.D.T. ON None (ON) E10T215HS E10T215HP —
2 P.D.T. (ON) OFF (ON) E10T215GS E10T215GP —
Three-Pole
15 10 3/4 3 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10E315AS E10E315AP —
3 P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10E315DS E10E315DP E10E315DL
3 P.D.T. ON None ON E10E315ES E10E315EP E10E315EL
Four-Pole
15 10 3/4 4 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10E415AS — E10E415AL
4 P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10E415DS — E10E415DL
4 P.D.T. ON None ON E10E415ES — E10E415EL
Two-Pole
Single-Pole
Three-Pole
Four-Pole
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
To g g l e Sw i t c h e s — E10
Hesitation Switches
E10 Series—Special Purpose—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
Pushbuttons
E10 Series—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
Accessories
Toggle Switches Accessories—Minimum Order Quantity 100 Pieces
Notes
Interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through the center position until pressure is momentarily relieved.
Designed for control and protection of reversing motors.
1 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V7-T1-6.
2 Rated 1/4 hp at 125V, 1/2 hp at 250V.
Nominal Ratings
Operation
Function—Circuit with Lever In…
Poles
and
Throw 1
Screw Terminal
Catalog Number
Amperes hp
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position—
Keyway
28
Vdc
125
Vac
250
Vac
250
Vac
15 15 10 3/4 Maintained ON OFF ON 2 P.D.T. E10E215SS
3 P.D.T. E10E315SS
4 P.D.T. E10E415SS
Nominal Ratings
Poles
and
Throw 1 Contacts
Bushing
Length
in (mm)
Dim. “A”
Button
Extension
in (mm)
Dim. “B”
Typical
Maximum
Operating
Force
Screw Terminal
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal
0.250 in (6.4 mm)
Catalog Number
Amperes hp
125 Vac 250 Vac 125–
250VNO NC NO NC
6 — 3 — — 1 P.S.T. NO 0.69 (17.5) 0.53 (13.5) 0.9 lbs E10P106RS E10P106RP
0.34 (8.6) 0.25 (6.4) E10P106JS —
15 — 10 — 1/3 1 P.S.T. NO 0.69 (17.5) 0.53 (13.5) 0.9 lbs E10P115RS E10P115RP
0.34 (8.6) 0.25 (6.4) E10P115JS —
15 10 10 5 1/4 21 P.D.T. NO, NC 0.69 (17.5) 0.53 (13.5) 1.0 lbs E10P115LS —
Description Material/Notes Catalog Number
Hexagon locknut Zinc-chromate treated steel E10TA101
Knurled face nut Zinc-chromate treated steel E10TA102
Internal tooth lockwasher Cadmium plated steel E10TA103
Terminal screws #6-32 x 3/16 in binding head E10TA201
Spade terminal adapter—0.250 in (6.4 mm) Assembles to screw terminals E10TA202
ON-OFF indicating plate—vertical orientation Burnished nickel finish steel E10TA301
OFF-ON indicating plate—horizontal orientation Burnished nickel finish steel E10TA302
Flip-up guard for toggle switches E10TA104
Fixed shroud for toggle switches E10TA105
Heavy-Duty Hesitation
Switch
One-Hole Mounted
Medium-Duty, Mom.
Contact
E10TA104
E10TA105
V7-T1-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Tog gl e Sw i t c h e s — E10
Technical Data and Specifications
Toggle Switches
Hesitation Switches
Pushbutton Actuators
Circuit Diagrams
Description Specification
AC ratings 6–20A, 125 Vac
3–10A, 250 Vac
Max. 3/4 hp at 250 Vac
DC ratings 6–20A, 28 Vdc
Electrical life 6,000 cycles make/break at switch ampere rating
Operation Slow make/slow break mechanism with butt action for AC and low voltage DC applications
Maintained and momentary contacts
Poles/throws 1 through 4, single and double throw
Mounting One hole with threaded 0.468 in-32 bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 in (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway
that serves as anti-rotational feature
Lever lengths 0.563 in (14.3 mm) or 0.688 in (17.5 mm), bright nickel plated
Terminals Screw, 0.250 in (6.4 mm) spade and solder lug
Description Specification
Operation Slow make/slow break mechanism with butt action for AC and low voltage DC applications; maintained contacts; ideal
for reversing motor applications; interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through center position until manual
pressure is momentarily relieved
AC ratings 15A, 125 Vac
10A, 250 Vac
Max. 3/4 hp at 250 Vac
DC ratings 15A, 28 Vdc
Poles/throws 2, 3 and 4, double throw only
Mounting Single-pole with threaded 0.468 in-32 bushing and 0.068 x 0.049 in (1.7 x 1.2 mm) deep keyway
Lever length 0.687 in (17.4 mm), stainless steel
Terminals Screw
Description Specification
AC ratings 6–15A, 125 Vac (NO)
3–10A, 250 Vac (NO)
Max. 1/3 hp at 125/250 Vac
Operation Slow make/slow break mechanism
Normally open contacts
Poles/throws Single, single and double throw
Mounting One hole with 0.468 in-32 threaded bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 in (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway
Two bushing heights: 11/16 in (17.5 mm) and 11/32 in (8.7 mm)
Button extensions 17/32 in (13.5 mm) and 1/4 in (6.4 mm), bright nickel plated
Terminals Screw
SPST DPST
SPDT
DPDT
4PST3PDT 4PDT3PST
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
To g g l e Sw i t c h e s — E10
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Toggle Switch Dimensions
Toggle Switch Hesitation Switch Pushbutton Actuator
Accessories
E10TA101
Hexagon Locknut
E10TA102
Knurled Face Nut
E10TA301
ON-OFF Indicating Plate—
Vertical Orientation
E10TA302
ON-OFF Indicating Plate—
Horizontal Orientation
Note
1Spade terminal adapters are used on 6 ampere and momentary screw terminal switches, adding 0.42 in (10.7 mm) to dimension C.
No. of
Poles Operation
Bushing
Length
A
Lever
Length
B
Screw Terminals Spade Terminals Solder Lug
CDEC
1DECDE
1 Momentary
and maintained
0.47
(11.9)
0.56
(14.2)
1.00
(25.4)
1.17
(29.7)
0.63
(16.0)
1.13
(28.7)
1.13
(28.7)
0.63
(16.0)
1.00
(25.4)
1.13
(28.7)
0.63
(16.0)
2 Maintained 0.47
(11.9)
0.56
(14.2)
1.06
(26.9)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.19
(30.2)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.06
(26.9)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
Momentary 0.47
(11.9)
0.56
(14.2)
1.25
(31.8)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.31
(33.3)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.25
(31.8)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
3 Maintained 0.47
(11.9)
0.69
(17.5)
1.27
(32.3)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1.37
(34.8)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1.23
(31.2)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
4 Maintained 0.47
(11.9)
0.69
(17.5)
1.20
(30.5)
1.30
(33.0)
1.40
(35.6)
1.30
(33.0)
1.34
(34.0)
1.40
(35.6)
1.23
(31.2)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
D
E
C
A
B
1.47
(37.3)
0.47-32
Thread
0.07 (1.8) x
0.05 (1.3)
Keyway
1.34
(34)
1.25
(31.8)
0.47
(11.9)
0.69
(17.5)
1.13
(28.7)
0.47-32
Thread
0.04 (1) x 0.07 (1.8)
Keyway
1.13
(28.7)
A
B
0.63
(16)
0.63
(16)
0.08
(2)
0.63
(16)
0.07
(1.8)
0.63
(16)
0.06
(1.5)
0.03
(.8)
1.0
(25.4)
ON
OFF
O
N
O
F
F
V7-T1-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E
Toggle Switches—E10E
Contents
Description Page
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E
Product Selection
Molded-In Screw Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-9
Econoswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-9
Switch Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-9
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-10
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-11
Product Description
Designed for general purpose
and OEM applications, this
line of toggle switches
provides a high IP68 rating for
demanding environments.
Features
Molded-In Screw Terminal
●Completely sealed against
dust, moisture and other
contaminants
●One-hole mounted bushing
for easy installation
●Multi-circuits offered
●Two- and three-position
with maintained and
momentary action
●Molded-in terminal inserts
and terminals numbers
●Single- and two-pole
circuitry
Econoswitch
●Environmentally sealed
●Single- and two-pole
circuitry
●One-hole mounting for
easy installation
●Multi-circuits
●Two- and three-position
with maintained and
momentary action
●Three types of termination
offered as standard
Switch Guard
●For use with two-position
switch
●Cover closure transfers
switch toggle lever to OFF
position
●One-hole mounted
mounting style
●Cover is molded out of red
thermoset molding
material
●Guard cover is spring-
loaded to either close or
lock in open position
●Prevents accidental
operation at switches
Options
Note: Contact your local Eaton
Sales Representative for more
information.
●Non-UL Recognized
devices
●Alternate toggle levers
●Locking toggle levers
●Rocker buttons
●Special mounting hardware
●Mounting hardware
furnished assembled
●Terminal screws furnished
assembled
●Special circuits
●Panel seal, part number
32-341
●Spade terminal adapters
available
Standards and
Certifications
●UL—File number E15346;
Guide card number is
WOYR2
●CSA—LR40068, class
number 6241
UL and CSA Nominal
Ratings
Catalog Number 125 Vac 250 Vac
Amperes
E10E118xx 18 9
E10E218xx 18 9
Single-Phase hp
E10E118xx 1/4 1/2
E10E218xx 1/2 1
Three-Phase hp
E10E118xx ——
E10E218xx ——
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E
Product Selection
Molded-In Screw Terminal
E10E Series—Molded-In Screw Terminal
Econoswitch
E10E Series—Econoswitch
Switch Guard
E10E Series—Switch Guard
Note
1 Momentary contact.
Circuit with Lever Position
Catalog Number
Up Center
Down
(Keyway)
Nominal AC Ratings
Amperes Single-Phase hp Three-Phase hp
125V 250V 125V 250V 125/250V
Single-Pole
18 9 1/4 1/2 — ON OFF ON E10E118DM
ON NONE OFF E10E118AM
ON NONE ON E10E118EM
Tw o - Po l e
18 9 1/2 1 — ON OFF ON E10E218DM
ON NONE OFF E10E218AM
ON NONE ON E10E218EM
Type of
Operation
Circuit with Lever Position
Screw Terminal
Catalog Number
Solder Lug
Terminal
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal
Catalog Number
Current Ratings—Amperes
Up Center
Down
(Keyway)
28 Vdc 115 Vac, 60 or 400 Hz
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
Lamp
Load
Resistive
Load
Inductive
Load
Single-Pole
Maintained 5 20 15 3 15 10 ON OFF ON E10E118DS E10E118DL E10E118DP
Maintained 5 20 15 3 15 10 ON NONE OFF E10E118AS E10E118AL E10E118AP
Maintained 5 20 15 3 15 10 ON NONE ON E10E118ES E10E118EL E10E118EP
Momentary 4 15 10 2 15 7 ON 1OFF ON 1E10E118GS E10E118GL E10E118GP
Momentary 4 15 10 2 15 7 OFF NONE ON 1E10E118BS E10E118BL E10E118BP
Tw o - Po l e
Maintained 7 20 15 4 15 15 ON OFF ON E10E218DS E10E218DL E10E218DP
Maintained 7 20 15 4 15 15 ON NONE OFF E10E218AS E10E218AL E10E218AP
Maintained 7 20 15 4 15 15 ON NONE ON E10E218ES E10E218EL E10E218EP
Momentary 5 18 10 2 11 8 ON 1OFF ON 1E10E218GS E10E218GL E10E218GP
Momentary 5 18 10 2 11 8 OFF NONE ON 1E10E218BS E10E218BL E10E218BP
Catalog Number
Switch Guard E10TA104
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Single-Pole
Two-Pole
Switch Guard
V7-T1-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E
Technical Data and Specifications
E10E Series—Molded-In Screw Terminal
E10E Series—Econoswitch
Description Specification
Watertight seal Per MIL-STD-108E and designed to meet IP68
Thermoset molding materials Meet flame retardant requirements
Temperature range –50° to 150°F (–46° to 66°C)
Life 20,000 operations at rated load; 40,000 operations mechanical life;
6,000 operations at hp ratings per UL and CSA requirements
Bushings 15/32 in-32 thread
Description Specification
Watertight seal Per MIL-STD-108E and designed to meet IP68
Type of terminal Screws—6-32 UNC-22A
Solder lug—0.125 in (3.17 mm) dia. hole
Spade—0.250 in (6.35 mm) x 0.032 in (0.81 mm) thick
Life 50,000 operations at rated load; 100,000 operations mechanical life
Temperature range –50° to 150°F (–46° to 66°C)
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Single-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series
Toggle Switch Panel Cutout
Two-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series
15/32 Dia. Bushing
0.375
(9.52) 0.130
(3.30) 0.062
(1.57)
0.480 (12.19)
Dia. Hole
Locking Ring Keyway
0.445
(11.30)
0.480 (12.19)
Dia. Hole
0.690
(17.53)
0.470
(11.94)
1.10 0
(27.94)
Max.
0.130
(3.30)
0.250
(6.35)
0.130
(3.30)
0.380
(9.65)
0.910
(23.11)
Max.
1.370
(34.80)
Max.
0.076
(1.93)
Keyway
#6-32 Terminal Screw
with Internal Tooth
Lockwasher (SEMS)
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
123
456
0.432
(10.97)
16.5°
33°
0.240 (6.10)
Dia.
0.380
(9.65)
Typ.
1.340 (34.04) Max.
V7-T1-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Single-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series
Two-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series
#6-32 UNC-2A
Terminal Screw,
SEMS 0.125 (3.17)
Dia. Hole
0.250 x 0.032
(6.35) x (0.81)
Thick
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
0.240 (6.10)
Dia.
0.432
(10.97)
0.076
(1.93)
Keyway
2
132
132
13
Screw Terminal Solder Lug Spade Terminal
0.690
(17.53)
0.470
(11.94)
1.30
(33.0)
Max.
1.28
(32.5)
Max.
1.51
(38.4)
Max.
0.594
(15.09)
1.25 (31.75)
33°
16.5°
0.432
(10.97)
0.076
(1.93)
Keyway
33°
0.125 (3.17)
Dia. Hole
0.250 x 0.032
(6.35) x (0.81)
Thick
1.55
(39.4)
Max.
Screw Terminal Solder Lug Spade Terminal
0.89
(22.6)
1.32 (33.5)
#6-32 UNC-2A
Terminal Screw,
SEMS
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
0.240 (6.10)
Dia. 16.5°
0.690
(17.53)
0.468
(11.89)
1.34
(34.1)
Max.
1.32
(33.5)
Max.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Switch Guard
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
Rivet
Switch
(Ref.)
Red-Molded
Plastic
Closed
Steel
Open
0.240 (6.10)
Dia.
33°
0.840
(21.34)
0.468
(11.89)
0.688
(17.48)
Max.
0.062
(1.57)
0.031
(0.79)
1.062
(26.97)
1.547 (39.29)
Rad.
0.475
(12.07)
Dia.
0.688
(17.48)
1.093
(27.76)
Max.
0.032
(0.81)
1.635 (41.53) Max.
1.830 (46.48) Max.
0.750
(19.05)
Max.
V7-T1-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Pushbutton Control Stations
Contents
Description Page
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-15
Product Selection
M22 Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . V7-T1-16
Commercial Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-17
General Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . V7-T1-18
Special Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . V7-T1-19
10250H Series Heavy-Duty
Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-20
10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm
Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-21
Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty
30.5 mm Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-22
Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion
Resistant 30.5 mm Control Stations . . . . V7-T1-23
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-23
Custom Assembled Stations
Specification Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-24
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-26
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-28
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-28
Product Description
M22 Assembled Control
Stations
●M22 series operators
●Available in horizontal and
vertical configurations
●Impact resistant
polycarbonate enclosures
●Optional yellow covers
●Base mounting contact
blocks and light units for
quick wiring and vibration
resistance
Commercial Control Stations
●10250T series operators
●Full front label
●Specific function labels on
front of enclosure
General Purpose Control
Stations
●Construction grade
●General purpose wall
mount
●Popular with contractors
●UL (NEMA) Type 1
Special Purpose Control
Stations
●Standard grade
●Polyester enclosure
●UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4,
4X, 13
10250H Series Heavy-Duty
Control Stations
●10250H Series operators
●Dark brown polyester
enclosure
●Protective rubber gaskets
provide NEMA 3S rating on
pushbuttons
●Top and bottom 3/4 in NPT
conduit entrances
●Includes alternate legend
plates and spare mounting
screws
10250T Series Heavy-Duty
30.5 mm Control Stations
●10250T Series operators
●ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc
enclosures
●Surface or flush mounting
●Single 3/4 in NPT conduit
entrance on one and two
element stations
●Single 1 in NPT conduit
entrance on three element
stations
Class I Division 2 10250T
Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm
Control Stations
●10250T Series operators
●Factory sealed contact
blocks
●Die-cast, polyester or
stainless steel enclosures
●Approved for NEC Class I
Division 2, Groups B, C and
D or Class I Zone 2 Group
IIB plus Hydrogen type
hazardous locations
Class I Division 2 E34 Series
Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm
Control Stations
●E34 Series operators
●Factory sealed contact
blocks
●Die-cast, polyester or
stainless steel enclosures
●Approved for NEC Class I
Division 2 Groups B, C and
D or Class I Zone 2 Group
IIB plus Hydrogen type
hazardous locations
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Features
M22 Assembled Control
Stations
●IP66, UL (NEMA) Type 4X,
13
●Impact resistant
polycarbonate enclosures
●Optional yellow cover
●25% smaller depth than
most competitor
enclosures
●Base mounting contact
blocks and light units for
faster wiring and vibration
resistance
Commercial Control Stations
●ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc
enclosures
●Pre-assembled and labeled
for functions such as “Fuel
Shut-Off”
●Great for commercial
applications
General Purpose Control
Stations
●Construction grade
●General purpose wall
mount
●Popular with contractors
●UL (NEMA) Type 1
Special Purpose Control
Stations
●Standard grade
●Polyester enclosure
●UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4,
4X, 13
10250H Series Heavy-Duty
Control Stations
●Industrial grade
●Extra heavy-duty
●Polyester enclosure
●Booted buttons
●Outdoor installation
●UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S,
4, 4X, 12, 13
10250T Series Heavy-Duty
30.5 mm Control Stations
●30.5 mm operators
●Industrial grade
●Zinc die cast enclosure
●Popular with industrial end
users
●UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12,
13
Class I Division 2 Control
Stations
●Available with 10250T or
E34 30.5 mm operators
●Zinc die cast, polyester or
stainless steel enclosures
●Factory-sealed contact
blocks
●Popular with industrial end
users
●UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12,
13
●NEC Class I Division 2
Groups B, C and D
V7-T1-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Product Selection
M22 Assembled Control Stations
One Element Control Stations
Two Element Control Stations
Three Element Control Stations
Notes
For assembled control stations not found in this selection, please contact the Eaton Technical Resource Center
at 1-877-ETN CARE (386-2273) or TRC@eaton.com.
1
Contact block configuration.
Orientation Description Color 1Inscription
Enclosure
Cover Color Catalog Number
Horizontal 40 mm mushroom head push-pull emergency stop operator Red NC — Yellow M22-C1-M1H
Horizontal 40 mm illuminated mushroom head push-pull emergency stop
operator, 85–264 Vac
Red NO-NC — Yellow M22-C1-M2H
Horizontal 40 mm mushroom head twist-to-release emergency stop operator Red NC — Yellow M22-C1-M3H
Horizontal 40 mm mushroom head key-release emergency stop operator Red NC — Yellow M22-C1-M4H
Horizontal Flush pushbutton Green NO Gray M22-C1-M5H
Horizontal Flush pushbutton Green NO START Gray M22-C1-M6H
Horizontal Extended pushbutton Red NC Gray M22-C1-M7H
Horizontal Extended pushbutton Red NC STOP Gray M22-C1-M8H
Horizontal Key-operated selector switch, two-position maintained — NO OFF-ON Gray M22-C1-M9H
Horizontal Knob type selector switch, three-position maintained — 2NO HAND 0 AUTO Gray M22-C1-M10H
Horizontal Double pushbutton Green NO START Gray M22-C1-M11H
Red NC STOP
Orientation
Element 1
Description Color 1Inscription
Element 2
Description Color 1Inscription
Enclosure
Cover Color Catalog Number
Horizontal Extended pushbutton Red NC Flush pushbutton Green NO Gray M22-C2-M1H
Vertical Flush pushbutton Green NO START Extended pushbutton Red NC STOP Gray M22-C2-M2V
Vertical Flush pushbutton Black NO FORWARD Flush pushbutton Black NO REVERSE Gray M22-C2-M3V
Orientation
Element 1
Description Color 1Inscription
Element 2
Description Color 1Inscription
Element 3
Description Color 1Inscription
Enclosure
Cover Color Catalog Number
Horizontal Extended
pushbutton
Red NC Indicating
light
White 85–264
Vac
—Flush
pushbutton
Green NO Gray M22-C3-M1H
Vertical Indicating
light
White 85–264
Vac
—Flush
pushbutton
Green NO START Extended
pushbutton
Red NC STOP Gray M22-C3-M2V
Horizontal Flush
pushbutton
Green NO Extended
pushbutton
Red NC Flush
pushbutton
Green NO Gray M22-C3-M3H
Vertical Flush
pushbutton
Black NO OPEN Extended
pushbutton
Red NC STOP Flush
pushbutton
Black NO CLOSE Gray M22-C3-M4V
Vertical Flush
pushbutton
Black NO FORWARD Flush
pushbutton
Red NC STOP Flush
pushbutton
Black NO REVERSE Gray M22-C3-M5V
Vertical Flush
pushbutton
Black NO UP Flush
pushbutton
Red NC STOP Flush
pushbutton
Black NO DOWN Gray M22-C3-M6V
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-17
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Commercial Control Stations
Key Specifications
●30.5 mm (10250T series)
operators
●ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc
enclosures
●Industrial grade
●UL® Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
●Single 3/4 in NPT conduit
entrance
●Dimensions—in (mm)
●Enclosure:
3.88 W x 4.00 H x 3.00 D
(98.6 x 101.6 x 76.3)
●Operator:
1.63 D (to enclosure) x
1.50 diameter
(41.4 x 38.1)
What is included?
Eaton’s pre-assembled,
enclosed emergency stop
pushbutton stations include
an operator, an enclosure,
contact blocks and a variety
of unique labels. Each label
has white lettering on a red
background indicating the
function and red lettering on a
white background indicating
the operator type.
Available Catalog Numbers
Additional Contact Blocks
(Sold Separately)
Note
1Includes 1NO-1NC contact block.
Catalog
Number 1Operator
Enclosure
Color Label
10250T5B62-S101 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY STOP
10250T5B62-S102 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF
10250T5B62-S103 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY GENERATOR STOP
10250T5B62-S104 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY HVAC SHUT-DOWN
10250T5B62-S105 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL DISCONNECT
10250T5B62-S106 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY BOILER SHUT-DOWN
10250T5B62-S107 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY CHILLER STOP
10250T5B62-S108 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY FUEL SHUT-OFF
10250T5B62-S109 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY REFRIGERATION STOP
10250T5B62-S110 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY POWER OFF
10250T5B62-S111 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY GAS SHUT-OFF
10250T5B62-S112 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY VENTILATION SHUT-DOWN
10250T5B62-S113 Push-Pull Gray GENERATOR
Catalog Number
Circuit
Configuration
10250T51 1NC
10250T53 1NO
10250T1 NO-NC
10250T3 2NC
10250T2 2NO
V7-T1-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
General Purpose Control Stations
Type N Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 1
Note
1 Round button.
Contact
Symbol Button Type/Color Legends Catalog Number
One Element Enclosure Type
Flush/green START 10250H5100
Flush/red STOP 10250H5101
Extended/red STOP 10250H5104
Palm operated/black None 10250H89 1
Three-position selector
switch/black knob
RUN/OFF/AUTO 10250H289 1
Two Element Enclosure Type
Flush/red START/STOP 10250H5200
Flush/green
extended/red
START/STOP 10250H5207
Flush/black (all) RAISE/LOWER 10250H5201
FOR/REV 10250H5202
OPEN/CLOSE 10250H5203
UP/DOWN 10250H5204
HIGH/LOW 10250H5205
FAST/SLOW 10250H5208
Three Element Enclosure Type
Flush/black (all) FOR/REV/STOP 10250H5300
UP/DOWN/STOP 10250H5301
RAISE/LOWER/STOP 10250H5302
OPEN/CLOSE/STOP 10250H5303
FAST/SLOW/STOP 10250H5304
110/220V neon indicating light START/STOP
Clear—flush/green; flush/red 10250H5310
Red—flush/green; flush/red 10250ED853
Amber—flush/green; flush/red 10250ED853-2
Selector Switch
Two Button Station
Three Button Station
Three Button Station
with Indicating Light
Single Button Station
with Padlock
Attachment Accessory
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-19
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Type N Control Stations—Open Type Construction (No Cover)
Special Purpose Control Stations
Special Purpose Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13
Note
1 No legend on buttons. Specify any standard legend.
Contact
Symbol Button Type/Color Legends Catalog Number
One Element Enclosure Type
Three-position selector
switch/black knob
RUN/OFF/AUTO 10250H2538
Two Element Enclosure Type
Flush/green START/STOP 10250H2747
Flush/black (all)
mech. interlocked
None 110250H2544
Contact
Symbol Feature Legends Catalog Number
One Element Pushbutton Type
Flush START 10250H2738
STOP 10250H658
With lock hasp STOP 10250H665
Two Element Pushbutton Type
Flush START/STOP 10250H364
With lock hasp START/STOP 10250H671
Buttons interlocked FAST/SLOW 10250ED664
FOR/REV 10250H2740
UP/DOWN 10250H2741
OPEN/CLOSE 10250H2742
Mechanically
Interlocked
Pushbuttons
Two Button Station
Selector Switch
10250H_
10250H_
V7-T1-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
10250H Series Heavy-Duty Control Stations
Type H Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Element Type Feature Circuit
Assembled
Legend
Plate
Unassembled
Alternate
Legend Plate Catalog Number
One Element
Pushbuttons Without padlock hasp 1NO-1NC JOG START 10250H1881
STOP
RUN
With padlock hasp 1NC STOP — 10250H4239
Knob selector
switch
Two-position 1NO-1NC OFF/ON — 10250H4526
Three-position 1NO-1NC MAN/OFF/AUTO — 10250H4527
Two Element
Pushbuttons Standard 1NO-2NC START/STOP — 10250H1884
2NO-2NC RAISE/LOWER FORWARD 10250H1885
REVERSE
OPEN
CLOSE
Standard and
standard with
padlock hasp
1NO-2NC START/STOP — 10250H4240
Three Element
Pushbuttons Standard 2NO-3NC FOR/REV/STOP START OPEN 10250H1890
Two standard and
standard with
padlock hasp
JOG CLOSE 10250H4241
RAISE FAST
LOWER SLOW
Indicating
light and
pushbuttons
120V Light-red lens
and two plain
1NO-2NC MOTOR
RUNNING
START/STOP
—10250H1913
10250H_
10250H_
10250H_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-21
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations
Complete Assembled Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
Break Glass Kit
Notes
1 Stop buttons are red—all others are black.
2 NEMA 4–13, if properly mounted on a flat surface. Consists of front plate, legend, operator and contact blocks.
3 Break glass stations will not function with Normally Open contact blocks.
4 Lock is 10250TA2.
5 Uses deep cover instead of shallow cover. Switch component is 10250TA67—mechanically interlocked operators.
6 Shown assembled to contact block (contact block supplied separately).
Element Type 1Features
Contact
Block(s) Legend
Surface Mounting
Catalog Number
Flush Mounting 2
Catalog Number
Break Glass Station
Break glass station 3Gray enclosure NC (logic level) EMERG. OFF 10250TGS —
Red enclosure 10250TGR —
One Element
Pushbutton Standard NO-NC START 10250T3516 10250T3573
NC STOP 10250T3518 10250T3575
NO-NC None 10250T3540 10250T3597
Mushroom head NO-NC START 10250T3517 10250T3574
NC STOP 10250T3519 10250T3576
With lock hasp 4NC STOP 10250T3520 10250T3577
Selector switch Two-position
black knob
NO-NC OFF/ON 10250T3523 10250T3580
Three-position
black knob
2NO MAN/OFF/AUTO 10250T3524 10250T3581
Push-pull
three-position
Momentary
red button
2NC START/STOP 10250T3545 10250T3602
Two Element
Pushbuttons Standard 1NO-2NC START/STOP 10250T3525 10250T3582
2NO-2NC RAISE/LOWER 10250T3672 10250T3673
2NO-2NC None 10250T3541 10250T3598
With lock hasp 4 1NO-2NC START/STOP 10250T3542 10250T3599
Standard and mushroom head 1NO-2NC START/STOP 10250T3526 10250T3583
Standard with
maintained contact 5
NO-NC START/STOP 10250T3528 10250T3585
Plus NC
Three Element
Pushbuttons Standard 2NO-3NC FOR, REV, STOP 10250T3532 10250T3589
2NO-3NC UP, DOWN, STOP 10250T3615 —
2NO-3NC OPEN, CLOSE, STOP 10250T3614 —
2NO-3NC None, None, STOP 10250T3543 10250T3600
Two standard and with lock hasp 2NO-3NC None, None, STOP 10250T3544 10250T3601
Indicating light
(transformer type)
and pushbuttons
Red lens — 120V 1NO-2NC MOTOR RUN,
START/STOP
10250T3536 10250T3593
Red lens — 240V 10250T3537 10250T3594
Red lens — 480V 10250T3538 10250T3595
Red lens — 600V 10250T3539 10250T3596
Description Catalog Number
Operator with hammer and five glass discs 10250TBG
Glass discs only (5) 10250TGL
Break Glass Station
One Element
Two Element
Three Element
Break Glass
Operator 6
V7-T1-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations
Complete Assembled Stations—
UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Contact
Symbol
Button
Type/Color
Legend
Marking
Die Cast
Enclosure
Catalog Number
Polyester Molded
Enclosure
Catalog Number
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
Catalog Number
Single Pushbutton
Flush/green START 10250T7003 10250T7003P 10250T7003S
Extended/red STOP 10250T7005 10250T7005P 10250T7005S
Alum. jumbo
mushroom/red
EMER. STOP
(engraved button)
10250T7007 10250T7007P 10250T7007S
Flush/black No legend 10250T7009 10250T7009P 10250T7009S
Two Pushbuttons
Flush/green START 10250T7023 10250T7023P 10250T7023S
Extended/red STOP
Flush/black No legend 10250T7025 10250T7025P 10250T7025S
Flush/black No legend
Single Pilot Light—Two Pushbuttons
120 Vac red No legend 10250T7033 10250T7033P 10250T7033S
Flush/green START
Extended/red STOP
120 Vac red No legend 10250T7035 10250T7035P 10250T7035S
Flush/black
Flush/black
Three-Position Selector Switch
Maintained
knob/black
HAND/OFF/AUTO 10250T7011 10250T7011P 10250T7011S
Maintained
knob/black
No legend 10250T7013 10250T7013P 10250T7013S
Single Pushbutton Maintained
Push-pull
with jumbo
mushroom/red
EMER. STOP
(engraved button)
10250T7019 10250T7019P 10250T7019S
10250T7007
10250T7023P
10250T7033S
1NO
1NC
Each Button
1NC
1NO
Each Button
1NC
1NO
2NC
2NO
Pull
O
X
Push
X
O
1NO
1NC
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-23
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm Control Stations
Complete Assembled Stations—
UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Accessories
Type N Control Stations
Note
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page V7-T1-22.
Contact
Symbol
Button
Type/Color
Legend
Marking
Die Cast
Enclosure
Catalog Number
Polyester Molded
Enclosure
Catalog Number
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
Catalog Number
Single Pushbutton
Flush/green START E34EX7003 E34EX7003P E34EX7003S
Extended/red STOP E34EX7005 E34EX7005P E34EX7005S
Alum. jumbo
mushroom/red
EMER. STOP
(engraved button)
E34EX7007 E34EX7007P E34EX7007S
Flush/black No legend E34EX7009 E34EX7009P E34EX7009S
Two Pushbuttons
Flush/green START E34EX7023 E34EX7023P E34EX7023S
Extended/red STOP
Flush/black No legend E34EX7025 E34EX7025P E34EX7025S
Flush/black No legend
Three-Position Selector Switch
Maintained
knob/black
HAND/OFF/AUTO E34EX7011 E34EX7011P E34EX7011S
Maintained
knob/black
No legend E34EX7013 E34EX7013P E34EX7013S
Single Pushbutton Maintained
Push-pull with jumbo
mushroom/red
EMER. STOP
(engraved button)
E34EX7019 E34EX7019P E34EX7019S
Description Catalog Number
Padlock attachment—For field assembly on square button type
(except extended button types)
10250H5110
E34EX_
1NO
1NC
Each Button
1NC
1NO
2NC
2NO
Pull
O
X
Push
X
O
1NO
1NC
Padlock Attachment
V7-T1-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Custom Assembled Stations Specification Form
Ordering Instructions
Step 1
Copy this ordering guide from
catalog.
Step 2
Specify 10250T or E34
pushbutton lines in the
corresponding box on the
following page.
Step 3
Check back of panel
dimensions—specify single
or double depth enclosure in
the corresponding box on the
following page.
Step 4
Specify enclosure catalog
number and price in the
corresponding box on the
following page. Enclosures
can be found on Pages
V7-T1-118, V7-T1-235
and V7-T1-285. For pricing,
reference the most recent
PAD or VISTA-line.
Step 5
Specify catalog numbers for
desired operator, legend
plate, light unit, accessory
and contact block(s) for each
location in the enclosure in
the corresponding box on the
following page. (See position
locations on this page.)
Position Locations
Step 6
For non-standard legends,
specify legend desired, letter
size and location on the
layout sketches on the
following page. For
limitations see Page
V7-T1-234. For pricing,
use the blank legend catalog
number and “STAMP” Suffix
(Ex.: 10250TS36STAMP) and
reference the most recent
PAD or VISTA-line.
Example: 10250TS36
Special
Legend
for Position #_______
Step 7
Fax Sheet 2 of this form to
Eaton’s TRC, Technical
Resource Center, at 828-651-
0549 to the attention of—
Custom Stations Order or
email to TRC@eaton.com.
Within a few days you will
receive a confirmation fax
with the custom station part
number and price.
Step 8
Place your order over the
VISTA System.
For Selector and Roto-Push
Operators
10250T or E34
For single contact blocks or
1NO-1NC contact blocks, the
mounting position of contacts
must be specified. For
example: If a 1NO-1NC
contact block is required,
specify if NO is to be
mounted in Top A position or
Bottom B position.
10250T Pages
V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255
E34 Pages
V7-T1-256 to V7-T1-297
10250T and
E34
Class I Div. 2
Pages
V7-T1-323 to V7-T1-363
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 1
Position 2
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Position 1
LETTER
SIZE
3/32 in
1/8 in ✔
3/16 in
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-25
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
for Assembled Stations
FACTORY USE ONLY
Part Number
Product Code
Suffix
Date
Engineer
Step 3) ✔
Single Depth Enclosure
Double Depth Enclosure
Step 4)
Enclosure Catalog Number Price
Step 2)
10250T ❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2
E34 ❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2
Step 5)
Position Operator
Price
U.S. $ Light Unit
Price
U.S. $
Contact
Block
Price
U.S. $ A/L B/R
Contact
Block
Price
U.S. $ A/L B/R
Total
Price
1
2
3
4
Total:
Step 6) Non-standard Legends
Special Legend for Position #_______ Special Legend for Position #_______ Special Legend for Position #_______
LETTER SIZE ✔
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
Position Legend Plate
Price
U.S. $ Lens or Caps
Price
U.S. $ Accessory
Price
U.S. $
Total
Price
1
2
3
4
To — Eaton’s TRC, Custom Station Order
(828) 651-0549 FAX, or email to TRC@eaton.com
From — Customer Name ___________________________________________
Customer Contact __________________________________________
Phone Number_____________________________________________
Fax Number _______________________________________________
Email Address _____________________________________________
10% Adder
LETTER SIZE ✔
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
LETTER SIZE ✔
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
V7-T1-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Renewal Parts
Ty p e N R e n e w a l P a r t s
Assembled Stations—Type N
Item
No. Description
No.
Req. Part Number
Type N—Square Buttons
1 Cover 1
Two element 49-3524
One element—top button 49-3524-2
One element—bottom button 49-3524-3
2 Cover screw 2 11-2168
3 Pushbutton support bracket 1 79-6649
4 Pushbutton support bracket screw 1 11-2090
5 Pushbutton spring 2 69-2571
6 Disc (when used—two element assembly) 2 16-1960
7 Pushbutton—top position 1
START/green 53-1169-3
RAISE/black 53-1169-66
FORWARD/black 53-1169-7
OPEN/black 53-1169-9
UP/blank 53-1169-11
Blank/green 53-1169
8 Pushbutton—bottom position 1
STOP/red 53-1202-2
Extended STOP/red 53-1202-5
REVERSE/black 53-1169-8
CLOSE/black 53-1169-10
DOWN/black 53-1169-12
LOWER/black 53-1169-6
Blank/red 53-1202
Item
No. Description
No.
Req. Part Number
Type N—Square Buttons, continued
9 Pushbutton element 1
1NO-1NC 86-2588
2NO 86-2588-2
1NO 86-2588-3
1NC 86-2588-4
10 Cover 1 49-3464
11 Pushbutton support bracket 1 79-6650
12 Pushbutton—top position 1
FORWARD/black 53-1170-7
UP/black 53-1170-4
RAISE/black 53-1170-5
OPEN/black 53-1170-9
FAST/black 53-1170-6
13 Pushbutton middle position 1
REVERSE/black 53-1169-15
DOWN/black 53-1169-18
LOWER/black 53-1169-16
CLOSE/black 53-1169-17
SLOW/black 53-1169-13
14 Pushbutton—bottom position 1
STOP/red 53-1201-2
15 Pushbutton element 1
2NO-3NC 86-2593
16 Cover 1 49-3524-4
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-27
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Assembled Stations—Type N, continued
Ty p e H R e n e w a l P a r t s
Assembled Stations—Type H
Item
No. Description
No.
Req. Part Number
Type N—Square Buttons, continued
17 Lens 1
Clear 28-494
Red 28-887-2
Amber 28-887-3
18 Shield 1 73-1337
19 Shield screws 4 11-2012
20 Lamp (neon NE48) 1 28-494
21 Lamp receptacle 1 28-902
22 Lamp receptacle screw 1 911-330F1
23 Pilot light terminal base 1 86-2586
24 Lens 1
Clear 28-887
Red 28-887-2
Amber 28-887-3
25 Pushbutton support bracket 1 79-6650-2
26 Pushbutton element 1
1NO-1NC 86-2594
Item
No. Description
No.
Req. Part Number
Type N—Round Buttons
Similar
to 27
Pushbutton assembly and element for:
10250H289 1 10250H2538
10250H364 1 86-353
10250H685 1 86-353-8
10250H665 1 86-353-8
10250H671 1 86-353
10250H2738 1 86-353-3
10250H2740 1 86-356
10250H2741 1 86-356
10250H2742 1 86-356
1
Pushbutton Indicating Light
2
3
5
4
6
3
4
5
9
78
12
7
12 1
Selector Switch
2
11
10
10
5
4
7
Item
No. Description
No.
Req. Part Number
Type H—Assembled Stations
1Screw 2 11-4654
2Screw 2 11-5719
3Base 1 17-16560
4 Contact blocks See Page V7-T1-237
5 10250T operator See Pages V7-T1-190
to V7-T1-227
6 Mounting plate 1 17-19524
Item
No. Description
No.
Req. Part Number
Type H—Assembled Stations
7Screw 4 11-953
8 Diaphragm 1 32-253-2
9 Mounting plate 1 17-19522
10 Gasket 1 32-254
11 Base 1 17-16561
12 Mounting plate 1 17-19523
V7-T1-28 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Technical Data and Specifications
Ratings
Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type N Control Stations
Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type H Control Stations
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Type N Control Stations
Special Purpose Control Stations
Note
12.38 (60.5) for neon indicating light.
Volts AC Volts DC
Description 110 220 440 550 120 240 600
Make and emergency interrupt capacity 30 15 7.5 6 1.0 0.5 0.1
Normal load break 3 1.5 0.75 0.6 1.0 0.5 0.1
Continuous current 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Description
Volts AC 50/60 Hz Volts DC
120 240 480 600 125 250
Make and emergency interrupt capacity 60 30 15 12 1.1 0.55
Normal load break 6 3 1.5 1.2 1.1 0.55
Continuous amperes 10 10 10 10 10 10
Voltamperes —
Make and emergency interrupt capacity 7200 7200 7200 7200 138 138
Normal load break 720 720 720 720 138 138
3.25
(82.6)
4.00
(101.6)
2.25
(57.2)
a
1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)
3.25
(82.6)
4.00
(101.6)
2.25
(57.2)
a
1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)
Single Button Station
5.00
(127.0)
6.00
(152.4)
2.25
(57.2)
a
1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)
Two Button Station Three Button Station
3.13
(79.5)
0.75 (19.1)
Pipe Tap
2.25
(57.2)
3.38
(85.9)
6.25
(158.8)
5.50
(139.7)
Ship Wt.
2.5 Lb (1.1 kg)
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-29
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Type H Control Stations
NEMA Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 13
10250T and E34
Approximate Enclosure Dimensions
Note
1No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.
No. of
Elements
Dimensions
Wide High Deep
1 and 2 4.50 (114.3) 8.25 (209.6) 4.50 (114.3)
3 4.50 (114.3) 10.75 (273.1) 4.25 (108.0)
Number
of
Elements
Surface Mounting
Conduit
Entrance
Dimensions in In (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
DE
Cast
13.88
(98.6)
4.0
(101.6)
3.0
(76.3)
2.69
(68.3)
3.25
(82.6)
3/4
23.88
(98.6)
5.88
(149.4)
3.0
(76.3)
2.69
(68.3)
5.13
(130.3)
3/4
33.88
(98.6)
7.75
(196.9)
3.0
(76.3)
2.69
(68.3)
7.0
(177.8)
1
433.88
(98.6)
9.63
(244.6)
3.0
(76.3)
2.69
(68.3)
8.88
(225.6)
1
Polyester
13.81
(96.8)
6.63
(168.4)
3.38
(85.9)
2.94
(74.7)
4.88
(124.0)
1
23.81
(96.8)
6.63
(168.4)
3.38
(85.9)
2.94
(74.7)
4.88
(124.0)
1
33.81
(96.8)
8.88
(225.6)
3.38
(85.9)
2.94
(74.7)
7.13
(181.1)
1
43.81
(96.8)
6.63
(168.4)
3.38
(85.9)
2.94
(74.7)
4.88
(124.0)
1
Stainless Steel
13.00
(76.2)
3.50
(88.9)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
4.25
(108.0)
1
23.50
(88.9)
6.75
(171.5)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
7.50
(190.5)
1
33.50
(88.9)
9.00
(228.6)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
9.00
(228.6)
1
43.50
(88.9)
11.25
(285.8)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
12.00
(304.8)
1
A
Surface
DC
B
E
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
V7-T1-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Contents
Description Page
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-31
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-32
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-34
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-35
Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated,
Illuminated and Keyed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-36
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-40
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-43
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-45
Product Overview
Product Description
The RMQ-16 pushbutton
line offers a wide array of
functional and attractively
designed illuminated and
non-illuminated pushbuttons,
selector switches, emergency
stops and indicating lights.
The illuminated line is offered
with either incandescent or
LED. RMQ-16 devices are
designed with two front-of-
panel operator sizes. The
18 x 18 mm or 25 x 25 mm
square operators can help
the user achieve over three
times the information density
compared with 22 mm ranges.
Features
●Wide product breadth:
RMQ-16 offers illuminated
and non-illuminated
pushbuttons, keyed,
non-keyed, and illuminated
selector switches,
emergency stops, and a
large variety of accessories
●Custom laser etching:
Hundreds of standard
markings available in
addition to infinite possible
custom images with laser
etching
●High durability:
Pushbuttons and selector
switches rated for 3 million
mechanical operations
●High information density:
Square operators (18 mm
or 25 mm) allow for side-
by-side mounting and
achieve over three times
the information density of
typical 22 mm installations
●Laser etched operators
●Heavy-duty construction
with IP65 on front of panel
operators
●LED or incandescent
illumination available
●Front-of-panel operators
available in either
18 x 18 mm or 25 x 25 mm
sizes
●Safety rated emergency
stops (IEC 60947-5,
positively driven contacts)
●Mounting diameter
16.2 mm to EN 50007
Standards and Certifications
●UL Listed
●CSA Certified
●IEC/EN 60947-5 VDE-0660
●IP65
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-31
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Product Selection Guide
Pushbuttons
Indicating Lights
Emergency Stops
Selector Switches
Description Non-Illuminated Illuminated
Product Selection Page V7-T1-32 Page V7-T1-33
Description Flush Extended
Product Selection Page V7-T1-34 Page V7-T1-34
Description Non-Illuminated Illuminated
Product Selection Page V7-T1-35 Page V7-T1-35
Description Non-Illuminated Illuminated Keyed
Product Selection Page V7-T1-36 Page V7-T1-37 Page V7-T1-38
V7-T1-32 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
●Momentary or maintained
●Customizable laser etched pushbutton operators
●18 mm or 25 mm square operator
●3 million mechanical operations
●IEC/EN 60947-5
●IP65
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
Note
1 To order separate button plates, see Page V7-T1-42.
Type
Button
Color
Catalog Number
18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Momentary Green Q18-D-GN Q25-D-GN
Red Q18-D-RT Q25-D-RT
Black Q18-D-SW Q25-D-SW
White Q18-D-WS Q25-D-WS
Blue Q18-D-BL Q25-D-BL
Yellow Q18-D-GE Q25-D-GE
Without Q18-D-X 1Q25-D-X 1
Maintained Green Q18-DR-GN Q25-DR-GN
Red Q18-DR-RT Q25-DR-RT
Black Q18-DR-SW Q25-DR-SW
White Q18-DR-WS Q25-DR-WS
Blue Q18-DR-BL Q25-DR-BL
Yellow Q18-DR-GE Q25-DR-GE
Without Q18-DR-X 1Q25-DR-X 1
Face Plate
18 = 18 x 18 mm
25 = 25 x 25 mm
Q18–DR–BL/WB
Button Plate
GN =Green
RT =Red
SW = Black
WS =White
BL = Blue
GE = Yellow
X = Without
Operator Type
D = Non-illuminated momentary
DR = Non-illuminated maintained
LT = Illuminated momentary
LTR = Illuminated maintained
Bulb
WB = With incandescent bulb 24V
Q18-D-GN
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-33
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Illuminated Pushbuttons
●Momentary or maintained
●LED or incandescent
●18 mm or 25 mm square operator
●3 million mechanical operations
●IEC/EN 60947-5
●IP65
Illuminated Pushbuttons Without Bulb 1
Notes
1 To order with incandescent 24V bulb, insert a /WB at the end of the catalog number. Example, Q18-LT-GN/WB.
2 For a complete selection of incandescent 24V bulbs and LEDs, see Page V7-T1-40.
Type
Button
Color
Catalog Number 2
18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Momentary Green Q18-LT-GN Q25-LT-GN
Red Q18-LT-RT Q25-LT-RT
Black Q18-LT-SW Q25-LT-SW
White Q18-LT-WS Q25-LT-WS
Blue Q18-LT-BL Q25-LT-BL
Yellow Q18-LT-GE Q25-LT-GE
Maintained Green Q18-LTR-GN Q25-LTR-GN
Red Q18-LTR-RT Q25-LTR-RT
Black Q18-LTR-SW Q25-LTR-SW
White Q18-LTR-WS Q25-LTR-WS
Blue Q18-LTR-BL Q25-LTR-BL
Yellow Q18-LTR-GE Q25-LTR-GE
Q18-LT-GE
V7-T1-34 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Indicating Lights
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Indicating Lights—Flush and Extended
Product Selection
Indicating Lights
●LED or incandescent
●Flush and extended lenses
●18 mm or 25 mm square operator
●3 million mechanical operations
●IEC/EN 60947-5
●IP65
Indicating Lights Without Bulb 1
Notes
1 To order with incandescent 24V bulb, insert a /WB at the end of the catalog number. Example, Q18-LF-GN/WB.
2 For a complete selection of incandescent 24V bulbs and LEDs, see Page V7-T1-40.
Face Plate
18 = 18 x 18 mm
25 = 25 x 25 mm
Q18–LF–WS/WB
Button Plate
GN = Green
RT =Red
WS =White
BL =Blue
GE = Yellow
Bezel
LF = Flush indicator light
LH = Extended indicator light
Bulb
WB = With incandescent bulb 24V
Type
Button
Color
Catalog Number 2
18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Flush Green Q18-LF-GN Q25-LF-GN
Red Q18-LF-RT Q25-LF-RT
White Q18-LF-WS Q25-LF-WS
Blue Q18-LF-BL Q25-LF-BL
Yellow Q18-LF-GE Q25-LF-GE
Extended. Green Q18-LH-GN Q25-LH-GN
Red Q18-LH-RT Q25-LH-RT
White Q18-LH-WS Q25-LH-WS
Blue Q18-LH-BL Q25-LH-BL
Yellow Q18-LH-GE Q25-LH-GE
Q18-LF-GE
Q18-LH-BL
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-35
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Emergency Stops
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Emergency Stops—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Product Selection
Emergency Stops
●Push/pull operation
●Illuminated or non-illuminated
●Emergency stop (red) or Machine stop (black) available
●Suitable for use in safety applications
●IEC/EN 60947-5
●IP65
Emergency Stops—Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops—Illuminated 1
Note
1Includes built-in multiple LED 24 Vdc.
Face Plate
25 = 25 x 25 mm
Q25–LPV–S
Operator Type
PV =Emergency stop
LPV = Emergency stop (illuminated)
Color
Blank =Red
S =Black
Button
Color
Catalog Number
25 x 25 mm
Red Q25PV
Black Q25PV-S
Q25PV
Button
Color
Catalog Number
25 x 25 mm
Red Q25LPV
Black Q25LPV-S
Q25LPV
V7-T1-36 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated, Illuminated and Keyed
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
●Momentary or maintained
●18 mm or 25 mm square operator
●VS Anti-rotation feature
●3 million mechanical operations
●IP65
Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated
Function Position
Switch
Position
Catalog Number
18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Momentary 2 Q18WK1 Q25WK1
Maintained Q18WK1R Q25WK1R
Momentary 3 Q18WK3 Q25WK3
Maintained Q18WK3R Q25WK3R
Maintained/momentary Q18WK3R1 Q25WK3R1
Momentary/maintained Q18WK3R2 Q25WK3R2
Face Plate
18 = 18 x 18 mm
25 = 25 x 25 mm
Q18–WK1R
Selector Positions
WK1 = Two positions momentary
WK3 = Three positions momentary
WK1R = Two positions maintained
WK3R = Three positions maintained
WK3R1 = Three positions maintained/momentary
WK3R2 = Three positions momentary/maintained
Q18WK1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-37
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Selector Switches—Illuminated
Product Selection
Illuminated Selector Switches
●LED or incandescent
●Momentary or maintained
●18 mm or 25 mm square operator
●VS Anti-rotation feature
●3 million mechanical operations
●IP65
Selector Switches—Illuminated without Bulb 1
Notes
1 To order with incandescent 24V bulb, insert a /WB at the end of the catalog number. Example, Q18LWK1-GN/WB.
2 For a complete selection of incandescent 24V bulbs and LEDs, see Page V7-T1-40.
Function Position
Button
Color
Switch
Position
Catalog Number 2
18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Momentary 2 Green Q18LWK1-GN Q25LWK1-GN
Red Q18LWK1-RT Q25LWK1-RT
White Q18LWK1-WS Q25LWK1-WS
Maintained Green Q18LWK1R-GN Q25LWK1R-GN
Red Q18LWK1R-RT Q25LWK1R-RT
White Q18LWK1R-WS Q25LWK1R-WS
Momentary 3 Green Q18LWK3-GN Q25LWK3-GN
Red Q18LWK3-RT Q25LWK3-RT
White Q18LWK3-WS Q25LWK3-WS
Maintained Green Q18LWK3R-GN Q25LWK3R-GN
Red Q18LWK3R-RT Q25LWK3R-RT
White Q18LWK3R-WS Q25LWK3R-WS
Maintained/
momentary
Green Q18LWK3R1-GN Q25LWK3R1-GN
Red Q18LWK3R1-RT Q25LWK3R1-RT
White Q18LWK3R1-WS Q25LWK3R1-WS
Momentary/
maintained
Green Q18LWK3R2-GN Q25LWK3R2-GN
Red Q18LWK3R2-RT Q25LWK3R2-RT
White Q18LWK3R2-WS Q25LWK3R2-WS
Face Plate
18 = 18 x 18 mm
25 = 25 x 25 mm
Q18–LWK1–WS/WB
Button Plate
GN =Green
RT =Red
WS =White
Bulb
WB = With incandescent bulb 24V
Switch Positions
LWK1 = Two positions momentary
LWK3 = Three positions momentary
LWK1R = Two positions maintained
LWK3R = Three positions maintained
LWK3R1 = Three positions maintained/momentary
LWK3R2 = Three positions momentary/maintained
Q18LWK1-GN
V7-T1-38 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Keyed Selector Switches—Two- and Three-Position
Product Selection
Keyed Selector Switches
●5 color options
●Momentary or maintained
●18 mm or 25 mm square operator
●VS Anti-rotation feature
●3 million mechanical operations
●IP65
Keyed Selector Switches—Two-Position
Keyed Selector Switches—Three-Position
Note
1 I = Key is removed at the left.
O = Key is removed at the center.
II = Key is removed at the right.
Function
Button
Color
Switch
Position
Key Removal
Position 1
Catalog Number
18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Momentary Black O Q18S1 Q25S1
Maintained Black O Q18S1R Q25S1R
Maintained Black O Q18S1R-A1 Q25S1R-A1
Function
Button
Color
Switch
Position
Key Removal
Position 1
Catalog Number
18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Momentary Black O Q18S3 Q25S3
Maintained O, II Q18S3R Q25S3R
Maintained O Q18S3R-A1 Q25S3R-A1
I, O Q18S3R-A2 Q25S3R-A2
O, II Q18S3R-A3 Q25S3R-A3
Maintained/
momentary
I, O Q18S3R-A4 Q25S3R-A4
OQ18S3R-A5 Q25S3R-A5
Momentary/
maintained
O, II Q18S3R-A6 Q25S3R-A6
OQ18S3R-A7 Q25S3R-A7
Face Plate
18 = 18 x 18 mm
25 = 25 x 25 mm
Q18–S1–A1–WS
Color
GN =Green
RT =Red
SW =Black
WS =White
BL = Blue
Switch Positions
S1 = Two positions momentary
S1R = Two positions maintained
S3 = Three positions momentary
S3R = Three positions maintained
Key Code
A1–A7 = Switch and key removal
positions (detailed below)
Q18S1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-39
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Keyed Selector Switches, Multicolor—Two-Position
Keyed Selector Switches, Multicolor—Three-Position
Note
1 I = Key is removed at the left.
O = Key is removed at the center.
II = Key is removed at the right.
Function
Button
Color
Switch
Position
Key Removal
Position 1
Catalog Number
18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Momentary Green 0 Q18S1-GN Q25S1-GN
Red Q18S1-RT Q25S1-RT
White Q18S1-WS Q25S1-WS
Blue Q18S1-BL Q25S1-BL
Maintained Green 0 Q18S1R-GN Q25S1R-GN
Red Q18S1R-RT Q25S1R-RT
White Q18S1R-WS Q25S1R-WS
Blue Q18S1R-BL Q25S1R-BL
Function
Button
Color
Switch
Position
Key Removal
Position 1
Catalog Number
18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm
Momentary Green 0 Q18S3-GN Q25S3-GN
Red Q18S3-RT Q25S3-RT
White Q18S3-WS Q25S3-WS
Blue Q18S3-BL Q25S3-BL
Maintained Green 0, II Q18S3R-GN Q25S3R-GN
Red Q18S3R-RT Q25S3R-RT
White Q18S3R-WS Q25S3R-WS
Blue Q18S3R-BL Q25S3R-BL
Q18S1-BL
Q18S3-RT
V7-T1-40 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Accessories
Contact Elements
Screw Adapter
Incandescent 24V Bulbs
LEDs (AC/DC)
Insulated Ferrule
Combination Box Spanner
Anti-Rotation Tab
Housing
Blanking Plug
Cover Plate
Note
1Positive pole to X1. Integral suppressor circuit up to 1000V.
Feature
Catalog
Number
Normally open (N/O) E10
Normally closed (N/C) E01
Feature
Catalog
Number
Normally open (N/O) SRA10
Normally closed (N/C) SRA01
Lamp sockets SRAL
Voltage Current Color
Catalog
Number
6V 1W White WBGL6
12V WBGL12
24–28V WBGL24
Voltage Current Color
Catalog
Number
Multiple Chip LED
6V 45 mA Green WBLED-GN6
12V 24 mA WBLED-GN12
6V 45 mA Red WBLED-RT6
12V 24 mA WBLED-RT12
6V 45 mA Yellow WBGLED-GE6
12V 24 mA WBGLED-GE12
Single Chip LED 1
18–30V 7–12.5mA Green LEDWB-G
Red LEDWB-R
White LEDWB-W
Blue LEDWB-B
Yellow LEDWB-Y
E10
E01
SRA10
WBGL6
WBLED-GN6
Description
Catalog
Number
Insulated ferrule ISH2,8
Description
Catalog
Number
Mounting ring tool 16-MS
Description
Catalog
Number
Guard ring VS
Description Color
Catalog
Number
Surface mount enclosure White I8
Flush mount panel White E8
Black E8-SW
Size
Catalog
Number
18 x 18 mm Q18BS
25 x 25 mm Q25BS
Size Color
Catalog
Number
25 x 38 mm Black Q25AS
Gray Q25AGR
ISH2,8
R16-MS
VS
E8-SW
Q18BS
Q25AGR
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-41
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Insert Plate
Legend Plate
Legend Plate—Complete
Emergency Stop Labels
Extra Keys
Codes for Extra Keys
Size
Catalog
Number
10 x 22 mm BLANK 02SQ25
CUSTOM 02SQ25-ETCH
Size Color
Catalog
Number
25 x 38 mm Black Q25TS-X
Gray Q25TGR-X
Size Etching
Catalog
Number
25 x 38 START Q25TS-111
STOP Q25TS-110
FAULT Q25TS-250
HAND 0 AUTO Q25TS-197
MAN 0 AUTO Q25TS-397
0Q25TS-10
IQ25TS-11
0I Q25TS-90
I0II Q25TS-93
02SQ25
Q25TS-X
Q25TS_
Type Feature
Catalog
Number
Square 4 Languages SQT11
Blank SQT-GE
Circle 4 Languages SRT11
Blank SRT-GE
Color Catalog Number
Green ES16-GN
Red ES16-RT
Black ES16
White ES16-WS
Blue ES16-BL
SQT11
SRT11
ES16
V7-T1-42 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Button Plates
Instructions for Ordering Laser Inscriptions
1. Identify part number to be inscribed.
2. Pick symbol from library and identify suffix code associated with the symbol.
3. Order part number already listed in the catalog with -ETCH suffix.
4. When placing an order by fax or Vistaline on the web, reference order item number and indicate appropriate
symbol code or desired text.
Example
To order a 25 mm green flush button plate with the inscription AUTO HAND:
Order Catalog Number 03TQ25-ETCH.
AUTO HAND inscription is found on Page V7-T1-135 in the M22 Symbols Library, suffix code is X91.
In the order notes, reference item number and suffix X91.
Note: For a complete list of available symbols, see Pages V7-T1-132 to V7-T1-138, M22 Symbols Library.
Type Color Etching
Catalog
Number Type Color Etching
Catalog
Number
18 x 18 mm Black — 01TQ18 25 x 25 mm Black — 01TQ25
CUSTOM 01TQ18-ETCH CUSTOM 01TQ25-ETCH
21TQ18 21TQ25
19TQ18 19TQ25
White — 02TQ18 “STOP” 112TQ25
CUSTOM 02TQ18-ETCH “ON” 221TQ25
20TQ18 White — 02TQ25
Green — 03TQ18 CUSTOM 02TQ25-ETCH
CUSTOM 03TQ18-ETCH 20TQ25
11TQ18 Green — 03TQ25
Red — 04TQ18 CUSTOM 03TQ25-ETCH
CUSTOM 04TQ18-ETCH “START” 111TQ25
10TQ18 11TQ25
Yellow — 05TQ18 Red — 04TQ25
CUSTOM 05TQ18-ETCH CUSTOM 04TQ25-ETCH
Blue — 06TQ18 “STOP” 110TQ25
CUSTOM 06TQ18-ETCH 10TQ25
“OFF” 217TQ25
Yellow — 05TQ25
CUSTOM 05TQ25-ETCH
Blue — 06TQ25
CUSTOM 06TQ25-ETCH
Button Plates
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-43
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Technical Data and Specifications
RMQ-16
Specification Illuminated Pushbutton
Operators (Maintained)
Illuminated Selector
SwitchesDescription Unit Contact Elements Indicating Lights
General Technical Data
Standards UL, CSA, IEC/EN 60 947, VDE 0660, CE
Lifespan, mechanical (operations) x 105100 30 (3) 3 —
Maximum operating frequency Ops/h 3600 3600 (1800) 1800 —
Operating force N 3 4 — —
Operating torque Nm — 0.2 —
Degree of protection to IEC/EN 60 529 IP20 with ISH2,8 IP65 IP65 IP65
Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60 068-2-3/Damp heat, cyclical, to IEC 60 068-2-30
Ambient temperature
Open °C –25 to 60 –25 to 60 –25 to 60 –25 to 60
Enclosed °C –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40
Mounting position As required As required As required As required
Mechanical shock resistance to IEC 60 068-2-27
(half-sinusoidal shock, duration 11 ms)
g40404040
Terminal capacity (min./max.) mm20.5/1.0 0.5/1.0 0.5/1.0 0.5/1.0
Blade terminal 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm to DIN 46 244
Ferrule 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm to DIN 46 247 and IEC 60 760
Dimensions See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45
Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp V 4000 800 800 800
Rated insulation voltage UiV 250 250 250 250
Overvoltage category/pollution degree III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3
Rated operational voltage Ue (max.) V 250 24 24 24
Rated operational current Ie (max.) A 4 — — —
Control circuit reliability at
24 Vdc/5 mA (Fault probability Hr) <10–7, <1 fault in 107 operations
5 Vdc/1 mA (Fault probability Hr) <5 x 10–6, < fault in 5 x 106 operations
Use of insulated ferrule ISH 2.8
From Ue >24 Vac/dc recommended >24 Vac/dc recommended >24 Vac/dc recommended >24 Vac/dc recommended
From Ue >50 Vac or 120 Vdc is mandatory, even on unused blade terminals
Maximum short-circuit protective device
Fuseless Type FAZ-B6 — — —
Fuse A gG/gL 10 — — —
Switching Capacity
Rated operational current Ie
AC-15
24V A 4 — — —
48V A 4 — — —
110V A 4 — — —
230V A 4 — — —
DC-13
24V A 3 — — —
42V A 1.0 — — —
60V A 0.8 — — —
110V A 0.5 — — —
220V A 0.2 — — —
UL/CSA Data UL listed File No. E 29 184, Guide No. NKCR/CSA certified File No. 46 552 Class No. 321103
Blade terminal 0.110 x 0.032 in 0.110 x 0.032 in 0.110 x 0.032 in 0.110 x 0.032 in
Fast-on connector 0.110 x 0.032 in AMP #60 197-1, 62 050-1 or equivalent
Rated voltage maximum AC Vac 300 24 24 24
Contact rating code AC E10/E01 C300/Q300 — — —
Thermal continuous test current A 2.5 — — —
Rated voltage maximum DC Vdc 300 — — —
Contact rating code DC E10/E01 C300/R300 — — —
Thermal continuous test current A 2.5 — — —
V7-T1-44 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
RMQ-16, continued
Lifespan, Electrical AC-15 to IEC/EN 60 947-5-1 at 230V
Note
1See illuminated selector switches on Page V7-T1-37 for contact values.
Specification Emergency Stop
Operators
(Illuminated) 1
Description Unit
Pushbutton Operators
(Maintained) Selector Switches
Key-Released
Operators
Emergency Stop
Operators
General Technical Data
Standards UL, CSA, IEC/EN 60 947, VDE 0660, CE
Lifespan, mechanical (operations) x 10530 (3) 3 3 0.5 0.5
Maximum operating frequency Ops/h 3600 (1800) 1800 1800 600 600
Operating force N 4 — — 25 25
Operating torque Nm — 0.2 0.4 — —
Degree of protection to IEC/EN 60 529 IP65 IP65 IP65 IP65 IP65
Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60 068-2-3
Damp heat, cyclical, to IEC 60 068-2-30
Ambient temperature
Open °C –25 to 60 –25 to 60 –25 to 60 –25 to 60 –25 to 60
Enclosed °C –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40
Mounting position As required As required As required As required As required
Mechanical shock resistance to
IEC 60 068-2-27 (half-sinusoidal shock,
duration 11 ms)
g4040404040
Terminal capacity (min./max.) mm2————0.5/1.0
Blade terminal ————2.8 x 0.8 mm
Ferrule ————2.8 x 0.8 mm
Dimensions See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45
0.1
E10
E01
0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
0.6 0.8 1.0
3.00.7 4.02.00.9
l[A]
e
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
0.7
0.9
x 10 6
Operations
l= Rated operational current
e
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-45
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
Actuating and Indicator Elements
Square Style Q…BS
Q…D-_, Q…DR-_ Q…S_ Q…WK_
Q…LT-_, Q…LTR-_, Q…LF-_ Q…LH-_ Q…LWK_
Q25PV_, Q25LPV_
M16 x 1 18.0
[0.71]
39.0 [1.54] Ø25.0 [0.98] Ø18.0 [0.71]
24.0 [0.94]
4.0 [0.16]
39.0 [1.54]
11.0 [0.43]
39.0 [1.54]
17.0
[0.67] 13.0 [0.51]
39.0 [1.54]
26.0 [1.02]
11.0
[0.43]
49.0 [1.93]
16.0
[0.63]
49.0 [1.93]
26.0
[1.02]
49.0 [1.93]
28.0 [1.10]
Ø 25.0
[0.98]
Ø 28.0
[1.10]
37.0 [1.46] 39.0 [1.54]
49.0 [1.93]
V7-T1-46 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
Front Fixing
Q18, Q25, E89, SRA, VS, M16
Drilling Dimensions
Drilling
Grid Dimension to
IEC/EN 60947
Q25
Minimum Grid Spacing
Dimension
Q18
Mounting Distance
Mounting
RMQ Screw Adapter Anti-Rotation Feature RMQ-16 Label Mount
SRA_ VS Q25TS-_
Blanking Plates
Q25AS
58.0 [2.28]
49.0 [1.93]
ISH 2.8
[0.11]
E01, E10
6.0
[0.24]
18.0
[0.71]
16.2 [0.64]
+ 0.2
0
25.0
[0.98]
25.0
[0.98]
18.0
[0.71]
18.0 [0.71]
22.0
[0.87]
5.6 [0.22]
18.5 [0.73]
17.8
[0.70]
14.9 [0.59]
17.8
[0.70]
38.0
[1.50]
25.0 [0.98]
12.0
[0.47]
13.0
[0.51]
25.0 [0.98]
13.0
[0.51]
4.0
[0.16]
12.0
[0.47]
38.0
[1.50]
Note
1Exposed conductive part (metal).
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-47
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Contents
Description Page
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-48
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-113
Coding Adapter Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-120
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-121
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-125
Symbols Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-131
Drawings
Online
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 industrial heavy-
duty pushbutton line offers a
wide array of functional,
attractive and ergonomically
designed illuminated and non-
illuminated pushbuttons,
selector switches, push-pulls,
alternate action and twist-to-
release operators. The
complete illuminated line is
only offered in LED light units
to ensure high-quality
brightness and up to 100,000
hours of LED illumination.
M22 operators are available
with either a silver or a black
colored bezel. The space-
saving modular construction
of the M22 line makes on-
the-job assembly fast and
simplifies the stocking of
both components and
complete devices.
Highly Modular and
Versatile Line
●Field convertible functions
(pushbuttons and selector
switches), maintained to
momentary
●Customizable laser
engraving capabilities
LED Indicators
●100,000 hours of life
in high-vibration
environments
●Lenses specifically
designed for LED
illumination
Rugged Design
●Most pushbutton operators
and contact blocks exceed
5 million mechanical
operations
●All components have IP66
rating, and some carry
IP67 and IP69K for
washdown environment;
see Page V7-T1-121 for
further technical data
Innovative Technologies
●ASi communicating
devices
●Palm switches
Standards and Certifications
All operators and
components are IEC/EN
60947 VDE 0660.
All operators carry an IP66
rating with some rated for
washdown environment with
IP67 and IP69K.
All pushbuttons, emergency-
stops, indicating lights,
potentiometers and selector
switches carry NEMA 4X, 13.
Marine classification
societies: Bureau Veritas
(BV), Germanischer Lloyd
(GL), and Lloyd’s Register of
Shipping (LR) approved.
V7-T1-48 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Features
●Field convertible
pushbuttons and
mushroom operators from
maintained to momentary
status
●Field convertible selector
switches from momentary
to maintained operation
and vice versa
●LED offering only for all
illuminated operators
●Laser engraved
pushbuttons, lenses and
enclosures
●Heavy-duty construction
with a minimum of IP66
and UL NEMA® type 4X /
13 on front of panel
operators. Many operators
even carry IP67 and IP69K,
for the toughest
applications
●Silver or black colored
nylon bezels
●Snap-lock contact blocks
and light units for front or
base mounting
●Notched hole mounting
with anti-rotation tab and
central nut mounting on
each operator
●Over 5 million mechanical
operations and 1.6 million
electrical (reference
specification sheet)
●Direct opening action
normally closed contacts
●Unique and innovative
offerings, such as four-way
pushbuttons and USB/
RJ45 bulkhead interfaces
●Screw or spring-cage
terminals
Benefits
●Modular construction
makes assembly fast and
simplifies stocking of
components and complete
devices
●Field convertibility of
operator status for
pushbuttons and selector
switches helps distributors
and customers reduce
inventory and increase
functionality
●LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
●Plastic construction is
corrosion resistant.
Operators are designed
for rugged environments,
ideal for washdown
applications (reference
each operator’s IP ratings
and IEC/EN 60529 for ingress
protection definition)
●Anti-rotation tab saves
installation time and
prevents operator rotation
●High mechanical and
electrical life allows for use
in tough and challenging
applications
●Laser inscription
capabilities allow for high-
quality, wear-resistant
markings
●All normally closed (NC)
contacts are direct opening
action, i.e., NC contacts
are physically forced open
by direct linkage with the
pushbutton operator
in the unlikely event of
contact weld
●Some M22 operators are
capable of communication
via ASi protocol
●M22 offers USB and RJ45
connections
Product Selection Guide
Pushbuttons
Indicating Lights
Description Non-illuminated, flush Non-illuminated, extended Illuminated, flush Illuminated, extended
Operator Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained
Product Selection
Pages V7-T1-53 to
V7-T1-55
Pages V7-T1-56,
V7-T1-57
Pages V7-T1-58,
V7-T1-59
Pages V7-T1-60,
V7-T1-61
Pages V7-T1-63 to
V7-T1-65
Pages V7-T1-66,
V7-T1-67
Pages V7-T1-68,
V7-T1-69
Pages V7-T1-70,
V7-T1-71
Description Flat Conical
Product Selection
Pages V7-T1-72,
V7-T1-73
Pages V7-T1-72,
V7-T1-73
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-49
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Emergency Stops
Selector Switches
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons
Double Pushbuttons
Description Non-illuminated Illuminated Key release Mechanical indication
Product Selection Page V7-T1-75 Page V7-T1-75 Page V7-T1-76 Page V7-T1-76
Description
Non-illuminated
knob type
Non-illuminated
rotary type
Illuminated Key-operated
Product Selection
Pages V7-T1-80,
V7-T1-81
Pages V7-T1-82,
V7-T1-83
Pages V7-T1-85
to V7-T1-87
Pages V7-T1-88
to V7-T1-93
Description Non-illuminated Non-illuminated
Operator Momentary Maintained
Product Selection
Pages V7-T1-96,
V7-T1-97
Pages V7-T1-98,
V7-T1-99
Description
Extended pushbuttons
and center light
Flush top and center
light, extended bottom
Flush pushbuttons and
center light
Operator Momentary Momentary —
Product Selection Page V7-T1-101 Page V7-T1-102 Page V7-T1-102
V7-T1-50 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Four-Way Pushbuttons
Joysticks
Potentiometers
Acoustic Devices
Through-the-Door Operators
Bulkhead Interfaces
ASi Adapter Modules
Palm Switches
Assembled Control Stations
Description Non-interlocked Interlocked
Operator Momentary Maintained
Product Selection Page V7-T1-105 Page V7-T1-105
Description Joysticks
Product Selection Page V7-T1-106
Description Potentiometers
Product Selection Page V7-T1-108
Description Acoustic devices
Product Selection Page V7-T1-108
Description Through-the-door operators
Product Selection Page V7-T1-109
Description Bulkhead interfaces
Product Selection Page V7-T1-109
Description ASi adapter modules
Product Selection Page V7-T1-110
Description Palm switches
Product Selection Page V7-T1-111
Description Assembled control stations
Product Selection Page V7-T1-16
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-51
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Point-of-Purchase Units
Note
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Color Type
Contact
Configuration 1Catalog Number
Black Flush momentary NO/NC M22-D-S-K11-P
Red Extended momentary NO/NC M22-DH-R-K11-P
Green Flush momentary NO/NC M22-D-G-K11-P
Red Ext. illuminated (12–30V) momentary NO/NC M22-DLH-R-K11-R-P
Red Ext. illuminated (85–264V) momentary NO/NC M22-DLH-R-K11-230R-P
White Flush illuminated (12–30V) maintained NO/NC M22-DRL-W-K11-W-P
White Flush illuminated (85–264V) maintained NO/NC M22-DRL-W-K11-230W-P
Red Indicating light (12–30V) — M22-L-R-R-P
Green Indicating light (12–30V) — M22-L-G-G-P
Red Indicting light (85–264V) — M22-L-R-230R-P
Green Indicating light (85–264 Vac) — M22-L-G-230G-P
Red Twist-to-release E-stop 1NO/2NC M22-PVT-K12-P
Red Illuminated (12–30V) push-pull E-stop 1NO/2NC M22-PVL-K12-R-P
Red Illuminated (85–264V) push-pull E-stop 1NO/2NC M22-PVL-K12-230R-P
— Two-position maintained V selector switch NO/NC M22-WKV-K11-P
— Three-position momentary selector switch NO/NC M22-WK3-K22-P
M22-_
V7-T1-52 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Contents
Description Page
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Non-Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . V7-T1-53
Non-Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-56
Non-Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . V7-T1-58
Non-Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . V7-T1-60
Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-63
Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-66
Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-68
Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-70
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 pushbutton
line is a complete, modular
and versatile offering. From
field-convertible maintained
operators to customizable
laser engraved buttons, the
M22 pushbutton line provides
endless opportunity for
flexibility and reduced
inventory. Each operator
type provides options for
ordering as complete or
component parts allowing
for a perfect fit for each
application. All of this
flexibility comes in a very
rugged design.
Features
●Field convertible from
maintained to momentary
(available on maintained
pushbuttons only)
●Customizable laser
engraving on all buttons
●LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
●More than five million
mechanical operations on
momentary and 1 million
on maintained pushbuttons
●Modular construction
makes assembly fast and
simplifies stocking of
components and complete
devices
●Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●IP67, IP69K
●NEMA 4X, 13
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-53
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Complete Devices
Note
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Bezel Button Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1Catalog Number
Silver Black NO M22-D-S-K10
NC M22-D-S-K01
2NO M22-D-S-K20
2NC M22-D-S-K02
1NO-1NC M22-D-S-K11
Red NO M22-D-R-K10
NC M22-D-R-K01
2NO M22-D-R-K20
2NC M22-D-R-K02
1NO-1NC M22-D-R-K11
Green NO M22-D-G-K10
NC M22-D-G-K01
2NO M22-D-G-K20
2NC M22-D-G-K02
1NO-1NC M22-D-G-K11
Black Black NO M22S-D-S-K10
NC M22S-D-S-K01
2NO M22S-D-S-K20
2NC M22S-D-S-K02
1NO-1NC M22S-D-S-K11
Red NO M22S-D-R-K10
NC M22S-D-R-K01
2NO M22S-D-R-K20
2NC M22S-D-R-K02
1NO-1NC M22S-D-R-K11
Green NO M22S-D-G-K10
NC M22S-D-G-K01
2NO M22S-D-G-K20
2NC M22S-D-G-K02
1NO-1NC M22S-D-G-K11
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S =Black
M22 –D–S–X0–K10
1Silver bezel only.
Operator Type
D = Flush momentary
DH = Extended momentary
DG = Flush with guard 1
DR = Flush maintained
DGH = Extended momentary with guard 1
DRH = Extended maintained
Button Plate Color
G = Green
Y = Yellow
B =Blue
S =Black
R =Red
W =White
Inscription
GB0 =STOP
GB1 =START
GB2 =CLOSE
GB3 =UP
GB4 = DOWN
GB5 =OFF
GB6 =ON
GB14 = RESET
GB15 =FORWARD
GB16 = REVERSE
X0 =
X1 =
X4 =
X5 =
X6 =
X7 =
X8 =
Contact Blocks
K10 =1NO
K01 =1NC
K20 =2NO
K02 =2NC
K11 = 1NO-1NC
K30 =3NO
K03 =3NC
K21 = 2NO-1NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC
M22-D-G-K10
M22S-D-G-K10
V7-T1-54 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Operators Only 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green).
3 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).
Bezel Button Color Inscription Catalog Number
Silver Black — M22-D-S
Red — M22-D-R
STOP M22-D-R-GB0
M22-D-R-X0
Green — M22-D-G
START M22-D-G-GB1
M22-D-G-X1
White — M22-D-W
Blue — M22-D-B
Yellow — M22-D-Y
—— M22-D-X-SRG 2
—M22-D-X-SWRGYB 3
Black Black — M22S-D-S
Red — M22S-D-R
STOP M22S-D-R-GB0
M22S-D-R-X0
Green — M22S-D-G
START M22S-D-G-GB1
M22S-D-G-X1
White — M22S-D-W
Blue — M22S-D-B
Yellow — M22S-D-Y
—— M22S-D-X-SRG 2
—M22S-D-X-SWRGYB 3
Silver guarded Black — M22-DG-S
Red — M22-DG-R
Green — M22-DG-G
White — M22-DG-W
Blue — M22-DG-B
Yellow — M22-DG-Y
—— M22-DG-X-SRG 2
—M22-DG-X-SWRGYB 3
M22-D-G
M22S-D-G
M22-DG-G
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-55
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Components
Button Plates 1Buttonless Operator
Contact Blocks 1
Notes
1For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
2Minimum order quantity of (10).
3When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4Includes contact block mounting adapter.
5All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Black — M22-XD-S 2
Custom M22-XD-S-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XD-S-GB0
START M22-XD-S-GB1
CLOSE M22-XD-S-GB2
UP M22-XD-S-GB3
DOWN M22-XD-S-GB4
OFF M22-XD-S-GB5
ON M22-XD-S-GB6
TEST M22-XD-S-GB9
FORWARD M22-XD-S-GB15
REVERSE M22-XD-S-GB16
RAISE M22-XD-S-GB17
LOWER M22-XD-S-GB18
M22-XD-S-X0
M22-XD-S-X1
M22-XD-S-X2
M22-XD-S-X4
M22-XD-S-X5
M22-XD-S-X7
Red — M22-XD-R 2
Custom M22-XD-R-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XD-R-GB0
OFF M22-XD-R-GB5
M22-XD-R-X0
Green — M22-XD-G 2
Custom M22-XD-G-ETCH 3
START M22-XD-G-GB1
ON M22-XD-G-GB6
M22-XD-G-X1
Blue — M22-XD-B 2
Custom M22-XD-B-ETCH 3
RESET M22-XD-B-GB14
M22-XD-B-X6
White — M22-XD-W 2
Custom M22-XD-W-ETCH 3
START M22-XD-W-GB1
M22-XD-W-X1
Yellow — M22-XD-Y 2
Custom M22-XD-Y-ETCH 3
Black, red, green — M22-XD-SRG
Black, white,
red, green,
yellow, blue
—M22-XD-SWRGYB
M22-XD-G
Bezel Catalog Number 4
Silver M22-D-X
Black M22S-D-X
Silver guarded M22-DG-X
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 5Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-D-X
M22S-D-X
M22-DG-X
M22-K10
V7-T1-56 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1
Operators Only 2
Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
3 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green).
4 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.
Bezel Button Color Catalog Number
Silver Black M22-DR-S
Red M22-DR-R
Green M22-DR-G
White M22-DR-W
Blue M22-DR-B
Yellow M22-DR-Y
3M22-DR-X-SRG
4M22-DR-X-SWRGYB
Black Black M22S-DR-S
Red M22S-DR-R
Green M22S-DR-G
White M22S-DR-W
Blue M22S-DR-B
Yellow M22S-DR-Y
3M22S-DR-X-SRG
4M22S-DR-X-SWRGYB
M22-DR-S
M22S-DR-S
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-57
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1
Components
Button Plates 2Buttonless Operator
Contact Blocks 2
Notes
1Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching
the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
3Minimum order quantity of (10).
4When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
5Includes contact block mounting adapter.
6All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Black — M22-XD-S 3
Custom M22-XD-S-ETCH 4
STOP M22-XD-S-GB0
START M22-XD-S-GB1
CLOSE M22-XD-S-GB2
UP M22-XD-S-GB3
DOWN M22-XD-S-GB4
OFF M22-XD-S-GB5
ON M22-XD-S-GB6
TEST M22-XD-S-GB9
FORWARD M22-XD-S-GB15
REVERSE M22-XD-S-GB16
RAISE M22-XD-S-GB17
LOWER M22-XD-S-GB18
M22-XD-S-X0
M22-XD-S-X1
M22-XD-S-X2
M22-XD-S-X4
M22-XD-S-X5
M22-XD-S-X7
Red — M22-XD-R 3
Custom M22-XD-R-ETCH 4
STOP M22-XD-R-GB0
OFF M22-XD-R-GB5
M22-XD-R-X0
Green — M22-XD-G 3
Custom M22-XD-G-ETCH 4
START M22-XD-G-GB1
ON M22-XD-G-GB6
M22-XD-G-X1
Blue — M22-XD-B 3
Custom M22-XD-B-ETCH 4
RESET M22-XD-B-GB14
M22-XD-B-X6
White — M22-XD-W 3
Custom M22-XD-W-ETCH 4
START M22-XD-W-GB1
M22-XD-W-X1
Yellow — M22-XD-Y 3
Custom M22-XD-Y-ETCH 4
Black, red, green — M22-XD-SRG
Black, white, red,
green, yellow, blue
—M22-XD-SWRGYB
M22-XD-S
Bezel Catalog Number 5
Silver M22-DR-X
Black M22S-DR-X
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 6Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-DR-X
M22S-DR-X
M22-K10
V7-T1-58 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
Complete Devices
Operators Only 2
Notes
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
3 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green).
4 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).
Bezel Button Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1Catalog Number
Silver Red NO M22-DH-R-K10
NC M22-DH-R-K01
2NO M22-DH-R-K20
2NC M22-DH-R-K02
1NO-1NC M22-DH-R-K11
Black Red NO M22S-DH-R-K10
NC M22S-DH-R-K01
2NO M22S-DH-R-K20
2NC M22S-DH-R-K02
1NO-1NC M22S-DH-R-K11
Silver guarded Red NO M22-DGH-R-K10
NC M22-DGH-R-K01
2NO M22-DGH-R-K20
2NC M22-DGH-R-K02
1NO-1NC M22-DGH-R-K11
Bezel Button Color Inscription Catalog Number
Silver Black — M22-DH-S
Red — M22-DH-R
STOP M22-DH-R-GB0
M22-DH-R-X0
Green — M22-DH-G
White — M22-DH-W
Blue — M22-DH-B
Yellow — M22-DH-Y
3—M22-DH-X-SRG
4—M22-DH-X-SWRGYB
Black Black — M22S-DH-S
Red — M22S-DH-R
STOP M22S-DH-R-GB0
M22S-DH-R-X0
Green — M22S-DH-G
White — M22S-DH-W
Blue — M22S-DH-B
Yellow — M22S-DH-Y
3—M22S-DH-X-SRG
4—M22S-DH-X-SWRGYB
Silver guarded Black — M22-DGH-S
Red — M22-DGH-R
STOP M22-DGH-R-GB0
M22-DGH-R-X0
Green — M22-DGH-G
White — M22-DGH-W
Blue — M22-DGH-B
Yellow — M22-DGH-Y
M22-DH-R-K10
M22S-DH-R-K10
M22-DGH-R-K10
M22-DH-R
M22S-DH-R
M22-DGH-R
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-59
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
Components
Button Plates 1Buttonless Operator
Contact Blocks 1
Notes
1For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
2Minimum order quantity of (10).
3When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4Includes contact block mounting adapter.
5All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Black — M22-XDH-S 2
Custom M22-XDH-S-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XDH-S-GB0
START M22-XDH-S-GB1
CLOSE M22-XDH-S-GB2
UP M22-XDH-S-GB3
DOWN M22-XDH-S-GB4
OFF M22-XDH-S-GB5
ON M22-XDH-S-GB6
TEST M22-XDH-S-GB9
FORWARD M22-XDH-S-GB15
REVERSE M22-XDH-S-GB16
RAISE M22-XDH-S-GB17
LOWER M22-XDH-S-GB18
M22-XDH-S-X0
M22-XDH-S-X1
M22-XDH-S-X2
M22-XDH-S-X4
M22-XDH-S-X5
M22-XDH-S-X7
Red — M22-XDH-R 2
Custom M22-XDH-R-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XDH-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDH-R-GB5
M22-XDH-R-X0
Green — M22-XDH-G 2
Custom M22-XDH-G-ETCH 3
START M22-XDH-G-GB1
ON M22-XDH-G-GB6
M22-XDH-G-X1
Blue — M22-XDH-B 2
Custom M22-XDH-B-ETCH 3
RESET M22-XDH-B-GB14
M22-XDH-B-X6
White — M22-XDH-W 2
Custom M22-XDH-W-ETCH 3
START M22-XDH-W-GB1
M22-XDH-W-X1
Yellow — M22-XDH-Y 2
Custom M22-XDH-Y-ETCH 3
Black, red, green — M22-XDH-SRG
Black, white, red,
green, yellow, blue
—M22-XDH-SWRGYB
M22-XDH-R
Bezel Catalog Number 4
Silver M22-D-X
Black M22S-D-X
Silver guarded M22-DG-X
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 5Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-D-X
M22S-D-X
M22-DG-X
M22-K10
V7-T1-60 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1
Operators Only 2
Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
3 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green).
4 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue).
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.
Bezel Button Color Catalog Number
Silver Black M22-DRH-S
Red M22-DRH-R
Green M22-DRH-G
White M22-DRH-W
Blue M22-DRH-B
Yellow M22-DRH-Y
3M22-DRH-X-SRG
4M22-DRH-X-SWRGYB
Black Black M22S-DRH-S
Red M22S-DRH-R
Green M22S-DRH-G
White M22S-DRH-W
Blue M22S-DRH-B
Yellow M22S-DRH-Y
3M22S-DRH-X-SRG
4M22S-DRH-X-SWRGYB
M22-DRH-W
M22S-DRH-W
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-61
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1
Components
Button Plates 2Buttonless Operator
Contact Blocks 2
Notes
1Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
3Minimum order quantity of (10).
4When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
5Includes contact block mounting adapter.
6All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Black — M22-XDH-S 3
Custom M22-XDH-S-ETCH 4
STOP M22-XDH-S-GB0
START M22-XDH-S-GB1
CLOSE M22-XDH-S-GB2
UP M22-XDH-S-GB3
DOWN M22-XDH-S-GB4
OFF M22-XDH-S-GB5
ON M22-XDH-S-GB6
TEST M22-XDH-S-GB9
FORWARD M22-XDH-S-GB15
REVERSE M22-XDH-S-GB16
RAISE M22-XDH-S-GB17
LOWER M22-XDH-S-GB18
M22-XDH-S-X0
M22-XDH-S-X1
M22-XDH-S-X2
M22-XDH-S-X4
M22-XDH-S-X5
M22-XDH-S-X7
Red — M22-XDH-R 3
Custom M22-XDH-R-ETCH 4
STOP M22-XDH-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDH-R-GB5
M22-XDH-R-X0
Green — M22-XDH-G 3
Custom M22-XDH-G-ETCH 4
START M22-XDH-G-GB1
ON M22-XDH-G-GB6
M22-XDH-G-X1
Blue — M22-XDH-B 3
Custom M22-XDH-B-ETCH 4
RESET M22-XDH-B-GB14
M22-XDH-B-X6
White — M22-XDH-W 3
Custom M22-XDH-W-ETCH 4
START M22-XDH-W-GB1
M22-XDH-W-X1
Yellow — M22-XDH-Y 3
Custom M22-XDH-Y-ETCH 4
Black, red, green — M22-XDH-SRG
Black, white,
red, green, yellow,
blue
—M22-XDH-SWRGYB
M22-XDH-W
Bezel Catalog Number 5
Silver M22-DR-X
Black M22S-DR-X
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 6Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-DR-X
M22S-DR-X
M22-K10
V7-T1-62 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S =Black
1Silver bezel only.
Operator Type
DL = Illuminated flush momentary
DLH = Illuminated extended momentary
DGL = Illuminated flush momentary with guard 1
DRL = Illuminated flush maintained
DGLH = Illuminated extended momentary with guard 1
DRLH = Illuminated extended maintained
Light Units
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W =White
R =Red
G = Green
B =Blue
85–264 Vac
230W =White
230R =Red
230G = Green
230B =Blue
Inscription
GB0 =STOP
GB1 =START
GB2 =CLOSE
GB3 =UP
GB4 = DOWN
GB5 =OFF
GB6 =ON
GB14 = RESET
GB15 =FORWARD
GB16 = REVERSE
X0 =
X1 =
X4 =
X5 =
X6 =
Contact Blocks
K10 =1NO
K01 =1NC
K20 =2NO
K02 =2NC
K11 = 1NO-1NC
K30 =3NO
K03 =3NC
K21 = 2NO-1NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC
Lens Color
W =White
R =Red
G = Green
Y = Yellow
B =Blue
A =Amber
M22 –DRL–R–GB0–K10–230R
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-63
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Complete Devices
Note
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Bezel Button Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number
Silver Red NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K01-R
NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-R-K01-230R
2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K02-R
2NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-R-K02-230R
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K11-R
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-R-K11-230R
Green NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K10-G
NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-G-K10-230G
2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K20-G
2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-G-K20-230G
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K11-G
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-G-K11-230G
White NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K10-W
NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-W-K10-230W
2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K20-W
2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-W-K20-230W
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K11-W
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-W-K11-230W
Black Red NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-R-K01-R
NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-R-K01-230R
2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-R-K02-R
2NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-R-K02-230R
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-R-K11-R
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-R-K11-230R
Green NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-G-K10-G
NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-G-K10-230G
2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-G-K20-G
2NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-G-K20-230G
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-G-K11-G
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-G-K11-230G
White NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-W-K10-W
NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-W-K10-230W
2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-W-K20-W
2NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-W-K20-230W
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-W-K11-W
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DL-W-K11-230W
M22-DL-G-K01-G
M22S-DL-G-K01-G
V7-T1-64 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Operators Only 1
Note
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Bezel Button Color Catalog Number
Silver Red M22-DL-R
Green M22-DL-G
White M22-DL-W
Blue M22-DL-B
Yellow M22-DL-Y
Amber M22-DL-A
Black Red M22S-DL-R
Green M22S-DL-G
White M22S-DL-W
Blue M22S-DL-B
Yellow M22S-DL-Y
Amber M22S-DL-A
Silver guarded Red M22-DGL-R
Green M22-DGL-G
White M22-DGL-W
Blue M22-DGL-B
Yellow M22-DGL-Y
M22-DL-G
M22S-DL-G
M22-DGL-G
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-65
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Components
Button Lenses 1
Buttonless Operator
Light Units 1
Contact Blocks 1
Notes
1For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see
Accessories, Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
2Minimum order quantity of (10).
3When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4Includes contact block mounting adapter.
5All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Red — M22-XDL-R 2
Custom M22-XDL-R-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XDL-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDL-R-GB5
M22-XDL-R-X0
Green — M22-XDL-G 2
Custom M22-XDL-G-ETCH 3
START M22-XDL-G-GB1
ON M22-XDL-G-GB6
M22-XDL-G-X1
Blue — M22-XDL-B 2
Custom M22-XDL-B-ETCH 3
RESET M22-XDL-B-GB14
M22-XDL-B-X6
White — M22-XDL-W 2
Custom M22-XDL-W-ETCH 3
Yellow — M22-XDL-Y 2
Custom M22-XDL-Y-ETCH 3
Amber — M22-XDL-A
Custom M22-XDL-A-ETCH
Bezel Catalog Number 4
Silver M22-DL-X
Black M22S-DL-X
Silver guarded M22-DGL-X
M22-XDL-G
M22-DL-X
M22S-DL-X
M22-DGL-X
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage Catalog Number
Screw White 12–30
Vac/Vdc
M22-LED-W
Red M22-LED-R
Green M22-LED-G
Blue M22-LED-B
Screw White 85–264
Vac
M22-LED230-W
Red M22-LED230-R
Green M22-LED230-G
Blue M22-LED230-B
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 5Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-LED-W
M22-K10
V7-T1-66 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 2
Complete Devices
Operators Only 3
Notes
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
2 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
3 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.
Bezel Button Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number
Silver White NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K10-W
NO 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K10-230W
NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K01-W
NC 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K01-230W
2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K20-W
2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K20-230W
2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K02-W
2NC 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K02-230W
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K11-W
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K11-230W
Black White NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DRL-W-K10-W
NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DRL-W-K10-230W
NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DRL-W-K01-W
NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DRL-W-K01-230W
2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DRL-W-K20-W
2NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DRL-W-K20-230W
2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DRL-W-K02-W
2NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DRL-W-K02-230W
1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DRL-W-K11-W
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DRL-W-K11-230W
Bezel Button Color Catalog Number
Silver Red M22-DRL-R
Green M22-DRL-G
White M22-DRL-W
Blue M22-DRL-B
Yellow M22-DRL-Y
Amber M22-DRL-A
Black Red M22S-DRL-R
Green M22S-DRL-G
White M22S-DRL-W
Blue M22S-DRL-B
Yellow M22S-DRL-Y
Amber M22S-DRL-A
M22-DRL-W-K10-W
M22S-DRL-W-K10-W
M22-DRL-W
M22S-DRL-W
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-67
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1
Components
Button Lenses 2
Buttonless Operator
Light Units 2
Contact Blocks 2
Notes
1Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see
Accessories, Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
3Minimum order quantity of (10).
4When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
5Includes contact block mounting adapter.
6All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Red — M22-XDL-R 3
Custom M22-XDL-R-ETCH 4
STOP M22-XDL-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDL-R-GB5
M22-XDL-R-X0
Green — M22-XDL-G 3
Custom M22-XDL-G-ETCH 4
START M22-XDL-G-GB1
ON M22-XDL-G-GB6
M22-XDL-G-X1
Blue — M22-XDL-B 3
Custom M22-XDL-B-ETCH 4
RESET M22-XDL-B-GB14
M22-XDL-B-X6
White — M22-XDL-W 3
Custom M22-XDL-W-ETCH 4
Yellow — M22-XDL-Y 3
Custom M22-XDL-Y-ETCH 4
Amber — M22-XDL-A
Custom M22-XDL-A-ETCH
Bezel Catalog Number 5
Silver M22-DRL-X
Black M22S-DRL-X
M22-XDL-W
M22-DRL-X
M22S-DRL-X
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage Catalog Number
Screw White 12–30
Vac/Vdc
M22-LED-W
Red M22-LED-R
Green M22-LED-G
Blue M22-LED-B
Screw White 85–264
Vac
M22-LED230-W
Red M22-LED230-R
Green M22-LED230-G
Blue M22-LED230-B
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 6Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-LED-W
M22-K10
V7-T1-68 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
Complete Devices
Complete Press-to-Test Units Operators Only 2
Notes
1All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
2Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Bezel Button Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number
Silver Red 1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-R-K11-R
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DLH-R-K11-230R
Green 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-G-K20-G
2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DLH-G-K20-230G
White 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-W-K20-W
2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DLH-W-K20-230W
Black Red 1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DLH-R-K11-R
1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22S-DLH-R-K11-230R
Green 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DLH-G-K20-G
2NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DLH-G-K20-230G
White 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DLH-W-K20-W
2NO 85–264 Vac M22S-DLH-W-K20-230W
M22-DLH-R-K11-R
M22S-DLH-R-K11-R
Bezel Button Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number
Silver Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-T-R-R
Blue M22-T-B-B
Yellow M22-T-Y-W
Green M22-T-G-G
White M22-T-W-W
Red 85–264 Vac M22-T-R-230R
Blue M22-T-R-230B
Yellow M22-T-Y-230W
Green M22-T-G-230G
White M22-T-W-230W
Black Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22S-T-R-R
Blue M22S-T-B-B
Yellow M22S-T-Y-W
Green M22S-T-G-G
White M22S-T-W-W
Red 85–264 Vac M22S-T-R-230R
Blue M22S-T-B-230B
Yellow M22S-T-Y-230W
Green M22S-T-G-230G
White M22S-T-W-230W
Bezel Button Color Catalog Number
Silver Red M22-DLH-R
Green M22-DLH-G
White M22-DLH-W
Blue M22-DLH-B
Yellow M22-DLH-Y
Amber M22-DLH-A
Black Red M22S-DLH-R
Green M22S-DLH-G
White M22S-DLH-W
Blue M22S-DLH-B
Yellow M22S-DLH-Y
Amber M22S-DLH-A
Silver guarded Red M22-DGLH-R
Green M22-DGLH-G
White M22-DGLH-W
Blue M22-DGLH-B
Yellow M22-DGLH-Y
M22-DLH-R
M22S-DLH-R
M22-DGLH-R
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-69
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
Components
Button Lenses 1
Buttonless Operator
Light Units 1
Contact Blocks 1
Notes
1For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see
Accessories, Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
2Minimum order quantity of (10).
3When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4Includes contact block mounting adapter.
5All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Red — M22-XDLH-R 2
Custom M22-XDLH-R-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XDLH-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDLH-R-GB5
M22-XDLH-R-X0
Green — M22-XDLH-G 2
Custom M22-XDLH-G-ETCH 3
START M22-XDLH-G-GB1
ON M22-XDLH-G-GB6
M22-XDLH-G-X1
Blue — M22-XDLH-B 2
Custom M22-XDLH-B-ETCH 3
RESET M22-XDLH-B-GB14
M22-XDLH-B-X6
White — M22-XDLH-W 2
Custom M22-XDLH-W-ETCH 3
Yellow — M22-XDLH-Y 2
Custom M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH 3
Amber — M22-XDLH-A
Custom M22-XDLH-A-ETCH
Bezel Catalog Number 4
Silver M22-DL-X
Black M22S-DL-X
Silver guarded M22-DGL-X
M22-XDH-R
M22-DL-X
M22S-DL-X
M22-DGL-X
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage Catalog Number
Screw White 12–30
Vac/Vdc
M22-LED-W
Red M22-LED-R
Green M22-LED-G
Blue M22-LED-B
Screw White 85–264
Vac
M22-LED230-W
Red M22-LED230-R
Green M22-LED230-G
Blue M22-LED230-B
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 5Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-LED-W
M22-K10
V7-T1-70 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1
Operators Only 2
Notes
1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.
Bezel Button Color Catalog Number
Silver Red M22-DRLH-R
Green M22-DRLH-G
White M22-DRLH-W
Blue M22-DRLH-B
Yellow M22-DRLH-Y
Amber M22-DRLH-A
Black Red M22S-DRLH-R
Green M22S-DRLH-G
White M22S-DRLH-W
Blue M22S-DRLH-B
Yellow M22S-DRLH-Y
Amber M22S-DRLH-A
M22-DRLH-W
M22S-DRLH-W
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-71
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1
Components
Button Lenses 2
Buttonless Operator
Light Units 2
Contact Blocks 2
Notes
1Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
2For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see
Accessories, Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
3Minimum order quantity of (10).
4When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDLH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
5Includes contact block mounting adapter.
6All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Red — M22-XDLH-R 3
Custom M22-XDLH-R-ETCH 4
STOP M22-XDLH-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDLH-R-GB5
M22-XDLH-R-X0
Green — M22-XDLH-G 3
Custom M22-XDLH-G-ETCH 4
START M22-XDLH-G-GB1
ON M22-XDLH-G-GB6
M22-XDLH-G-X1
Blue — M22-XDLH-B 3
Custom M22-XDLH-B-ETCH 4
RESET M22-XDLH-B-GB14
M22-XDLH-B-X6
White — M22-XDLH-W 3
Custom M22-XDLH-W-ETCH 4
Yellow — M22-XDLH-Y 3
Custom M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH 4
Amber — M22-XDLH-A
Custom M22-XDLH-A-ETCH
Bezel Catalog Number 5
Silver M22-DRL-X
Black M22S-DRL-X
M22-XDLH-W
M22-DRL-X
M22S-DRL-X
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage Catalog Number
Screw White 12–30
Vac/Vdc
M22-LED-W
Red M22-LED-R
Green M22-LED-G
Blue M22-LED-B
Screw White 85–264
Vac
M22-LED230-W
Red M22-LED230-R
Green M22-LED230-G
Blue M22-LED230-B
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 6Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-LED-W
M22-K10
V7-T1-72 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Indicating Lights
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 indicating lights
use the combination of a
durable, bright LED unit and
modern lenses designed
specifically for this type of
LED to create a bright and
visible indicating light.
As with the pushbuttons, the
indicating light lenses can be
laser engraved. Indicating
lights can be ordered as
complete devices, including
lens and LED unit, or as
modular components.
Features
●Customizable laser
engraving on all lenses
●LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
●Lenses designed
specifically for LED
illumination
●Modular construction
makes assembly fast and
simplifies stocking of
components and complete
devices
●Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●IP67, IP69K
●NEMA 4X, 13
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Indicating Lights
Product Selection
Indicating Lights, Flush
Complete Devices
Operators Only 1
Note
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Lens Color Light Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number
White White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-L-W-W
Red Red M22-L-R-R
Green Green M22-L-G-G
Yellow White M22-L-Y-W
Blue Blue M22-L-B-B
Amber White M22-L-A-W
White White 85–264 Vac M22-L-W-230W
Red Red M22-L-R-230R
Green Green M22-L-G-230G
Yellow White M22-L-Y-230W
Blue Blue M22-L-B-230B
Amber White M22-L-A-230W
Lens Color Catalog Number Lens Color Catalog Number
Flat Conical
White M22-L-W White M22-LH-W
Red M22-L-R Red M22-LH-R
Green M22-L-G Green M22-LH-G
Yellow M22-L-Y Yellow M22-LH-Y
Blue M22-L-B Blue M22-LH-B
Amber M22-L-A Amber M22-LH-A
Note: Light unit should match color of lens.
Use white light unit with yellow lens.
Lens Color
W =White
R =Red
G = Green
Y = Yellow
B =Blue
M22 - L –B–GB8–B
Operator Type
M22-L = Flush indicating light
1When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see Pages V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-L-B-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
Plate Inscription
ETCH =Custom
1
GB5 =OFF
GB6 =ON
GB8 = FAULT
GB15 =FORWARD
GB16 = REVERSE
Light Units
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W =White
R =Red
G =Green
B =Blue
85–264 Vac
230W =White
230R =Red
230G =Green
230B =Blue
M22-L-R-R
M22-L-R
M22-LH-R
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-73
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Indicating Lights, Flush
Components
Lenses 1
Lensless Indicating Light
Light Units 14
Notes
1For complete listing of available lenses and light units, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
2Minimum order quantity of (10).
3When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4Select the same color LED element as lens color; for yellow and amber lenses,
choose a white LED.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Flat
Red — M22-XL-R 2
Custom M22-XL-R-ETCH 3
OFF M22-XL-R-GB5
Green — M22-XL-G 2
Custom M22-XL-G-ETCH 3
ON M22-XL-G-GB6
REVERSE M22-XL-G-GB16
Blue — M22-XL-B 2
Custom M22-XL-B-ETCH 3
FAULT M22-XL-B-GB8
White — M22-XL-W 2
Custom M22-XL-W-ETCH 3
OFF M22-XL-W-GB5
ON M22-XL-W-GB6
FAULT M22-XL-W-GB8
FORWARD M22-XL-W-GB15
Yellow — M22-XL-Y 2
Custom M22-XL-Y-ETCH 3
Amber — M22-XL-A 2
Custom M22-XL-A-ETCH 3
Conical
Red — M22-XLH-R
Green — M22-XLH-G
Blue — M22-XLH-B
White — M22-XLH-W
Yellow — M22-XLH-Y
Amber — M22-XLH-A
Catalog Number
M22-L-X
M22-XL-R
M22-L-X
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage Catalog Number
Screw White 12–30
Vac/Vdc
M22-LED-W
Red M22-LED-R
Green M22-LED-G
Blue M22-LED-B
Screw White 85–264
Vac
M22-LED230-W
Red M22-LED230-R
Green M22-LED230-G
Blue M22-LED230-B
M22-LED-W
V7-T1-74 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Emergency Stops
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 emergency
stops are a durable and
reliable solution to a variety
of e-stop applications. With
standard push-pull, as well
as twist-to-release and key-
release, illuminated options
and red or black operators,
the M22 e-stop is a robust
solution. As with all
operators, they can be
ordered as a ready to install
complete device or as
modular components for
the perfect fit.
Features
●Push-pull and twist to
release options available as
well as illuminated and
keyed release
●LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
●More than 100,000
mechanical operations
●Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
●Suitable for use in safety
applications up to
Category-4 or Sil-3
Protection Type
●IP67, IP69K
(IP66 key-release)
●NEMA 4X, 13
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Emergency Stops
M22 –PVT–MS2–K10–230R
Operator Color
M22 =Silver
M22S =Black
Contact Blocks
K10 =NO
K10P = NO, early-make
K01 =NC
K01D = NC, late-break
CK10 =NO
CK01 =NC
CK01D = NC, late-break
Ck20 =2NO
CK02 =2NC
CK11 =NO-NC
Key Release Code
Blank =MS1
MS2 =MS2
MS3 =MS3
MS4 =MS4
MS5 =MS5
MS6 =MS6
MS7 =MS7
MS8 =MS8
RS = Ronis
(45 and 60 mm only)
Light Units
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W =White
R =Red
G =Green
B =Blue
85–264 Vac
230W =White
230R =Red
230G =Green
230B =Blue
Operator Type
PV = Non-illuminated push-pull emergency stop
PV45P = Non-illuminated 45 mm emergency stop
PV60P = Non-illuminated 60 mm emergency stop
PV45P-MPI = Non-illuminated mechanical indication, 45 mm
PV60P-MPI = Non-illuminated mechanical indication, 60 mm
PVT = Non-illuminated twist-to-release emergency stop
PVT45P = Non-illuminated twist-to-release 45 mm emergency stop
PVT60P = Non-illuminated twist-to-release 60 mm emergency stop
PVT45P-MPI = Non-illuminated twist-to-release with mechanical
indication, 45 mm
PVT60P-MPI = Non-illuminated twist-to-release with mechanical
indication, 60 mm
PVS = Non-illuminated keyed release (red operator only)
PVS45P = Non-illuminated keyed release 45 mm (red only)
PVS60P = Non-illuminated keyed release 60 mm (red only)
PVL = Illuminated push-pull emergency stop
PVLT = Illuminated twist-to-release emergency stop
PVLT45P = Illuminated twist-to-release 45 mm emergency stop
PVLT60P = Illuminated twist-to-release 60 mm emergency stop
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-75
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Emergency Stops
Complete Devices
Note
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Type
Button
Color
LED
Color
Contact Block
Configuration 1
Light Unit
Voltage Catalog Number
Non-Illuminated
Push-pull Red — NC — M22-PV-K01
2NC M22-PV-K02
1NO-2NC M22-PV-K12
Twist-to-release Red — NC — M22-PVT-K01
2NC M22-PVT-K02
1NO-2NC M22-PVT-K12
Key release Red — NC — M22-PVS-K01
2NC M22-PVS-K02
1NO-2NC M22-PVS-K12
Illuminated
Push-pull Red Red NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVL-K01-R
2NC M22-PVL-K02-R
1NO-2NC M22-PVL-K12-R
NC 85–264 Vac M22-PVL-K01-230R
2NC M22-PVL-K02-230R
1NO-2NC M22-PVL-K12-230R
Twist-to-release Red Red NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVLT-K01-R
2NC M22-PVLT-K02-R
1NO-2NC M22-PVLT-K12-R
NC 85–264 Vac M22-PVLT-K01-230R
2NC M22-PVLT-K02-230R
1NO-2NC M22-PVLT-K12-230R
M22-PV-K01
M22-PVL-K01-R
V7-T1-76 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Emergency Stops
Components
Push-Pull Emergency Stops
Twist-to-Release Emergency Stops
Machine Stop Operators (Black) 1
Key Release Emergency Stops 2
Notes
1Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2Key included. For identical locks and keys, use the same key code. One key is included with
actuator; additional keys are available as accessories.
3Includes Key Code MS1.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Illumination/Indication
Actuator
Size
Catalog
Number
None 35mm M22-PV
45mm M22-PV45P
60mm M22-PV60P
LED illumination 35mm M22-PVL
45mm M22-PVL45P
60mm M22-PVL60P
Mechanical indication 45mm M22-PV45P-MPI
60mm M22-PV60P-MPI
Illumination/Indication
Actuator
Size
Catalog
Number
None 35mm M22-PVT
45mm M22-PVT45P
60mm M22-PVT60P
LED illumination 35mm M22-PVLT
45mm M22-PVLT45P
60mm M22-PVLT60P
Mechanical indication 45mm M22-PVT45P-MPI
60mm M22-PVT60P-MPI
Illumination Type
Actuator
Size
Catalog
Number
Non-illuminated Push-pull 35mm M22S-PV
Twist-to-
release
35mm M22S-PVT
LED illumination Push-pull 35mm M22S-PVL
Twist-to-
release
35mm M22S-PVLT
M22-PVL
M22-PVT45P-MPI
M22S-PVLT
Actuator
Size
Key
Code
Catalog
Number
35 mm MS1 M22-PVS 3
MS2 M22-PVS-MS2
MS3 M22-PVS-MS3
MS4 M22-PVS-MS4
MS5 M22-PVS-MS5
MS6 M22-PVS-MS6
MS7 M22-PVS-MS7
MS8 M22-PVS-MS8
45 mm MS1 M22-PVS45P
MS2 M22-PVS45P-MS2
MS3 M22-PVS45P-MS3
MS4 M22-PVS45P-MS4
MS5 M22-PVS45P-MS5
MS6 M22-PVS45P-MS6
MS7 M22-PVS45P-MS7
MS8 M22-PVS45P-MS8
Ronis M22-PVS45P-RS
60 mm MS1 M22-PVS60P
MS2 M22-PVS60P-MS2
MS3 M22-PVS60P-MS3
MS4 M22-PVS60P-MS4
MS5 M22-PVS60P-MS5
MS6 M22-PVS60P-MS6
MS7 M22-PVS60P-MS7
MS8 M22-PVS60P-MS8
Ronis M22-PVS60P-RS
M22-PVS60P-MS1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-77
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Contact Blocks 1
Light Units 1
Extra Keys 4
Accessories
Notes
1For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
2Self-monitoring contact blocks (SMCB type) cannot be used with illuminated emergency
stops.
3All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
4For use with key release operators only. One key included with operator.
Terminal
Type
Mounting
Location 2
Contact
Configuration 3Catalog Number
Screw Front NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
SMCB, NC M22-K01SMC10
SMCB, 2NC M22-K02SMC10
Base SMCB, NC M22-KC01SMC10
SMCB, 2NC M22-KC02SMC10
Spring-
cage
Front NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage Catalog Number
Screw White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LED-W
Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LED-R
Screw White 85–264 Vac M22-LED230-W
Red 85–264 Vac M22-LED230-R
Screw White 207–264 Vac M22-LED230H-W
Red 207–264 Vac M22-LED230H-R
For Key Code Catalog Number
MS1 M22-ES-MS1
MS2 M22-ES-MS2
MS3 M22-ES-MS3
MS4 M22-ES-MS4
MS5 M22-ES-MS5
MS6 M22-ES-MS6
MS7 M22-ES-MS7
MS8 M22-ES-MS8
M22-K10
M22-LED-W
M22-ES-MS1
Description Voltage Catalog Number
Yellow guard ring — M22-XGPV
Gray guard ring — M22G-XGPV
Rectangular guard — M22-MGTA
Sealing shroud — M22-PL-PV
Illuminated ring 24 Vac/Vdc M22-XPV60-Y-24
120 Vac M22-XPV60-Y-120
230 Vac M22-XPV60-Y-230
M22-XGPV
M22G-XGPV
M22-PL-PV
M22-MGTA
M22-XPV60-Y-120
V7-T1-78 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Selector Switches
Contents
Description Page
Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-79
Illuminated Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-84
Key Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-88
Selector Switches
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 selector switch
line offers an almost endless
variety of options in
maintained/momentary, key-
removal and illuminated
devices. The coding adapters
used for maintained/
momentary and key removal
positions make the M22
stand out from competitive
devices. By simply adding or
removing a coding adapter
from inside the operator,
the end-user can change
the function of the button.
Operator options include
standard knob, rotary head,
illuminated and keyed
versions. As with all
operators, they can be
ordered as a ready to install
complete device or as
modular components to
meet application specific
requirements.
Features
●Adding or removing coding
adapters allows for field
convertibility of
maintained/momentary
and key removal positions
●LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
●More than 100,000
mechanical operations
●Coding adapter options
make assembly fast and
simplify stocking of
different configurations of
selector switches
●Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●IP66
●NEMA 4X, 13
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-79
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
Contact Blocks
K10 =NO
K10P = NO, early-make
Options
K11 = NO-NC
K22 = 2NO-2NC
K20 = 2NO
K02 = 2NC
2Rotary type only.
Inscription 2
X91 = AUTO-HAND
X92 = II-I
Bezel Color
M22 =Silver
M22S =Black
1All momentary selector switches can
be converted in the field to maintained
operation with the removal of a color-
coded adapter.
Handle Type 1
W = Momentary rotary
WK = Momentary knob
WKV = Maintained V-position knob
WR = Maintained rotary
WRK = Maintained knob
Number of Positions
Blank = Two-position
3 = Three-position
4 = Four-position
M22 –WRK –X91–K10
–
V7-T1-80 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
Complete Devices, Knob Type 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Type Switching Position Bezel
Contact Block
Configuration 2Catalog Number
Two-position Maintained Silver NO M22-WRK-K10
1NO-1NC M22-WRK-K11
2NO-2NC M22-WRK-K22
Black NO M22S-WRK-K10
1NO-1NC M22S-WRK-K11
2NO-2NC M22S-WRK-K22
Maintained V Silver NO M22-WKV-K10
1NO-1NC M22-WKV-K11
2NO-2NC M22-WKV-K22
Black NO M22S-WKV-K10
1NO-1NC M22S-WKV-K11
2NO-2NC M22S-WKV-K22
Three-position Maintained Silver 2NO M22-WRK3-K20
2NO-2NC M22-WRK3-K22
Black 2NO M22S-WRK3-K20
2NO-2NC M22S-WRK3-K22
M22-WKV-K10
40°
60°
60° 60°
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-81
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
Components
Operators Only, Knob Type 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color
coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-120.
Type Switching Position Bezel Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary 2 Silver M22-WK
Black M22S-WK
Maintained Silver M22-WRK
Black M22S-WRK
Maintained V Silver M22-WKV
Black M22S-WKV
Three-position Momentary 2 Silver M22-WK3
Black M22S-WK3
Maintained Silver M22-WRK3
Black M22S-WRK3
Maintained, return from left Silver M22-WRK3-2
Black M22S-WRK3-2
Maintained, return from right Silver M22-WRK3-1
Black M22S-WRK3-1
Four-position Maintained Silver M22-WRK4
Black M22S-WRK4
M22-WK
40°
40°
60°
40° 40°
60°60°
40° 40° 60°60°
40° 40° 60°60°
V7-T1-82 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
Components
Operators Only, Rotary Type 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color
coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-120.
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see
Pages
V7-T1-131
to
V7-T1-138
)
into the Order Notes. For example, M22-WR3-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X88, Line item #_.
Type Switching Position Bezel Inscription Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary 2Silver I-O M22-W
Black I-O M22S-W
Maintained Silver I-O M22-WR
Custom M22-WR-ETCH 3
AUTO-HAND M22-WR-X91
II-I M22-WR-X92
Black I-O M22S-WR
Custom M22S-WR-ETCH 3
AUTO-HAND M22S-WR-X91
II-I M22S-WR-X92
Three-position Momentary 2Silver I-O-II M22-W3
Black I-O-II M22S-W3
Maintained Silver I-O-II M22-WR3
Custom M22-WR3-ETCH 3
AUTO-O-MAN M22-WR3-X94
Black I-O-II M22S-WR3
Custom M22S-WR3-ETCH 3
AUTO-O-MAN M22S-WR3-X94
Four-position Maintained Silver 0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 M22-WR4
Black 0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 M22S-WR4
M22S-WR3-X94
40°
40°
40° 40°
60°60°
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-83
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches
Components
Contact Blocks 1Accessories
Notes
1For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
2All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
3Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
three-position selector switches only.
4Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 2Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-K10
Description Catalog Number
Plunger bridge 3M22-XW
Key cover M22-XWS
Key withdraw adapter 4M22-XC-R
Coding adapter M22-XC-Y
Guard ring M22-XGWK
M22-XC-Y
M22-XWS
M22-XC-R
M22-XW
M22-XGWK
V7-T1-84 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Illuminated Selector Switches
Bezel Color
M22 =Silver
M22S =Black
Handle Type
WLK = Illuminated knob type
momentary, two-position
WLKV = Illuminated Knob type
momentary, V-position
WLK3 = Illuminated knob type
momentary, three-position
M22 –WLK–R–K10–R
Light Units
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W =White
R =Red
G =Green
B =Blue
85–264 Vac
230W =White
230R =Red
230G =Green
230B =Blue
Contact Blocks
K10 =1NO
K01 =1NC
K20 =2NO
K02 =2NC
K11 = 1NO-1NC
K30 =3NO
K03 =3NC
K21 = 2NO-1NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC
Handle Color
W =White
R =Red
G = Green
Y = Yellow
B =Blue
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-85
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection
Illuminated Selector Switches
Components
Operators Only, Knob Type 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded
adapter. See Page V7-T1-120.
Type Switching Position Bezel Button Color Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary 2 Silver White M22-WLK-W
Red M22-WLK-R
Green M22-WLK-G
Yellow M22-WLK-Y
Blue M22-WLK-B
Black White M22S-WLK-W
Red M22S-WLK-R
Green M22S-WLK-G
Yellow M22S-WLK-Y
Blue M22S-WLK-B
Maintained Silver White M22-WRLK-W
Red M22-WRLK-R
Green M22-WRLK-G
Yellow M22-WRLK-Y
Blue M22-WRLK-B
Black White M22S-WRLK-W
Red M22S-WRLK-R
Green M22S-WRLK-G
Yellow M22S-WRLK-Y
Blue M22S-WRLK-B
Maintained V Silver White M22-WLKV-W
Red M22-WLKV-R
Green M22-WLKV-G
Yellow M22-WLKV-Y
Blue M22-WLKV-B
Black White M22S-WLKV-W
Red M22S-WLKV-R
Green M22S-WLKV-G
Yellow M22S-WLKV-Y
Blue M22S-WLKV-B
M22-WLK-W
40°
40°
60°
V7-T1-86 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Selector Switches
Components
Operators Only, Knob Type 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded
adapter. See Page V7-T1-120.
Type Switching Position Bezel Button Color Catalog Number
Three-position Momentary 2 Silver White M22-WLK3-W
Red M22-WLK3-R
Green M22-WLK3-G
Yellow M22-WLK3-Y
Blue M22-WLK3-B
Black White M22S-WLK3-W
Red M22S-WLK3-R
Green M22S-WLK3-G
Yellow M22S-WLK3-Y
Blue M22S-WLK3-B
Maintained Silver White M22-WRLK3-W
Red M22-WRLK3-R
Green M22-WRLK3-G
Yellow M22-WRLK3-Y
Blue M22-WRLK3-B
Black White M22S-WRLK3-W
Red M22S-WRLK3-R
Green M22S-WRLK3-G
Yellow M22S-WRLK3-Y
Blue M22S-WRLK3-B
Maintained, return from right Silver White M22-WRLK3-1-W
Red M22-WRLK3-1-R
Green M22-WRLK3-1-G
Yellow M22-WRLK3-1-Y
Blue M22-WRLK3-1-B
Black White M22S-WRLK3-1-W
Red M22S-WRLK3-1-R
Green M22S-WRLK3-1-G
Yellow M22S-WRLK3-1-Y
Blue M22S-WRLK3-1-B
Maintained, return from left Silver White M22-WRLK3-2-W
Red M22-WRLK3-2-R
Green M22-WRLK3-2-G
Yellow M22-WRLK3-2-Y
Blue M22-WRLK3-2-B
Black White M22S-WRLK3-2-W
Red M22S-WRLK3-2-R
Green M22S-WRLK3-2-G
Yellow M22S-WRLK3-2-Y
Blue M22S-WRLK3-2-B
M22-WLK3-W
40° 40°
60°60°
40° 40° 60°60°
40° 40° 60°60°
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-87
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Illuminated Selector Switches
Light Units 15
Contact Blocks 1
Accessories
Notes
1For complete listing of available light units and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
2Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
three-position selector switches only.
3All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
4Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.
5Select the same color LED element as lens color; for yellow lens, choose a white LED.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage Catalog Number
Screw White 12–30
Vac/Vdc
M22-LED-W
Red M22-LED-R
Green M22-LED-G
Blue M22-LED-B
Screw White 85–264
Vac
M22-LED230-W
Red M22-LED230-R
Green M22-LED230-G
Blue M22-LED230-B
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 3Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-LED-W
M22-K10
Description Catalog Number
Plunger bridge 2M22-XW
Key cover M22-XWS
Key withdraw adapter 4M22-XC-R
Coding adapter M22-XC-Y
Guard ring M22-XGWK
M22-XC-Y
M22-XWS
M22-XC-R
M22-XW
M22-XGWK
V7-T1-88 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Key-Operated Selector Switches
Product Selection
Key-Operated Selector Switches 12
Components
Operators Only 3
Notes
1 Includes one key.
2 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-120.
3 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
4 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-120.
Bezel Color
M22 = Silver
M22S =Black
M22 –WS–MS2–A1
Key Code
Blank =MS1
MS2 =MS2
MS3 =MS3
MS4 =MS4
MS5 =MS5
MS6 =MS6
MS7 =MS7
MS8 =MS8
Handle Type
WS = Two-position, momentary
WS3 = Three-position, momentary
WRS = Two-position, maintained
WRS3 = Three-position, maintained
Key Removal Position
Refer to coding adapter assembly
and functional test guide on Page
V7-T1-120.
Type Switching Position Bezel Key Removal Position Key Code Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary 4 Silver Return from right, key
removable left
MS1 M22-WS
MS2 M22-WS-MS2
MS3 M22-WS-MS3
MS4 M22-WS-MS4
MS5 M22-WS-MS5
MS6 M22-WS-MS6
MS7 M22-WS-MS7
MS8 M22-WS-MS8
Black Return from right, key
removable left
MS1 M22S-WS
MS2 M22S-WS-MS2
MS3 M22S-WS-MS3
MS4 M22S-WS-MS4
MS5 M22S-WS-MS5
MS6 M22S-WS-MS6
MS7 M22S-WS-MS7
MS8 M22S-WS-MS8
M22-WS
40°
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-89
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Key-Operated Selector Switches 12
Components
Operators Only, continued 3
Notes
1 Includes one key.
2 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-120.
3 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
4 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-120.
Type Switching Position Bezel Key Removal Position Key Code Catalog Number
Two-position Maintained Silver Key removable left MS1 M22-WRS-A1
MS2 M22-WRS-MS2-A1
MS3 M22-WRS-MS3-A1
MS4 M22-WRS-MS4-A1
MS5 M22-WRS-MS5-A1
MS6 M22-WRS-MS6-A1
MS7 M22-WRS-MS7-A1
MS8 M22-WRS-MS8-A1
Key removable left/right MS1 M22-WRS
MS2 M22-WRS-MS2
MS3 M22-WRS-MS3
MS4 M22-WRS-MS4
MS5 M22-WRS-MS5
MS6 M22-WRS-MS6
MS7 M22-WRS-MS7
MS8 M22-WRS-MS8
Black Key removable left MS1 M22S-WRS-A1
MS2 M22S-WRS-MS2-A1
MS3 M22S-WRS-MS3-A1
MS4 M22S-WRS-MS4-A1
MS5 M22S-WRS-MS5-A1
MS6 M22S-WRS-MS6-A1
MS7 M22S-WRS-MS7-A1
MS8 M22S-WRS-MS8-A1
Key removable left/right MS1 M22S-WRS
MS2 M22S-WRS-MS2
MS3 M22S-WRS-MS3
MS4 M22S-WRS-MS4
MS5 M22S-WRS-MS5
MS6 M22S-WRS-MS6
MS7 M22S-WRS-MS7
MS8 M22S-WRS-MS8
Three-position Momentary 4 Silver Return from left/right,
key removable center
MS1 M22-WS3
MS2 M22-WS3-MS2
MS3 M22-WS3-MS3
MS4 M22-WS3-MS4
MS5 M22-WS3-MS5
MS6 M22-WS3-MS6
MS7 M22-WS3-MS7
MS8 M22-WS3-MS8
Black Return from left/right,
key removable center
MS1 M22S-WS3
MS2 M22S-WS3-MS2
MS3 M22S-WS3-MS3
MS4 M22S-WS3-MS4
MS5 M22S-WS3-MS5
MS6 M22S-WS3-MS6
MS7 M22S-WS3-MS7
MS8 M22S-WS3-MS8
M22S-WRS
M22-WS3-X93
40°
40° 40°
V7-T1-90 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Key-Operated Selector Switches 12
Components
Operators Only, continued 3
Notes
1 Includes one key.
2 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-120.
3 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Type Switching Position Bezel Key Removal Position Key Code Catalog Number
Three-position Maintained Silver Key removable left/center/right MS1 M22-WRS3-A1
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A1
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A1
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A1
MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A1
MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A1
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A1
MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A1
Key removable center/left MS1 M22-WRS3-A2
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A2
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A2
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A2
MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A2
MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A2
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A2
MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A2
Key removable center/right MS1 M22-WRS3-A3
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A3
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A3
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A3
MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A3
MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A3
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A3
MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A3
Key removable left/right MS1 M22-WRS3
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4
MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5
MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7
MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8
Return from left,
key removable center
MS1 M22-WRS3-A7
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A7
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A7
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A7
MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A7
MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A7
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A7
MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A7
Return from left,
key removable center/right
MS1 M22-WRS3-A6
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A6
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A6
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A6
MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A6
MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A6
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A6
MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A6
M22-WS3-X93
60°60°
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-91
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Key-Operated Selector Switches 12
Components
Operators Only, continued 3
Notes
1 Includes one key.
2 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-120.
3 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Type Switching Position Bezel Key Removal Position Key Code Catalog Number
Three-position Maintained Silver Return from right,
key removable left/center
MS1 M22-WRS3-A4
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A4
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A4
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A4
MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A4
MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A4
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A4
MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A4
Return from right,
key removable center
MS1 M22-WRS3-A5
MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A5
MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A5
MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A5
MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A5
MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A5
MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A5
MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A5
Black Key removable center MS1 M22S-WRS3-A1
MS2 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A1
MS3 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A1
MS4 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A1
MS5 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A1
MS6 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A1
MS7 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A1
MS8 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A1
Key removable center/left MS1 M22S-WRS3-A2
MS2 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A2
MS3 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A2
MS4 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A2
MS5 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A2
MS6 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A2
MS7 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A2
MS8 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A2
Key removable center/right MS1 M22S-WRS3-A3
MS2 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A3
MS3 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A3
MS4 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A3
MS5 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A3
MS6 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A3
MS7 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A3
MS8 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A3
Key removable left/right/center MS1 M22S-WRS3
MS2 M22S-WRS3-MS2
MS3 M22S-WRS3-MS3
MS4 M22S-WRS3-MS4
MS5 M22S-WRS3-MS5
MS6 M22S-WRS3-MS6
MS7 M22S-WRS3-MS7
MS8 M22S-WRS3-MS8
M22-WS3-X93
60°60°
V7-T1-92 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Key-Operated Selector Switches 12
Components
Operators Only, continued 3
Notes
1 Includes one key.
2 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-120.
3 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Type Switching Position Bezel Key Removal Position Key Code Catalog Number
Three-position Maintained Black Return from left,
key removable center
MS1 M22S-WRS3-A7
MS2 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A7
MS3 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A7
MS4 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A7
MS5 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A7
MS6 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A7
MS7 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A7
MS8 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A7
Return from left,
key removable center/right
MS1 M22S-WRS3-A6
MS2 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A6
MS3 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A6
MS4 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A6
MS5 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A6
MS6 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A6
MS7 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A6
MS8 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A6
Return from right,
key removable left/center
MS1 M22S-WRS3-A4
MS2 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A4
MS3 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A4
MS4 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A4
MS5 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A4
MS6 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A4
MS7 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A4
MS8 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A4
Return from right,
key removable center
MS1 M22S-WRS3-A5
MS2 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A5
MS3 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A5
MS4 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A5
MS5 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A5
MS6 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A5
MS7 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A5
MS8 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A5
M22-WS3-X93
60°60°
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-93
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Key-Operated Selector Switches
Components
Contact Blocks 1
Extra Keys
Accessories
Notes
1For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
2All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
3Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
three-position selector switches only.
4Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 2Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
Key Code Catalog Number
MS1 M22-ES-MS1
MS2 M22-ES-MS2
MS3 M22-ES-MS3
MS4 M22-ES-MS4
MS5 M22-ES-MS5
MS6 M22-ES-MS6
MS7 M22-ES-MS7
MS8 M22-ES-MS8
M22-K10
M22-ES-MS1
Description Catalog Number
Plunger bridge 3M22-XW
Key cover M22-XWS
Key withdraw adapter 4M22-XC-R
Coding adapter M22-XC-Y
Guard ring M22-XGWK
M22-XC-Y
M22-XWS
M22-XC-R
M22-XW
M22-XGWK
V7-T1-94 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 mushroom head
operators are a durable and
unique way to include
standard pushbutton
functionality. Like the
standard pushbutton line,
the maintained pushbuttons
are field convertible to
momentary. They also offer
laser engraving and a robust
five million mechanical
operations on the standard
momentary operator. As with
all operators, they can be
ordered as a ready to install
complete device or as
modular components.
Features
●Field convertible from
maintained to momentary
(available on maintained
pushbuttons only)
●Customizable laser
engraving on all buttons
●More than five million
mechanical operations on
momentary and one million
on maintained pushbuttons
●Modular construction
makes assembly fast and
simplifies stocking of
components and complete
devices
●Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●IP67, IP69K
●NEMA 4X, 13
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-95
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S =Black
Operator Type
DP = Non-illuminated momentary
mushroom head pushbutton
DRP = Non-illuminated maintained
mushroom head pushbutton
Operator Color
R =Red
S =Black
G = Green
Y = Yellow 1When ordering, specify inscription
per catalog number suffix from
the Symbols Library (see Pages
V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138) into the
Order Notes.
For example, M22-DP-R-ETCH;
Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91,
Line item #_.
Plate Inscription
ETCH =Custom
1
GB0 =STOP
GB1 =START
GB3 =UP
GB4 = DOWN
GB5 =OFF
GB6 =ON
GB15 =FORWARD
GB16 = REVERSE
X0 =
X1 =
X4 =
X5 =
X6 =
X7 =
M22 –DP–R–GB4–K01
Contact Blocks
K01 =NC
K10 =NO
K11 =NO-NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC
V7-T1-96 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Momentary 1
Complete Devices
Operators Only 2
Notes
1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
2 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Bezel Button Color
Contact Block
Configuration 2Catalog Number
Silver Red NC M22-DP-R-K01
2NC M22-DP-R-K02
1NO-2NC M22-DP-R-K12
1NO-1NC M22-DP-R-K11
Black Red NC M22S-DP-R-K01
2NC M22S-DP-R-K02
1NO-2NC M22S-DP-R-K12
1NO-1NC M22S-DP-R-K11
Bezel Button Color Catalog Number
Silver Black M22-DP-S
Red M22-DP-R
Green M22-DP-G
Yellow M22-DP-Y
Black Black M22S-DP-S
Red M22S-DP-R
Green M22S-DP-G
Yellow M22S-DP-Y
M22-DP-R-K01
M22S-DP-R-K01
M22-DP-G
M22S-DP-G
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-97
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Momentary 1
Components
Mushroom Head Plates Insertless Mushroom Head Operators
Contact Blocks 4
Notes
135 mm diameter mushroom head button.
2Minimum order quantity of (10).
3When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDP-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
5All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Note: Included
with operator.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Black -— M22-XDP-S 2
Custom M22-XDP-S-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XDP-S-GB0
START M22-XDP-S-GB1
FORWARD M22-XDP-S-GB15
REVERSE M22-XDP-S-GB16
UP M22-XDP-S-GB3
DOWN M22-XDP-S-GB4
OFF M22-XDP-S-GB5
ON M22-XDP-S-GB6
M22-XDP-S-X0
M22-XDP-S-X1
M22-XDP-S-X4
M22-XDP-S-X5
M22-XDP-S-X7
Red — M22-XDP-R 2
Custom M22-XDP-R-ETCH 3
STOP M22-XDP-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDP-R-GB5
M22-XDP-R-X0
Green — M22-XDP-G 2
Custom M22-XDP-G-ETCH 3
START M22-XDP-G-GB1
ON M22-XDP-G-GB6
M22-XDP-G-X0
M22-XDP-G-X1
White — M22-XDP-W 2
Custom M22-XDP-W-ETCH 3
Yellow — M22-XDP-Y 2
Custom M22-XDP-Y-ETCH 3
M22-XDP-G
Bezel Color Catalog Number
Silver Black M22-DP-S-X
Red M22-DP-R-X
Green M22-DP-G-X
Yellow M22-DP-Y-X
Black Black M22S-DP-S-X
Red M22S-DP-R-X
Green M22S-DP-G-X
Yellow M22S-DP-Y-X
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 5Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-DP-G-X
M22-K10
V7-T1-98 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Maintained 12
Complete Devices
Operators Only
Notes
1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button.
2 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring,
which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
3 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device
to be set to either maintained or momentary operation.
Bezel Button Color
Contact Block
Configuration 3Catalog Number
Silver Red NC M22-DRP-R-K01
2NC M22-DRP-R-K02
1NO-2NC M22-DRP-R-K12
1NO-1NC M22-DRP-R-K11
Black Red NC M22S-DRP-R-K01
2NC M22S-DRP-R-K02
1NO-2NC M22S-DRP-R-K12
1NO-1NC M22S-DRP-R-K11
Bezel Button Color Catalog Number
Silver Black M22-DRP-S
Red M22-DRP-R
Green M22-DRP-G
Yellow M22-DRP-Y
Black Black M22S-DRP-S
Red M22S-DRP-R
Green M22S-DRP-G
Yellow M22S-DRP-Y
M22-DRP-R-K01
M22S-DRP-R-K01
M22-DRP-G
M22S-DRP-G
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-99
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Maintained 12
Components
Mushroom Head Plates 5Insertless Mushroom Head Operators
Contact Blocks 5
Notes
135 mm diameter mushroom head button.
2Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
3Minimum order quantity of (10).
4When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138) into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XDP-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
5For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
6All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Note: Included
with operator.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Black — M22-XDP-S 3
Custom M22-XDP-S-ETCH 4
STOP M22-XDP-S-GB0
START M22-XDP-S-GB1
FORWARD M22-XDP-S-GB15
REVERSE M22-XDP-S-GB16
UP M22-XDP-S-GB3
DOWN M22-XDP-S-GB4
OFF M22-XDP-S-GB5
ON M22-XDP-S-GB6
M22-XDP-S-X0
M22-XDP-S-X1
M22-XDP-S-X4
M22-XDP-S-X5
M22-XDP-S-X7
Red — M22-XDP-R 3
Custom M22-XDP-R-ETCH 4
STOP M22-XDP-R-GB0
OFF M22-XDP-R-GB5
M22-XDP-R-X0
Green — M22-XDP-G 3
Custom M22-XDP-G-ETCH 4
START M22-XDP-G-GB1
ON M22-XDP-G-GB6
M22-XDP-G-X0
M22-XDP-G-X1
White — M22-XDP-W 3
Custom M22-XDP-W-ETCH 4
Yellow — M22-XDP-Y 3
Custom M22-XDP-Y-ETCH 4
M22-XDP-G
Bezel Color Catalog Number
Silver Black M22-DRP-S-X
Red M22-DRP-R-X
Green M22-DRP-G-X
Yellow M22-DRP-Y-X
Black Black M22S-DRP-S-X
Red M22S-DRP-R-X
Green M22S-DRP-G-X
Yellow M22S-DRP-Y-X
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 6Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-DRP-G-X
M22-K10
V7-T1-100 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Double Pushbuttons
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 double
pushbutton line is perfect for
applications such as motor
and pump starting, as well as
anytime space is limited. In
addition to the two buttons
that fit in one 22 mm hole is
the integrated white
indicating light between
them. These three operators
allow for multiple functions to
occur in a single space.
Green/red, black/white and
black/black color options
along with laser engraving
allow for further custom
applications.
Features
●Flush and extended, as
well as color options allow
for the perfect combination
button
●Integrated indicating light
adds even more
functionality in one
standard 22 mm hole
●Customizable laser
engraving on all buttons
●LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
●More than 200,000
mechanical operations
●Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●IP66
●NEMA 4X, 13
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Double Pushbuttons
Bezel
M22 = Silver
M22S =Black
M22 –DDL–GR–GB5–K10–G
Operator Type
DDL = Extended buttons and light
DDLF = Flush buttons and light
DDLM = Extended bottom button
Light Units
12–30 Vac/Vdc
W =White
R =Red
G =Green
B =Blue
85–264 Vac
230W =White
230R =Red
230G =Green
230B =Blue
Inscription
GB0 =STOP
GB1 =START
GB3 =UP
GB4 = DOWN
GB5 =OFF
GB6 =ON
GB14 = RESET
GB15 =FORWARD
GB16 = REVERSE
X0 =
X1 =
X5 =
X5 =
X6 =
X7 =
X5 =
Contact Blocks
K10 =1NO
K01 =1NC
K20 =2NO
K02 =2NC
K11 = 1NO-1NC
K30 =3NO
K03 =3NC
K21 = 2NO-1NC
K12 = 1NO-2NC
Button Plate Color
Top Bottom
GR =
WS =
S =
Green
White
Black
Red
Black
Black
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-101
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection
Components
Double Pushbuttons, Extended Pushbuttons and Center Light, Momentary
Operators Only 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see
Pages
V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138
)
into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-DDL-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
Color Inscription
Catalog NumberBezel Top Bottom Top Bottom
Silver Green Red — — M22-DDL-GR
Custom Custom M22-DDL-GR-ETCH 2
M22-DDL-GR-X1-X0
START STOP M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0
White Black — — M22-DDL-WS
Custom Custom M22-DDL-WS-ETCH 2
M22-DDL-WS-X1-X0
START STOP M22-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0
Black Black — — M22-DDL-S
Custom Custom M22-DDL-S-ETCH 2
——M22-DDL-S-X4-X5
M22-DDL-S-X7-X7
Black Green Red — — M22S-DDL-GR
Custom Custom M22S-DDL-GR-ETCH 2
M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0
START STOP M22S-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0
White Black — — M22S-DDL-WS
Custom Custom M22S-DDL-WS-ETCH 2
M22S-DDL-WS-X1-X0
START STOP M22S-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0
Black Black — — M22S-DDL-S
Custom Custom M22S-DDL-S-ETCH 2
—M22S-DDL-S-X4-X5
M22S-DDL-S-X7-X7
M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0
M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0
V7-T1-102 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbuttons and Center Light, Momentary
Operators Only 1
Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbutton and Center Light, Extended Bottom Pushbutton, Momentary
Operators Only 1
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see
Pages
V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138
)
into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
Color Inscription
Catalog NumberBezel Top Bottom Top Bottom
Silver Green Red — — M22-DDLF-GR
Custom Custom M22-DDLF-GR-ETCH 2
White Black — — M22-DDLF-WS
Custom Custom M22-DDLF-WS-ETCH 2
Green Red M22-DDLF-GR-X1-X0
White Black M22-DDLF-WS-X1-X0
Black Green Red — — M22S-DDLF-GR
Custom Custom M22S-DDLF-GR-ETCH 2
White Black — — M22S-DDLF-WS
Custom Custom M22S-DDLF-WS-ETCH 2
Green Red M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0
White Black M22S-DDLF-WS-X1-X0
Color Inscription
Catalog NumberBezel Top Bottom Top Bottom
Silver Green Red — — M22-DDLM-GR
Custom Custom M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH 2
White Black — — M22-DDLM-WS
Custom Custom M22-DDLM-WS-ETCH 2
Green Red M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0
White Black M22-DDLM-WS-X1-X0
Black Green Red — — M22S-DDLM-GR
Custom Custom M22S-DDLM-GR-ETCH 2
White Black — — M22S-DDLM-WS
Custom Custom M22S-DDLM-WS-ETCH 2
Green Red M22S-DDLM-GR-X1-X0
White Black M22S-DDLM-WS-X1-X0
M22-DDLF-GR
M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0
M22-DDLM-GR
M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-103
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Double Pushbuttons
Light Units 1 Contact Blocks
1
Notes
1For complete listing of available light units and contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
2All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Terminal
Type
LED
Color
Light Unit
Voltage Catalog Number
Screw White 12–30
Vac/Vdc
M22-LED-W
85–264
Vac
M22-LED230-W
M22-LED-W
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 2Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-K10
V7-T1-104 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Four-Way Pushbuttons
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 four-way push-
button is a truly unique
offering. A four-way
pushbutton offers four
different buttons mounted
in a single 22 mm hole. This
is ideal not only for an
application with limited
space, but also directional
applications (when ordered
with the four arrow engraving
option). Another unique
option is the interlocked
version, which prevents two
opposite buttons from being
actuated at the same time.
Features
●Four buttons in one
operator allows for
increased functionality in
limited space
●Optional interlocking
option, which prevents two
buttons from being
actuated at the same time
●Customizable laser
engraving on all buttons for
directional or other
applications
●Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●IP66
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Four-Way Pushbuttons
Bezel
M22 =Silver
M22S =Black
M22 –D4–S–X7–K01
Operator Type
D4 = Four-way pushbutton,
momentary, non-interlocked
DI4 = Four-way pushbutton,
momentary, interlocked
1When ordering, specify
inscription per catalog
number suffix from the Symbols
Library (see Pages V7-T1-131
to V7-T1-138) into the Order
Notes.
For example, M22-D4-S-ETCH;
Order Notes: Mark with symbol
X91, Line item #_.
Inscription
ETCH =Custom
1
X7 =
Contact Blocks
K10 =1NO
K01 =1NC
K20 =2NO
K02 =2NC
K11 = 1NO-1NC
K30 =3NO
K03 =3NC
K21 =2NO-1NC
K12 =1NO-2NC
Button Color
S =Black
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-105
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Product Selection
Four-Way Pushbuttons, Momentary
Components
Operators Only 1
Contact Blocks 2
Notes
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see
Pages
V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138
)
into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-D4-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
4 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Type Bezel Color Inscription Catalog Number
Non-interlocked Silver Black — M22-D4-S
Custom M22-D4-S-ETCH 3
Directional arrows M22-D4-S-X7
Black Black — M22S-D4-S
Custom M22S-D4-S-ETCH 3
Directional arrows M22S-D4-S-X7
Interlocked Silver Black — M22-DI4-S
Custom M22-DI4-S-ETCH 3
Directional arrows M22-DI4-S-X7
Black Black — M22S-DI4-S
Custom M22S-DI4-S-ETCH 3
Directional arrows M22S-DI4-S-X7
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 4Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
M22-D4-S-X7
M22-K10
V7-T1-106 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Joysticks
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 joystick line
comes in a wide variety of
options. From vertical and
horizontal two-position
switches to the maintained
four-position, these operators
fit a variety of applications. An
additional option, two switch
points, allows for eight
isolated circuits to be
actuated individually on a
single operator.
Features
●Available in four-position
and two-position
●Two switch point option
allows for two contacts in
each direction (up to eight
total contacts in one
operator)
●Capable of communicating
via ASi protocol with ASi
adapter modules
Protection Type
●IP66
Product Selection
Joysticks
Components
Operators 1
Note
1 Includes contact block mounting adapter.
Bezel
Number of
Directions
Switching
Position Catalog Number
Silver Two-position horizontal Momentary M22-WJ2H
Two switch points M22-WJ2H-2P
Two-position horizontal Maintained M22-WRJ2H
Two-position vertical Momentary M22-WJ2V
Two switch points M22-WJ2V-2P
Two-position vertical Maintained M22-WRJ2V
Four-position Momentary M22-WJ4
Two switch points M22-WJ4-2P
Four-position Maintained M22-WRJ4
Black Two-position horizontal Momentary M22S-WJ2H
Two switch points M22S-WJ2H-2P
Two-position horizontal Maintained M22S-WRJ2H
Two-position vertical Momentary M22S-WJ2V
Two switch points M22S-WJ2V-2P
Two-position vertical Maintained M22S-WRJ2V
Four-position Momentary M22S-WJ4
Two switch points M22S-WJ4-2P
Four-position Maintained M22S-WRJ4
M22-WJ2H
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-107
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Joysticks
Contact Blocks 12
Notes
1Includes contact block mounting adapter.
2For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
3All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Joystick with Double Contact
The joystick allows the control
of up to four directions of
movement on machines.
Different variants of the
joystick have two/four-
positions and other variants
have two settings for each
position. This allows, for
example, two-speed settings
for each direction. For this
application, a standard
normally open contact and an
early-make contact are fitted
in series. Momentary contact
and latching contact versions
are available.
max. 5mm
thickness
Note: Included
with operator.
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 3Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-K10
NO, early-make M22-K10P
NC M22-K01
NC, late-break M22-K01D
Spring-cage NO M22-CK10
NC M22-CK01
NC, late-break M22-CK01D
2NO M22-CK20
2NC M22-CK02
NO-NC M22-CK11
M22-K10
0
1
01
2
V7-T1-108 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Potentiometers
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 potentiometers allow for a ready to use operator in
a conveniently sized package. M22 potentiometers include the
resistive element, instead of just a knob, and a built in legend
surrounding the knob. The slim design, with integrated contacts
and the range of resistances available, allows for a quick install.
Features
●Scale markings on the knob allows the operator to be used
without an additional legend plate
●Oversized knob option available
●Slim design allows for space saving and simple wiring and
installation
Protection Type
●IP66
●NEMA 4X, 13
Product Selection
Potentiometers
Complete Devices
Acoustic Devices
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 acoustic devices are a simple and aesthetic way to
add a buzzer or indicator to any application. Fitting in the same
22 mm hole, these devices can be ordered in continuous or
pulsed tone and with or without the IP40 enclosure.
Features
●Continuous or pulsed tone available
●83dB/10 cm decibel rating
●Slim design allows for space saving and simple wiring and
installation
Protection Type
●IP40
●NEMA 12
Product Selection
Acoustic Devices
Complete Devices
Buzzers
Bezel
Resistance
Rk Catalog Number
Silver 1 M22-R1K
4.7 M22-R4K7
10 M22-R10K
47 M22-R47K
100 M22-R100K
470 M22-R470K
Black 1 M22S-R1K
4.7 M22S-R4K7
10 M22S-R10K
47 M22S-R47K
100 M22S-R100K
470 M22S-R470K
Oversized Knob
Silver 1 M22-R1K-RH
4.7 M22-R4K7-RH
10 M22-R10K-RH
47 M22-R47K-RH
100 M22-R100K-RH
470 M22-R470K-RH
Black 1 M22S-R1K-RH
4.7 M22S-R4K7-RH
10 M22S-R10K-RH
47 M22S-R47K-RH
100 M22S-R100K-RH
470 M22S-R470K-RH
M22-R10K
Description
Decibel
Rating Catalog Number
Indicator with buzzer,
black continuous tone,
18–30 Vac/Vdc
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-AMC-XAM
Indicator with buzzer,
black pulsed tone,
18–30 Vac/Vdc
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-AMC-XAMP
Description
Decibel
Rating Catalog Number
Indicator without
buzzer, black
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-AMC
Buzzer only,
continuous tone,
18–30 Vac/Vdc
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-XAM
Buzzer only, pulsed
tone, 18–30 Vac/Vdc
83 dB/
10 cm
M22-XAMP
M22-AMC-XAM
M22-XAM
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-109
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Through-the-Door Operators
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 through-the-door operators use the same familiar
flush pushbutton look with the addition of a cut-to-length rod
that allows for a simple reset operator.
Features
●Customizable laser engraving on all buttons
●More than five million mechanical operations
●Pushrod can be cut to length
Protection Type
●IP67, IP69K
●NEMA 4X, 13
Product Selection
Through-the-Door Operators 1
Complete Devices
Buttonless Operator
Button Plates 2
Bulkhead Interfaces
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 bulkhead interfaces are another unique offering in
the M22 line. This device allows for a secure connection to any
USB or RJ45 connected device within an enclosure or panel.
With an IP65 rating when closed, these devices are not only
convenient, but robust and reliable.
Features
●Convenient and safe way to make a data connection to inside
of the panel without opening the panel door
Protection Type
●IP65 when closed, IP20 when connected
Product Selection
Bulkhead Interfaces
USB Socket 45
RJ45 Socket 6
Notes
1The pushrod is 3.24 in long and can be cut to length.
2Any combination of plate color and inscription is available.
3Minimum order quantity of (10).
4USB interface is complete with 2-ft-long USB cable.
5USB interface is not UL Listed or CSA approved.
6RJ45 interface is an eight-wire connector.
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Blue — M22-DZ-B
RESET M22-DZ-B-GB14
M22-DZ-B-X6
Red — M22-DZ-R
M22-DZ-R-X0
STOP M22-DZ-R-GB0
Bezel Catalog Number
Silver M22-DZ-X
Color Inscription Catalog Number
Blue — M22-XD-B 3
RESET M22-XD-B-GB14
M22-XD-B-X6
Red — M22-XD-R 3
M22-XD-R-X0
STOP M22-XD-R-GB0
M22-DZ-B-X6
M22-DZ-X
M22-XD-B
Description Catalog Number
Used for USB connection
USB 2.0 Type A plug
IP65 when closed
IP20 when connected
M22-USB-SA
Description Catalog Number
Used for RJ45 Ethernet
connection IP65 when
closed IP20 when connected
M22-RJ45-SA
M22-USB-SA
M22-RJ45-SA
V7-T1-110 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
ASi Adapter Modules
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 ASi adapter modules add functionality to every
operator in the M22 line. These devices can be connected to any
operator that uses contact blocks or LED units. The simple snap-
on design allows for a quick integration of an entire application of
operators to a communicating network.
Features
●Allows compatible operators to communicate on an ASi
network
●Not only can the status of a contact block be read, but LEDs
can be illuminated by an ASi adapter
●ASi adapters simply clip on to the back of the contact blocks
and LEDs
●Insulation displacement connectors allow for installation of
adapters without any tools
●Two integrated LEDs indicate status of communications
Protection Type
●IP20
Product Selection
ASi Adapter Modules
Complete Devices
Description Catalog Number
ASi adapter module M22-ASI
ASi adapter module for
base mounting
M22-ASI-C
ASi adapter module for
E-stop
M22-ASI-S
ASi adapter module for
E-stop base mounting
M22-ASI-CS
M22-ASI
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-111
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Palm Switches
Product Description
Eaton’s M22 palm switches are an oversized button that mount
directly to an enclosure base. This allows for a standalone button
that can be mounted anywhere. The enclosure uses base-
mounted contact blocks, which allows for quick wiring and
mounting. The palm switches come in momentary or maintained
versions. As with other M22 operators, the palm switches are
available as complete devices, including the enclosure and
contact blocks or as modular components.
Features
●Oversized operator in black, red and yellow color options
●Button integrated directly into an enclosure
●Base mounting contact blocks allow for simple wiring and
installation
●More than one million mechanical operations on momentary
and 100,000 on maintained operators
Protection Type
●IP67, IP69K
●NEMA 4X, 13
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and
not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Palm Switches, Type 4X/13 Enclosure
Product Selection
Complete Devices
Operator, Base and Contact Blocks 1
Notes
1For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories,
Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
2All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Button
Color
Contact Block
Configuration 2Catalog Number
Momentary
Black 1NO-1NC FAK-S-KC11-I
Red 1NO-1NC FAK-R-KC11-I
Yellow 1NO-1NC FAK-Y-KC11-I
Maintained
Red NC FAK-R-V-KC01-IY
2NC FAK-R-V-KC02-IY
1NO-2NC FAK-R-V-KC12-IY
1NO-1NC FAK-R-V-KC11-IY
Operator Type
FAK = Palm switch
Contact Blocks
KC10 =NO
KC01 =NC
CKC10 =NO
CKC01 =NC
Operator Color
S =Black
R =Red
Y = Yellow
Enclosure
Top Color
I =Gray
IY = Yellow
FAK –S–KC10–I
FAK-S-KC11-I
FAK-R-V-KC01-IY
V7-T1-112 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Components
Operators Only
Palm Switch Enclosure Base
Contact Blocks 1
Notes
1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-113 to V7-T1-118.
2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
Type Button Color Catalog Number
Momentary Black FAK-S
Red FAK-R
Yellow FAK-Y
Maintained Red FAK-R-V-Y
Catalog Number
FAK-IU
Terminal
Type
Contact
Configuration 2Catalog Number
Screw NO M22-KC10
NC M22-KC01
Spring-cage NO M22-CKC10
NC M22-CKC01
FAK-S
FAK-IU
M22-KC10
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-113
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Accessories
Button Plates
Note
1 Refer to the Symbols Library,
(see
Pages
V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138
)
, for symbol image.
Color Inscription
Catalog Number
Flush Pushbutton
Catalog Number
Extended Pushbutton
Catalog Number
Mushroom Head Button
Black — M22-XD-S M22-XDH-S M22-XDP-S
White — M22-XD-W M22-XDH-W M22-XDP-W
Red — M22-XD-R M22-XDH-R M22-XDP-R
Green — M22-XD-G M22-XDH-G M22-XDP-G
Yellow — M22-XD-Y M22-XDH-Y M22-XDP-Y
Blue — M22-XD-B M22-XDH-B —
Black, white, red, green, yellow, blue — M22-XD-SWRGYB M22-XDH-SWRGYB —
Black, red, green — M22-XD-SRG M22-XDH-SRG —
Black Custom M22-XD-S-ETCH M22-XDH-S-ETCH M22-XDP-S-ETCH
White Custom M22-XD-W-ETCH M22-XDH-W-ETCH M22-XDP-W-ETCH
Red Custom M22-XD-R-ETCH M22-XDH-R-ETCH M22-XDP-R-ETCH
Green Custom M22-XD-G-ETCH M22-XDH-G-ETCH M22-XDP-G-ETCH
Yellow Custom M22-XD-Y-ETCH M22-XDH-Y-ETCH M22-XDP-Y-ETCH
Blue Custom M22-XD-B-ETCH M22-XDH-B-ETCH —
Black STOP M22-XD-S-GB0 M22-XDH-S-GB0 M22-XDP-S-GB0
Red STOP M22-XD-R-GB0 M22-XDH-R-GB0 M22-XDP-R-GB0
Black START M22-XD-S-GB1 M22-XDH-S-GB1 M22-XDP-S-GB1
White START M22-XD-W-GB1 M22-XDH-W-GB1 —
Green START M22-XD-G-GB1 M22-XDH-G-GB1 M22-XDP-G-GB1
Black CLOSE M22-XD-S-GB2 M22-XDH-S-GB2 —
Black UP M22-XD-S-GB3 M22-XDH-S-GB3 M22-XDP-S-GB3
Black DOWN M22-XD-S-GB4 M22-XDH-S-GB4 M22-XDP-S-GB4
Black OFF M22-XD-S-GB5 M22-XDH-S-GB5 M22-XDP-S-GB5
Red OFF M22-XD-R-GB5 M22-XDH-R-GB5 M22-XDP-R-GB5
Black ON M22-XD-S-GB6 M22-XDH-S-GB6 M22-XDP-S-GB6
Green ON M22-XD-G-GB6 M22-XDH-G-GB6 M22-XDP-G-GB6
Black TEST M22-XD-S-GB9 M22-XDH-S-GB9 —
Blue RESET M22-XD-B-GB14 M22-XDH-B-GB14 —
Black FORWARD M22-XD-S-GB15 M22-XDH-S-GB15 M22-XDP-S-GB15
Black REVERSE M22-XD-S-GB16 M22-XDH-S-GB16 M22-XDP-S-GB16
Black RAISE M22-XD-S-GB17 M22-XDH-S-GB17 —
Black LOWER M22-XD-S-GB18 M22-XDH-S-GB18 —
Black M22-XD-S-X0 M22-XDH-S-X0 M22-XDP-S-X0
Red M22-XD-R-X0 M22-XDH-R-X0 M22-XDP-R-X0
Green — — M22-XDP-G-X0
Black M22-XD-S-X1 M22-XDH-S-X1 M22-XDP-S-X1
White M22-XD-W-X1 M22-XDH-W-X1 —
Green M22-XD-G-X1 M22-XDH-G-X1 M22-XDP-G-X1
Black M22-XD-S-X2 M22-XDH-S-X2 —
Green M22-XD-G-X2 M22-XDH-G-X2 —
Black M22-XD-S-X4 M22-XDH-S-X4 M22-XDP-S-X4
Black M22-XD-S-X5 M22-XDH-S-X5 M22-XDP-S-X5
Blue M22-XD-B-X6 M22-XDH-B-X6 —
Black M22-XD-S-X7 M22-XDH-S-X7 M22-XDP-S-X7
Black M22-XD-S-X8 M22-XDH-S-X8 —
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X9 M22-XDH-S-X9 —
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X10 M22-XDH-S-X10 —
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X11 M22-XDH-S-X11 —
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X12 M22-XDH-S-X12 —
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X13 M22-XDH-S-X13 —
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X14 M22-XDH-S-X14 —
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X15 M22-XDH-S-X15 —
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X16 M22-XDH-S-X16 —
Black See 1 below M22-XD-S-X17 M22-XDH-S-X17 —
M22-XDH-R
M22-XDP-G
M22-XD-S
V7-T1-114 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Button Lenses
Mounting Adapters
Contact Blocks
Notes
1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact.
2 Not stackable.
Color Inscription
Catalog Number
Flush
Catalog Number
Extended Color Inscription
Catalog Number
Flush
Catalog Number
Extended
White — M22-XDL-W M22-XDLH-W Blue Custom M22-XDL-B-ETCH M22-XDLH-B-ETCH
Red — M22-XDL-R M22-XDLH-R Red STOP M22-XDL-R-GB0 M22-XDLH-R-GB0
Green — M22-XDL-G M22-XDLH-G Green START M22-XDL-G-GB1 M22-XDLH-G-GB1
Yellow — M22-XDL-Y M22-XDLH-Y Red OFF M22-XDL-R-GB5 M22-XDLH-R-GB5
Blue — M22-XDL-B M22-XDLH-B Green ON M22-XDL-G-GB6 M22-XDLH-G-GB6
White Custom M22-XDL-W-ETCH M22-XDLH-W-ETCH Blue RESET M22-XDL-B-GB14 M22-XDLH-B-GB14
Red Custom M22-XDL-R-ETCH M22-XDLH-R-ETCH Red M22-XDL-R-X0 M22-XDLH-R-X0
Green Custom M22-XDL-G-ETCH M22-XDLH-G-ETCH Green M22-XDL-G-X1 M22-XDLH-G-X1
Yellow Custom M22-XDL-Y-ETCH M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH Blue M22-XDL-B-X6 M22-XDLH-B-X6
Description Catalog Number
Contact block mounting adapter M22-A
Contact block mounting adapter,
four-position (for use with
four-way pushbuttons, joysticks
and four-position selector switches
only).
M22-A4
Allows mounting of M22 pushbuttons
to LS-Titan limit switch bodies
(for the full LS-Titan catalog section,
see PG08301004E).
M22-LS
Mounting
Location Terminal Type
Contact
Configuration 1
Package
Qty. Catalog Number
Front Screw NO 1 M22-K10
NO 25 M22-K10-B25
NO 100 M22-K10-B100
NO, early-make 1 M22-K10P
NC 1 M22-K01
NC 25 M22-K01-B25
NC 100 M22-K01-B100
NC, late-break 1 M22-K01D
SMCB, NC 1 M22-K01SMC10
SMCB, 2NC 1 M22-K02SMC10
Base NO 1 M22-KC10
NO 25 M22-KC10-B25
NO 100 M22-KC10-B100
NC 1 M22-KC01
NC 25 M22-KC01-B25
NC 100 M22-KC01-B100
SMCB, NC 1 M22-KC01SMC10
SMCB, 2NC 1 M22-KC02SMC10
Front Spring-cage NO 1 M22-CK10
NC 1 M22-CK01
NC, late-break 1 M22-CK01D
2NO 21M22-CK20
2NC 21M22-CK02
NO-NC 21M22-CK11
Base NO 1 M22-CKC10
NC 1 M22-CKC01
M22-XDLH-W
M22-XDL-G
M22-A
M22-A4
M22-LS
M22-K10
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-115
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Light Units
LED Resistor and Test Elements
Notes
1 Resistor units to be used with 12–30V light units.
2 Refer to IL04716002E for use of resistor elements in series for higher DC voltage.
Terminal Type
Mounting
Location LED Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number
Screw Front White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LED-W
Red M22-LED-R
Green M22-LED-G
Blue M22-LED-B
White 85–264 Vac M22-LED230-W
Red M22-LED230-R
Green M22-LED230-G
Blue M22-LED230-B
White 207–264 Vac M22-LED230H-W
Red M22-LED230H-R
Green M22-LED230H-G
Blue M22-LED230H-B
Base White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LEDC-W
Red M22-LEDC-R
Green M22-LEDC-G
Blue M22-LEDC-B
White 85–264 Vac M22-LEDC230-W
Red M22-LEDC230-R
Green M22-LEDC230-G
Blue M22-LEDC230-B
White 207–264 Vac M22-LEDC230H-W
Red M22-LEDC230H-R
Green M22-LEDC230H-G
Blue M22-LEDC230H-B
Spring-cage Front White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-CLED-W
Red M22-CLED-R
Green M22-CLED-G
Blue M22-CLED-B
White 85–264 Vac M22-CLED230-W
Red M22-CLED230-R
Green M22-CLED230-G
Blue M22-CLED230-B
Base White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-CLEDC-W
Red M22-CLEDC-R
Green M22-CLEDC-G
Blue M22-CLEDC-B
White 85–264 Vac M22-CLEDC230-W
Red M22-CLEDC230-R
Green M22-CLEDC230-G
Blue M22-CLEDC230-B
Terminal Type
Mounting
Location
Element
Type Voltage Catalog Number
Screw Front Resistor 12 42–60 Vac/Vdc M22-XLED60
220 Vdc M22-XLED220
Test 12–240 Vac/Vdc M22-XLED-T
85–264 Vac M22-XLED230-T
M22-LED-W
M22-XLED60
V7-T1-116 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Legend Plate Holders and Inserts, Pushbuttons and Double Pushbuttons 2
Notes
1 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see
Pages
V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138
)
into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
2 Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13.
Example
To order a legend plate for a pushbutton with non-standard markings (FORWARD):
1. Select legend plate holder—M22S-ST-X.
2. Select legend plate insert—M22-XST-ETCH.
3. Select FORWARD from the Symbols Library, Pages V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138, identified by GB15 suffix.
4. Indicate on the order form in the order notes—suffix GB15, line item # ___ .
Description Inscription Catalog Number
Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert,
for pushbuttons
—M22S-ST-X
Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert,
for double pushbuttons
—M22S-STDD-X
Legend plate insert — M22-XST
Custom M22-XST-ETCH 1
STOP M22-XST-GB0
START M22-XST-GB1
OFF M22-XST-GB5
ON M22-XST-GB6
RUN M22-XST-GB7
FAULT M22-XST-GB8
OFF ON M22-XST-GB10
MAN. AUTO M22-XST-GB11
MAN. O AUTO M22-XST-GB12
HAND AUTO M22-XST-D11
HAND O AUTO M22-XST-D12
1M22-XST-X52
2M22-XST-X53
O I M22-XST-X88
O - I M22-XST-X89
I O II M22-XST-X93
M22S-ST-X
M22-XST-GB0
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-117
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Legend Plates, Complete 2
Notes
1 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library
(see
Pages
V7-T1-131 to V7-T1-138
)
into the Order Notes.
For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_.
2 Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13.
Description Inscription Catalog Number
For use with pushbuttons
and indicating lights
Legend plate holder with insert STOP M22S-ST-GB0
START M22S-ST-GB1
OFF M22S-ST-GB5
ON M22S-ST-GB6
RUN M22S-ST-GB7
FAULT M22S-ST-GB8
1M22S-ST-X52
2M22S-ST-X53
Selector switches — OFF ON M22S-ST-GB10
MAN. AUTO M22S-ST-GB11
MAN. O AUTO M22S-ST-GB12
HAND AUTO M22S-ST-D11
HAND O AUTO M22S-ST-D12
O I M22S-ST-X88
O - I M22S-ST-X89
I O II M22S-ST-X93
Emergency-stop operators Rectangular yellow legend plate — M22-XZK
Custom M22-XZK-ETCH 1
EMERGENCY-STOP M22-XZK-GB99
Square yellow legend plate — M22-XYK
—M22-XYK-ETCH 1
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language M22-XYK1
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XYK5
Round yellow legend plate, 90 mm — M22-XAK
Custom M22-XAK-ETCH 1
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language M22-XAK1
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XAK5
Round yellow legend plate, 60 mm — M22-XBK
Custom M22-XBK-ETCH 1
EMERGENCY-STOP four-language M22-XBK1
EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XBK5
Four-way pushbutton,
joystick and four-position
selector switches
Silver square legend plate — M22-XCK
Custom M22-XCK-ETCH 1
Four directional arrows M22-XCK1
0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 M22-XCK2
Two directional arrows M22-XCK3
M22S-ST-GB0
M22-XZK
M22-XBK1
M22-XCK1
M22-XYK
V7-T1-118 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Surface Mounting Enclosures 1
Flush Mounting Plates, Aluminum
Shrouds, Plastic
Selector Switch Accessories
Notes
1Requires use of base mounted contact blocks.
2Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated
three-position selector switches only.
3Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position.
Description Catalog Number
Yellow top, black base for
emergency-stop operators
M22-IY1-PG
One-element enclosure M22-I1-PG
Two-element enclosure M22-I2-PG
Three-element enclosure M22-I3-PG
Four-element enclosure M22-I4-PG
Six-element enclosure M22-I6-PG
M20 connecting screw M22-XI
M20 cord grip V-M20
Finish Rating Catalog Number
One Hole
Yellow paint for
emergency-stop
operators
—M22-EY1
Gray anodized IP65 M22-E1
Tw o H o l e s
Gray anodized IP65 M22-E2
Three Holes
Gray anodized IP65 M22-E3
Four Holes
Gray anodized IP65 M22-E4
Five Holes
Gray anodized IP65 M22-E5
Six Holes
Anodized IP40 M22-E6
Description Rating Catalog Number
One-element IP55 M22-H1
Two-element IP55 M22-H2
Three-element IP55 M22-H3
Four-element IP40 M22-H4
Five-element IP40 M22-H5
Six-element IP40 M22-H6
Mounting plate — M22-XE5
Plaster keys for
flush mounting
—M22-UPE
M22-IY1-PG
M22-IY-PG
M22-EY1
M22-H1
Description Catalog Number
Plunger bridge 2M22-XW
Key cover M22-XWS
Key withdraw adapter 3M22-XC-R
Coding adapter M22-XC-Y
Guard ring M22-XGWK
M22-XC-Y
M22-XWS
M22-XC-R
M22-XW
M22-XGWK
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-119
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Emergency Stop Operator Accessories
Blanking Plugs
Mounting Accessories
Protective Diaphragm
Dust Covers
Kits
Description Voltage Catalog Number
Yellow guard ring — M22-XGPV
Gray guard ring — M22G-XGPV
Rectangular guard — M22-MGTA
Sealing shroud — M22-PL-PV
Illuminated ring 24 Vac/Vdc M22-XPV60-Y-24
120 Vac M22-XPV60-Y-120
230 Vac M22-XPV60-Y-230
Color Catalog Number
Gray M22-B
Black M22S-B
M22-XGPV
M22G-XGPV
M22-PL-PV
M22-XPV60-Y-120
M22-MGTA
M22-B
Description Catalog Number
Telescopic clip with top-hat rail M22-TC
Telescopic clip M22-TA
Telescopic clip extension M22-TCV
DIN rail mounting adapter M22-IVS
Mounting ring M22-GR
Mounting ring tool M22-MS
Adapter ring set for
30 mm holes
M22S-R30
For Use with … Catalog Number
Flush pushbuttons and
indicating lights
M22-T-D
Double pushbuttons M22-T-DD
Description Catalog Number
Contact block dust cover M22-XKDP
Operator dust cover,
max three contact blocks
M22-ADC
Operator dust cover,
max four contact blocks
M22-ADC4
Description Catalog Number
Includes one each: M22-XW,
M22-XC-R, M22-XC-Y, M22S-B,
M22-A, M22-XD-SWRGYB
M22-KT1
M22-TC and M22-TA
M22-IVS
M22-GR
M22-MS
M22S-R30
M22-T-D and
M22-T-DD
M22-ADC4
V7-T1-120 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Coding Adapter Guide
Selector Switches
Two-Position Selector Switch
Three-Position Selector Switch
Two-Position Key-Operated Selector Switch
Three-Position Key-Operated Selector Switch
Top (B) Bottom (A) Catalog Number Function
M22(S)-W(L)(K) Momentary
M22(S)-WR(L)(K) Maintained
Top (B) Bottom (A) Catalog Number
Function
Left Right
M22(S)-W(L)(K)3 Momentary Momentary
M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3 Maintained Maintained
M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3-1 Maintained Momentary
M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3-2 Momentary Maintained
Top (B) Bottom (A) Catalog Number
Center
Key Withdraw
Right
Function Key Withdraw
M22(S)-WS Yes Momentary No
M22(S)-WRS Yes Maintained Yes
M22(S)-WRS-A1 Yes Maintained No
Top (B) Bottom (A) Catalog Number
Left
Function Key Withdraw
Center
Key Withdraw
Right
Function Key Withdraw
M22(S)-WS3 Momentary No Yes Momentary No
M22(S)-WRS3 Maintained Yes Yes Maintained Yes
M22(S)-WRS3-A1 Maintained No Yes Maintained No
M22(S)-WRS3-A2 Maintained Yes Yes Maintained No
M22(S)-WRS3-A3 Maintained No Yes Maintained Yes
M22(S)-WRS3-A4 Maintained Yes Yes Momentary No
M22(S)-WRS3-A5 Maintained No Yes Momentary No
M22(S)-WRS3-A6 Momentary No Yes Maintained Yes
M22(S)-WRS3-A7 Momentary No Yes Maintained No
Top ( B )
Bottom (A)
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-121
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Technical Data and Specifications
Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights, Selector Switches and Emergency-Stop Operators
Description
Momentary
Pushbuttons
Maintained
Pushbuttons
Indicating Lights,
Buzzers and
Potentiometers
Emergency-Stop
Operators
Selector
Switches
Key-Operated
Operators
Double
Pushbuttons
General
Standards IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #340491
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
Lifespan, mechanical Operations x 106>5 >1 — >0.1 >0.1 >0.1 >0.2
Operating frequency Operations/h >3600 >1800 — >600 >2000 >100 >3600
Actuating force n >5>5— >50 – — >5
Operating torque
(screw terminals)
Nm——— —>0.3 >0.5 —
Protection Type
IP IP67, IP69K IP67, IP69K Indicating lights: IP67, 69K
Buzzers: IP40
Potentiometers: IP66
IP67, IP69K IP66 IP66 IP66
UL type 4X, 13 4X, 13 Indicating lights: 4X/13
Buzzers: 12
Potentiometers: 4X/13
4X, 13 4X, 13 4X, 13 4X, 13
Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, according to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclical to IEC 60068-2-30
Ambient temperature,
operating
°F
(°C)
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
–13 to 158
(–25 to 70)
Mounting position As required As required As required As required As required As required As required
Mechanical shock
resistance to
IEC 60068-2-27
shock duration 11 ms,
half-sinusoidal
g >30 >30 >30 >50 >30 >30 >30
Terminal Capacities
Solid AWG——20-16 ————
mm2— 0.5–1.5 — —
Stranded AWG——20-16 ————
mm2— 0.5–1.5 — —
Contacts
Rated impulse withstand
voltage
Uimp Vac——4000 ————
Rated insulation voltage UiV ——2500 ————
Overvoltage category/
pollution degree
— — III/3 ————
V7-T1-122 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Contact Blocks and Light Units
Description
Contact
Blocks
LED
Light Units
General
Standards IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
UL #E29184
Lifespan, mechanical Operations x 106>5 —
Operating frequency Operations/h >3600 —
Actuating force n >5—
Operating torque (screw terminals) Nm <0.8 —
Protection Type
IP IP20 IP20
UL type — —
Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, according to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclical to IEC 60068-2-30
Ambient temperature, operating °F (°C) –13 to 158 (–25 to 70) –13 to 158 (–25 to 70)
Mounting position As required As required
Mechanical shock resistance to
IEC 60068-2-27 shock duration
11 ms, half-sinusoidal
g>30 >30
Terminal Capacities
Solid AWG 18–14 18–14
mm20.75–2.5 0.75–2.5
Stranded AWG 20–14 20–14
mm20.5–2.5 0.5–2.5
Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Vac 6000 6000
Rated insulation voltage UiV 500 500
Overvoltage category/
pollution degree
III/3 III/3
NEMA contact ratings A600, Q300 —
Current draw — 5–15 mA
Control Circuit Reliability
at 24 Vdc/5 mA HFFault probability <10-7, <1 fault in 107operations —
at 5 Vdc/1 mA HFFault probability <5 x 10-6, <1 fault in 5 x 106 operations —
Max. Short-Circuit Protective Device
Fuse gG/gL A 10 —
Switching Capacity
Rated Operational Current
AC-15
115V IeA6 —
230V IeA6 —
400V IeA4 —
500V IeA2 —
DC-13
24V IeA3 —
42V IeA1.7 —
60V IeA1.2 —
110V IeA0.6 —
220V IeA0.3 —
Lifespan, Electrical
AC-15
230V/0.5A Operations x 1061.6 —
230V/1.0A Operations x 1061—
230V/3.0A Operations x 1060.7 —
DV-13
12V/2.8A Operations x 1061.2 —
Contact Element Note: >200 Vac/60 Hz: –25/55°C
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-123
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Palm Switches
ASi Adapter Modules
Description Momentary Maintained FAK-R-V-KC11-I
General
Standards IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
IEC/EN 60947
VDE 0660
Lifespan, mechanical Operations x 106>1 >0.1 >0.1
Operating frequency Operations/h >3600 >600 >600
Actuating force n 20–40 40–60 15–25
Operating torque Nm — — —
Degree of protection, IEC/EN 60529 IP IP67, IP69K IP67, IP69K IP65
UL Type 4X, 13 4X, 13 4X, 13
Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60068-2-30
Ambient temperature, operating °F (°C) –73 to 104 (–25 to 40) –73 to 104 (–25 to 40) –73 to 104 (–25 to 40)
Mounting position As required
Mechanical shock resistance to
IEC 60068-2-27
shock duration 11 ms, half-sinusoidal
g >15 >15 >15
Description M22-ASI M22-ASI-C
General
Standards IEC/EN 60947,
DIN EN 50295
IEC/EN 60947,
DIN EN 50295
Radio interference suppression EN 55011,
EN 55022
EN 55011,
EN 55022
Limit value class — —
Protection type IP20 IP00
Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78, cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30
Ambient temperature, operating °F (°C) –13 to 131 (–25 to 55) –13 to 131 (–25 to 55)
Shock resistance shock duration 11 ms g >30 >30
Vibration to IEC 60068-2-27
(amplitude 1 mm)
Hz — —
Dimensions mm — —
Weight kg — —
Mounting Front mounting Front mounting
Mounting position As required As required
Power Supply
Rated voltage to AS-interface
specification
Vdc 26.5–31.6 26.5–31.6
Connection technique Yellow plug-in terminal as insulation
piercing terminal
Two cables onboard
Power supply Completely from the AS-interface cable
Addressing Via connection to AS-interface cable
Total power consumption of
the AS-interface
mA >40 >40
AS-interface — —
Rated operational current at full load mA — —
Rated operational current when idle
(no I, O set)
mA — —
Status LEDs POWER AS-interface cable:
green LED on the rear side of the element
ERROR AS-interface, AS-interface master
failure: red LED on the rear side of the element
POWER AS-interface cable:
green LED on the board
ERROR AS-interface, AS-interface master
failure: red LED on the board
V7-T1-124 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
ASi-S Adapter Modules
Description M22-ASI-S M22-ASI-CS
Inputs
Inputs, protected against
short-circuit
Number Two (normally 22V/5 mA) Two (normally 22V/5 mA)
Voltage range Vdc — —
Rated current per input mA — —
High signal level V — —
Low signal mA — —
Length of connecting cables cm — —
Outputs
Outputs, protected against
short-circuit
Number One (normally 19V/8 mA) One (normally 19V/8 mA)
Voltage range Vdc — —
Max. Current Carrying Capacity
All outputs — —
S three external outputs — —
Length of connecting cables cm — —
Profile S-3.A.E S-3.A.E
Specification 2.1 2.1
Addresses Number 62 62
Emergency-Stop Circuits
Connection of the AS-interface line Yellow plug terminal with insulation
piercing
Two cables on the circuit board
Power supply Complete from AS-interface,
cable 26.5–31.6 Vdc
Complete from AS-interface,
cable 26.5–31.6 Vdc
Fixing Front mounted Base mounted
Addressing Via AS-interface cable Via AS-interface cable
Max. total current A 45 mA 45 mA
Ambient temperature, operating °F (°C) –13 to 131 (–25 to 55) –13 to 131 (–25 to 55)
Shock resistance 30g/11 ms as per IEC 60068-2-27 30g/11 ms as per IEC 60068-2-27
Protection type IP20 IP00
Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78,
cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30
Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78,
cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30
Mounting position As required As required
Standards EN 50178
EN 50 295
EN 50178
EN 50 295
Inputs Two-channel input (22V/5 mA)
(moduled by code sequence)
(two break contact sets M22-K01)
Two-channel input (22V/5 mA)
(moduled by code sequence)
(two break contact sets M22-K01)
Outputs One output, typically 19V/8 mA,
short-circuit proof
One output, typically 19V/8 mA,
short-circuit proof
Status Displays
Power, AS-interface cable Green LED on the back Green LED on the back
AS-interface error,
AS-interface master failure
Red LED on the back Red LED on the back
Profile S-7.B.E S-7.B.E
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-125
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Operators and Indicating Lights
Pushbuttons Selector Switches Operators
Key-Operated Selector Switches
Indicating Light
0.75 (19)
M22 x 0.06 (1.5)
0.39 (10)
Ø 1.17 (29.7)
Ø 1.16 (29.5)
0.04 (1)–0.24 (6)
1.17 (29.7)
0.39 (10)
0.65 (16.4)
M22…-D-_ M22…-DH-_
M22-DG(L)-_ M22…-DD-_
Ø1.17 (29.7)
0.65 (16.5)
0.52 (13.2)
2.15 (54.7)
M22-D, Base Mounted
>0.01 (0.3)
1.78 (45.3)
0.04 (1)
1.47 (37.2)
0.93 (23.7) 1.06 (26.9)
M22…-W-_ M22…-WL-_
1.88 (47.75)
Ø1.17 (29.7)
0.81 (20.6)
M22…-W(R)S-_
0.45 (11.5)
M22-L_
V7-T1-126 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Mushroom Head Pushbutton
Emergency-Stop Operators
Potentiometer
Contact Block Mounting Adapter
Front Mounted Centering Adapter
Front Mounted Indicating Light
Pushbutton, Complete Devices
0.39 (10)
0.65 (16.4)
M22…-DL-_ M22…-DLH_
M22…-DP-_
Ø1.44 (36.5)
0.93 (23.6)
2.96 (75.1)
1.89 (47.9)
1.5 (38)
1.38 (35)
M22-PV_
M22S-PV_
M22-PVL_
M22-PVS_
1.15 (29.2) 1.3 (32.9)
M22(S)-R_
1.73 (44)
1.77 (45)
1.18 (30)
0.76 (19.3)
0.85 (21.5)
M22-A_ M22S-A…
1.18 (30) 0.7 (17.8)
0.84 (21.4)
M22-ZA
1.18 (30) 1.77 (45)
1.46 (37)
0.39 (10)
0.39 (10)
0.39 (10)
1.18 (30)
2.8 (71)
1.77 (45)
A
1 x M22-K_ 2 x M22-K_ 1 x M22-CK_ 2 x M22-CK_
A1.46 (37.2) 1.46 (37.2) 1.54 (39.0) 1.54 (39.0)
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
DIN-Rail Mounting Adapter
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights with M22-TC Telescopic
Clip and M22-TVC Extension
Palm Switches
Front Mounted Mounting Plate
Base Mounted Surface Mounting Enclosure
0.88 (22.4)
2.23 (56.7) 0.12 (3.1)
1.39 (35.2)
0.18 (4.5 (M4))
2.15 (54.5)
2.54 (64.5)
M22-D...
M22-L...
M22-W...
M22-P...
0.88 (22.4)
AB
F
G
E
C
D
H
1Top-hat rail to IEC/EN 60715.
AB CDEFGH
1.77
(45)
2.36–3.94
(60–100)
0.79
(20)
0.79
(20)
0.18
(4.5)
0.39
(10)
154
(39)
0.39
(10)
M22-D_
M22-L_
M22-W_
M22-P_
M22-TC M22-TCV
1
L-...
1.36 (34.5)
1.42 (36)
M5 x 20
2.56 (65)
1.57 (40)
0.71 (18)
3.98 (101)
Ø94
0.26 (6.5) – 0.3 (7.5)
3.35 (85)
FAK_
13 x M20 lateral, 1 x M16 in bottom.
1
1.42 (36)
0.12 (3)
0.1 (2.5)
4 x M4 x 16
2.2 (56)
e
a1
1.3 (33)
2.83 (72)
M22-E_
Catalog
Number a1 e
Catalog
Number a1 e
M22-E(Y) 12.83 (72) 2.21 (56) M22-E4 6.73 (171) 6.10 (155)
M22-E2 4.13 (105) 3.50 (89) M22-E5 8.03 (204) 7.40 (188)
M22-E3 5.43 (138) 4.80 (122) M22-E6 9.33 (237) 8.70 (221)
1
3.15 (80)
1.73 (44)
M20
a
b
1.3 (33)
1.89 (48)
2.2 (56)
M20/M25
eM4
2.62 (66.5)
0.7 (17.8)
M20 M20
M20
M22-I_
Catalog
Number
Mounting
LocationsabeCable Entries
M22-I(Y)1 12.83
(72.0)
1.68
(42.6)
2.30
(58.5)
2 x M16 3 x M20 2 x M25
M22-I2 24.72
(120.0)
3.37
(85.6)
4.19
(106.5)
2 x M20 3 x M20 2 x M25
M22-I3 36.02
(153.0)
4.67
(118.6)
5.49
(139.5)
2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20
M22-I4 47.32
(186.0)
5.97
(151.6)
6.79
(172.5)
2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20
M22-I6 69.92
(252.0)
8.57
(217.6)
9.39
(238.5)
2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20
V7-T1-128 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Covers
Connecting Screw
Shroud with Plaster Keys
Legend Plates
Mounting Hole with Lug Slot
a2
M20 M20 M20
2.32 (59)
3.74 (95)
M22-H_
Catalog
Number a2 Cable Entry Style
M22-H1 1.65 (42) 3 x M20 One-piece
M22-H2 2.95 (75) 4 x M20
M22-H3 4.25 (108) 4 x M20
M22-H4 5.55 (141) 4 x M20 Split
M22-H5 6.85 (174) 5 x M20
M22-HE6 8.15 (207) 6 x M20
0.04 (1)
M22-XI
1Gasket.
1
a2 +1.65 (42)
a2 +1.26 (32)
0.16 (4)
2.2 (56)
2.76 (70)
a2
M22-H...
M22-H...
M22-UPE
0.31 (8)
0.31 (8)
1.02 (26)
e
e + 0.51 (13)
0.35 (9)
0.35 (9)
M22-UPE
2Box for closing off when plastering.
3Plaster thickness less than 8 mm.
4Plaster thickness more than 8 mm
1
23
1.18 (30)
0.59 (15)
1.38 (35)
1.18 (30)
1.08 (27.5) 1.85 (47)
M22S-ST-_ M22S-STDD-X
0.13 (3.2)
0.88 (22.3)
0.95 (24.1)
0.04 (1)–0.24 (6)
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-129
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Grid Dimension to IEC/EN 60947
Grid Dimension for Various Combinations
Pushbutton Diaphragm
Grid Dimension for M22-DD_
Grid Dimension for M22-DDL_
Emergency Stop Sealing Cover
1.18 (30)
1.97 (50)
A
B
Pushbutton diaphragm cannot be combined with label mount.
Catalog Number A >B >
M22(S)-_(IEC/EN 60947) 1.18 (30.0) 1.97 (50.0)
RMQ-Titan min. 1.18 (30.0) 1.58 (40.0)
M22-D_ + M22-T-D 1.30 (33.0) 1.58 (40.0)
M22-D(R)P_ 1.50 (38.0) 1.58 (40.0)
M22-PV_ 1.50 (38.0) 1.58 (40.0)
M22-PV(L) + M22-PL-PV 1.89 (48.0) 2.20 (56.0)
M22-PV(L)(S_) + M22-D_ 1.30 (33.0) 1.58 (40.0)
M22-DDL_ 1.18 (30.0) 2.17 (55.0)
M22-DDL_ + M22-T-DD 1.30 (33.0) 2.28 (58.0)
M22-ST_ 1.18 (30.0) 1.97 (50.0)
M22-STDD_ 1.18 (30.0) 2.95 (75.0)
M22-CK_ 1.18 (30.0) 1.77 (45.0)
M22-CLED_ 1.18 (30.0) 1.77 (45.0)
M22-XAK_ 3.54 (90.0) 3.54 (90.0)
M22-XZK_ 1.30 (33.0) 2.04 (52.0)
M22-XBK_ 2.36 (60.0) 2.36 (60.0)
M22-XYK_ 1.97 (50.0) 1.97 (50.0)
M22-D4 2.17 (55.0) 2.17 (55.0)
M22-WR…4 1.97 (50.0) 1.97 (50.0)
M22-W…J4 1.97 (50.0) 1.97 (50.0)
1.18 (30)
2.95 (75)
2.48 (63)
b 1.73 (44)
b 2.28 (58)
a 1.18 (30)
Pushbutton
Diaphragm
M22-T-DD 1
1Pushbutton diaphragm cannot be combined with label mount.
1.26 (32)
1.89 (48)
0.41 (10.4) 2.03 (51.6)
M22-PL-PV
V7-T1-130 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Blanking Plugs
Pushbutton Diaphragm
Guard Ring
Key Cover
Emergency Stop Legend Plate
Joystick
Four-Way Pushbutton
1.16 (29.5)
M22…B-_
1.3 (33)
0.67 (17)
1.3 (33)
0.67 (17)
0.91 (23)
2.28 (58)
M22-T-D M22-T-D
Ø 1.42 (36)
0.98 (25)
3.07 (78)
2.68 (68)
R35 R41
1.97 (50)
M22-XGWK M22-XGPV
0.47 (12)
0.2 (5)
Ø 0.98 (25)
0.79 (20)
M22-XWS
3.54 (90)
d= 0.03 (0.8)
1.3 (33)
0.65 (16.5)
1.97 (50)
M22-XAK_ M22-X(Y)ZK_
0.13 (3.2)
0.49 (12.5)
Ø 2.36 (60)
Ø 0.89 (22.5)
1.97 (50)
1.97 (50)
M22-XBK-_ M22-XYK-_
1.18 (30)
2.95 (75)
M22…W…J_
2.17 (55)
0.45 (11.5)
M22…-D…4-_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-131
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Symbols Library
Instructions for Ordering Laser Inscriptions
1. Identify part number to be inscribed.
2. Pick symbol from library and identify suffix code associated with the symbol.
3. Order part number already listed in the catalog with -ETCH suffix.
4. When placing an order by fax or Vistaline on the Web, reference order item number and
indicate appropriate suffix code.
Example
To order a green flush button plate with the inscription AUTO HAND:
Order Catalog Number: M22-XD-G-ETCH (see Page V7-T1-55).
AUTO HAND inscription is found on Page V7-T1-135 in the Symbols Library, suffix code is X91.
In the order notes, reference item number and suffix X91.
Letter height 3 mm: max three lines, max. 12 characters per line.
Letter height 5 mm: max. two lines, max. eight characters per line.
Note: For symbols or text not found in the Symbols Library, please contact the
Eaton Technical Resource Center at 1-877-ETN CARE (386-2273) or TRC@eaton.com.
V7-T1-132 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Letter Height Specifications: < five characters; letter height = 0.197 in (5 mm). > five characters; letter height = 0.118 in (3 mm).
Text—English
Text—German
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
GB0
GB1
GB2
GB3
GB4
GB5
GB6
GB7
GB8
GB9
GB10
GB11
GB12
GB14
GB15
GB16
GB17
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
GB18
GB19
GB20
GB21
GB22
GB23
GB24
GB25
GB26
GB27
GB32
GB62
GB63
GB64
GB65
GB66
GB99
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
D25
D28
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
D36
D37
D38
D39
D40
D41
D42
D43
D44
D72
D73
D74
D75
D99
D100
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-133
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Letter Height Specifications: < five characters; letter height = 0.197 in (5 mm). > five characters; letter height = 0.118 in (3 mm).
Text—French
Text—Swedish
Symbols
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F67
F68
F99
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
S0
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S21
S22
S23
S32
S45
S46
S99
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
X10
X11
X12
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X13
X14
X15
X16
X17
X18
X19
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
V7-T1-134 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X26
X27
X28
X29
X30
X31
X32
X33
X34
X35
X36
X37
X38
X39
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X40
X41
X42
X43
X44
X45
X46
X47
X48
X49
X50
X51
X52
X53
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X54
X55
X56
X57
X58
X59
X60
X61
X62
X63
X64
X65
X66
X67
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X68
X69
X70
X71
X72
X73
X74
X75
X76
X77
X78
X79
X80
X81
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-135
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X82
X83
X88
X89
X90
X91
X92
X93
X94
X95
X100
X101
X102
X103
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X104
X105
X106
X107
X108
X109
X110
X111
X112
X113
X114
X115
X116
X117
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X118
X119
X120
X121
X122
X123
X124
X125
X126
X127
X128
X129
X130
X131
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X132
X133
X134
X135
X136
X137
X138
X139
X140
X141
X142
X143
X144
X145
V7-T1-136 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X146
X147
X148
X149
X150
X151
X152
X153
X154
X155
X156
X157
X158
X159
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X160
X161
X162
X163
X164
X165
X166
X167
X168
X169
X170
X171
X172
X173
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X174
X175
X176
X177
X178
X179
X180
X181
X182
X183
X184
X185
X186
X187
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X188
X189
X190
X191
X192
X193
X194
X195
X196
X197
X198
X199
X200
X201
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-137
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X202
X203
X204
X205
X206
X207
X208
X209
X210
X211
X212
X213
X214
X215
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X216
X217
X218
X219
X220
X221
X222
X223
X224
X225
X226
X227
X228
X229
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X230
X231
X232
X233
X234
X235
X236
X237
X238
X239
X240
X241
X242
X243
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X244
X245
X246
X247
X248
X249
X250
X251
X252
X253
X254
X255
X256
X257
V7-T1-138 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X258
X259
X260
X261
X262
X263
X264
Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line;
10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line.
Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line.
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X265
X266
X267
X268
X269
X270
X271
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X272
X273
X274
X275
X276
X277
X278
Inscription
Catalog
Number Suffix
X279
X280
X281
X282
X283
X284
X285
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-139
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Contents
Description Page
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-141
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-142
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-151
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-153
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-156
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-161
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-163
Product Overview
Product Description
Eaton’s C22 compact
pushbutton line offers an
industry leading array of
functional, attractive, and
ergonomically designed
“all-in-one” illuminated and
non-illuminated pushbuttons,
selector switches, emergency
stops and indicating lights.
The complete illuminated line
is only offered in LED light
units to ensure high-quality
brightness and up to 100,000
hours of LED illumination.
C22 operators are available
with either a silver or black
bezel and share the exact
same front of the panel
look and feel as Eaton’s
M22 line. The C22’s compact,
“all-in-one” design with the
contact block(s) and
operators integral provides
the user with a simple solution.
Wide Product Breadth
●In addition to the standard
compact offering of
indicating lights and
pushbuttons, Eaton’s
C22 offers keyed and
non-keyed operators
and emergency stops
●Hundreds of styles with
standard laser etch
markings with the ability
to use custom M22 laser
etched buttons in
conjunction with C22
buttonless operators
LED Indicators
●100,000 hours of life
in high-vibration
environments
●Lenses specifically
designed for LED
illumination
Rugged Design
●Pushbuttons (momentary)
rated for 5 million
mechanical operations
and selector switches
(non-keyed) rated for
1 million mechanical
operations
●All components have IP65
rating, and some carry
IP67 and IP69K for wash-
down environment
Standards and Certifications
All operators are IEC/EN
60947 VDE 0660, UL Listed,
and CSA Certified.
All operators carry an IP65,
IP66, IP67 or IP69K rating.
All products carry ratings of
NEMA 1, 3R, 4X, 12 and 13
V7-T1-140 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Features
●Field convertible
maintained pushbuttons
from maintained to
momentary
●Field convertible selector
switches from momentary
to maintained operation
and vice versa
●LED offering only for all
illuminated operators
●Laser engraved
pushbuttons and lenses
●Heavy-duty construction
with a minimum of IP65
and UL NEMA® Type 4X/13
on front of panel operators.
Many operators even carry
IP67 and IP69K, for the
toughest applications
●Silver or black colored
nylon bezels
●Notched hole mounting
with anti-rotation tab and
central nut mounting on
each operator
●Pushbuttons (momentary)
rated for 5 million
mechanical operations
and selector switches
(non-keyed) rated for
1 million mechanical
operations
●Unique compact offerings,
including keyed and non-
keyed operators and
emergency stops
Benefits
●Compact, “all-in-one”
operator and contact block
design simplifies product
selection, inventory, and
installation
●Field convertibility of
pushbuttons and selector
switches helps distributors
and customers reduce
inventory and increase
functionality
●LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
●Plastic construction is
corrosion resistant
●Operators are designed
for rugged environments,
ideal for wash-down
applications (reference
each operator’s IP ratings
for ingress protection
definition)
●Anti-rotation tab saves
installation time and
prevents operator rotation
●High mechanical and
electrical life allows for
use in tough and
challenging applications
●Laser inscription
capabilities allow for high
quality, wear-resistant
markings
●By having a compact
design emergency stop, the
C22 design eliminates the
need for self-monitoring
contact blocks
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-141
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Product Selection Guide
Pushbuttons
Indicating Lights
Emergency Stops
Selector Switches
Description Non-illuminated, flush Non-illuminated, extended Illuminated, flush Illuminated, extended
Operator Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained
Product Selection Page V7-T1-143 Page V7-T1-144 Page V7-T1-145 Page V7-T1-146 Page V7-T1-147 Page V7-T1-148 Page V7-T1-149 Page V7-T1-150
Description Indicating lights
Product Selection Page V7-T1-152
Description Twist release Keyed-release
Product Selection Page V7-T1-154 Page V7-T1-154
Description Non-illuminated, knob type Key-operated
Product Selection Page V7-T1-157 Page V7-T1-158
V7-T1-142 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Contents
Description Page
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Non-Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . V7-T1-143
Non-Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-144
Non-Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . V7-T1-145
Non-Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . V7-T1-146
Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-147
Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-148
Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-149
Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-150
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-151
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-153
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-156
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-161
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-163
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated
Product Description
Eaton’s C22 Compact
Pushbuttons are a complete
line of monoblock type
pushbuttons with the contact
blocks, mounting adapter,
and operator all-in-one. The
C22 pushbuttons offer the
same look and feel as their
modular counterpart, the
M22. They also carry many of
the same rugged ratings and
options, such as laser
etching, field convertibility,
and LED technology.
Note: For additional accessories,
please see Volume 7—Motor
Controls, Logic and Connectivity,
CA08100008E, Tab 37, section
37.4, 22.5 mm Modular
Pushbuttons—M22.
Features
●Field convertible
maintained pushbuttons
from maintained to
momentary
●LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
●Laser engraved
pushbuttons and lenses
●Pushbuttons (momentary)
rated for 5 million
mechanical operations
Protection Type
●IP67/IP69K
●NEMA 4X, 13
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-143
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated, Flush, Momentary
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
Button
Color
Button
Etching
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Green — 1NO C22-D-G-K10 C22S-D-G-K10
—2NOC22-D-G-K20 C22S-D-G-K20
— 1NO/1NC C22-D-G-K11 C22S-D-G-K11
X1 1NO C22-D-G-X1-K10 C22S-D-G-X1-K10
X1 2NO C22-D-G-X1-K20 C22S-D-G-X1-K20
X1 1NO/1NC C22-D-G-X1-K11 C22S-D-G-X1-K11
Red — 1NC C22-D-R-K01 C22S-D-R-K01
—2NCC22-D-R-K02 C22S-D-R-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-D-R-K11 C22S-D-R-K11
X0 1NC C22-D-R-X0-K01 C22S-D-R-X0-K01
X0 2NC C22-D-R-X0-K02 C22S-D-R-X0-K02
X0 1NO/1NC C22-D-R-X0-K11 C22S-D-R-X0-K11
Black — 1NC C22-D-S-K01 C22S-D-S-K01
—2NCC22-D-S-K02 C22S-D-S-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-D-S-K11 C22S-D-S-K11
X0 1NC C22-D-S-X0-K01 C22S-D-S-X0-K01
X0 2NC C22-D-S-X0-K02 C22S-D-S-X0-K02
X0 1NO/1NC C22-D-S-X0-K11 C22S-D-S-X0-K11
White — 1NO C22-D-W-K10 C22S-D-W-K10
—2NOC22-D-W-K20 C22S-D-W-K20
— 1NO/1NC C22-D-W-K11 C22S-D-W-K11
X1 1NO C22-D-W-X1-K10 C22S-D-W-X1-K10
X1 2NO C22-D-W-X1-K20 C22S-D-W-X1-K20
X1 1NO/1NC C22-D-W-X1-K11 C22S-D-W-X1-K11
Buttonless — 1NO C22-D-X-K10 C22S-D-X-K10
—2NOC22-D-X-K20 C22S-D-X-K20
—1NCC22-D-X-K01 C22S-D-X-K01
—2NCC22-D-X-K02 C22S-D-X-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-D-X-K11 C22S-D-X-K11
C22 -D-G-X1-K10
Bezel
C22 = Silver
C22S =Black
Operator Type
D = Flush, momentary
DR = Flush, maintained
DH = Extended, momentary
DRH = Extended, maintained
Button Plate Color
G =Green
R =Red
S =Black
W =White
X = Buttonless
Button Etching
X0 =
X1 =
Contact Blocks
K10 =1NO
K20 =2NO
K01 =1NC
K02 =2NC
K11 =1NO/1NC
C22(S)-D-_
V7-T1-144 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Non-Illuminated, Flush, Maintained
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
Button
Color
Button
Etching
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Green — 1NO C22-DR-G-K10 C22S-DR-G-K10
—2NOC22-DR-G-K20 C22S-DR-G-K20
— 1NO/1NC C22-DR-G-K11 C22S-DR-G-K11
X1 1NO C22-DR-G-X1-K10 C22S-DR-G-X1-K10
X1 2NO C22-DR-G-X1-K20 C22S-DR-G-X1-K20
X1 1NO/1NC C22-DR-G-X1-K11 C22S-DR-G-X1-K11
Red — 1NC C22-DR-R-K01 C22S-DR-R-K01
—2NCC22-DR-R-K02 C22S-DR-R-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-DR-R-K11 C22S-DR-R-K11
X0 1NC C22-DR-R-X0-K01 C22S-DR-R-X0-K01
X0 2NC C22-DR-R-X0-K02 C22S-DR-R-X0-K02
X0 1NO/1NC C22-DR-R-X0-K11 C22S-DR-R-X0-K11
Black — 1NC C22-DR-S-K01 C22S-DR-S-K01
—2NCC22-DR-S-K02 C22S-DR-S-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-DR-S-K11 C22S-DR-S-K11
X0 1NC C22-DR-S-X0-K01 C22S-DR-S-X0-K01
X0 2NC C22-DR-S-X0-K02 C22S-DR-S-X0-K02
X0 1NO/1NC C22-DR-S-X0-K11 C22S-DR-S-X0-K11
White — 1NO C22-DR-W-K10 C22S-DR-W-K10
—2NOC22-DR-W-K20 C22S-DR-W-K20
— 1NO/1NC C22-DR-W-K11 C22S-DR-W-K11
X1 1NO C22-DR-W-X1-K10 C22S-DR-W-X1-K10
X1 2NO C22-DR-W-X1-K20 C22S-DR-W-X1-K20
X1 1NO/1NC C22-DR-W-X1-K11 C22S-DR-W-X1-K11
Buttonless — 1NO C22-DR-X-K10 C22S-DR-X-K10
—2NOC22-DR-X-K20 C22S-DR-X-K20
—1NCC22-DR-X-K01 C22S-DR-X-K01
—2NCC22-DR-X-K02 C22S-DR-X-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-DR-X-K11 C22S-DR-X-K11
C22(S)-DR-_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-145
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Non-Illuminated, Extended, Momentary
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
Button
Color
Button
Etching
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Green — 1NO C22-DH-G-K10 C22S-DH-G-K10
—2NOC22-DH-G-K20 C22S-DH-G-K20
— 1NO/1NC C22-DH-G-K11 C22S-DH-G-K11
X1 1NO C22-DH-G-X1-K10 C22S-DH-G-X1-K10
X1 2NO C22-DH-G-X1-K20 C22S-DH-G-X1-K20
X1 1NO/1NC C22-DH-G-X1-K11 C22S-DH-G-X1-K11
Red — 1NC C22-DH-R-K01 C22S-DH-R-K01
—2NCC22-DH-R-K02 C22S-DH-R-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-DH-R-K11 C22S-DH-R-K11
X0 1NC C22-DH-R-X0-K01 C22S-DH-R-X0-K01
X0 2NC C22-DH-R-X0-K02 C22S-DH-R-X0-K02
X0 1NO/1NC C22-DH-R-X0-K11 C22S-DH-R-X0-K11
Black — 1NC C22-DH-S-K01 C22S-DH-S-K01
—2NCC22-DH-S-K02 C22S-DH-S-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-DH-S-K11 C22S-DH-S-K11
X0 1NC C22-DH-S-X0-K01 C22S-DH-S-X0-K01
X0 2NC C22-DH-S-X0-K02 C22S-DH-S-X0-K02
X0 1NO/1NC C22-DH-S-X0-K11 C22S-DH-S-X0-K11
White — 1NO C22-DH-W-K10 C22S-DH-W-K10
—2NOC22-DH-W-K20 C22S-DH-W-K20
— 1NO/1NC C22-DH-W-K11 C22S-DH-W-K11
X1 1NO C22-DH-W-X1-K10 C22S-DH-W-X1-K10
X1 2NO C22-DH-W-X1-K20 C22S-DH-W-X1-K20
X1 1NO/1NC C22-DH-W-X1-K11 C22S-DH-W-X1-K11
C22(S)-DH-_
V7-T1-146 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Non-Illuminated, Extended, Maintained
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained
Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
Button
Color
Button
Etching
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Green — 1NO C22-DRH-G-K10 C22S-DRH-G-K10
—2NOC22-DRH-G-K20 C22S-DRH-G-K20
— 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-G-K11 C22S-DRH-G-K11
X1 1NO C22-DRH-G-X1-K10 C22S-DRH-G-X1-K10
X1 2NO C22-DRH-G-X1-K20 C22S-DRH-G-X1-K20
X1 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-G-X1-K11 C22S-DRH-G-X1-K11
Red — 1NC C22-DRH-R-K01 C22S-DRH-R-K01
—2NCC22-DRH-R-K02 C22S-DRH-R-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-R-K11 C22S-DRH-R-K11
X0 1NC C22-DRH-R-X0-K01 C22S-DRH-R-X0-K01
X0 2NC C22-DRH-R-X0-K02 C22S-DRH-R-X0-K02
X0 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-R-X0-K11 C22S-DRH-R-X0-K11
Black — 1NC C22-DRH-S-K01 C22S-DRH-S-K01
—2NCC22-DRH-S-K02 C22S-DRH-S-K02
— 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-S-K11 C22S-DRH-S-K11
X0 1NC C22-DRH-S-X0-K01 C22S-DRH-S-X0-K01
X0 2NC C22-DRH-S-X0-K02 C22S-DRH-S-X0-K02
X0 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-S-X0-K11 C22S-DRH-S-X0-K11
White — 1NO C22-DRH-W-K10 C22S-DRH-W-K10
—2NOC22-DRH-W-K20 C22S-DRH-W-K20
— 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-W-K11 C22S-DRH-W-K11
X1 1NO C22-DRH-W-X1-K10 C22S-DRH-W-X1-K10
X1 2NO C22-DRH-W-X1-K20 C22S-DRH-W-X1-K20
X1 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-W-X1-K11 C22S-DRH-W-X1-K11
C22(S)-DRH-_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-147
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Product Selection
Illuminated, Flush, Momentary
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary
LED Color
Button
Color Voltage
Button
Etching
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-G-K10-24 C22S-DL-G-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-G-K10-120 C22S-DL-G-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-G-K10-230 C22S-DL-G-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DL-G-X1-K10-24 C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-24
120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DL-G-X1-K10-120 C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-120
230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DL-G-X1-K10-230 C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-230
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-XG-K10-24 C22S-DL-XG-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XG-K10-120 C22S-DL-XG-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XG-K10-230 C22S-DL-XG-K10-230
Red Red 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NC C22-DL-R-K01-24 C22S-DL-R-K01-24
120 Vac — 1NC C22-DL-R-K01-120 C22S-DL-R-K01-120
230 Vac — 1NC C22-DL-R-K01-230 C22S-DL-R-K01-230
24 Vac/Vdc X0 1NC C22-DL-R-X0-K01-24 C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-24
120 Vac X0 1NC C22-DL-R-X0-K01-120 C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-120
230 Vac X0 1NC C22-DL-R-X0-K01-230 C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-230
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NC C22-DL-XR-K01-24 C22S-DL-XR-K01-24
120 Vac — 1NC C22-DL-XR-K01-120 C22S-DL-XR-K01-120
230 Vac — 1NC C22-DL-XR-K01-230 C22S-DL-XR-K01-230
White White 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-W-K10-24 C22S-DL-W-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-W-K10-120 C22S-DL-W-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-W-K10-230 C22S-DL-W-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DL-W-X1-K10-24 C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-24
120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DL-W-X1-K10-120 C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-120
230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DL-W-X1-K10-230 C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-230
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-XW-K10-24 C22S-DL-XW-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XW-K10-120 C22S-DL-XW-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XW-K10-230 C22S-DL-XW-K10-230
Blue Blue 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-B-K10-24 C22S-DL-B-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-B-K10-120 C22S-DL-B-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-B-K10-230 C22S-DL-B-K10-230
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-XB-K10-24 C22S-DL-XB-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XB-K10-120 C22S-DL-XB-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XB-K10-230 C22S-DL-XB-K10-230
C22 -DL-G-X1-K10-24
Bezel
C22 = Silver
C22S =Black
Operator Type
DL = Illuminated, flush, momentary
DRL = Illuminated, flush, maintained
DLH = Illuminated, extended, momentary
DRLH = Illuminated, extended, maintained
Lens Etching
X0 =
X1 =
Contact Blocks
K10 =1NO
K01 =1NC
LED Voltage
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
120 = 120 Vac
230 = 230 Vac
LED/Lens Color
G = Green
R =Red
W =White
B = Blue
XG = Green without lens
XR = Red without lens
XW = White without lens
XB = Blue without lens
C22(S)-DL-_
V7-T1-148 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Illuminated, Flush, Maintained
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
LED Color
Button
Color Voltage
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-G-K10-24 C22S-DRL-G-K10-24
120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-G-K10-120 C22S-DRL-G-K10-120
230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-G-K10-230 C22S-DRL-G-K10-230
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-XG-K10-24 C22S-DRL-XG-K10-24
120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XG-K10-120 C22S-DRL-XG-K10-120
230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XG-K10-230 C22S-DRL-XG-K10-230
Red Red 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC C22-DRL-R-K01-24 C22S-DRL-R-K01-24
120 Vac 1NC C22-DRL-R-K01-120 C22S-DRL-R-K01-120
230 Vac 1NC C22-DRL-R-K01-230 C22S-DRL-R-K01-230
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC C22-DRL-XR-K01-24 C22S-DRL-XR-K01-24
120 Vac 1NC C22-DRL-XR-K01-120 C22S-DRL-XR-K01-120
230 Vac 1NC C22-DRL-XR-K01-230 C22S-DRL-XR-K01-230
White White 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-W-K10-24 C22S-DRL-W-K10-24
120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-W-K10-120 C22S-DRL-W-K10-120
230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-W-K10-230 C22S-DRL-W-K10-230
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-XW-K10-24 C22S-DRL-XW-K10-24
120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XW-K10-120 C22S-DRL-XW-K10-120
230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XW-K10-230 C22S-DRL-XW-K10-230
Blue Blue 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-B-K10-24 C22S-DRL-B-K10-24
120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-B-K10-120 C22S-DRL-B-K10-120
230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-B-K10-230 C22S-DRL-B-K10-230
Buttonless 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-XB-K10-24 C22S-DRL-XB-K10-24
120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XB-K10-120 C22S-DRL-XB-K10-120
230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XB-K10-230 C22S-DRL-XB-K10-230
C22(S)-DRL-_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-149
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Illuminated, Extended, Momentary
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary
LED Color
Button
Color Voltage
Button
Etching
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DLH-G-K10-24 C22S-DLH-G-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-G-K10-120 C22S-DLH-G-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-G-K10-230 C22S-DLH-G-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-24 C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-24
120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-120 C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-12
230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-230 C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-23
Red Red 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NC C22-DLH-R-K01-24 C22S-DLH-R-K01-24
120 Vac — 1NC C22-DLH-R-K01-120 C22S-DLH-R-K01-120
230 Vac — 1NC C22-DLH-R-K01-230 C22S-DLH-R-K01-230
24 Vac/Vdc X0 1NC C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-24 C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-24
120 Vac X0 1NC C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-120 C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-12
230 Vac X0 1NC C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-230 C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-23
White White 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DLH-W-K10-24 C22S-DLH-W-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-W-K10-120 C22S-DLH-W-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-W-K10-230 C22S-DLH-W-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-24 C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-24
120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-120 C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-12
230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-230 C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-23
Blue Blue 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DLH-B-K10-24 C22S-DLH-B-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-B-K10-120 C22S-DLH-B-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-B-K10-230 C22S-DLH-B-K10-230
C22(S)-DLH-_
V7-T1-150 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Illuminated, Extended, Maintained
Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained
Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by
switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body.
LED Color
Button
Color Voltage
Button
Etching
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DRLH-G-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-G-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-G-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-G-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-G-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-G-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-24
120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-120
230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-230
Red Red 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NC C22-DRLH-R-K01-24 C22S-DRLH-R-K01-24
120 Vac — 1NC C22-DRLH-R-K01-120 C22S-DRLH-R-K01-120
230 Vac — 1NC C22-DRLH-R-K01-230 C22S-DRLH-R-K01-230
24 Vac/Vdc X0 1NC C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-24 C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-24
120 Vac X0 1NC C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-120 C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-120
230 Vac X0 1NC C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-230 C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-230
White White 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DRLH-W-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-W-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-W-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-W-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-W-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-W-K10-230
24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-24
120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-120
230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-230
Blue Blue 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DRLH-B-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-B-K10-24
120 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-B-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-B-K10-120
230 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-B-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-B-K10-230
C22(S)-DRLH-_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-151
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Indicating Lights
Contents
Description Page
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-142
Indicating Lights
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-152
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-152
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-153
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-156
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-161
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-163
Indicating Lights
Product Description
C22 indicating lights use a
combination of a durable,
bright LED unit and modern
lenses designed specifically
for this type of LED to create
a bright and visible indicating
light. As with the
pushbuttons, the indicating
light lenses can be laser
etched, simply order without
lens and order M22/C22
custom etched lenses
to attach.
Note: For additional accessories,
please see Volume 7—Motor
Controls, Logic and Connectivity,
CA08100008E, Tab 37, section
37.4, 22.5 mm Modular
Pushbuttons—M22.
Features
●LED offering only for
improved brightness
quality and up to 100,000
hours of operation
●Lenses specifically
designed for LED
illumination
●Lenses capable of being
laser etched for custom
solutions that last
Protection Type
●IP67/IP69K
●NEMA 4X, 13
V7-T1-152 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Indicating Lights
Product Selection
Indicating Lights
Indicating Lights
Note
1 Use white LED for both white and yellow lenses.
Lens Color LED Color Voltage Catalog Number
Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-G-24
120 Vac C22-L-G-120
230 Vac C22-L-G-230
Red Red 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-R-24
120 Vac C22-L-R-120
230 Vac C22-L-R-230
White White 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-W-24
120 Vac C22-L-W-120
230 Vac C22-L-W-230
Yellow White 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-Y-24
120 Vac C22-L-Y-120
230 Vac C22-L-Y-230
Blue Blue 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-B-24
120 Vac C22-L-B-120
230 Vac C22-L-B-230
Without Lens Green 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-XG-24
120 Vac C22-L-XG-120
230 Vac C22-L-XG-230
Red 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-XR-24
120 Vac C22-L-XR-120
230 Vac C22-L-XR-230
White 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-XW-24
120 Vac C22-L-XW-120
230 Vac C22-L-XW-230
Blue 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-XB-24
120 Vac C22-L-XB-120
230 Vac C22-L-XB-230
C22 -L-G-24
Bezel
C22-L = Flush indicating light
LED Voltage
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
120 = 120 Vac
230 = 230 Vac
LED/Lens Color
G =Green
R =Red
W =White
Y = Yellow
B = Blue
XG = Green without lens
XR = Red without lens
XW = White without lens 1
XB = Blue without lens
C22-L-_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-153
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Emergency Stops
Contents
Description Page
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-142
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-151
Emergency Stops
Non-Illuminated, Twist-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-154
Non-Illuminated, Keyed-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-154
Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-156
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-161
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-163
Emergency Stops
Product Description
C22 emergency stops are a
durable and reliable solution
to a variety of e-stop
applications. This compact
e-stop, available as twist-to-
release and keyed-release,
is a simple product that
eliminates the need for self-
monitoring contact blocks,
all while still meeting almost
all of the industry safety
standards.
Note: For additional accessories,
please see Volume 7—Motor
Controls, Logic and Connectivity,
CA08100008E, Tab 37, section
37.4, 22.5 mm Modular
Pushbuttons—M22.
Features
●Available in both twist-
release and keyed-release
with either 45 mm or
60 mm operators
Protection Type
●Twist-Release
●IP67/IP69K
●Keyed-Release
●IP66
●NEMA 4X, 13
V7-T1-154 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Emergency Stops
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated, Twist-Release
Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Twist-Release
Non-Illuminated, Keyed-Release
Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Keyed-Release
Release Method Operator Size
Contact Block
Configuration Catalog Number
Twist-release 45 mm 2NC C22-PVT45P-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVT45P-K11
60 mm 2NC C22-PVT60P-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVT60P-K11
Release Method Operator Size Key Code
Contact Block
Configuration Catalog Number
Keyed-release 45 mm MS1 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS1-K11
MS2 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS2-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS2-K11
MS3 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS3-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS3-K11
MS4 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS4-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS4-K11
MS5 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS5-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS5-K11
MS6 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS6-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS6-K11
MS7 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS7-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS7-K11
MS8 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS8-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS8-K11
Ronis 2NC C22-PVS45P-RS-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-RS-K11
C22 - PVS45P -MS1-K01
Operator Type
PVT45P = Twist-release, 45 mm
PVT60P = Twist-release, 60 mm
PVS45P = Key-release, 45 mm
PVS60P = Key-release, 60 mm
Key Code
MS1 =MS1
MS2 =MS2
MS3 =MS3
MS4 =MS4
MS5 =MS5
MS6 =MS6
MS7 =MS7
MS8 =MS8
RS = Ronis-445
Contact Blocks
K02 =2NC
K11 = 1NO/1NC
C22-PVT_
C22-PVS_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-155
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Keyed-Release, continued
Release Method Operator Size Key Code
Contact Block
Configuration Catalog Number
Keyed-release 60 mm MS1 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS1-K11
MS2 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS2-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS2-K11
MS3 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS3-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS3-K11
MS4 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS4-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS4-K11
MS5 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS5-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS5-K11
MS6 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS6-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS6-K11
MS7 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS7-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS7-K11
MS8 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS8-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS8-K11
Ronis 2NC C22-PVS60P-RS-K02
1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-RS-K11
C22-PVS_
V7-T1-156 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Selector Switches
Contents
Description Page
Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and
Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-142
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-151
Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-153
Selector Switches
Non-Illuminated, Knob Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-157
Non-Illuminated, Key Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-158
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-161
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-163
Selector Switches
Product Description
With over 20 variations of
operation and 8 varieties of
key codes, the C22 line offers
a very complete line of
selector switches.
Note: For additional accessories,
please see Volume 7—Motor
Controls, Logic and Connectivity,
CA08100008E, Tab 37, section
37.4, 22.5 mm Modular
Pushbuttons—M22.
Features
●Selector switch (non-
keyed) rated for 1 million
mechanical operations
●Momentary selector
switches are field
convertible from
momentary to maintained
Protection Type
●IP65
●NEMA 4X, 13
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-157
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Selector Switches—Non-Keyed
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated, Knob Type
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Knob Type
Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.
Type
Switching
Position
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary 1NO C22-WK-K10 C22S-WK-K10
2NO C22-WK-K20 C22S-WK-K20
1NC C22-WK-K01 C22S-WK-K01
2NC C22-WK-K02 C22S-WK-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WK-K11 C22S-WK-K11
Momentary 1NO C22-WKV-K10 C22S-WKV-K10
2NO C22-WKV-K20 C22S-WKV-K20
1NC C22-WKV-K01 C22S-WKV-K01
2NC C22-WKV-K02 C22S-WKV-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WKV-K11 C22S-WKV-K11
Maintained 1NO C22-WRK-K10 C22S-WRK-K10
2NO C22-WRK-K20 C22S-WRK-K20
1NC C22-WRK-K01 C22S-WRK-K01
2NC C22-WRK-K02 C22S-WRK-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRK-K11 C22S-WRK-K11
Maintained 1NO C22-WRKV-K10 C22S-WRKV-K10
2NO C22-WRKV-K20 C22S-WRKV-K20
1NC C22-WRKV-K01 C22S-WRKV-K01
2NC C22-WRKV-K02 C22S-WRKV-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRKV-K11 C22S-WRKV-K11
Three-position Momentary 2NO C22-WK3-K20 C22S-WK3-K20
2NC C22-WK3-K02 C22S-WK3-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WK3-K11 C22S-WK3-K11
Maintained 2NO C22-WRK3-K20 C22S-WRK3-K20
2NC C22-WRK3-K02 C22S-WRK3-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRK3-K11 C22S-WRK3-K11
C22 -WK-K10
Bezel
C22 = Silver
C22S =Black
Operator Type
WK = 2-position, momentary
WKV = 2-position, momentary, “V” position
WRK = 2-position, maintained
WRKV = 2-position, maintained, “V” position
WK3 = 3-position, momentary
WRK3 = 3-position, maintained
Contact Blocks
K10 =1NO
K20 =2NO
K01 =1NC
K02 =2NC
K11 =1NO/1NC
C22(S)-WK-_/
C22(S)-WRK_
40°
60°
40°
60°
40°
40°
60°
60°
V7-T1-158 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Selector Switches—Keyed
Non-Illuminated, Key Operated
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated
Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.
Position Type Key Code
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Two-position Momentary
key removal left
MS1 1NO C22-WS-MS1-K10 C22S-WS-MS1-K10
2NO C22-WS-MS1-K20 C22S-WS-MS1-K20
1NC C22-WS-MS1-K01 C22S-WS-MS1-K01
2NC C22-WS-MS1-K02 C22S-WS-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS1-K11 C22S-WS-MS1-K11
MS2 1NO C22-WS-MS2-K10 C22S-WS-MS2-K10
2NO C22-WS-MS2-K20 C22S-WS-MS2-K20
1NC C22-WS-MS2-K01 C22S-WS-MS2-K01
2NC C22-WS-MS2-K02 C22S-WS-MS2-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS2-K11 C22S-WS-MS2-K11
MS3 1NO C22-WS-MS3-K10 C22S-WS-MS3-K10
2NO C22-WS-MS3-K20 C22S-WS-MS3-K20
1NC C22-WS-MS3-K01 C22S-WS-MS3-K01
2NC C22-WS-MS3-K02 C22S-WS-MS3-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS3-K11 C22S-WS-MS3-K11
MS4 1NO C22-WS-MS4-K10 C22S-WS-MS4-K10
2NO C22-WS-MS4-K20 C22S-WS-MS4-K20
1NC C22-WS-MS4-K01 C22S-WS-MS4-K01
2NC C22-WS-MS4-K02 C22S-WS-MS4-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS4-K11 C22S-WS-MS4-K11
MS5 1NO C22-WS-MS5-K10 C22S-WS-MS5-K10
2NO C22-WS-MS5-K20 C22S-WS-MS5-K20
1NC C22-WS-MS5-K01 C22S-WS-MS5-K01
2NC C22-WS-MS5-K02 C22S-WS-MS5-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS5-K11 C22S-WS-MS5-K11
C22 -WS-MS1-A1-K10
Bezel
C22 = Silver
C22S =Black
Operator Type
WS = 2-position, momentary
WRS = 2-position, maintained
WRS-…-A1 = 2-position, maintained,
key removal left
WS3 = 3-position, momentary
WRS3 = 3-position, maintained
Contact Blocks
K10 =1NO
K20 =2NO
K01 =1NC
K02 =2NC
K11 = 1NO/1NC
Key Code
MS1 =MS1
MS2 =MS2
MS3 =MS3
MS4 =MS4
MS5 =MS5
MS6 =MS6
MS7 =MS7
MS8 =MS8
1
1
C22(S)-WS-MS_
40°
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-159
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, continued
Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.
Position Type Key Code
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Two-position,
continued
Momentary
key removal left
MS6 1NO C22-WS-MS6-K10 C22S-WS-MS6-K10
2NO C22-WS-MS6-K20 C22S-WS-MS6-K20
1NC C22-WS-MS6-K01 C22S-WS-MS6-K01
2NC C22-WS-MS6-K02 C22S-WS-MS6-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS6-K11 C22S-WS-MS6-K11
MS7 1NO C22-WS-MS7-K10 C22S-WS-MS7-K10
2NO C22-WS-MS7-K20 C22S-WS-MS7-K20
1NC C22-WS-MS7-K01 C22S-WS-MS7-K01
2NC C22-WS-MS7-K02 C22S-WS-MS7-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS7-K11 C22S-WS-MS7-K11
MS8 1NO C22-WS-MS8-K10 C22S-WS-MS8-K10
2NO C22-WS-MS8-K20 C22S-WS-MS8-K20
1NC C22-WS-MS8-K01 C22S-WS-MS8-K01
2NC C22-WS-MS8-K02 C22S-WS-MS8-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS8-K11 C22S-WS-MS8-K11
Two-position Maintained
key removal left/right
MS1 1NO C22-WRS-MS1-K10 C22S-WRS-MS1-K10
2NO C22-WRS-MS1-K20 C22S-WRS-MS1-K20
1NC C22-WRS-MS1-K01 C22S-WRS-MS1-K01
2NC C22-WRS-MS1-K02 C22S-WRS-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS1-K11 C22S-WRS-MS1-K11
MS2 1NO C22-WRS-MS2-K10 C22S-WRS-MS2-K10
2NO C22-WRS-MS2-K20 C22S-WRS-MS2-K20
1NC C22-WRS-MS2-K01 C22S-WRS-MS2-K01
2NC C22-WRS-MS2-K02 C22S-WRS-MS2-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS2-K11 C22S-WRS-MS2-K11
MS3 1NO C22-WRS-MS3-K10 C22S-WRS-MS3-K10
2NO C22-WRS-MS3-K20 C22S-WRS-MS3-K20
1NC C22-WRS-MS3-K01 C22S-WRS-MS3-K01
2NC C22-WRS-MS3-K02 C22S-WRS-MS3-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS3-K11 C22S-WRS-MS3-K11
C22(S)-WRS-MS_
40°
40°
V7-T1-160 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, continued
Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained.
Position Type Key Code
Contact Block
Configuration
Silver Bezel
Catalog Number
Black Bezel
Catalog Number
Two-position,
continued
Maintained
key removal left/right
MS4 1NO C22-WRS-MS4-K10 C22S-WRS-MS4-K10
2NO C22-WRS-MS4-K20 C22S-WRS-MS4-K20
1NC C22-WRS-MS4-K01 C22S-WRS-MS4-K01
2NC C22-WRS-MS4-K02 C22S-WRS-MS4-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS4-K11 C22S-WRS-MS4-K11
MS5 1NO C22-WRS-MS5-K10 C22S-WRS-MS5-K10
2NO C22-WRS-MS5-K20 C22S-WRS-MS5-K20
1NC C22-WRS-MS5-K01 C22S-WRS-MS5-K01
2NC C22-WRS-MS5-K02 C22S-WRS-MS5-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS5-K11 C22S-WRS-MS5-K11
MS6 1NO C22-WRS-MS6-K10 C22S-WRS-MS6-K10
2NO C22-WRS-MS6-K20 C22S-WRS-MS6-K20
1NC C22-WRS-MS6-K01 C22S-WRS-MS6-K01
2NC C22-WRS-MS6-K02 C22S-WRS-MS6-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS6-K11 C22S-WRS-MS6-K11
MS7 1NO C22-WRS-MS7-K10 C22S-WRS-MS7-K10
2NO C22-WRS-MS7-K20 C22S-WRS-MS7-K20
1NC C22-WRS-MS7-K01 C22S-WRS-MS7-K01
2NC C22-WRS-MS7-K02 C22S-WRS-MS7-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS7-K11 C22S-WRS-MS7-K11
MS8 1NO C22-WRS-MS7-K10 C22S-WRS-MS7-K10
2NO C22-WRS-MS7-K20 C22S-WRS-MS7-K20
1NC C22-WRS-MS7-K01 C22S-WRS-MS7-K01
2NC C22-WRS-MS7-K02 C22S-WRS-MS7-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS7-K11 C22S-WRS-MS7-K11
Two-position Maintained
key removal left
MS1 1NO C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K10 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K10
2NO C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K20 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K20
1NC C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K01 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K01
2NC C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K02 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K11 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K11
Three Position Momentary
Key Removal Center
MS1 2NO C22-WS3-MS1-K20 C22S-WS3-MS1-K20
2NC C22-WS3-MS1-K02 C22S-WS3-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WS3-MS1-K11 C22S-WS3-MS1-K11
Maintained
Key Removal Left/Right
MS1 2NO C22-WRS3-MS1-K20 C22S-WRS3-MS1-K20
2NC C22-WRS3-MS1-K02 C22S-WRS3-MS1-K02
1NO/1NC C22-WRS3-MS1-K11 C22S-WRS3-MS1-K11
C22(S)-WRS…-MS1_
40°
40°
40°
40°
60°60°
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-161
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Technical Data and Specifications
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Pushbutton Actuators
Illuminated Pushbuttons C22 Indicator
Lights C22
Selector Switch
Actuators C22
Key-Operated
Buttons C22
Emergency Stop/
Emergency Switching
OFF Pushbuttons C22Description Unit Momentary Maintained
General
Standards IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660
Lifespan, mechanical Operations x 10651— 1 0.1 0.05
Operating frequency Operations/h >3600 >3600 — >2000 >100 >300
Actuating force N >5>5———>50
Operating torque Nm — — — >0.3 >0.5 —
Terminal screw tightening torque Nm 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
Threaded ring tightening torque Nm222222
Protection type IP67, IP69K IP67, IP69K IP67, IP69K IP65 IP66 IP67, IP69K
Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60068-2-30
Ambient temperature
Open °C –25° to 70° –25° to 70° –25° to 70° –25° to 70° –25° to 70° –25° to 70°
Storage °C –30° to 80° –30° to 80° –30° to 80° –30° to 80° –30° to 80° –30° to 80°
Mounting position As required As required As required As required As required As required
Mechanical shock resistance to
IEC 60068-2-27 Shock duration
11 ms, half-sinusoidal
g303030303030
Terminal capacities
Solid mm22 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5
Flexible with ferrule mm22 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5
Contacts
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000
Rated insulation voltage UiV 250 250 250 250 250 250
Overvoltage category/pollution
degree
III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3
Control circuit reliability
at 5 Vdc/1 mA HFFault
probability
Values follow Values follow — Values follow Values follow Values follow
at 17 Vdc/7 mA HFFault
probability
N/O contact: statistically determined
1 failure per 17 x 106 operations
N/C contact: statistically determined
1 failure per 0.9 x 106 operations
— N/O contact: statistically determined 1 failure per
17 x 106 operations
N/C contact: statistically determined 1 failure per
0.9 x 106 operations
at 24 Vdc/5 mA HFFault
probability
Values follow Values follow — Values follow Values follow Values follow
Max. short-circuit protective device
Fuse gG/gL A 10 10 — 10 10 10
V7-T1-162 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22, continued
Contact Travel
Contact Travel Diagram
Push-button Actuators
Illuminated Pushbuttons C22 Indicator
Lights C22
Selector Switch
Actuators C22
Key-Operated
Buttons C22
Emergency Stop/
Emergency Switching
OFF Pushbuttons C22Description Unit Momentary Maintained
Switching Capacity
Rated operational current
AC-15
24V IeA44—444
110V IeA22—222
230V IeA 1.5 1.5 — 1.5 1.5 1.5
DC-13
24V IeA33—333
60V IeA11—111
110V IeA 0.6 0.6 — 0.6 0.6 0.6
220V IeA 0.3 0.3 — 0.3 0.3 0.3
Lifespan, electrical
AC-15
230V/0.5A Operations x 1060.4 0.4 — 0.4 0.4 0.4
230V/1.0A x 1060.6 0.6 — 0.6 0.6 0.6
0
0
3.15 5.5
5.52.2
3
4
2
1
Contact closed
Contact open
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-163
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Flat
C22(S)-DRL_/C22(S)-DL_
Extended
C22(S)-DRLH_/C22(S)-DLH_
Pushbutton Actuators
Flat
C22(S)-DR_/C22(S)-D_
Extended
C22(S)-DRH_/C22(S)-DH_
Indicating Lights
Flat
C22-L_
Ø29.7
[1.17]
M22 x 1.5
54.6 [2.15]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
9.6
[0.38]
20.2
[0.80]
10.4
[0.41]
Ø29.7
[1.17]
M22 x 1.5
60.9 [2.40]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
9.6
[0.38]
20.2
[0.80]
16.7
[0.66]
Ø29.7
[1.17]
M22 x 1.5
54.6 [2.15]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
9.6
[0.38]
20.2
[0.80]
10.4
[0.41]
Ø29.7
[1.17]
M22 x 1.5
60.9 [2.40]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
9.6
[0.38]
20.2
[0.80]
16.7
[0.66]
Ø29.7
[1.17]
M22 x 1.5
55.9 [2.20]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
9.6
[0.38]
Ø20.2
[0.80]
11.7
[0.46]
V7-T1-164 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
Emergency Stop/Emergency Switching OFF Pushbuttons
C22-PVT45P_
C22-PVT45P-MS_
C22-PVT60P_
C22-PVT45P-RS_
C22-PVT60P-MS_
C22-PVT60P-MS_
Ø45.0
[1.77]
93.0 [3.66]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
9.3
[0.37]
M22 x 1.5
Ø29.5
[1.16]
Ø20.4
[0.80]
48.0
[1.89]
45.0
[1.77]
M22 x 1.5
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
9.3
[0.37]
Ø20.4
[0.80]
Ø45.0
[1.17]
120.0 [4.72]
75.0 [2.95]
48.0
[1.89] 45.0
[1.77]
Ø60.0
[2.36]
92.0 [3.62]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
9.3
[0.37]
M22 x 1.5
Ø29.5
[1.16]
Ø20.4
[0.80]
48.0
[1.89]
45.0
[1.77]
M22 x 1.5
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
9.3
[0.37]
Ø20.4
[0.80]
Ø45.0
[1.77]
116.0 [4.57]
71.0 [2.80]
48.0
[1.89] 45.0
[1.77]
M22 x 1.5
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
9.3
[0.37]
Ø20.4
[0.80]
Ø60.0
[2.36]
120.0 [4.72]
75.0 [2.95]
48.0
[1.89]
45.0
[1.77]
M22 x 1.5
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
9.3
[0.37]
Ø20.4
[0.80]
Ø60.0
[2.36]
116.0 [4.57]
71.0 [2.80]
48.0
[1.89]
45.0
[1.77]
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-165
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.6
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22
Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]
Selector Switch Actuators
C22(S)-W(R)K_
Selector Switch Actuators/V Position
C22(S)-W(R)KV_
Key Operated Actuators
C22(S)-WS(3)-MS_/C22(S)-WRS(3)-MS_
C22(S)-WS(3)-RS_/C22(S)-WRS(3)-RS_
Ø29.7
[1.17]
M22 x 1.5
72.0 [2.83]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
9.6
[0.38]
20.2
[0.80]
27.8
[1.09]
Ø29.7
[1.17]
M22 x 1.5
72.0 [2.83]
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
9.6
[0.38]
20.2
[0.80]
27.8
[1.09]
30°
M22 x 1.5
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
9.6
[0.38]
20.2
[0.80]
Ø29.7
[1.17]
92.1 [3.63]
20.8
[0.82]
47.9 [1.89]
44.2 [1.74]
M22 x 1.5
1.0–6.0
[0.04–0.24]
6.0
[0.24]
4.0
[0.16]
Ø29.5
[1.16]
9.6
[0.38]
20.2
[0.80]
Ø29.7
[1.17]
92.1 [3.63]
24.9
[0.98]
47.9 [1.89]
44.2 [1.74]
V7-T1-166 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Contents
Description Page
30.5 mm Square Multifunction
Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-167
Product Selection
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-168
Operator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-171
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-177
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-178
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-181
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-182
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-183
Product Description
The E30 industrial pushbutton
and indicating light line from
Eaton’s electrical sector
features a wide selection of
square, multifunction
operators which conveniently
mount in a standard 30.5 mm
(1-13/64 in) diameter panel
hole. Up to six input and
indicating functions can be
grouped into a single
operating head, saving
valuable panel space.
Attractive square operator
styling, coupled with custom
legending of colored buttons
and lenses and many special
function accessories, makes
E30 components ideally
suited for use on control
consoles and for a variety of
industrial OEM applications.
Features
Type E30 control units consist
of a basic operator with one
or more buttons and lenses
and contact block selection
dependent on the specific
operator configuration.
●Pushbutton operators will
accommodate up to four
single depth stackable
contact blocks behind each
operating button, up to
eight circuits maximum.
●Indicating lights are
supplied complete with
either a transformer light
unit up to 600 Vac supply
line voltage or full voltage
light unit up to 120 Vac/Vdc
supply line voltage.
●Combination pushbutton
with indicating light
operators are supplied
complete with a
transformer or full voltage
unit. Contact blocks must
be ordered separately, up to
four circuits maximum.
Die Cast Construction
Each operator has high
pressure type seals to
prevent the passage of oil
and other contaminants
through the operator into the
contact structure or panel
interior. Each operator uses a
Buna N cork gasket between
the mounting flange on the
operator and the panel to
maintain oiltightness.
Standards and
Certifications
●UL Listed—File No.
E131568
●CSA Certified—File No.
LR68551
Ingress Protection
●Single and dual indicating
lights
●UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●All other operators
●UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R,
4, 4X, 12, 13
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-167
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Product Identification
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
Two C i rc uit
Contact Block
Transformer or
Full Voltage Light
Element—Supplied
with Operator
Locking Ring—Supplied with
Operator—Serves as Mount
for Light Element and
Contact Blocks
Retaining Nut
Secures Operator
to Panel
Lower Contact
Block Operating
Plunger
Buttons and Lenses Supplied
Blank or with Custom
Legend(s)
(see Pages V7-T1-171 to
V7-T1-175)
Multifunction Operator
(see Pages V7-T1-168 to V7-T1-170) Upper Contact Block
Operating Plunger
Gasket
Quarter Turn Screw—
Mounts Locking Ring to Operator
Single Circuit
Contact Block
V7-T1-168 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Product Selection
Operators
When Ordering a Complete E30 Control Unit Specify
Square Multifunction Operators
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Single Button Operator/without Button (Order Button Separately)
Two Button Operator/without Buttons (Order Buttons Separately)
Two Button Operator with Long (OFF) Release Bar—Includes OFF Bar/Button
(Order Other Buttons Separately)
Notes
1 Order from table on Page V7-T1-171.
2 Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button.
3 Buttons are interlocked so that one of the two is maintained at all times.
Depressing the other button releases the maintained button and maintains the depressed button.
4 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch.
For other colors or markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243.
For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR100.
5 Order from table on Page V7-T1-172.
6 Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button.
Catalog Number of … Ordering Example (E30AB)
Operator E30KB130 “START”
Button(s) E30KB231 “STOP”
Contact block(s) E30KLA1 1NO
Accessories (if required) E30KLA2 1NC
Button Type
Required 1Operation Special Features Catalog Number
Momentary — E30AA
Button Types
Required 1
Operation
Special Features Catalog NumberTop Button Bottom Button
Momentary Momentary — E30AB
Momentary Momentary With mechanical
interlock
E30AC
Maintained
(all contacts)
Release
(all contacts)
—E30AD 2
Maintained
(all contacts)
Release
(all contacts)
With mechanical
interlock
E30AP 23
Button Types
Required 45
Operation
Special Features Catalog NumberTop Button Bottom Button
Maintained Maintained — E30AF
Maintained Maintained With mechanical
interlock
E30AG
Maintained Momentary With mechanical
interlock
E30AH
Maintained
(all contacts)
Maintained
(bottom contacts only)
Top button operates
both top and
bottom contacts
E30AK 6
Shown with
Extended Button
Single Button Operator
Two Button Operator
Shown with
Extended Buttons
Two Button Operator
Shown with Long
Release Bar
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-169
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Two Button Operator with (OFF) Release—Includes OFF Bar/Button(s)
(Order Other Buttons Separately)
Single Indicating Light Unit/without Lens (Order Lens Separately)
Dual Indicating Light Unit/without Lenses (Order Lenses Separately)
Notes
1 Order from table on Page V7-T1-172.
2 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or
markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of
standard red release bar, order E30KR101.
3 Order from table on Page V7-T1-173.
4 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED part numbers, see table on Page V7-T1-181.
5 Order from table on Page V7-T1-174.
Button Types
Required 12
Operation
Special Features Catalog NumberTop Button Bottom Button
Maintained Momentary Release bar for
top button
E30AL
Maintained Maintained Individual release
bars for each button
E30AN
Maintained
with interlock
Maintained
with interlock
Individual release
bars for each button
E30AM
Lens Type
Required 3
Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage
Lamp
Number 4Catalog Number Voltage
Lamp
Number 4Catalog Number
120 6PSB E30BA 24 24PSB E30BJ
120 120PSB E30BM
Lens Types
Required 5
Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage
Lamp
Number 4Catalog Number Voltage
Lamp
Number 4Catalog Number
120 6PSB E30CA 24 24PSB E30CJ
120 120PSB E30CM
Shown with Release
Bar for Top Button
Two Button Operator
Shown with Release
Bars for Each Button
Two Button Operator
Shown with Lens
Single Indicating
Light Unit
Shown with Lens
Dual Indicating
Light Unit
V7-T1-170 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Single Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Button or Lens
(Order Button and Lens Separately)
Single Button Operator with (OFF) Release Bar and Indicating Light—
Includes OFF Bar/Button (Order Other Button and Lens Separately)
Two Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Buttons or Lens
(Order Buttons and Lens Separately)
Two Button Operator with Dual Indicating Lights/without Buttons and Lens
Notes
1 Order from tables on Pages V7-T1-171 to V7-T1-175.
2 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED part numbers, see table on Page V7-T1-181.
3 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or
markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of
standard red release bar, order E30KR101.
4 Order from tables on Pages V7-T1-173 and V7-T1-174.
Button and
Lens Types
Required 1
Operation
(Bottom
Button)
Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage
Lamp
Number 2Catalog Number Voltage
Lamp
Number 2Catalog Number
Momentary 120 6PSB E30DA 24 24PSB E30DX3
120 120PSB E30DF
Button and
Lens Types
Required 1
Operation
(Bottom
Button)
Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage
Lamp
Number 3Catalog Number Voltage
Lamp
Number 2Catalog Number
Maintained 120 6PSB E30DG 24 24PSB E30DX13
120 120PSB E30DM
Button and
Lens Types
Required 4
Button
Operation
Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage
Lamp
Number 2Catalog Number Voltage
Lamp
Number 2Catalog Number
Momentary 120 6PSB E30EA 24 24PSB E30EX3
120 120PSB E30EF
Momentary
with
interlock
120 6PSB E30EG 24 24PSB E30EX13
120 120PSB E30EM
Button and
Lens Types
Required 1
Button
Operation
Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage
Lamp
Number 2Catalog Number Voltage
Lamp
Number 2Catalog Number
Momentary 120 6PSB E30JA 24 24PSB E30JX3
120 120PSB E30JF
Shown with Button
and Lens
Single Button Operator
and Indicating Light
Shown with Button
and Lens
Single Button Operator
with Release Bar and
Indicating Light
Shown with Button
and Lens
Two Button Operator
with Indicating Light
Shown with Button
and Lens
Two Button Operator
with Dual Indicating
Lights
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-171
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Operator Components
Operating Buttons Only
Type A Buttons with Standard Markings 1
Type B Buttons with Standard Markings 2
Notes
1 Use with operator E30AA, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high.
2 Use with operators E30AB thru AE, AL and DA thru DF, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high.
Button
Application Color Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Short Button
Catalog Number Color Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Short Button
Catalog Number
Black Blank E30KA100 E30KA150 Green START E30KA330 E30KA380
START — E30KA180 Yellow Blank E30KA400 E30KA450
Red Blank E30KA200 E30KA250 White Blank E30KA500 E30KA550
EMERG. STOP E30KA204 — Gray Blank E30KA600 E30KA650
OFF E30KA218 E30KA268 Brown Blank E30KA700 E30KA750
STOP E30KA231 E30KA281 Orange Blank E30KA800 E30KA950
Green Blank E30KA300 E30KA350 Blue Blank E30KA900 E30KA950
Button
Application Color Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Short Button
Catalog Number Color Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Short Button
Catalog Number
Black Blank E30KB100 E30KB150 Black REVERSE E30KB125 E30KB175
AUTO E30KB101 E30KB151 RUN E30KB126 E30KB176
CLOSE E30KB102 E30KB152 SLOW E30KB128 E30KB178
DOWN E30KB103 E30KB153 START E30KB130 E30KB180
FAST E30KB105 E30KB155 TEST E30KB132 E30KB182
FORWARD E30KB107 E30KB157 UP E30KB134 E30KB184
HIGH E30KB109 E30KB159 Red Blank E30KB200 E30KB250
IN E30KB110 E30KB160 EMERG. STOP E30KB204 —
INCH E30KB111 E30KB161 OFF E30KB218 E30KB268
JOG E30KB112 E30KB162 STOP E30KB231 E30KB281
JOG FOR. E30KB113 E30KB163 Green Blank E30KB300 E30KB350
JOG REV. E30KB114 E30KB164 START E30KB330 E30KB380
LOW E30KB115 E30KB165 Yellow Blank E30KB400 E30KB450
LOWER E30KB116 E30KB166 White Blank E30KB500 E30KB550
MAN E30KB117 E30KB167 AUTO E30KB501 —
ON E30KB119 E30KB169 HAND E30KB508 —
OPEN E30KB120 E30KB170 Gray Blank E30KB600 E30KB650
OUT E30KB121 E30KB171 Brown Blank E30KB700 E30KB750
RAISE E30KB122 E30KB172 Orange Blank E30KB800 E30KB850
RESET E30KB124 E30KB174 Blue Blank E30KB900 E30KB950
Type A Extended
Button
Type B Extended
Button
V7-T1-172 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Type C Buttons with Standard Markings 1
Note
1 Use with operators E30AF thru AK, AL thru AM and DG thru DM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
Button
Application Color Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Short Button
Catalog Number Color Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Short Button
Catalog Number
Black Blank E30KC100 E30KC150 Black RESET E30KC124 E30KC174
AUTO E30KC101 E30KC151 REVERSE E30KC125 E30KC175
CLOSE E30KC102 E30KC152 RUN E30KC126 E30KC176
DOWN E30KC103 E30KC153 SLOW E30KC128 E30KC178
FAST E30KC105 E30KC155 START E30KC130 E30KC180
FORWARD E30KC107 E30KC157 TEST E30KC132 E30KC182
HAND E30KC108 E30KC158 UP E30KC134 E30KC184
HIGH E30KC109 E30KC159 Red Blank E30KC200 E30KC250
IN E30KC110 E30KC160 OFF E30KC218 —
INCH E30KC111 E30KC161 STOP E30KC231 E30KC281
JOG E30KC112 E30KC162 Green Blank E30KC300 E30KC350
JOG FOR. E30KC113 E30KC163 START E30KC330 E30KC380
JOG REV. E30KC114 E30KC164 Yellow Blank E30KC400 E30KC450
LOW E30KC115 E30KC165 White Blank E30KC500 E30KC550
LOWER E30KC116 E30KC166 Gray Blank E30KC600 E30KC650
MAN E30KC117 E30KC167 Brown Blank E30KC700 E30KC750
ON E30KC119 E30KC169 Orange Blank E30KC800 E30KC850
OPEN E30KC120 E30KC170 Blue Blank E30KC900 E30KC950
OUT E30KC121 E30KC171
RAISE E30KC122 E30KC172
Type C Extended
Button
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-173
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Operating Buttons and Lens Only
Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking 1
Black lettering on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear.
White lettering on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.
Type E Buttons with Standard Markings 2
Type F Lenses with Standard Markings 3
Notes
1 For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on
Pages V7-T1-178 to V7-T1-180.
2 Use with operators E30EA thru EM, FA thru FM and JA thru JM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
3 Use with operators E30BA thru BY, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high.
Button
Application Color Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number Color Marking
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Black Blank E30KE100 Black RESET E30KE124
CLOSE E30KE102 REVERSE E30KE125
DOWN E30KE103 RUN E30KE126
FAST E30KE105 SLOW E30KE128
FORWARD E30KE107 START E30KE130
HIGH E30KE109 TEST E30KE132
IN E30KE110 UP E30KE134
INCH E30KE111 Red Blank E30KE200
JOG E30KE112 OFF E30KE218
JOG FOR. E30KE113 STOP E30KE231
JOG REV. E30KE114 Green Blank E30KE300
LOW E30KE115 START E30KE330
LOWER E30KE116 Yellow Blank E30KE400
ON E30KE119 White Blank E30KE500
OPEN E30KE120 Gray Blank E30KE600
OUT E30KE121 Brown Blank E30KE700
PHASE E30KE122 Orange Blank E30KE800
Blue Blank E30KE900
Button
Application Color Marking Catalog Number Color Marking Catalog Number
Red Blank E30KF10 Green OFF E30KF22
MOTOR RUN E30KF11 Amber Blank E30KF30
ON E30KF12 Blue Blank E30KF40
POWER ON E30KF13 Clear Blank E30KF50
Green Blank E30KF20 White Blank E30KF60
MOTOR STOP E30KF21
MOTOR RUN E30KF23
Type E Button
Type F Lens
V7-T1-174 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Operating Lens Only
Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking 1
Black lettering on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear.
White lettering on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.
Type G Lenses with Standard Markings 2
Type J Lenses with Standard Markings 3
Type K Lenses with Standard Markings (Sold in Pairs Only) 4
Notes
1 For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on
Pages V7-T1-178 to V7-T1-180.
2 Use with operators E30CA thru CM and DA thru DM, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high except MOTOR RUN,
POWER ON and MOTOR STOP are 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
3 Use with operators E30EA thru EM, FA thru FM and GA thru GM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high.
4 Use with operators E30JA thru JW, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high
Lens
Application Color Marking Catalog Number Color Marking Catalog Number
Red Blank E30KG10 Green OFF E30KG22
MOTOR RUN E30KG11 READY E30KG23
ON E30KG12 Amber Blank E30KG30
POWER ON E30KG13 Blue Blank E30KG40
Green Blank E30KG20 Clear Blank E30KG50
MOTOR RUN E30KG24 White Blank E30KG60
MOTOR STOP E30KG21
Lens
Application Color Marking Catalog Number Color Marking Catalog Number
Red Blank E30KJ10 Green OFF E30KJ22
MOTOR RUN E30KJ11 ON E30KJ24
ON E30KJ12 Amber Blank E30KJ30
POWER ON E30KJ13 Blue Blank E30KJ40
MOTOR STOP E30KJ14 Clear Blank E30KJ50
Green Blank E30KJ20 White Blank E30KJ60
MOTOR STOP E30KJ21
MOTOR RUN E30KJ23
Lens
Application
Color Marking
Catalog Number
Left Hand
Lens
Right Hand
Lens
Left Hand
Lens
Right Hand
Lens
Red Red ON ON E30KK12
Green ON OFF E30KK13
Green OFF OFF E30KK22
Red OFF ON E30KK23
Type G Lens
Type J Lens
Type K Lenses
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-175
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Type K Lenses—Blank (Sold in Pairs Only)
Color Color
Left Hand
Lens
Right Hand
Lens Catalog Number
Left Hand
Lens
Right Hand
Lens Catalog Number
Red Red E30KK10 Blue Red E30KK41
Green E30KK11 Green E30KK42
Amber E30KK17 Amber E30KK43
Blue E30KK14 Blue E30KK40
Clear E30KK15 Clear E30KK45
White E30KK16 White E30KK46
Green Red E30KK21 Clear Red E30KK51
Green E30KK20 Green E30KK52
Amber E30KK27 Amber E30KK53
Blue E30KK24 Blue E30KK54
Clear E30KK25 Clear E30KK50
White E30KK26 White E30KK56
Amber Red E30KK31 White Red E30KK61
Green E30KK32 Green E30KK62
Amber E30KK30 Amber E30KK63
Blue E30KK34 Blue E30KK64
Clear E30KK35 Clear E30KK65
White E30KK36 White E30KK60
Type K Lenses
V7-T1-176 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks—Molded, phenolic construction.
Enclosed silver contacts with reliability “nibs” that improve the
reliability of switching performance under dry circuit, corrosive
atmosphere and fine dust conditions. For more extreme
conditions, the logic level contact blocks described below are
recommended.
Logic Level Contact Blocks—Feature palladium contacts.
Palladium, which is more inert than gold, is well suited for
voltages and currents approaching zero. When mounted in an
enclosure rated for highly corrosive environments, logic level
contact blocks can be used where exposure to chemicals may
cause failure to other types of materials.
Mounting Limitations
See the contact block mounting limitations for Type E30
pushbutton and combination pushbutton and light operators on
this page. Mounting positions 1 thru 8 indicate single depth
contact blocks. Each of these positions can represent either a
single circuit 600 volt block or a two-circuit 120 volt block. The
two-circuit 600 volt block requires two of the numbered
positions shown.
Mounting Positions
Contact Block Selection
Notes
1 Except operator E30AD, AJ or AK which will accommodate contact blocks 1, 2, 5 and 6 only. (See Mounting Positions above.)
2 Individually boxed contact blocks master packed 10 per carton.
3 Supplied with non-stacking screws. Limited to 2 contact blocks mounted in positions 1 and 5.
4 Do not use with maintained operators.
5 Contacts must be same polarity.
Catalog Number
of Operator
Contact Blocks Can Be Mounted in
Positions Listed Below
Upper Stack Lower Stack
E30AA thru E30AM 11-2-3-4 5-6-7-8
E30BA thru E30CM None None
E30DA thru E30DM None 5-6-7-8
E30EA thru E30GM 2-3-4 6-7-8
E30JA thru E30JM 3-4 7-8
Contact Block
Mounting
Positions
Upper Contact
Block Stack
Upper Contact Block Stack Operating Plunger
Lower Contact Block Stack
Operating Plunger
Lower Contact
Block Stack
1
5678
234
Circuit
Pressure Terminals Quick Connect Terminals 3
Standard Logic Level Standard
Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
1NO 600 Vac, 250 Vdc—Single Circuit
E30KLA1 E30KLAE1 E30KLB1
1NC E30KLA2 E30KLAE2 E30KLB2
1NO-1NC 600 Vac, 250 Vdc—Two Circuit
E30KLA3 E30KLAE3 E30KLB3
2NO E30KLA4 E30KLAE4 E30KLB4
2NC E30KLA5 E30KLAE5 E30KLB5
Special Contact Operation
1NO-1NC
Overlapping
E30KLA6 4— E30KLB6 4
2NO
(One early closing)
E30KLA7 4— E30KLB7 4
2NC
(One late opening)
E30KLA8 — E30KLB8
1NO-1NC 120 Vac Only—Two Circuit
E30KLA9 5— E30KLB9 5
Single Circuit,
Screw Terminals
Two Circuit,
Screw Terminals
Two Circuit, Quick
Connect Terminals
120 Vac Only—
Two Circuit
Contact Block Type 2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-177
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Accessories
Accessories
Note
1 Color coordinating collars, padlock attachments or legend plates cannot be used with operators equipped with a
transparent boot.
Description Color/Type Catalog Number
Collar—Snap on mounting for assembly in the field. Permits
color coding of operator heads. Size: 1-19/32 x 1-19/32 x 9/16 in.
Black E30KR1
Red E30KR2
Green E30KR3
Yellow E30KR4
White E30KR5
Gray E30KR6
Orange E30KR8
Blue E30KR9
Brown E30KR10
Shroud—Similar to collar above except for extension above
the face of button to prevent accidental actuation of button.
Half shroud with an extension on only half the collar may be positioned
to protect top or bottom button.
Full shroud
(gray)
E30KT6
Half shroud
(gray)
E30KT7
Guard—Two collars deep, removable slide prevents accidental
operation. White slide can be marked with grease pencil.
Red with white slide E30KR31
Red with clear slide E30KR32
Terminal Block—2 terminals, each will accommodate 2-wire
terminations.
E30KR30
Padlock Attachment for locking single button and bottom button
of multi-function operators in the depressed position. Locks NC
contacts open or early closing NO contacts closed. Cannot be used
in conjunction with collar, shroud or boot.
Short button E30KT1
Extended button E30KT2
Transparent Boot—Guards against ingress of foreign material
and freezing rain. Note: If this boot is used in conjunction with
operator types AD or AE, an extended type button must be used
in the top position and a short button in the lower position.
E30KT3 1
Square Hole Plug—
Gray enameled E30KT4
Stainless steel E30KT5
Lamp and Lens Removal Tool—Will not fit Cat. No. E30B light units
listed on Page V7-T1-169.
E30KV1
Octagonal Wrench for mounting operators to panel. E22CW
Button and Lens Removal Tool E30KV2
E30KR_
Full
Shroud
Half
Shroud
E30KT_
E30KR3_
E30KR30
E30KT_
E30KT3
E30KT_
E30KV1
E22CW
E30KV2
V7-T1-178 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Options
Markings and Legend Plates
Buttons or Lenses with Non-
Standard Horizontal Markings
Markings not listed as
Standard Markings below are
considered non-standard. If
more than one marking is
required on a button or lens,
order non-standard markings.
Ordering Instructions
●Specify catalog number of
blank button or lens of
desired color, plus suffix
“STAMP” for non-standard
or “STD” for standard
markings in order notes.
See Pages V7-T1-171 to
V7-T1-175.
●Specify size, legend desired
and location in order notes
by alphas as shown in
example.
●Do not exceed maximum
number of legend
characters per line.
Ordering Example
Green Type B button to be
marked with non-standard
legend “ALL
ELEVATORS DOWN.”
Catalog No.: E30KB300STAMP
Letter Size: 1/8 in
Pos. A—ALL
Pos. C—ELEVATORS
Pos. F—DOWN
How to Use the Legend
Location Figure
Legend Locations
Standard Markings
Buttons Lenses
Line Position
7
9
A
C
E
7
8
8
8
No. of Characters per Line
AUTO
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERG. STOP
FAST
FORWARD
HAND
HIGH
IN
INCH
JOG
JOG FOR.
JOG REV.
LOW
LOWER
MAN.
OFF
ON
OPEN
OUT
RAISE
RESET
REVERSE
RUN
SLOW
START
STOP
TEST
UP
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR STOP
POWER ON
READY
7
7
A
C
8
8
99
BB
88
5
56
A
CB
6
B
4
4
A
C
4
B
4
E
4
4
D
F
4
E
4
B
545
5
66
BAB
D
CC
ED
45
6
C
978
9
99
BAB
D
CC
FD
78
888
8
88
88
9
C
8
9
9
9
99
9
9
9
9
D
A
B
E
G
D
E
J
G
K
N
G
K
J
M
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
88
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
99
9
9
9
B
B
D
F
E
H
F
K
J
K
9
9
9
8
8
88
8
8
8
8
8
8
A
C
L
F
J
8
8
8
8
8
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.
Type A buttons and Type F lenses
Type B buttons and Type G lenses
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.
Type C buttons
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.
Type D buttons
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.
Type K buttons
Type E buttons and Type J lenses
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.
1/8 in
(3 mm)
High
Char.
3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.
Type F lens only
3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.
3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.
3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.
3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.
3/16 in
(5 mm)
High
Char.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-179
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Legend Arrangements and Legend Locations
Legend Plates E30KN76 or KN76B
Maximum Number and Size of Permissible Legend Characters of Custom Stamped Legend Plates
Legend plates
E30KM1 or KM11
Legend plates
E30KM4 or KM14
Legend plates
E30KM2 or KM12
Legend plates
E30KM5 or KM15
Legend plates
E30KM3 or KM13
Legend plates
E30KM6 or KM16
H
G
KB
JA
DM
CL
BFM
G
B
A
F
E
M
L
H
B
M
M
K
D
BF
E
F
F
A
B
B
D
C
C
D
BF
A
B
B
Type
No.of
Lines
Size and Maximum Number of Characters Per Line
One Span Two Span Three Span
3/32 in
(2.5 mm)
1/8 in
(3 mm)
3/16 in
(5 mm)
3/32 in
(2.5 mm)
1/8 in
(3 mm)
3/16 in
(5 mm)
3/32 in
(2.5 mm)
1/8 in
(3 mm)
3/16 in
(5 mm)
Standard 1 13 10 10 30 22 22 47 34 34
Large 1 13 10 10 30 23 23 47 36 36
2 13 101030 232347 3636
Characters available for non-standard markings
3/32 in (2.5 mm)—1/8 in (3 mm)—3/16 in (5 mm)
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z . / — , 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Legend plates
E30KN76 or KN76B
1/8 in character
size only with a maximum
of six characters.
LINE B
L
I
N
E
A
L
I
N
E
C
V7-T1-180 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Buttons or Lenses with Non-Standard Vertical Markings
Ordering Instructions
●Specify catalog number
of blank button or lens of
desired color, selected
from listings on Pages
V7-T1-171 to V7-T1-175.
●Specify size, legend
desired, location and state
“vertically marked” in
order notes.
Note: Specify either 1/8 or 3/16 in
(3.2 or 4.8 mm) character height.
Do not exceed maximum number
of characters as outlined in table
below.
Ordering Example:
Green Type K button to be
marked with “RUN” “ON.”
Catalog No.: E30KK20STAMP
Letter Size: 3/16 in (4.8 mm)
Vertically Marked
Pos. B—RUN
Pos. E—ON
Legend Plates
Legend plates for Type E30
compact pushbutton and
indicating light operators
hook directly onto the
operator and are clamped in
place when the operator
locking nut behind the panel
is secured.
Two and three span plates
are designed for use where
two or more operators are
mounted adjacent to each
other on minimum
horizontal mounting
centers. These legend plates
mount in the same manner as
single span units.
Maximum Number of Characters
Description Type
Maximum Number of Characters
1/8 in (3.2 mm) 3/16 in (4.8 mm)
Buttons A 7 5
B7 5
C4 3
D5 3
E7 5
Lenses F 7 5
G7 5
J7 5
K3 2
When Ordering Legend Plates
with Markings
●Catalog number of blank
legend plate
●Insert the following in
order notes:
●Legends required
●Size of characters—
3/32, 1/8, 3/16 in (2.4,
3.2, 4.8 mm)
●Positions of legends on
one line standard and
two line large legend
plates by alphas as
shown in sketches on
following page.
Ordering Example:
Three span legend plate to be
marked “MASTER
CONTROL”, “STATION A”
and “STATION B.”
Catalog No.: E30KM3STAMP
Letter Size: 1/8 in (3.2 mm)
Pos. C—MASTER CONTROL
Pos. B—STATION A
Pos. F—STATION B
Blank Legend Plates and Legend Plates
with Markings
Type
One Span
Catalog Number
Black
Standard E30KM1
Large E30KM4
Standard— One Span
Large—One Span
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-181
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Replacement Parts
Replacement Light Units for E30 Components
Replacement Lamps for E30 Illuminated Operators
Replacement Lamps—Incandescent and LED
Note
1E30 blue LED bulbs may not provide sufficient intensity for some applications.
Voltage
AC and DC
Part Numbers—Receptacles without Lamps
Single
Indicating Light
Dual
Indicating Light
Single Light
Single Pushbutton
Single Light
Dual Pushbutton
Dual Light
Dual Pushbutton
Full Voltage Type
6V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567
12V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567
18/24V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567
28V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567
32V 57-2579-3A 57-2568-2A 57-2568-2A — 57-2567
48V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567
120V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567
Transformer Type
120V 42-2672A 42-2663A 42-2663A 42-2671A 42-2664A
208V 42-2672-2A 42-2663-2A 42-2663-2A 42-2671-2A 42-2664-2A
240V 42-2672-3A 42-2663-3A 42-2663-3A 42-2671-3A 42-2664-3A
380V 42-2672-4A 42-2663-4A 42-2663-4A 42-2671-4A 42-2664-4A
480V 42-2672-5A 42-2663-5A 42-2663-5A 42-2671-5A 42-2664-5A
600V 42-2672-6A 42-2663-6A 42-2663-6A 42-2671-6A 42-2664-6A
Description and Part Numbers—Related Parts
Inner lens 28-1008 28-1010 28-1010 28-1010 28-1010
Retaining nut 15-1885 15-1885 15-1885 15-1885 15-1885
Gasket 16-2092 16-2092 16-2092 16-2092 16-2092
Locking ring 52-1116 52-1116 52-1116 52-1116 52-1116
Mfg. Lamp Type Voltage Base Style Application Part Number
6PSB 6V T2 slide E30 transformer and full voltage 28-1022
12PSB 12V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1025
24PSB 24V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1026
28PSB 28V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1027
48PSB 48V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1028
60PSB 60V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1598
120PSB 120V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1029
#259 6.3V T3-1/4 wedge E30 single transformer 28-949
Lamp
Voltage
Incandescent Lamps LED Lamps
Manufacturer’s
Part Number
Base
Style
Eaton’s
Part Number
Eaton’s Part Number
Red Green Yellow Blue 1
6 6PSB T2 slide 28-1022 35-1523 35-1523-2 35-1523-3 35-1523-17
12 12PSB T2 slide 28-1025 35-1523-11 35-1523-12 35-1523-13 35-1523-18
24 24PSB T2 slide 28-1026 35-1523-4 35-1523-5 35-1523-6 35-1523-19
28 28PSB T2 slide 28-1027 35-1523-4 35-1523-5 35-1523-6 35-1523-19
48 48PSB T2 slide 28-1028 35-1523-14 35-1523-15 35-1523-16 35-1523-20
120 120PSB T2 slide 28-1029 35-1523-7 35-1523-8 35-1523-9 35-1523-21
V7-T1-182 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Technical Data and Specifications
Operator Specifications
Reliability Nibs
Electrical Ratings
Contact Blocks
●UL A600/P300 nominal connect 10A
●1NO, 1NC, 2NO, 2NC, 1NO-1NC, early make, late break and
overlapping configurations
●Mechanical positive drive operation on NC contacts
●Palladium alloy contact for logic level or highly corrosive
environments
Maximum Ratings for Logic Level and
Hostile Atmosphere Application Light Unit
Note
1Logic level contact blocks are UL A600/P500 rated per table above.
Description Specification
Climate Conditions
Operating –20° to 150°F (–29° to 65°C)
Te rm i n a l s
Light units Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
Torque—7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Contact block Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
Torque—7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Materials
Operator Zinc base die casting with a copper-nickel-chrome plated finish
Withstands the 200 hr. salt spray test in accordance with MIL Spec. QQ-M-151A and NEMA 4X testing.
Internal parts Including shafts, washers and springs, are made of stainless steel
Buttons and lenses Colorfast, wear resistant, molded acetal resin
Contact blocks Made of molded, heat resistant, mineral filled phenolic
Contact block plungers are molded of nylon filled phenolic
Contacts are silver
Reliability nibs These nibs combine a scrubbing action with high pressure density when the contacts are closed
They push through particles and films found on contact surfaces in industrial environments
Reliability nibs self-adjust to the application—dry circuit, normal or heavy-duty
Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designation A600 and P300
Vac A600 Vdc P300
Description 120V 240V 480V 600V 24/28V 125V 250V
Make and emergency
interrupting capacity (Amps)
60 30 15 12 5.73 1.1 0.55
Normal load break (Amps) 6 3 1.5 1.2 5.73 1.1 0.55
Continuous current (Amps) 10 10 10 10 5 5 5
Heavy-Duty
Dry Circuit
Medium Duty
Description Specification
Maximum amperes 0.5A 1
Maximum volts 120 Vac/Vdc
Description Specification
Bulbs—Average Life
Transformer type 20,000 hrs.
Resistor/direct voltage type 2,500 hrs. min. at rated voltage
LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-183
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.7
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Pushbutton Operators
Combination Pushbutton and Indicating Light Operators
Padlocking Attachment and Half Shroud E30KT7
Legend Plates
Combination Pushbutton and Indicating Light Operators
Indicating Light Operators
Drilling Dimensions—Minimum Spacing 12
Notes
1Dimensions shown allow adequate space for the addition of one or two high legend plates
and color coordinating collars.
2Locating nib hole or notch is 0.136 in (3.5 mm) drill. Alternate to drilling mounting holes use
Greenlee Tool Co. punch (No. 730-S) to punch the hole and (No. 730-K) to punch the notch.
1.75
(44.5)
0.53
(13.5)
0.81
(20.6) 1.72
(43.7) 1.72
(43.7)
1.47
(37.3)
Square 0.88
(22.4) 0.88
(22.4)
1.13
(28.7)
1.88
(47.8)
Panel
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max.
0.78 (19.8) Ext. Button
0.63 (16)
Std.
Button 1 Circ.
Cont. Blocks
2 Circ.
Cont. Blocks
Plunger
Extends to
0.25 (6.4)
0.88
(22.4)
0.88 (22.4) 0.88 (22.4)
Full Voltage
Types DF,
DM and DX
Plunger Extends
to 0.25 (6.4) on
Contact Blocks
Transformer
Types DA – DL
1.75
(44.5)
0.53
(13.5)
0.84
(21.3)
0.81
(20.6) 1.72
(43.7)
1.47
(37.3)
Square
1.13
(28.7)
1.88
(47.8)
Panel
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max.
0.69
(17.5)
1.13
(28.7)
0.31 (7.9)
Dia. Hole
0.5 (12.7)
0.56
(14.2)
1.59
(40.4)
0.75
(19.1)
1.44
(36.6)
0.11 (2.8)
Max.
1.44
(36.6)
0.02
(0.5)
0.78
(19.8) 0.39
(9.9)
Standard
3.06 (77.7) Two Span
0.05 (1.3)
0.08 (1.9)
One Span
4.69 (119.1) Three Span
Large
0.88
(22.4)
Operator
Types E30JA–
E30JW
Operator
Types E30EA–
E30GM
Plungers
Extended
to 0.25 (6.4)
Transformer
or Full Voltage
Light Element
1.75
(44.5)
0.53
(13.5)
0.84
(21.3)
0.81
(20.6) 1.72
(43.7)
1.47
(37.3)
Square
1.13
(28.7)
1.88
(47.8)
Panel
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max.
1.75
(44.5)
0.53
(13.5)
0.84
(21.3)
0.81
(20.6) 1.72
(43.7)
1.47
(37.3)
Square
1.13
(28.7)
1.88
(47.8)
0.88
(22.4)
Panel
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max.
Operator
Types E30BA–
E30BM
Operator
Types E30CA–
E30CM
1.63 a
(41.3)
2.25 a
(57) 0.6
(15)
Drill .14
(3.5)
ø 1.20 (30.5)
V7-T1-184 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Contents
Description Page
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-185
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-185
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-186
Product Selection
Point-of-Purchase Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-188
Non-Illuminated Momentary
Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-189
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-190
Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units . V7-T1-194
Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-195
Illuminated Pushbuttons and
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-196
Push-Pull Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-198
Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-201
Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-204
Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-205
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-209
Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-210
Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-213
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . . V7-T1-216
Joystick Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-217
Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-218
Roto-Push Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-221
Roto-Push Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-222
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-227
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-232
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-241
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-243
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-246
Drawings
Online
Product Description
The 30.5 mm pushbutton line
features a zinc die cast
construction with chrome-
plated housing and mounting
nut. The same durable
construction is also available
with the corrosive resistant
E34 line of pushbuttons.
See E34 section on Pages
V7-T1-256 to V7-T1-290.
Features
●Heavy-duty zinc die cast
construction
●Enclosed silver contacts
with reliability nibs
●Diaphragm seals with
drainage holes
●Grounding nibs on the
operator casing
Benefits
●Reliability nibs improve
contact reliability even
under dry circuit and fine
dust conditions
●Drainage holes prevent
buildup of liquid inside the
operator which can prevent
operation in freezing
environments
●Grounding nibs bit through
paint and other coatings to
provide secure ground
Application Description
Contact Operation
Slow make and break. All
normally closed contacts
have positive opening
operation, i.e., normally closed
contacts are forced open in
the event of contact weld or
spring breakage.
Standards and
Certifications
●CE EN 60947-5-1 and
60947-5-5
●UL 508—File No. 131568
●CSA C22.2 No. 14—File
No. LR68551
Ingress Protection
When mounted in similarly
rated enclosure—
●Standard indicating lights
●UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●IEC IP65
●Most other operators
●UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●IEC IP65
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-185
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Product Overview
Reliability Nibs
Eaton’s contact blocks
feature enclosed silver
contacts with pointed
“reliability nibs” for reliable
performance from logic level
up to 600V. To ensure reliable
switching, nibs bite through
oxide which can form on silver
contacts, eliminating the
need for expensive logic level
blocks for most applications.
Reliability Nibs
Reliability nibs improve
performance in dry circuit,
corrosive, fine dust and other
contaminated atmospheres.
Under normal environmental
conditions, the minimum
operational voltage is 5V and
the minimum operational
current is 1 mA, AC/DC. For
operation under a wider range
of environmental conditions,
logic level contact blocks with
inert palladium tipped
contacts are recommended.
Grounding Nibs
10250T line operators have
“grounding nibs”—four
metal points on the operator
casting designed to bite
through most paints and
other coatings on metal
panels to enhance the ground
connection when the operator
is securely tightened.
Grounding Nibs
Product Identification
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Series
Dry Circuit
Medium Duty
Heavy-Duty
Grounding
Nibs
Mounting Nut Legend Plate Operator
Terminal Clamps
Shipped Ready to Wire
Stackable Contact
Blocks up to 12 Circuits
per Operator
Color Coded Plungers
Red = NC Green = NO
Diaphragm Seal with
Drainage Holes
Liquid Drainage
Eaton’s pushbutton operators
offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator
bushing. Hidden from view by
the mounting nut, these
holes prevent buildup of liquid
inside the operator, which
can prevent operation in
freezing environments.
The holes also provide a route
for escaping liquid in high
pressure washdowns,
effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm
seal, ensuring reliable sealing
in applications even beyond
NEMA 4.
Diaphragm Seal
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole
Drainage Hole
Flexible
Diaphragm
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
Mounting Nut
Colorfast
Molded
Button
V7-T1-186 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Push-Pulls
Note
1Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory.
10250T 10 1–1 1
Operator
10 = Flush
11 = Extended
12 = 40 mm mushroom
17 = 65 mm mushroom
50 = 1/2 shroud vertical mount
51 = 1/2 shroud horizontal mount
Circuit
Blank = Operator only
1= 1NO-1NC
2 = 2NO
3 = 2NC
51 = 1NC
53 = 1NO
Button Color
1 = Black
2 = Red
3 = Green
4 = Yellow
5 = Gray
6 = White
8 = Blue
9 = Orange
10250T 5 63 C47 –1 1
Circuit
Blank = Operator only
1 = 1NO-1NC
2 =2NO
3 =2NC
51 =1NC
53 =1NO
Incandescent
Light Unit
LED
Light Unit
Blank = Non-illuminated
89 = 24V/XFR
63 = 120V/XFR
64 = 208V/XFR
65 = 240V/XFR
82 = 277V/XFR
66 = 380V/XFR
67 = 480V/XFR
68 = 600V/XFR
69 = 6V/FV
70 = 12V/FV
79 = 24V/FV
83 = 32V/FV
80 = 120V/RES
81 = 240V/RES
Blank = Non-illuminated
89L = 24V/XFR
63L = 120V/XFR
64L = 208V/XFR
65L = 240V/XFR
82L = 277V/XFR
66L = 380V/XFR
67L = 480V/XFR
68L = 600V/XFR
97L = Full voltage
Non-illuminated Illuminated
Button Incandescent LED Lens Type
B60 = Black 40 mm
B62 = Red 40 mm
B63 = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
B61 = Green 40 mm
B64 = Blue 40 mm
J60 = Black 65 mm
J62 = Red 65 mm
J63 = Red 65 mm—“E” STOP
J61 = Green 65 mm
J64 = Yellow 65 mm
C47 =
C53 =
C48 =
C49 =
C50 =
C51 =
C52 =
C57 =
C63 =
C58 =
C59 =
C64 =
C60 =
C61 =
C62 =
C65 =
C66 =
C67 =
RD =
ED =
GD =
LD =
AD =
WD =
— =
RS =
ES =
GS =
LS =
AS =
YS =
WS =
— =
RH =
GH =
AH =
Red 40 mm
Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
Green 40 mm
Blue 40 mm
Amber 40 mm
White 40 mm
Clear 40 mm
Red side light
Red side light—“E” STOP
Green side light
Blue side light
Amber side light
Yellow side light
White side light
Clear side light
Red heavy-duty
Green heavy-duty
Amber heavy-duty
LED Voltage
Blank = Non-illuminated
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
Operator
5 = Two-position maintained
4 = Three-position mom push-mom pull
9 = Three-position mt push-mom pull
10 = Three-position mom push-mom pull
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-187
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test
Note
1Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory.
10250T 416 C21 –1 1
Circuit
Blank = Operator only
1 = 1NO-1NC
2 =2NO
3 =2NC
51 =1NC
53 =1NO
Incandescent Lens Color LED Lens Color
C21 = Red
C22 = Green
C23 = Yellow
C26 = White
C24 = Blue
C43 = Amber
C25 = Clear
RD =Red
GD = Green
YD = Yellow
WD =White
LD = Blue
AD =Amber
LED Voltage
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
Incandescent Light Unit LED Light Unit
416 = 24V/XFR
411 = 120V/XFR
412 = 240V/XFR
419 = 277V/XFR
413 = 380V/XFR
414 = 480V/XFR
415 = 600V/XFR
473 = 6V/FV
474 = 12V/FV
476 = 24V/FV
477 = 32V/FV
478 = 48V/FV
471 = 120V/RES
472 = 240V/RES
397L = Full voltage
416L = 24V/XFR
411L = 120V/XFR
412L = 240V/XFR
419L = 277V/XFR
413L = 380V/XFR
414L = 480V/XFR
415L = 600V/XFR
LED Voltage
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
Plastic Glass Lens Color Plastic Glass Lens Color
Standard/Master—Incandescent Standard/Master/PresTest—LED
C1N =
C2N =
C3N =
C6N =
C4N =
C19N =
C5N =
C7N =
C8N =
— =
C12N =
C10N =
C9N =
C11N =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
RP =
GP =
YP =
WP =
LP =
AP =
RG =
GG =
— =
WG =
LG =
AG =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
PresTest—Incandescent
C21 =
C22 =
C23 =
C26 =
C24 =
C43 =
C25 =
C13N =
C14N =
— =
C18N =
C16N =
C15N =
C17N =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
Light Unit Type
Standard—Incandescent Standard—LED
181N =
182N =
198N =
183N =
184N =
185N =
203N =
204N =
206N =
207N =
208N =
201N =
202N =
226N =
227N =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
120V/neon
240V/neon
181L =
182L =
198L =
183L =
184L =
185L =
197L =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full voltage
PresTest—LED
221L =
222L =
223L =
224L =
225L =
297L =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full voltage
PresTest—Incandescent
221N =
222N =
223N =
224N =
225N =
232N =
233N =
235N =
238N =
239N =
231N =
240N =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
Master Test—Incandescent
187N =
189N =
120V/XFR
240 Vac—SS
10250T 203N C1N 1
LED Voltage
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
V7-T1-188 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Product Selection
Point-of-Purchase Packaging
10250T Point-of-Purchase Packaged Pilot Devices
Product Description Catalog Number
Emergency Stop Operators
Red non-illuminated
push-pull
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved
legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP.
10250T5B62-1-POP
Red mushroom
pushbutton
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved
legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP.
10250T32R-POP
Red jumbo
mushroom pushbutton
Engraved EMERG. STOP with 1NO-1NC contact block. 10250T33-POP
Momentary Pushbuttons
Black flush
pushbutton
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved
legend plates: START and JOG.
10250T30B-POP
Red extended
pushbutton
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes one square engraved
legend plate: STOP.
10250T31R-POP
Indicating Lights
Red indicating light Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc with two extra lenses: Green and amber.
Also includes two square engraved legend plates: RUN and JOG.
10250T206NC1N-POP
Red indicating light Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc with two extra lenses: Green and Amber.
Also includes one square engraved legend plate: RUN and JOG.
10250T34R-POP
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Red illuminating
pushbutton
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc with 1NO-1NC contact block and two
extra lenses: Green and amber. Also includes one square
engraved legend plate: POWER ON.
10250T476C21-1-POP
Red illuminating
pushbutton
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc with 1NO-1NC contact block and two
extra lenses: Green and amber. Also includes one square
engraved legend plate: POWER ON.
10250T411C21-1-POP
Selector Switches
Black knob two-position
selector switch
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes three square engraved
legend plates: OFF/ON, HAND/AUTO and RUN/JOG.
10250T20KB-POP
Black knob three-position
selector switch
2NO-2NC contact blocks. Also includes 1 square engraved
legend plate: HAND/OFF/AUTO.
10250T22KB-POP
Black knob three-position
selector switch
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes legend plate:
HAND/OFF/AUTO
10250T21KB-POP
Point-of-Purchase
Packaged Pilot Device
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-189
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Non-Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Pushbutton Units—Flush, Extended, Mushroom Head or Jumbo Mushroom Head Operators
Note
1 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Contact
Type Button Color
Flush Button
Catalog Number
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Mushroom Button
Catalog Number
Jumbo Mushroom 1
Catalog Number
1NO Black 10250T23B 10250T25B 10250T26B 10250T27B
Red 10250T23R 10250T112-53 10250T122-53 10250T172-53
Green 10250T23G 10250T25G 10250T26G 10250T27G
Yellow 10250T23Y 10250T25Y 10250T26Y 10250T27Y
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T17213-53
1NC Black 10250T101-51 10250T111-51 10250T121-51 10250T171-51
Red 10250T102-51 10250T25R 10250T26R 10250T27R
Green 10250T103-51 10250T113-51 10250T123-51 10250T173-51
Yellow 10250T104-51 10250T120-51 10250T124-51 10250T174-51
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T29
1NO-1NC Black 10250T30B 10250T31B 10250T32B 10250T33B
Red 10250T30R 10250T31R 10250T32R 10250T33R
Green 10250T30G 10250T31G 10250T32G 10250T33G
Yellow 10250T30Y 10250T31Y 10250T32Y 10250T33Y
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T33
2NO Black 10250T101-2 10250T111-2 10250T121-2 10250T171-2
Red 10250T102-2 10250T112-2 10250T122-2 10250T172-2
Green 10250T103-2 10250T113-2 10250T123-2 10250T173-2
Yellow 10250T104-2 10250T120-2 10250T124-2 10250T174-2
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T17213-2
2NC Black 10250T101-3 10250T111-3 10250T121-3 10250T171-3
Red 10250T102-3 10250T112-3 10250T122-3 10250T172-3
Green 10250T103-3 10250T113-3 10250T123-3 10250T173-3
Yellow 10250T104-3 10250T120-3 10250T124-3 10250T174-3
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T17213-3
Flush Button
Extended Button
Mushroom Button
Jumbo Mushroom
V7-T1-190 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Pushbuttons
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-illuminated
Notes
1 To order operator with factory assembled extended retaining nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications,
add suffix letter E to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T101E.
2 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
3 Operating force—Standard = 2.4 lb; low force = 1.6 lb.
Button Color Catalog Number Note: To order complete assembled unit
using one composite catalog number,
add contact block and legend plate suffix
to the end of operator catalog number.
Example: 10250T101-1TS33
Flush button 1Black 10250T101
Red 10250T102
Green 10250T103
Yellow 10250T104
Gray 10250T105
White 10250T106
Blue 10250T108
Orange 10250T109
Extended button Black 10250T111
Red 10250T112
Green 10250T113
Yellow 10250T120
White 10250T116
Blue 10250T118
Orange 10250T119
Half shrouded button Vertical Horizontal
Black 10250T501 10250T511
Red 10250T502 10250T512
Green 10250T503 10250T513
Yellow 10250T504 10250T514
Gray 10250T505 10250T515
White 10250T506 10250T516
Blue 10250T508 10250T518
Orange 10250T509 10250T519
Mushroom button Black 10250T121
Red 10250T122
Green 10250T123
Yellow 10250T124
Blue 10250T129
Jumbo mushroom button 2Black 10250T171
Red 10250T172
Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250T17213
Green 10250T173
Yellow 10250T174
Low operating force—
jumbo mushroom 23
Black 10250ED1164-2
Red 10250ED1164-3
Green 10250ED1164-4
Yellow 10250ED1164-5
Clear 10250ED1164
10250T10_
10250T11_
10250T5_
10250T17_
10250T12_
10250ED1164_
Operator
10250T101
Contact Block
10250T1
Legend Plate
10250TS33
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-191
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators
Note
1 NC contacts must be mounted behind lock-down mushroom head operator to ensure lockout.
Description Catalog Number
Black flush and green flush 10250TA66
Black flush and long red 10250TA67
Black flush and red mushroom head 10250TA68
Black flush and lock-down red mushroom head 10250TA69 1
Black flush and red jumbo mushroom head 10250TA76
Green flush and long red 10250TA72
Black long and long red 10250TA73
Green flush and red mushroom head 10250TA77
Green flush and black flush 10250TA75
10250TA_
V7-T1-192 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Lockout Pushbutton Operators with Padlock Attachments
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
The following pushbutton and
mushroom operators include
an integral padlock
attachment for applications
requiring lockout/tagout of
specific machine functions.
They are available in styles
which allow locking of a
button in the down position
(stopped position) or locking a
button in the up position (to
prevent starting). Select the
“Hand” latch type which
functions as a momentary
pushbutton until the operator
presses the button and
moves the padlock
attachment into position for
locking, or choose the
“Spring Loaded” latch type
where the padlock
attachment springs into place
when the button is pressed.
Units accept a customer
supplied 1/4 in padlock.
Padlockable in the Down Position 1
Padlockable in the Up Position 1
Notes
Hand attachment must be manually moved into place for locking. Spring loaded: when operator is pressed—
attachment springs into place. Must be moved manually to release button.
1 Operators can be latched down without a padlock. Padlock not included.
2 Jumbo mushroom heads are not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists.
Operator Type Color Latch Type Catalog Number
Flush head Red Hand 10250TA16
Mushroom head Red Hand 10250TA42
Red Spring loaded 10250TA45
Jumbo head 2Red Hand 10250TA52
Red Spring loaded 10250TA55
Red (EMERG. STOP) Spring loaded 10250ED952
Operator Type Color Latch Type Catalog Number
Mushroom head Black Hand 10250TA41
Green Hand 10250TA43
Jumbo mushroom
head 2
Black Hand 10250TA51
Green Hand 10250TA53
Yellow Hand 10250TA54
10250TA16
10250TA4_
10250TA5_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-193
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Key Pushbutton Operator
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
These devices incorporate an
integral locking mechanism
which enables locking units in
various positions (Locked
Down), locking units to
prevent operation (Locked
Up) or setting unit to lock
when the button is pressed
(Push to Lock), requiring the
key to be inserted to return to
normal operation. With the
key in the center position,
these operators function as a
normal momentary
pushbutton (Free).
Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Key Operators Below
Listed operators have
identical locks and keys
(Key Code H661) Catalog
Number 10250ED824. For
dissimilar lock and key
combinations, see listing on
Page V7-T1-214.
Replacement Keys
Key Pushbutton Operator
Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Only with Button
Note
1 Horizontal mounting available on request.
Description Catalog Number
Replacement keys
(code H661)
10250ED824
Key Position and
Pushbutton Operations
Key Removal
Positions
Vertical Mounting 1
Catalog Number
Three-Position
Lock up Free Lock down All 10250T430
Lock up Free Lock down L and R 10250T431
Lock up Free Lock down C and R 10250T432
Two-Position
Lock up Free — L and C 10250T433
Lock up Free — L 10250T434
— Free Lock down C and R 10250T435
— Free Lock down R 10250T436
— Free Push to lock C and R 10250T437
— Free Push to lock R 10250T438
Description Catalog Number
Latch-in, twist-to-release operator with red mushroom head button 10250ED1043-4
10250T43_
L
C
R
10250ED1043-4
V7-T1-194 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●LED or incandescent
●Full voltage, resistor or transformer type
●Plastic lenses
Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Note
1 For flashing module catalog number 10250TFL1, add suffix code FM to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T75RFM.
Type Voltage Color
LED/Lamp
Number
Illuminated Pushbutton
1NO 1NO-1NC 1NC
Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
LED Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red Bayonet
base
10250T397LRD24-53 10250T397LRD24-1 10250T397LRD24-51
Green 10250T397LGD24-53 10250T397LGD24-1 10250T397LGD24-51
Amber 10250T397LAD24-53 10250T397LAD24-1 10250T397LAD24-51
Yellow 10250T397LYD24-53 10250T397LYD24-1 10250T397LYD24-51
Blue 10250T397LLD24-53 10250T397LLD24-1 10250T397LLD24-51
White 10250T397LWD24-53 10250T397LWD24-1 10250T397LWD24-51
120 Vac/Vdc Red 10250T397LRD2A-53 10250T397LRD2A-1 10250T397LRD2A-51
Green 10250T397LGD2A-53 10250T397LGD2A-1 10250T397LGD2A-51
Amber 10250T397LAD2A-53 10250T397LAD2A-1 10250T397LAD2A-51
Yellow 10250T397LYD2A-53 10250T397LYD2A-2 10250T397LYD2A-51
Blue 10250T397LLD2A-53 10250T397LLD2A-1 10250T397LLD2A-51
White 10250T397LWD2A-53 10250T397LWD2A-1 10250T397LWD2A-51
Transformer 120 Vac Red 10250T411LRD06-53 10250T411LRD06-1 10250T411LRD06-51
Green 10250T411LGD06-53 10250T411LGD06-1 10250T411LGD06-51
Amber 10250T411LAD06-53 10250T411LAD06-1 10250T411LAD06-51
Yellow 10250T411LYD06-53 10250T411LYD06-1 10250T411LYD06-51
Blue 10250T411LLD06-53 10250T411LLD06-1 10250T411LLD06-51
White 10250T411LWD06-53 10250T411LWD06-1 10250T411LWD06-51
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red #757 10250T476C21-53 10250T476C21-1 10250T476C21-51
Green 10250T476C22-53 10250T476C22-1 10250T476C22-51
Amber 10250T476C43-53 10250T476C43-1 10250T476C43-51
Yellow 10250T476C23-53 10250T476C23-1 10250T476C23-51
Blue 10250T476C24-53 10250T476C24-1 10250T476C24-51
Clear 10250T476C25-53 10250T476C25-1 10250T476C25-51
White 10250T476C26-53 10250T476C26-1 10250T476C26-51
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 120MB 10250T471C21-53 10250T471C21-1 10250T471C21-51
Green 10250T471C22-53 10250T471C22-1 10250T471C22-51
Amber 10250T471C43-53 10250T471C43-1 10250T471C43-51
Yellow 10250T471C23-53 10250T471C23-1 10250T471C23-51
Blue 10250T471C24-53 10250T471C24-1 10250T471C24-51
Clear 10250T471C25-53 10250T471C25-1 10250T471C25-51
White 10250T471C26-53 10250T471C26-1 10250T471C26-51
Transformer 120 Vac Red #755 10250T75R 110250T76R 110250T77R 1
Green 10250T75G 110250T76G 110250T77G 1
Amber 10250T75A 110250T76A 110250T77A 1
Yellow 10250T75Y 110250T76Y 110250T77Y 1
Blue 10250T75B 110250T76B 110250T77B 1
Clear 10250T75C 110250T76C 110250T77C 1
White 10250T75W 110250T76W 110250T77W 1
24V Full Voltage
Illuminated Pushbutton
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-195
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Indicating Light Units 1
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●LED or incandescent
●Full voltage, resistor or
transformer type
●Standard and PresTest
types
●Plastic lenses
PresTest—This device
incorporates a press-to-test
feature whereby depressing
the lens disconnects the light
from the source being
monitored and connects
the lamp to a continuously
energized circuit for
immediate detection of
faulty lamps.
Indicating Light Units
Notes
1 Standard indicating lights are rated UL (NEMA) 3S as well.
2 For flashing lamp add letter F to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T34RF.
Type Voltage Color
LED/Lamp
Number
Indicating Light
Catalog Number
PresTest
Catalog Number
LED Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red Bayonet
base
10250T197LRP24 10250T297LRP24
Green 10250T197LGP24 10250T297LGP24
Amber 10250T197LAP24 10250T297LAP24
Yellow 10250T197LYP24 10250T297LYP24
Blue 10250T197LLP24 10250T297LLP24
White 10250T197LWP24 10250T297LWP24
120 Vac Red 10250T197LRP2A 10250T297LRP2A
Green 10250T197LGP2A 10250T297LGP2A
Amber 10250T197LAP2A 10250T297LAP2A
Yellow 10250T197LYP2A 10250T297LYP2A
Blue 10250T197LLP2A 10250T297LLP2A
White 10250T197LWP2A 10250T297LWP2A
Transformer 120 Vac Red 10250T181LRP06 10250T221LRP06
Green 10250T181LGP06 10250T221LGP06
Amber 10250T181LAP06 10250T221LAP06
Yellow 10250T181LYP06 10250T221LYP06
Blue 10250T181LLP06 10250T221LLP06
White 10250T181LWP06 10250T221LWP06
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red #757 10250T206NC1N 10250T235NC21
Green 10250T206NC2N 10250T235NC22
Amber 10250T206NC19N 10250T235NC43
Yellow 10250T206NC3N 10250T235NC23
Blue 10250T206NC4N 10250T235NC24
Clear 10250T206NC5N 10250T235NC25
White 10250T206NC6N 10250T235NC26
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 120MB 10250T201NC1N 10250T231NC21
Green 10250T201NC2N 10250T231NC22
Amber 10250T201NC19N 10250T231NC43
Yellow 10250T201NC3N 10250T231NC23
Blue 10250T201NC4N 10250T231NC24
Clear 10250T201NC5N 10250T231NC25
White 10250T201NC6N 10250T231NC26
Transformer 2120 Vac Red #755 10250T34R 10250T74NR
Green 10250T34G 10250T74NG
Amber 10250T34A 10250T74NA
Yellow 10250T34Y 10250T74NY
Blue 10250T34B 10250T74NB
Clear 10250T34C 10250T74NC
White 10250T34W 10250T74NW
24V Full Voltage
Illuminated Light
120 Vac Transformer
PresTest
V7-T1-196 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
●LED or incandescent
●Full voltage, resistor or transformer type
Operators without Lens
Notes
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color. See Page V7-T1-241 for LED Selection and Page V7-T1-187 for Catalog Numbering
System.
2 Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
3 For flashing lamp, add letter F to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T181NF.
4 Resistant to shock and vibration. For best illumination use amber, yellow or clear lens.
Type Voltage
LED/Lamp
Number
Illuminated
Pushbutton
Catalog Number
Indicating Light
Catalog Number
PresTest
Catalog Number
Master Test
Catalog Number
Incandescent Unit
Full voltage AC/DC 6 #755 10250T473 10250T203N 10250T232N —
12 #756 10250T474 10250T204N 10250T233N —
24 #757 10250T476 10250T206N 10250T235N —
32 #1828 10250T477 10250T207N 10250T238N —
48 #1835 10250T478 10250T208N 10250T239N —
Resistor AC/DC 2120 120MB 10250T471 10250T201N 10250T231N —
240 120MB 10250T472 10250T202N 10250T240N —
Transformer AC only 324 #755 10250T416 — — —
120 10250T411 10250T181N 10250T221N —
240 10250T422 10250T182N 10250T222N —
277 10250T419 10250T198N — —
380 10250T413 10250T183N 10250T223N —
480 10250T414 10250T184N 10250T224N —
600 10250T415 10250T185N 10250T225N —
Neon AC/DC 4 120 NE51H-R22 — 10250T226N — —
240 NE51H-R68 — 10250T227N — —
Solid-state 50/60 Hz only 120 120MB — — — 10250T189N
LED (LEDs not included) 1
Full voltage — Bayonet
base
10250T397L 10250T197L 10250T297L —
Transformer AC only 24 10250T416L — — —
120 10250T411L 10250T181L 10250T221L —
240 10250T412L 10250T182L 10250T222L —
277 10250T419L 10250T198L — —
380 10250T413L 10250T183L 10250T223L —
480 10250T414L 10250T184L 10250T224L —
600 10250T415L 10250T185L 10250T225L —
Illuminated Pushbutton
Indicating Light
PresTest
Master Test
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-197
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Indicating and Master Test Lenses
Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses
PresTest Lenses
Color
Plastic
Catalog Number
Glass
Catalog Number
Red 10250TC1N 10250TC7N
Green 10250TC2N 10250TC8N
Amber 10250TC19N 10250TC9N
Yellow 10250TC3N —
Blue 10250TC4N 10250TC10N
Clear 10250TC5N 10250TC11N
White 10250TC6N 10250TC12N
Color Catalog Number
Red 10250TC21
Green 10250TC22
Yellow 10250TC23
Amber 10250TC43
Blue 10250TC24
Clear 10250TC25
White 10250TC26
Color
Plastic
Catalog Number
Glass
Catalog Number
Red 10250TC21 10250TC13N
Green 10250TC22 10250TC14N
Amber 10250TC43 10250TC15N
Yellow 10250TC23 —
Blue 10250TC24 10250TC16N
Clear 10250TC25 10250TC17N
White 10250TC26 10250TC18N
Plastic
Glass
10250TC2_
Plastic
Glass
V7-T1-198 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Push-Pull Emergency Stops (Compliant with IEC 60947-5-5)
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●Two- and three-position
●Non-illuminated
●LONC contact block
Two-Position Push-Pull Units
Note
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
Operator Position 1
Button Type/Color Lamp Type Voltage Catalog NumberPull Push
X O 40 mm red—illuminated Incandescent Transformer 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T563C47-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP Incandescent Transformer 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T563C53-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP LED Transformer 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T563LED06-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated Incandescent Full voltage 24 Vdc 10250T579C47-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP Incandescent Full voltage 24 Vdc 10250T579C53-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated Incandescent Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T580C47-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP Incandescent Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T580C53-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated Incandescent Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589C47-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP Incandescent Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589C53-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP LED Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589LED06-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated LED Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589LRD06-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP LED Full voltage 24 Vdc 10250T597LED24-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP LED Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T597LED2A-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated LED Full voltage 24 Vdc 10250T597LRD24-71X
X O 40 mm red—illuminated LED Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T597LRD2A-71X
XO40 mm red ———10250T5B62-71X
XO40 mm red ———10250T5B63-71X
XO65 mm red ———10250T5J62-71X
XO65 mm red ———10250T5J63-71X
10250T579C47-71X
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-199
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Two-Position Push-Pull Units
Button and Color Selection
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the table.
Example: 10250T5B64-1X.
3 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Operator Position 1
Button Type/Color 2Contact
Type Catalog Number 2
Pull Push Mounting Location
AB
Two-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
O
X
X
O
40 mm/red 1NO 10250T5B62-1X
1NC
O
X
X
O
40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1NO 10250T5B63-1X
1NC
O
X
X
O
65 mm aluminum engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1NO 10250T5J63-1X
1NC
O
X
X
O
65 mm aluminum engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1NO 10250ED1080-2
Special security
jumbo mushroom head
1NC
Color Suffix Code Catalog Number
Standard—40 mm
Red B62 10250TB62
Red (EMERG. STOP) B63 10250TB63
Green B61 10250TB61
Black B60 10250TB60
Blue B64 10250TB64
Jumbo Mushroom Head 3
(Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm
Red J62 10250TJ62
Red (EMERG. STOP) J63 10250TJ63
Green J61 10250TJ61
Black J60 10250TJ60
Yellow J64 10250TJ64
10250T5B63-1X
10250T5J63-1X
10250T5B62-1X
10250ED1080-2
Standard
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
V7-T1-200 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Three-Position Push-Pull Units
Button and Color Selection
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the table.
Example: 10250T5B64-1X.
3 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Operator Position 1
Button Type/Color 2
Contact
Type Catalog Number 2
Pull Intermediate Push Mounting Location
AB
Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
O
40 mm/black 1NC 10250T9B60-3X
1NC40 mm/red 10250T9B62-3X
40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
10250T9B63-3X
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
O
40 mm/black 1NC 10250T4B60-3X
1NC40 mm/red 10250T4B62-3X
O
X
O
O
X
O
40 mm/black 1NO 10250T10B60-1X
1NC40 mm/red 10250T10B62-1X
Color Suffix Code Catalog Number
Standard—40 mm
Red B62 10250TB62
Red (EMERG. STOP) B63 10250TB63
Green B61 10250TB61
Black B60 10250TB60
Blue B64 10250TB64
Jumbo Mushroom Head 3
(Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm
Red J62 10250TJ62
Red (EMERG. STOP) J63 10250TJ63
Green J61 10250TJ61
Black J60 10250TJ60
Yellow J64 10250TJ64
10250T_
Standard
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-201
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●LED or incandescent
●Full voltage, resistor or transformer type
●Two-position maintained
Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
Jumbo Lens Illuminated E-Stops
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on next page. Example: 10250T579C63-1X.
For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-207.
Operator Position 1
Lamp Type Voltage
Contact
Type
LED/Lamp
Number
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number 2
Maintained—
Pull
Maintained—
Push Mounting Location
AB
O
X
X
O
LED Full Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO Bayonet
base
10250T597LRD24-1X
1NC120 Vac/Vdc 10250T597LRD2A-1X
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589LRD06-1X
120 Vac 10250T563LRD06-1X
O
X
X
O
Incandescent Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO #757 10250T579C47-1X
1NCResistor 120 Vac/Vdc 120MB 10250T580C47-1X
Transformer 24 Vac #755 10250T589C47-1X
120 Vac 10250T563C47-1X
Lamp Button Type/Color Type Voltage
Contact
Type Catalog Number
LED Two-position illuminated maintained push/pull—
50 mm jumbo lens/red
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO
1NC
10250ED1375
LED Three-position illuminated momentary push/pull—
50 mm jumbo lens/red
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC
1NC
10250ED1376
LED Three-position illuminated momentary push/pull—
50 mm jumbo lens/red
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO
1NC
10250ED1377
LED Three-position illuminated maintained push/momentary pull—
50 mm lens/red
Full voltage 1NO
1NC
10250ED1378
Two-Position Push-
Pull Operator
10250ED137_
V7-T1-202 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Lens and Color Selection
Note
1 Clear anodized aluminum and colored lens.
Color
Incandescent
Suffix Code
LED
Suffix Code Catalog Number
Standard—40 mm
Red C47 RD 10250TC47
Red (EMERG. STOP) C53 ED 10250TC53
Green C48 GD 10250TC48
Blue C49 LD 10250TC49
Amber C50 AD 10250TC50
White C51 WD 10250TC51
Clear C52 CD 10250TC52
Side-Lighted Aluminum—40 mm 1
Red C57 RS 10250TC57
Red (EMERG. STOP) C63 ES 10250TC63
Green C58 GS 10250TC58
Blue C59 LS 10250TC59
Amber C64 AS 10250TC64
Yellow C60 YS 10250TC60
White C61 WS 10250TC61
Clear C62 CS 10250TC62
Aluminum Transparent Center—40 mm 1
Red C65 RH 10250TC65
Green C66 GH 10250TC66
Amber C67 AH 10250TC67
Jumbo Lens—50 mm
Red — — 10250TC77
Standard
Side-Lighted
Aluminum
Aluminum Transparent
Center
Jumbo Lens
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-203
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on Page V7-T1-202.
Example: 10250T1079C53-1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-207.
3 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on Page V7-T1-202.
Example: 10250T979C53X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-207.
Operator Position 1
Lamp Type Voltage
Contact
Type
LED/
Lamp
Number
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number 3
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Momentary—
Push Mounting Location
AB
O
X
O
O
X
O
LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO Bayonet
base
10250T1097LRD24-1X
1NC120 Vac 10250T1097LRD2A-1X
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T1089LRD06-1X
120 Vac 10250T1063LRD06-1X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC Bayonet
base
10250T497LRD24-3X
1NC120 Vac 10250T497LRD2A-3X
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T489LRD06-3X
120 Vac 10250T463LRD06-3X
O
X
O
O
X
O
Incan-
descent
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO #757 10250T1079C47-1X
1NCResistor 120 Vac 120MB 10250T1080C47-1X
Transformer 24 Vac #755 10250T1089C47-1X
120 Vac 10250T1063C47-1X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 10250T479C47-3X
1NCResistor 120 Vac 120MB 10250T480C47-3X
Transformer 24 Vac #755 10250T489C47-3X
120 Vac 10250T463C47-3X
Operator Position 1
Lamp Type Voltage
Contact
Type
LED/
Lamp
Number
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number 2
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Momentary—
Push Mounting Location
AB
X
X
O
X
O
O
LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC Bayonet
base
10250T997LRD24-3X
1NC120 Vac 10250T997LRD2A-3X
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T989LRD06-3X
120 Vac 10250T963LRD06-3X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Incan-
descent
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 10250T979C47-3X
1NCResistor 120 Vac 120MB 10250T980C47-3X
Transformer 24 Vac #755 10250T989C47-3X
120 Vac 10250T963C47-3X
Three-Position Push-
Pull Operator
Three-Position Push-
Pull Operator
V7-T1-204 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Potentiometers
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 12, 13
Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate—Linear Type ±10%
Notes
1 Shown with standard aluminum dial plate.
2 Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to catalog number.
Example: 10250T33136. To order separately, see footnote 3 below.
3 Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 in high. For custom stamped legend plates,
order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping.
4 For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing
on Page V7-T1-251.
Potentiometer
Ohms Catalog Number
2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate 23
1000 10250T331
2500 10250T332
5000 10250T338
10000 10250T333
25000 10250T334
50000 10250T335
Operator only 410250T330
Alternative—black plastic large legend with standard markings E34LP99
Vertical or Horizontal 1
One-Hole Mounting
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-205
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Push-Pull Operators
An illuminated push-pull
pushbutton unit, arranged for
one-hole mounting, can
replace two pushbuttons and
a pilot light or the non-
illuminated form can replace
two pushbuttons. These units
are available in three basic
types:
●Maintained—(Two-
position). Maintains in the
pulled or pushed position
until manually actuated to
the opposite mode.
●Momentary—(Three-
position). Spring returns to
an intermediate position
when pulled or pushed and
released.
●Momentary Pull,
Maintained Push—(Three-
position). Spring returns to
intermediate position
when pulled. Maintains in
pushed position until
manually returned to
intermediate (ready to
reset) position. Maintained
stop holds circuit open and
will prevent other series
connected operators from
starting the system.
The operators, buttons,
contact blocks, etc., are
offered as building block
components that can be
intermixed to satisfy many
requirements. This minimizes
the need for a varied and
costly inventory.
Typical Applications
Notes
A and B circuits shown in the application illustrations are defined in the “Application Guide” on the following page.
1 Shown without button on lens.
Control Line—Diagram Operator Circuits Operator Mode
Three-wire
three-position
momentary
Momentary
push and pull
10250T4
2NC
contact block
10250T3
START (mom.) Normal pos.
(maint.)
STOP (mom.)
Momentary
push and pull
10250T10
1NO-1NC
contact block
10250T1
Two-wire
two-position
maintained
Maintained
push and pull
10250T5
1NC
contact block
10250T51
START (maint.) No
intermediate
position
STOP (maint.)
Three-wire
momentary pull
maintained push
Maintained
push and
momentary
pull
10250T9
2NC
contact block
10250T3
START (mom.) Normal pos.
(maint.)
STOP (maint.)
Two-Position
Maintained Push-Pull 1
M
L2L1
OL
M
B Circuit
ACircuit Push-Pull
Operator
M
L2L1
OL
B Circuitor
A
Push-Pull
Operator
M
L2L1
OL
M
B Circuit
ACircuit Push-Pull
Operator
V7-T1-206 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Application Guide
To assist in the selection of
contact blocks, the sketch to
the right shows pictorially by
symbols A and B locations of
contact circuits after
assembly of contact blocks
and adapter to the operator.
The table below shows the
effect of the push and pull
operations on either NO or
NC contacts. (X = contact
closed, O = contact open).
Contact Circuit Locations
Push-Pull Operator Components
Note
1 Maximum of two blocks, four circuits. Special function contact blocks shown on Page V7-T1-237 CANNOT be used with three-position push-pull operators 10250T4,
10250T9 or 10250T10.
Locating Nib
A
B
Type of Operator
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
Contact Block 1Catalog Number
Out—Pull Intermediate In—Push
Contact Block Mounting Location
ABABAB
Two-Position Operator without Lens
Maintained push-pull O
Xor O
X
No intermediate
position
X
Oor X
O
1NO
1NC
10250T5
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
Maintained push-pull with
anti-theft jumbo mushroom
O
Xor O
X
No intermediate
position
X
Oor X
O
1NO
1NC
10250ED1080
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
Three-Position Operator without Lens
Momentary push-pull O
Xor O
X
O
Oor O
X
X
Oor O
O
1NO
1NC
10250T4 1
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
2NO
2NC
Maintained push-momentary pull O
Xor O
X
O
Oor O
X
X
Oor O
O
1NO
1NC
10250T9 1
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
2NO
2NC
Momentary push-pull O
Xor O
X
O
Oor O
O
X
Oor X
O
1NO
1NC
10250T10 1
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
2NO
2ND
10250T579C47-71X
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-207
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
Ordering Example with One Composite Number
Non-illuminated:
10250T5 + 10250TB62 + 10250T1 = 10250T5B62-1X
Incandescent:
10250T5 + 10250T79 + 10250TC47 + 10250T1 = 10250T579C47-1X
LED:
10250T5 + 10250T97L + 10250TC47 + Voltage code + 10250T1 = 10250T597LRD24-1X
06—6 Vac/Vdc
12—12 Vac/Vdc
24—24 Vac/Vdc
48—48 Vac/Vdc
60—60 Vac/Vdc
2A—120 Vac
2D—120 Vdc
Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Note
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color, see Page V7-T1-241.
Light Unit
Type Type Voltage
LED/Lamp
Number Catalog Number
LED
(LEDs not included) 1Full voltage — Bayonet
base
10250T97L
Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
10250T89L
10250T63L
10250T64L
10250T65L
10250T82L
10250T66L
10250T67L
10250T68L
Incandescent Full voltage
AC or DC
6
12
24/28
32
10250T69
10250T70
10250T79
10250T83
Resistor
AC or DC
120
240
120MB 10250T80
10250T81
Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
#755 10250T89
10250T63
10250T64
10250T65
10250T82
10250T66
10250T67
10250T68
V7-T1-208 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Notes
1 Suffix codes should only be used for assembling composite catalog numbers. To order lens above, order by catalog number.
2 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Lens Color
Incandescent
Suffix Code
LED
Suffix Code 1Catalog Number
Standard
Red C47 RD 10250TC47
Red (EMERG. STOP) C53 ED 10250TC53
Green C48 GD 10250TC48
Blue C49 LD 10250TC49
Amber C50 AD 10250TC50
White C51 WD 10250TC51
Clear C52 CD 10250TC52
Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring
Red C57 RS 10250TC57
Red (EMERG. STOP) C63 ES 10250TC63
Green C58 GS 10250TC58
Blue C59 LS 10250TC59
Amber C64 AS 10250TC64
Yellow C60 YS 10250TC60
White C61 WS 10250TC61
Clear C62 CS 10250TC62
Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center
Red C65 RH 10250TC65
Green C66 GH 10250TC66
Amber C67 AH 10250TC67
White C68 — 10250TC68
Jumbo Lens—50 mm
Red — — 10250TC77
Color Suffix Code Catalog Number Legend Plates
For a complete listing
of available legend plates
see Pages V7-T1-232 to
V7-T1-234.
Standard
Red B62 10250TB62
Red (EMERG. STOP) B63 10250TB63
Green B61 10250TB61
Black B60 10250TB60
Blue B64 10250TB64
Jumbo Mushroom Head 2
(Anodized) Aluminum
Red J62 10250TJ62
Red (EMERG. STOP) J63 10250TJ63
Green J61 10250TJ61
Black J60 10250TJ60
Yellow J64 10250TJ64
Standard
Side-Lighted Anodized
Aluminum Ring
Heavy-Duty Aluminum
Jumbo Lens
Standard
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
Standard
Jumbo
P
S
R
T
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-209
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Selector Switch Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●Two-, three- and four-position maintained
●Non-illuminated and illuminated
Two-Position Selector Switch
Three-Position Selector Switch
Four-Position Selector Switch
Color Selection
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained.
3 To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Color Selection table. Example: 10250T20KG.
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Catalog Number 3
Black Lever
Catalog Number 3
Red Knob
Catalog Number 3
Red Lever
Catalog Number 3
AB
XO 1NC 10250T20KB 10250T20LB 10250ED1117-KR 10250ED1117-LR
OX 1NO
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Catalog Number 3
Black Lever
Catalog Number 3
Red Knob
Catalog Number 3
Red Lever
Catalog Number 3
AB
XOO 1NO 10250T21KB 10250T21LB 10250ED1117-2KR 10250ED1117-2LR
OOX 1NO
XOO 1NO 10250T22KB 10250T22LB 10250ED1117-3KR 10250ED1117-3LR
O X O 2NC (Series)
OOX 1NO
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Catalog Number 3
Black Lever
Catalog Number 3
Red Knob
Catalog Number 3
Red Lever
Catalog Number 3
AB
XOOO 1NC 10250T46KB 10250T46LB 10250ED1117-4KR 10250ED1117-4LR
OXOO 1NO
OOXO 1NO
OOOX 1NC
Illuminated Non-Illuminated
Color
Code
Letter Color
Code
Letter Color
Code
Letter Color
Code
Letter Color
Code
Letter Color
Code
Letter
Red
Green
R
G
White
Blue
W
B
Amber
Clear
A
C
Black
Red
B
R
Green
White
G
W
Blue
Orange
L
O
Two-Position
Maintained Switch
MM
Three-Position
Maintained Switch
Three-Position
Maintained Switch
MM
M
Three-Position
Maintained Switch
MM
MM
V7-T1-210 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Selector Switch Selection
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their
varied forms (two-position,
three-position and four-
position) are a big factor
contributing to the great
flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons”
can achieve. Because of their
flexibility, they tend to cause
difficulty with product
selection and application.
The following systematic
approach should simplify
that task.
Cam and contact block
selection is better understood
if you:
●Work with each incoming
and outgoing wire/circuit
separately.
●Recognize the terms NO
and NC only identify the
type of contact by its mode
before mounting to the
operator. The “X-O” table
(Page V7-T1-212) shows
how that contact will act
after assembly to the
operator with the selected
cam shape. X = closed
circuit, O = open circuit.
●Up to six NO or NC
contacts may be mounted
behind each plunger
location for a total of
twelve contacts. Single
circuit contact blocks have
only one plunger with the
other side of the block
“open.” Therefore, single
circuit contact blocks
transmit motion to blocks
behind them only for the
position containing the
circuit.
●Each cam has two
separate lobes, each of
which operates one of the
two contact block plungers
independently of each
other. Those are identified
as position A (locating nib
side) and position B
(opposite of locating nib).
The position designations
give direction in selecting
and mounting of the
contact blocks.
Contact Circuit Locations
Locating Nib
A
B
Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFF-
AUTO selector switch. In this
circuit, one incoming line is
distributed to two other
outgoing circuits by the
switch. The two circuits can
be looked at individually.
Step 1: Elementary
Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your
mind, a simple elementary
diagram of the switching
scheme as follows:
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary
diagram, you can construct an
“X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts
are to be closed (X) or open
(O) in the various positions of
the switch. The “X-O” for the
HAND circuit looks like this:
In this circuit, you want a
contact closed on the left
(HAND) but open in the
center and right.
For the AUTO circuit, the
“X-O” diagram would look like
this:
Putting them together, the
complete “X-O” diagram is:
Once the “X-O” diagram has
been generated the next step
is to select the cam and
contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the
desired “X-O” functions.
The selection tables on the
following pages list the
various types (shapes) of
cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact
and position to achieve the
function outlined in your
“X-O” diagram.
OFF
HAND Outgoing
Circuit
AUTO
Outgoing
Circuit
Incoming
Line
HAND OFF AUTO
XOO
HAND OFF AUTO
OOX
X O O
O O X
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-211
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select
determines the operation of
all contact blocks mounted to
the operator. It is selected on
the basis that it provides the
simplest circuitry for the
desired “X-O” diagram. The
selection tables show all the
“X-O” combinations. For the
purpose of this example, the
applicable portion of those
tables is shown on this page.
Now to make the cam
selection, make a simple
worksheet such as:
It becomes immediately
obvious that cam 3 is the
better choice for two
reasons, (1) the series
combination can be avoided
making it simpler to wire, (2)
only two contacts are
required, which is less
expensive than the three
contacts required by cam 2.
Step 4: Contact Block
Selection.
Having selected the cam,
contact block selection is
simply a matter of gathering
the A position and B position
circuits into pairs which make
up the most convenient contact
block arrangement. If there is
an imbalance in the number of
circuits under A or B, then
single circuit blocks must be
selected for these leftover
circuits.
Back to the worksheet,
having selected cam 3 do
this:
Step 5: Selector Switch
Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose
from the many types of
operators—knob and lever
in various colors or keyed.
Also what combinations of
maintained and spring
return functions are
required. Selection of these
operators can be found on
Page V7-T1-214. For the
example in step 4 you may
want a three-position
maintained black knob,
cam 3—Catalog Number
10250T1323.
The Complete Switch:
10250T1323 with one
10250T2 or, for one
composite catalog number,
10250T21KB found on
Page V7-T1-209.
Diagrams
Circuits shown illustrate
connections to obtain a
selector switch circuit
combination and are shown
with their appropriate line
diagrams. Field wiring of
jumper connections required
as shown.
X = Closed circuit
O = Open circuit
Wiring of Jumper
Connections
Four-position selector
switches are limited to four
contact blocks.
Contact Blocks
For selection and number
of available contact blocks
per operator, see Pages
V7-T1-237 to V7-T1-240.
Cam 2 Cam 3
X O O
O O X
(A)NO-(B)NC
(B)NO
(A)NO
(B)NO
X O X
O O X
ANO
BNO 10250T2
Parallel Connection
Series Connection
Example Selection Table
Two-Position Selector Switch Contact Block Selection
Note
1Wired in series.
No. “X-O” Pattern
Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3
Top A Bottom B Top A Bottom B
1XOO
NO NC NO
—
4 OOX—
NO
—
NO
No.
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Contact Blocks Required to
Accomplish Circuit Function
Top Plunger A Bottom Plunger B
1XO
NC or NC
2OX
NO
or
NO
a
V7-T1-212 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Three-Position Switch—Cam and Contact Block Selection
Four-Position Switch—Contact Block Selection
No.
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function
(Jumpers must be installed where indicated)
Operator with Cam Code #2 Operator with Cam Code #3
Mounting Location Mounting Location
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
1X O O
NO NC NO
2XXO
NC NC
3X O X
NO
NO NO
4OOX
NO NO
5O X X
NC NO
NC
6O X O
NC NC NC
No.
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Function
No.
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Function
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Mounting Location Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Mounting Location
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
1XOOO
NC
10XOXO
NC
NO
2OXOO
NO
3OOXO
NO
11XXXO
NC
NO NO
4OOOX
NC
5XOOX
NC NC
12OXXX
NO NC
NO
6OXXO
NO NO
7OOXX
NO NC
13XOXX
NO
NC NC
8XXOO
NC NO
9OXOX
NO
NC
14XXOX
NC NO
NC
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-213
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Selector Switch Operators
Key Operators
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Key Operators with Cam
Notes
1 Horizontal mount, key removal #1 keyed selector switch, cam 1 shown.
2 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
3 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and tables on
Pages V7-T1-210, V7-T1-211 and V7-T1-212.
4 Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page V7-T1-214. Add key removal code no. to listed catalog number.
Example: 10250T15112.
Positions Operator Action 2Cam Code 3
Optional Key
Removal Positions 4
Vertical Mounting
Catalog Number
Horizontal Mounting
Catalog Number
Two-position—60° throw 1 1, 2, 3 10250T1511_ 10250T1611_
12 10250T1571_ 10250T1581_
Three-position—60° throw 2 1–7 10250T1522_ 10250T1622_
310250T1523_ 10250T1623_
21, 4, 5 10250T1532_ 10250T1632_
310250T1533_ 10250T1633_
24 10250T1542_ 10250T1642_
310250T1543_ 10250T1643_
22, 4, 6 10250T1652_ 10250T1662_
310250T1653_ 10250T1663_
Four-position—40° throw 7 7 10250T1677_ 10250T1687_
Two-Position
Maintained 1
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
V7-T1-214 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Key Removal Positions
Note: Key removal in “spring
return from” positions not
recommended.
Replacement Keys or Dissimilar
Locks for Key Operators
Operators listed on Page
V7-T1-214 have identical
locks and keys (Key Code
H661) Catalog Number
10250ED824. For dissimilar
lock and key combinations,
see listing on this page.
Replacement Key
Selector Switch Operators with
Dissimilar Locks and Keys
(UL [NEMA] 4, 4X and 13)
The locks in all key operators
listed on Pages V7-T1-193,
V7-T1-214 and V7-T1-351 are
identical and use key code
number H661. Two keys are
supplied with every lock. For
additional code number H661
keys, order Catalog Number
10250ED824. For others,
order 10250ED1130 and
designate lock number.
When dissimilar locks for
each operator or each group
of operators are required,
select from the lock and key
combination listed below.
When Ordering Operator
Only or a complete control
unit with a substitute lock,
order from table below and
add “except Lock and Key
Code No. …”
“H” Series Locks without
Master Key—with Key Slot
Cover
“M” Series Locks with
Master Key—with Key Slot
Cover
Master Keys for Above
Locks
Selector Switch Operators with Caps
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Selector Switch Operators with Caps
Notes
1 Black knob selector switch, cam 1 shown.
2 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
3 Field convertible to horizontal mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap.
4 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and
tables on Pages V7-T1-210, V7-T1-211 and V7-T1-212.
5 Black lever selector switch, cam 3 shown.
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
1Right only
2Left only
3Right and left
4Center only
5Right and center
6Left and center
7All positions
L
C
R
Description Catalog Number
Replacement keys
(code H661)
10250ED824 Lock and Key Code Numbers
H501 H635 H663
H620 H639 H675
H621 H643 H683
H634 H654 H688
Lock and Key Code Numbers
MD1 MD14 ME8 MJ6
MD2 MD15 ME11 MJ10
MD3 MD16 ME16 MJ11
MD4 MD19 ME17 MJ13
MD5 MD20 ME18 MJ15
MD7 ME2 ME19 MJ16
MD9 ME3 MJ1 MD17
MD10 ME5 MJ3
MD11 ME6 MJ4
MD13 ME7 MJ5
Application Catalog Number
For code:
MD1–MD20 10250ED825-3
ME2–ME18 10250ED825-4
MJ1–MJ16 10250ED825-5
Positions Operator Action 2
Black Knob Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 3
Black Lever Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 3
Cam Code 4Catalog Number Cam Code 4Catalog Number
Two-position—60° throw 1 10250T1311 110250T3011
110250T1371 110250T3071
Three-position—60° throw 2 10250T1322 210250T3022
310250T1323 310250T3023
210250T1332 210250T3032
310250T1333 310250T3033
210250T1342 210250T304
310250T1343 310250T3043
210250T1352 210250T3052
310250T1353 310250T3053
Four-position—40° throw 7 10250T1367 710250T3067
Two-Position
Maintained 1
Three-Position
Maintained 5
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-215
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Selector Switch Operators without Caps
Operators can be ordered
with caps assembled to
them by adding the code
number from the table on
this page to the end of
catalog number below.
Example: 10250T4011KB
Selector Switch Operators without Caps
Operating Caps
Notes
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
2 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and
tables on Pages V7-T1-210, V7-T1-211 and V7-T1-212.
3 Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only.
Positions Operator Action 1Cam Code 2Catalog Number
Two-position—60° throw 1 10250T4011
110250T4081
Three-position—60° throw 2 10250T4022
310250T4023
210250T4032
310250T4033
210250T4042
310250T4043
210250T4052
310250T4053
Four-position—40° throw 7 10250T4067
Color
Knob
Catalog and
Code Number
Lever
Catalog and
Code Number Color
Lever 3
Catalog and
Code Number
Coin Slot
Catalog and
Code Number
Black 10250TKB 10250TLB Black 10250TSB 10250TCB
Red 10250TKR 10250TLR Red 10250TSR 10250TCR
Green 10250TKG 10250TLG Green 10250TSG 10250TCG
Yellow 10250TKY 10250TLY Yellow 10250TSY 10250TCY
White 10250TKW 10250TLW White 10250TSW 10250TCW
Gray 10250TKA 10250TLA Gray 10250TSA 10250TCA
Blue 10250TKL 10250TLL Blue 10250TSL 10250TCL
Orange 10250TKD 10250TLO Orange 10250TSO 10250TCO
Two-Position Selector
Switch Maintained
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
Knob
Lever
Lever for Use with
Maintained Operators
Coin Slot
V7-T1-216 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators
Illuminated Selector Switches without Caps
Operator without Knob or Lever
Notes
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
2 For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection tables on Pages V7-T1-210, V7-T1-211 and V7-T1-212.
3 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
4 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-241.
5 Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
Positions Operator Action 1
Transformer Type—50/60 Hz
6 Volt #755 Lamp
Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 4
Lamps: 6V—#755, 12V—#756, 24V—#757,
48V—#1835, 120/240V—120MB
Cam
Code 2Voltage
Code Number and
Catalog Number 3
Cam
Code 2Voltage
Code Number and
Catalog Number 3
Two-position—60° throw 1 24 10250T5961 1610250T6201
120 10250T5971 12 10250T6211
208 10250T6511 24 10250T6221
240 10250T5981 48 10250T6231
380 10250T5991 120 10250T6361
480 10250T6001 240 510250T6371
600 10250T6011
Three-position—60° throw + 2 or 3 24 10250T602_ + 2 or 3 6 10250T624_
120 10250T603_ 12 10250T625_
208 10250T652_ 24 10250T626_
240 10250T604_ 48 10250T627_
380 10250T605_ 120 10250T638_
480 10250T606_ 240 510250T639_
600 10250T607_
+ 2 or 3 24 10250T654_ + 2 or 3 6 10250T612_
120 10250T620_ 12 10250T632_
208 10250T655_ 24 10250T642_
240 10250T656_ 48 10250T672_
380 10250T657_ 120 10250T622_
480 10250T658_ 240 10250T682_
600 10250T659_
+ 2 or 3 24 10250T660_ + 2 or 3 6 10250T613_
120 10250T621_ 12 10250T633_
208 10250T661_ 24 10250T643_
240 10250T662_ 48 10250T673_
380 10250T663_ 120 10250T623_
480 10250T664_ 240 10250T683_
600 10250T665_
+ 2 or 3 24 10250T614_ + 2 or 3 6 10250T628_
120 10250T615_ 12 10250T629_
208 10250T653_ 24 10250T630_
240 10250T616_ 48 10250T631_
380 10250T617_ 120 10250T640_
480 10250T618_ 240 510250T641_
600 10250T619_
Four-position—40° throw 7 24 10250T6087 7610250T6327
120 10250T6097 12 10250T6337
208 10250T6547 24 10250T6347
240 10250T6107 48 10250T6357
380 10250T6117 120 10250T6427
480 10250T6127 240 510250T6437
600 10250T6137
Two-Position Selector
Switch Maintained
MM
MM
M
MS
M
MS
M
SS
M
MM
MM
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-217
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Illuminated Knobs and Levers
Joystick Units
Joystick Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Notes
1 Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer), red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
2 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
3 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
4 Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa.
Color 1
Knob
Code Number and
Catalog Number
Lever
Code Number and
Catalog Number
Red 10250TER 10250TFR
Green 10250TEG 10250TFG
Yellow 10250TEA 10250TFA
Blue 10250TEL 10250TFL
Clear 10250TEC 10250TFC
White 10250TEW 10250TFW
Amber 10250TEM 10250TFM
Operator Position 2
Operator
Action 3
Contact
Type
Two-Position
Assembled Unit
Catalog Number 4
Up
Center
Down
Mounting Location
AB
XOO 1NC 10250T452-3X
OOX 1NC
Knob
Lever
Two-Position Joystick
M
S
S
V7-T1-218 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Joysticks
Two-Position Joystick Operators
The device mounts in the
standard 30.5 mm mounting
hole. Allow sufficient panel
space for lever movement.
The maximum travel of the
knob operator (full up to full
down) is 2.2 in (24°)
momentary, 2.5 in (30°)
maintained, but ample space
for lever operation must be
allowed. These operators are
field convertible from
momentary to maintained
operation or vice versa.
The use of NC contacts is
preferred because they
provide positive drive contact
opening and a direct
relationship between lever
movement and affected
terminal, i.e., up movement
affects the top terminals.
Application Caution
Joystick operators are not
recommended on certain DC
applications above 24 Vdc
which may involve lightly
engaging the contacts
(teasing) to achieve speed
control, positioning, jogging,
etc. Excessive arcing and
deterioration of the contacts
will occur.
Two-Position Joystick Operators—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Contact Block Operation and Selection
A and B Mounting Location
Notes
1 Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa. To expedite shipment of maintained types,
order momentary operator 10250T452 which is a stocked device.
2 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
3 See above for “A” and “B” mounting location.
4 NO = normally open, NC = normally closed, LONC = late opening normally closed.
5 Four circuits in single block depth—rated 300V max.
Contact Block Limitations
Two-Position Operator Only—AC Applications Only
Description 1Catalog Number
Momentary Mode
4NC contact blocks max.
3NO contact blocks max.
Maintained Mode
2 contact blocks max.
Momentary up and down 10250T452
Maintained up—momentary down 10250T4521
Maintained down—momentary up 10250T4522
Maintained up and down 10250T4525
Handle Position 2
Contact Block
Type 4Catalog Number
Up
Center
Down
Mounting Location 23
Top A Bottom B
XOO1NC 10250T51
OOX1NC 10250T51
OXO2LONC (Series) 10250T45
XOO1NC 10250T3
OOX1NC
X X O 1LONC 10250T45
OXX1LONC
XOO1NC 10250T44 5
OOX1NO
OOX1NC
XOO1NO
Two-Position Joystick
Operator
Up
Center
Down
Locating Nib
Top
Contacts
Bottom
Contacts
Center
All NC and NO Contacts
Are Open (1/2 Way),
Late Opening NC Is Closed
Down
NC Contact at Bottom
Is Closed, NO at
Top Is Closed
Up
NC Contact at Top
Is Closed, NO at
Bottom Is Closed
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-219
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Four-Position Joystick Operators
The joystick operated control
unit is intended for AC
application only. For other
use, see Application
Caution on preceding page.
The panel area required for
the four-position operator is
equivalent to two standard
pushbutton operators.
The latch holds the lever in
the center position. The
trigger latch must be released
before lever can moved into
any position.
Four-Position Joystick Operators—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Field Conversion—Gate
The factory assembled four-
position operator is
assembled with a gate
arranged for four handle
positions.
Handle Positions
Three additional gates,
supplied with every operator,
allow on the job conversion to
three- or eight-position
operation as illustrated.
Two-, Three- or Eight-
Position Operation
The eight-position gate
controls the four functions
shown as “Up,” “Down,”
“Left” and “Right.” The
remaining four diagonal
positions each actuate two
adjacent functions; for
example, “Left Down”
actuates both “Left” and
“Down.” The operator may
be arranged for spring return
of handle to center position,
or maintained in up to eight
positions (see description of
maintained position operator).
Adjacent Functions
Maintained Position
For maintained position (non-
spring return), locate required
maintained position or
positions of operating lever
and add appropriate suffix
number to the catalog
number selected from the
table above.
Maintained Positions
On an eight-position gate,
when an adjacent vertical and
horizontal position are both
maintained, the included
diagonal position is also
maintained.
Note
1Momentary operators—spring return to center. For maintained operators add suffix code from table on this page.
Example: 10250T45110. Operator without latch, maintained in left and right positions.
Contact Block Limitations Description 1Catalog Number
Operator Only—AC Application Only
Four contact blocks max.—two in each position Four-position—without latch 10250T451_
Four-position—with latch 10250T461_
Hole Plug
Four contact blocks max.—two in each position To plug unused hole 10250TA7
Four-Position Joystick
Operator
Four-Position Joystick
Operator with Latch
Four-Position
Gate
or
Two-Position
Gate
Eight-Position
Gate
Three-Position
Gate
or or or
Up
Right
Up
Left
Up
Down Right
Down
RightLeft
Left
Down
Maintained Positions Suffix
NumberUp Down Left Right
X— —— 1
—— — — 2
—X — — 3
—— X — 4
—— — — 5
X— X — 6
X— —X 7
—X X — 8
—X — X 9
—— X X 10
XX X — 11
XX —X 12
X— X X 13
—X X X 14
XX X X 15
V7-T1-220 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Contact Block Operation
Contact blocks mount directly to the back of the operator. For
reliable operation, the maximum number of contact blocks that
should be installed behind each operator lever is two (four total).
The figure below identifies the circuits activated by each of the
eight possible lever positions. Contact block plungers 1, 2, 3, 4
are depressed (change state) when handle is in the position
indicated by arrows below.
Circuit Activation
Note: Joystick in its resting state, center position, does not activate
contact block plungers.
Ordering Example:
Suppose you are looking for a four-position momentary joystick
without a latch and the following circuit arrangements.
X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit.
Example Circuit Arrangements
The contact blocks and their mounting locations would be as
follows:
Example Contact Blocks and Locations
A complete bill of material for this example would include:
Example Order
Blank Legend Plates for Joystick Operators
When ordering engraved legend plates, order by catalog number
and insert the following into order notes:
●Legend required
●Size of characters: 3/16,
1/8, 3/32 in (4.8, 3.2, 2.4 mm)
●Location by letter (A–N)
Locations K and M can accommodate up to two lines
horizontally; L and N up to two lines vertically.
Maximum number of characters:
●Horizontal
3/16 in—13, 1/8 in—14, 3/32 in—19
●Vertical
3/16 in—10, 1/8 in—13, 3/32 in—14
Ordering Example:
Two-position legend plate to be marked “UP” “DOWN.”
Catalog No. 10250TJ2S4STAMP
Letter Size: 3/16 in (4.8 mm)
Pos. K—UP
Pos. M—DOWN
Two-Position
Four-Position
Circuit Up Down Left Right
1st X X X X
2nd X O O X
Qty. Catalog Number
110250T451
210250T2
210250T1
1
2
3
4
NO
2nd
Circuit 1st
Circuit
10250T1 10250T2
NC
NC
NO
10250T1 10250T2
NO
NO
NO
NO
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Blank Plate
10250TJS3 10250TJS4
Engraved Plate
10250TJS3STAMP 10250TJS4STAMP
Catalog Number Catalog Number
Blank Plate
10250TJS1 10250TJS2
Engraved Plate
10250TJS1STAMP 10250TJS2STAMP
K
M
2.19
(55.6)
Sq.
NL
K
M
A
B
J
D
F
E
C
HG
A
B
J
D
F
E
C
HG
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-221
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Roto-Push Units
Two-Position Momentary
Complete assembled two-
position Roto-Push® Units are
listed below. These operators
have black flush buttons and
are arranged for vertical
mounting. Order legend
plates separately.
Mounting Location
Roto-Push Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Two-Position Latched
The two-position Roto-Push
Latch Unit is fully assembled
and only requires a legend
plate for a great variety of
applications. When the
selector collar is in the
extreme left position, the
button is in the free or normal
position and can be operated
as a standard pushbutton.
Rotating the collar to the
extreme right position
automatically depresses and
latches the button in the
depressed position. The
white filled groove in the
button indicates the selector
collar position. The selector
collar has spring return to the
left position except when in
the extreme right latched
position.
Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode
Notes
1X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2Roto-Push assembled with contact blocks.
Locating
Nib
A
B
Typical Applications
(Most Common Examples)
Operator Position 1
Contact
Type Catalog Number 2
Collar Left Collar Right
Mounting Location
Normal Depressed Normal Depressed A B
Two-Position
FORWARD/REVERSE;
HIGH/LOW; OPEN/CLOSE;
UP/DOWN; etc.
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
1NO 10250T2411-2
1NO
JOG/RUN; MAN./AUTO;
etc.
O
O
X
O
O
X
X
X
1NO 10250T24111-2
1NO
RUN/JOG; START/JOG;
etc.
O
X
X
X
O
O
X
O
1NO 10250T24111-1
1NC
SAFE/RUN; etc. O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
1NO 10250T2415-2
1NO
Roto-Push—Black
Flush Button
Color and Type
of Button
Contact
Block
Vertical Mounting
Catalog Number
Red long 1NC
2NC
10250T72
10250T73
Red Long
V7-T1-222 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Roto-Push Operators
Roto-Push Components
A Roto-Push control unit
combines the function of a
pushbutton and a selector
switch. The contacts are
operated by the combined
action of rotating the outer
collar and pushing a button
contained in the collar.
In selecting the cam and
contact blocks for the listed
function, the analysis involves
considering the function with
the collar rotated to the given
position with the button free
(designated as “N”) and then
in that same position with
the button depressed
(designated “D”). This is done
for each rotational position of
the collar.
When Ordering Specify
●Catalog number of
operator with cam code
suffix from tables below
and on following pages,
Example: 10250T2411.
●Catalog number(s) for
contact blocks and legend
plates if required.
●To select the cam and
contact blocks needed for
two-position and three-
position switches, use the
tables on following pages.
Operator and Cam
Two-Position Roto-Push Operator—Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode
Special Rotor Latch
This differs from the other
Roto-Push operators in that
as the collar is rotated to the
right it depresses the button
and releases the button when
rotated left. But the button in
the released position can be
momentarily pushed
independent of the collar or
its position. As the button is
depressed by rotating the
collar, the button also rotates
and indicates its mode by a
white line on the button face.
This button can be used as an
emergency stop or latched
stop.
Special Rotor Latch—
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Note
1Not to be used for emergency stop application.
Color and
Type of
Button
Cam Code No.
Select from Tables
Vertical Mounting
Catalog and
Code Number
Horizontal Mounting
Catalog and
Code Number
Black flush + 1 to 18 10250T241_ 10250T251_
Red flush 110250T242_ 10250T252_
Green flush 10250T243_ 10250T253_
Black long 10250T261_ 10250T271_
Red long 110250T262_ 10250T272_
Green long 10250T263_ 10250T273_
Operator and Cam
Color and Type
of Button
Vertical Mounting
Catalog Number
Red long 10250T3213
Black long 10250T3214
Special Roto Latch—
Red Long Button
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-223
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push
Series and Parallel
Connections
The connections are not
made at the factory. They are
illustrated in the selection
table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.
Circuit Location
Letters “A” and “B”
represent the locations which
the two circuits of a contact
block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the
operator.
Note
1N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
Combination
Number
Collar Position
Cam Code 1 Cam Code 2 Cam Code 3 Cam Code 4 Cam Code 5 Cam Code 6
Circuit Sequence 1
NDND
1 OOOX — — —
2 OOXO— — — —
3 OOXX— — — —
4OXOO ———
5OXOX — ——
6 OXXO——————
7 OXXX— — A or B NO —
8 XOOO— — A or B NC —
9 XOOX——————
10 X O X O — — —
11 X O X X — — —
12 XXOO— — — —
13 XXOO— — — —
14 XXXO — — —
ANOANO
ANO
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANO
BNO
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANO
BNO ANO
BNO
BNO
BNC
BNC
BNC
ANC
BNC ANC
BNC
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANO
ANC
ANC
ANC
Series Connection
Parallel Connection
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANO
Locating
Nib
A
B
V7-T1-224 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push, continued
Series and Parallel
Connections
The connections are not
made at the factory. They are
illustrated in the selection
table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.
Circuit Location
Letters “A” and “B”
represent the locations which
the two circuits of a contact
block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the
operator.
Note
1N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
Combination
Number
Collar Position
Cam Code 10 Cam Code 11 Cam Code 12 Cam Code 13 Cam Code 14
Circuit Sequence 1
NDND
15 OOOX— — — —
16 OOXO— A or B NC
17 OOXX — — —
18 OXOO — —
19 OXOX— — —
20OXXO————
21 OXXX ——
22 XOOO ——
23XOOX————
24 XOXO— — —
25 XOXX — —
26 XXOO — — —
27 X X O O — A or B NO
28 XXXO— — — —
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANC
ANC ANC
BNO
BNO
ANO
BNC
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNO
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANC
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANO
ANCBNC
ANC
BNO
ANO
BNC
BNC
BNC
BNC
ANO
ANO
ANO
BNC
ANC
Series Connection
Parallel Connection
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANO
Locating
Nib
A
B
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-225
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push
Series and Parallel Connections
The connections are not made at the factory.
They are illustrated in the selection table as
requirements, but must be made on the job.
Circuit Location
Letters “A” and “B” represent the locations
which the two circuits of a contact block will
occupy in relation to the locating nib of the
operator.
Notes
1N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
2Limited to 4 contact blocks. See Note on Page V7-T1-238.
Combination
Number
Collar Position
Cam Code 7 Cam Code 8 Cam Code 9 Cam Code 15 2Cam Code 16 Cam Code 17 Cam Code 18
Circuit Sequence 1
NDNDND
1 OOOOOX — —
2 OOOOXX — — — — —
3 OOOXOO — — — — —
4 OOOXOX ——————
5 OOOXXX—— ————
6 OOXXOO— —————
7 OOXXOX— —————
8 OOXXXO ——————
9 OOXXXX ——————
10 OXOOOO —
11 OXOOOX — — — —
12OXOOXX————— —
13OXOXOO——————
14OXOXOX——————
15 OXXXOO — —————
16 OXXXOX — —————
17 OXXXXX ——————
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANC
BNO
2
BNO
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANO
BNC
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANO
2
BNO
ANO
BNO
BNO
ANC
BNO
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANO
ANO
2
ANO
BNO
BNC
ANO
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANO
ANO
BNO
ANO
ANO
BNO
ANO
BNO
ANO
Series Connection
Parallel Connection
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANO
Locating
Nib
A
B
V7-T1-226 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push, continued
Series and Parallel Connections
The connections are not made at the factory.
They are illustrated in the selection table as
requirements, but must be made on the job.
Circuit Location
Letters “A” and “B” represent the locations
which the two circuits of a contact block will
occupy in relation to the locating nib of the
operator.
Notes
1N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
2Limited to 4 contact blocks. See Note on Page V7-T1-238.
Combination
Number
Collar Position
Cam Code 7 Cam Code 8 2Cam Code 9 Cam Code 15 Cam Code 16 Cam Code 17 Cam Code 18
Circuit Sequence 1
NDNDND
18 XOOOOO ——————
19 XOOOXX — —————
20 XOOOXO — —————
21 XOXXOO————— —
22 XOXXXX — —
23 XOXXXO — — — — —
24 XOXOXO — — — — —
25 XOXOXX — — — — —
26 XXOOOO — ————
27 XXOOOX ——————
28 XXOOXO— —————
29 XXOOXX— ————
30 XXXXOO — — — — —
31 XXXXXO — — —
32 XXXOXO — — — — —
33 XXXOXX — — — — —
BNC
ANC
ANC
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANC
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANC
ANCBNC
BNO
ANC
ANC
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANC
2
ANC ANC
BNC
2
ANC
BNC
ANO
BNC
BNO
ANC
BNO
ANC
BNC ANC
BNC
ANC
BNC
ANO
BNC
BNC
ANO
2
BNC
BNC
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANC
Series Connection
Parallel Connection
BNC
ANO
BNC
ANO
Locating
Nib
A
B
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-227
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Accessories
Padlocks not included with
padlocking attachments. For
operators with built-in
padlock attachment, see
Page V7-T1-192.
Accessories
Description Catalog Number
Padlock Attachments
Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock.
Will not lock NO contact.
10250TA2
Padlocking Attachment for Use with Extended Pushbutton
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock.
10250TA26
Padlocking Cover Guard
Cover locked over flush button makes it unaccessible or on extended button
locks NC contacts open. Takes 1/4 in shank size padlock.
10250TA36
Padlock Hasp or Flip-Up Guard
When used with a 1/4 in padlock, makes flush and long button and knob selector
switch unaccessible, but not locked down. Without the padlock, it is a flip-up guard.
Padlock hasp can be removed before assembly.
10250TA38
Padlocking Attachment for Use with Flexible Weather Resistant Boot
Used on long button operators. Stainless steel. Use only for locking NC contacts open.
10250TA63
Padlock Attachment
For use with illuminated pushbuttons and maintained push-pull operators having
standard button or lens only. Use 1/4 in padlock. Locks in down position only.
10250TA64
Padlocking Attachment for Non-Illuminated Knob Selector Switches
Provision for up to 5, 1/4 in padlocks.
10250TA11
10250TA2
10250TA26
10250TA36
10250TA38
10250TA63
10250TA64
10250TA11
V7-T1-228 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Accessories, continued
Notes
1 Should not be used on flush button for STOP function.
2 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.
Description Catalog Number
Shrouds and Guards
Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator
Prevents accidental operation. (Not for push-pull operators.)
10250TA6
Extended Retaining Nut
Replaces standard nut and provides guard for flush head pushbutton operators.
10250TA12
Guard for Illuminated Pushbutton 10250TA15
Shroud
For jumbo mushroom head operator.
Gray 10250TA56
Yellow 10250TA56Y
Half Shroud—Yellow
For jumbo mushroom head operator.
10250ED1241
Fingerproof Shroud—10 per package
Fits new style contact blocks and light units.
10250TA101
Boots
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot
For use with button operators (extended buttons preferred).
Temperature to –25°F (–32°C).
(See Page V7-T1-231 for 10250TA96 Tightening Tool.)
Black 10250TA3
Red 10250TA4 1
Green 10250TA10
Transparent Boot
For regular illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest—
Temperature to –38°F (–39°C). 2
10250TA25
Boot for Flush Pushbutton
Clear 10250TA46
Black 10250TA47
Red 10250TA48
Green 10250TA49
10250TA6
10250TA12
10250TA15
10250TA56_
10250ED1241
10250TA101
10250TA_
10250TA25
10250TA4_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-229
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Accessories, continued
Notes
1 Component only. Not to be used for custom built (factory assembled) stations.
2 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.
Description Catalog Number
Hardware and Kits
Thrust Washers—
To meet Ford Motor Co. mounting specifications.
10250TK3
Contact Block Tape Seal—
Seals plunger openings on last contact block. Order in multiples of 10 pieces.
10250TK5
Selector Switch Operator Gasket—
Seals out dust from getting in-between the cam and contact block plungers.
Supplied as standard with all selector switches.
56-9337
Special Retaining Nut—
To accommodate thick panel:
Indicating lights 10250TA30
PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches 10250TA31
Terminal Block—
Two terminals, each will accommodate two wire terminations.
10250TA62
Spacer Ring—
Used when legend plate is not required.
10250TA8
Stacking Screw—
Replaces transformer mounting screws on indicating light so terminal block
10250TA62 can be mounted to light to support and connect a series resistor.
This screw also fits all contact blocks. Order in multiples of 10.
10250TA79
Base Mounting Spacers 1—
Equivalent to contact block in depth
(one block deep).
10250TA22
Complete with screws, washers, etc.
(two block deep).
10250TA23
Grounding Kits—
Kits consist of a ring connector and a #6 screw for mounting connector to rear
of contact block mounting screw.
All components except standard indicating lights and PresTest indicating lights. 10250TKG1
Standard indicating lights 10250TKG2 2
PresTest indicating lights 10250TKG3 2
Contact Block Terminal Jumpers—
Available in multiples of 100 only.
Terminal to terminal—within block (short)
100 per pkg. 10250TA70
1000 per pkg. 10250TA70-2
Terminal to terminal—block to block (long)
100 per pkg. 10250TA71
1000 per pkg. 10250TA71-2
10250TA79
10250TK3
10250TK5
56-9337
10250TA3_
10250TA62
10250TA8
10250TA2_
10250TKG_
10250TA7_
V7-T1-230 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Accessories, continued
Note
1 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.
Description Catalog Number
Special Operators and Attachments
Wobble Stick
Complete with retaining nut—fits standard button.
10250TA5
Lever Operator
For use with two vertically mounted flush pushbuttons.
10250TA14
Maintained Contact Attachment Release Button Assembly 1
Mechanically interlocks with another pushbutton and contact block (not included).
Provides mode indication. Minimum hole centers 1.62 in (41.1 mm), maximum
2.313 in (58.8 mm).
Black 10250TA17
Red 10250TA18
Green 10250TA19
Yellow 10250TA20
Same with Long Button—Black 10250TA39
Maintained Contact Attachment 1
Mechanically interlocks two buttons and provides position indication for one.
Use with two pushbutton operators and one or more contact blocks.
10250TA1
Roto-Push Lever Operator—
Used to provide lever operation for Roto-Push operators.
10250TA13
Special Light Modules
Master Test (Dual Input) Module—
Internal Form C relay suitable for either AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation
between monitored and test circuit. Fits all illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices.
48 Vdc 10250TMT8
Flasher Module—
Changes any AC illuminated device to a controlled flashing light.
Fits 10250T, E30 and E34 devices.
24V 10250TFL2
120V 10250TFL1
Flashing Incandescent Lamp—
For use with 120V transformer type or 6V full voltage type indicating lights including
PresTest and most E29 devices.
10250ED986-4
10250TA5
10250TA14
10250TA_
10250TA1
10250TA13
10250TA79
10250TFL_
10250ED986-4
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-231
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Accessories, continued
Description Catalog Number
Hole Plugs
Plug—
For unused holes—steel, painted gray (stainless steel, use E30KT5, see Page V7-T1-177)
10250TA7
Tools
Octagonal 10250T (notched to fit over selector switch lever), E29 and E30 10250TA95
E22, E30, E34 and octagonal 10250T (will not fit over selector switch levers) E22CW
Tool for Tightening Boots—
Used to install boot Catalog Numbers 10250TA3, A4, A10 and A25.
10250TA96
10250T, E34 Allen Wrench—
Used for removal of jumbo mushroom head.
10250TA102
Lamp Removal Tools—
For transformer type illuminated pushbuttons, push-pull and selector switches.
Fits #12 lamp.
10250TA74
For full voltage and resistor type illuminated pushbuttons, push-pull and
selector switches and E30.
E30KV1
Standard indicating lights. Fits #44, #755, #6S6 and #10S6. E29KLT
10250TA7
10250TA95
E22CW
10250TA96
10250TA102
10250TA74
E30KV1
E29KLT
V7-T1-232 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Options
Legend Plates
Legend Plates with Standard Markings
The legend plates listed
below are sized for all
standard commercial
enclosures and Eaton’s cast
enclosures. For vertical
spacing less than 1.75 in,
replace the S in the catalog
number with MS, or the M
with P (except push-pull). No
change in price. The smaller
size legend plates, “MS” or
“P” size, have limited space
for legend.
For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights—Standard
Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square
Notes
1 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
2 Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures.
3 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required.
Legend
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number Legend
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number
Blank—see table on Page V7-T1-234.
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High
CLAMP Black 10250TS90 10250TM90 OFF Red 10250TS24 10250TM24
CLOSE 10250TS73 10250TM11 ON Black 10250TS25 10250TM25
DOWN 10250TS74 10250TM12 OPEN 10250TS26 10250TM26
EMERG. STOP Red 10250TS13 10250TM13 OUT 10250TS27 10250TM27
FAST Black 10250TS75 10250TM14 POWER ON 10250TS80 10250TM80
FASTER 10250TS87 10250TM87 RAISE 10250TS28 10250TM28
FEEDER ON 10250TS94 10250TM94 READY 10250TS86 10250TM86
FEEDER OFF 10250TS95 10250TM95 RESET 10250TS29 10250TM29
FORWARD 10250TS15 10250TM15 REVERSE 10250TS30 10250TM30
HIGH 10250TS16 10250TM16 RUN 10250TS31 10250TM31
IN 10250TS17 10250TM17 SAFE 10250TS85 10250TM85
INCH 10250TS18 10250TM18 SLOW 10250TS32 10250TM32
JOG 10250TS19 10250TM19 SLOWER 10250TS88 10250TM88
JOG FOR. 10250TS20 10250TM20 START 10250TS33 10250TM33
JOG REV. 10250TS21 10250TM21 STOP Red 10250TS34 10250TM34
LOW 10250TS22 10250TM22 TEST Black 10250TS83 10250TM83
LOWER 10250TS23 10250TM23 TRANSFER 10250TS93 10250TM93
LUBE-FAIL 10250TS92 10250TM92 TRIP 10250TS84 10250TM84
MOTOR RUN 10250TS81 10250TM81 UNCLAMP 10250TS91 10250TM91
MOTOR STOP 10250TS82 10250TM82 UP 10250TS35 10250TM35
Color Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo 2
Catalog Number
Extra Large
Catalog NumberLettering Field
Black White or silver 310250TSP76 10250TLP76 10250TEP76
White Red or black 310250TSP77 10250TLP77 10250TEP77
Square Legend Plate
1/2 Round Legend Plate
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-233
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
For Selector Switch and Roto-Push Operators—Standard Size
45 mm and 70 mm Plastic—Round
For Push-Pull Units 3
Notes
1 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
2 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required.
3 All push-pull legend plates include the symbols in the center of the plate.
Legend
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number Legend
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number
Blank—see table on Page V7-T1-234.
2-Position—5/32 in High Lettering 3-Position—1/8 in High Lettering
FOR. REV. Black 10250TS38 10250TM38 AUTO OFF HAND Black 10250TS49 10250TM49
HAND AUTO 10250TS39 10250TM39 FOR. OFF REV. 10250TS50 10250TM50
HIGH LOW 10250TS40 10250TM40 FOR. SAFE REV. 10250TS69 10250TM69
JOG RUN 10250TS41 10250TM41 HAND OFF AUTO 10250TS51 10250TM51
MAN. AUTO 10250TS67 10250TM67 MAN. OFF AUTO 10250TS68 10250TM68
OFF ON 10250TS42 10250TM42 OPEN OFF CLOSE 10250TS53 10250TM53
OPEN CLOSE 10250TS43 10250TM43 RUN SAFE JOG 10250TS70 10250TM70
RUN JOG 10250TS44 10250TM44 UP OFF DOWN 10250TS54 10250TM54
SAFE RUN 10250TS45 10250TM45 ON STOP SAFE Red 10250TS71 10250TM71
START JOG 10250TS46 10250TM46
START STOP 10250TS47 10250TM47
UP DOWN 10250TS48 10250TM48
Color
Lettering Field Catalog Number
45 mm
Blank Yellow or red 210250TRP78
70 mm
Blank Yellow or red 210250TRP76
Red EMERG. STOP Yellow 10250TRP79
Legend
Color of
Field
Square 1
Catalog Number
1/2 Round
Catalog Number
Standard Size—Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/32 in High
PULL START/PUSH STOP Green/red 10250TPP2 10250TR2
PUSH ON/PULL OFF Black 10250TPP5 10250TR5
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE Black 10250TPP8 10250TR8
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Black 10250TPP11 10250TR11
Jumbo Size—Letters on Legend Plates Below are 1/8 in High
PULL START/PUSH STOP Green/red 10250TPP3 10250TR3
PULL ON/PUSH OFF Black 10250TPP6 10250TR6
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE Black 10250TPP9 10250TR9
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Black 10250TPP12 10250TR12
Square Legend Plate
1/2 Round Legend Plate
70 mm Round—Plastic
Legend Plate
V7-T1-234 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Legend Plates with Non-Standard Markings
When Ordering Specify
●Catalog number of blank
plate phase plus Suffix
“STAMP.”
●Insert the following into
Order Notes: legend, letter
size and locations (letters
A–W)—combine letters for
definitive locations as
shown.
Ordering Example:
Catalog No.:
10250TS36STAMP
Letter Size: 3/32 in (2.4 mm)
Pos. A—POWER HOUSE
Pos. B—START PUMP 1
Legend Characters
Available
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
P Q R S T U V W X Y Z / - . , 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Legend characters on black
and red plates are white—
on satin aluminum plates,
characters are black.
Blackening Kit
Solution blackens aluminum
exposed by engraving
process. Must be applied
immediately after engraving.
0.3 oz. bottle—sufficient for
approximately 1100 legend
plates.
Catalog Number: 10250TBK
Legend Positions
Blank and Custom Engraved Legend Plates
Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions
Notes
1All push-pull legend plates include the symbols in the center of the plate.
2Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures.
3When used to meet Ford Motor Co. specifications, specify engraved legend. Cannot be used on standard cast or sheet metal enclosures.
4Slightly larger than standard size for legends requiring more space—fits cast enclosures.
5Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
6Recommended only when mounting on minimum centers (less than 1-3/4 in [44.5 mm] vertical centers).
7Can be used on top row only of any enclosure.
Style Color
Small
Catalog Number
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo 2
Catalog Number
Extra Large 3
Catalog Number
Four-Position Selector Switch Push-Pull with Symbols 1
Custom 4
Catalog Number
Standard
Catalog Number
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo 2
Catalog Number
Square 5Black 10250TMS36 10250TS36 10250TL36 — 10250TS76 10250TS72 10250TPP17 10250TPP18
Red 10250TMS3710250TS3710250TL37—————
Green/red ——————10250TPP20 10250TPP21
Satin alum. ———10250TNP99 ————
1/2 Round Black 10250TP36 10250TM36 10250TJ36 — — 10250TM72 10250TR17 10250TR18
Red 10250TP3710250TM3710250TJ37—————
Green/red ——————10250TR20 10250TR21
Satin alum. —10250TM8910250TJ89—————
Top
(Aluminum
and Plastic) Style
Character Size
Approximate Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
3/32 in High 1/8 in High 3/16 in High
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
Number of
CharactersWidth Height
Small 61.59 (40.4) 1.59 (40.4) Square 1 17 — — — —
1/2 Round 1 15 1 12 1 9
Standard and
custom
1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5) Square 2 18 2 13 1 9
1/2 Round 2 15 2 12 1 9
Jumbo 72.19 (55.6) 2.19 (55.6) Square 5 23 3 18 2 12
1/2 Round 5 19 4 15 2 11
Extra large 32.44 (62) 2.44 (62) Square 6 25 3 18 3 12
L
K
D
C
B
A
Extra Large Size
Cat. No. 10250TNP99
Jumbo Size
10250TL or TJ Series
Small Size
10250TMS or TP Series
A
A
C
K
D
B
Standard Size
10250TS or TM Series
AB
B
A
GF
AE
GH
A
I
AF
D4
C4B4
A4
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-235
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Enclosures
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 1
Mounting Instructions
Two-position joystick must be
used with two contact block
deep enclosures (maximum
number of contact blocks = 1).
Four-position joysticks cannot
be used within these
enclosures.
One and Two Contact Block
Depth Enclosures Enclosure Layouts
Notes
1For spacing increments, see Page V7-T1-236.
2All die cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks, with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23.
See listing on Page V7-T1-229.
3When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used.
4When used with resistor light units, only the 2 contact block depth enclosure can be used.
514 gauge, type 304.
Number of
Elements
One Contact Block Depth
Catalog Number
Two Contact Block Depth
Catalog Number
Die Cast Enclosure—In-Line 234 NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
110250TN1 10250TN11
210250TN2 10250TN12
310250TN3 10250TN13
4— 10250TN14
Polyester4—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1— E34N51
2— E34N52
3— E34N53
4— E34N54
Stainless Steel 45—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
1— 10250TN33
2— 10250TN34
3— 10250TN35
4— 10250TN36
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-248.
Die Cast Enclosure
Polyester Enclosure
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
One Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
Two Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
111
Top – For Vertical Mounting
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1
222
33
4
V7-T1-236 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Die Cast and Stainless Steel—Flush Mount, Covers Only
Covers Only—Flush Mounting
Spacing Increments
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Spacing Increments for
Enclosures Enclosure Layouts
Note
1Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only.
Number of
Elements Catalog Number Catalog Number
Flush Die Cast Covers
In-Line Deep
Cover
In-Line Flat
Cover
110250TF11 10250TF1
210250TF12 10250TF2
310250TF13 10250TF3
410250TF14 10250TF4
In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates 1
With Pullbox Without Pullbox
110250TS10 10250TS1
210250TS11 10250TS2
310250TS12 10250TS3
410250TS14 10250TS4
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-249.
Type F G H
Die cast 2.44 (62) 2.5 (63.5) 1.88 (47.8)
Polyester 1.88 (47.8) Min. 2.13 (54.1) 2.25 (57.2)
Stainless steel 1.69 (42.9) Min. 1.73 (43.9) 2.25 (57.2)
Flush Mounting Covers
F
G
H
111
Top – For Vertical Mounting
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1
222
33
4
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-237
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks
●UL A600/P600 rated
●Color-coded plungers—red/
green for NC/NO circuits
●Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●Gray (opaque) or amber
(translucent) housings
●Pressure plate or spade
terminals
●Fingerproof shrouds (for
pressure terminals only)
Logic Level Contact Blocks
●UL A600/P600 rated
●Color-coded plungers
●Inert palladium knife-blade
contacts
●Gray (opaque) housings
●Pressure plate or spade
terminals
Special Function Contact Blocks
●UL A600/P600 rated
●Color-coded plungers
●Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●Gray (opaque) housings
●Pressure plate terminals
only
Special Purpose Contact Block
●Maximum 300V rated
●Black plungers
●Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●Black (opaque) housings
●Pressure plate terminals
only
●Fingerproof shrouds not
available
Reliability Nibs
Reliability nibs are the
hallmark of Eaton’s contact
blocks. A pointed silver nib on
the contact tip ensures
reliable switching from logic
level (5V) up to 600V
applications. Therefore
standard contact blocks can
be used for most logic level
applications where the
contacts are not exposed to
any harsh environmental
conditions.
Palladium Contacts
Palladium, which is more
inert than gold, is well suited
for voltages and currents
approaching zero and is
recommended for applications
where environmental
conditions are a factor.
Maximum Contact Block
Mounting per Operator Type
Operator
Max.
Stack
Pushbuttons 6
Push-pull operators 2
Roto-push operators 4
Two- or three-position
selector switches
6
Four-position selector
switches
4
Joysticks 4
V7-T1-238 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Contact Blocks
Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm).
Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds.
3 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
4 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
5 Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks are not suitable on selector switches or roto-push operators. Okay to use with three-position push-pull operators only
on low voltage (30V or less) circuits. Fingerproof shrouds not available.
Symbol Circuit Description 1
Standard Logic Level
Pressure Terminal
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal 2
Catalog Number
Pressure Terminal
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal 2
Catalog Number
1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T51 10250T59 10250T51E 10250T59E
1NO Stack up to six blocks six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T53 10250T60 10250T53E 10250T60E
NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T1 10250T40 10250T1E 10250T40E
2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T3 10250T42 10250T3E 10250T42E
2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T2 10250T41 10250T2E 10250T41E
Special Function Blocks 3
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six
blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71 3— 10250T71E 3—
ECNO-
NC
Early closing NO and standard NC.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T47 34 — 10250T47E 3—
ECNO-
NO
Early closing NO and standard NO.
Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T57 34 — 10250T57E 3—
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T45 3— 10250T45E 3—
LONC-
ECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to
four blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T55 34 — 10250T55E 3—
Special Purpose Blocks 5
2NO-
2NC
Four circuits in single block depth.
Rated 300V max. Stack up to four
blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T44 5—
10250T1
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-239
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds
Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 To order contact blocks with translucent amber housing, change suffix P to CP in catalog number e.g. 10250T51CP.
3 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
4 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
Symbol Circuit Description 1
Standard
Pressure Terminal 2
Catalog Number
Logic Level
Pressure Terminal 2
Catalog Number
1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51P 10250T51EP
1NO Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53P 10250T53EP
NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1P 10250T1EP
2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3P 10250T3EP
2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2P 10250T2EP
Special Function Blocks 3
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71P 410250T71EP 4
ECNO-NC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to six blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T47P 34 10250T47EP 4
ECNO-NO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to four blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T57P 34 10250T57EP 4
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T45P 410250T45EP 4
LONC-ECNO Overlapping contacts. Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T55P 34 10250T55EP 4
10250T1CP
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
V7-T1-240 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Amber Contact Blocks
Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 To order amber contact blocks with fingerproof shrouds, change suffix to CP in the catalog number e.g. 10250T51CP. Not available with spade terminals.
3 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm).
Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds.
4 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
5 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
Symbol Circuit Description 1
Standard Logic Level
Pressure Terminal 2
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal 3
Catalog Number
Pressure Terminal 2
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal 3
Catalog Number
1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T51C 10250T59C 10250T51EC 10250T59EC
1NO Stack up to six blocks (six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T53C 10250T60C 10250T53EC 10250T60EC
NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T1C 10250T40C 10250T1EC 10250T40EC
2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T3C 10250T42C 10250T3EC 10250T42EC
2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T2C 10250T41C 10250T2EC 10250T41EC
Special Function Blocks 3
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six
blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise
noted.
10250T71C 4— 10250T71EC 4—
ECNO-
NC
Early closing NO and standard NC.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T47C 45 — 10250T47EC 4—
ECNO-
NO
Early closing NO and standard NO.
Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T57C 45 — 10250T57EC 4—
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T45C 4— 10250T45EC 4—
LONC-
ECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to
four blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T55C 45 — 10250T55EC 4—
10250T1C
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-241
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Replacement Parts
Replacement Lamps—For 10250T Illuminated Operators
Replacement LED Lamps—For 10250T, E34 and E22 Units
Mfg. Lamp Type Voltage Base Style Application Part Number
120MB 120V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T resistor indicating light 28-3044
#267 6.3V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T flasher 10250ED986-4
#755 6.3V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T transformer, PresTest and full voltage 28-2202
#756 12V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5184
#757 24V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5185
#1828 32V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5186
#1835 55V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T resistor 28-5187
NE48 120V T 4-1/2 bayonet 10250T neon 28-494
NE51H-R22 120V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T neon 28-3754
NE51H-R68 240V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T neon 28-3755
Voltage Color
Continuous Flashing
AC/DC
Catalog Number
AC
Catalog Number
DC
Catalog Number
6–12V Red E22LED612RN E22LED006RAF E22LED006RDF
Orange E22LED612ON E22LED006OAF E22LED006ODF
Yellow E22LED612YN E22LED006YAF E22LED006YDF
Green E22LED612GN E22LED006GAF E22LED006GDF
Blue E22LED612BN E22LED006BAF E22LED006BDF
White E22LED612WN E22LED006WAF E22LED006WDF
24V Red E22LED024RN E22LED024RAF E22LED024RDF
Orange E22LED024ON E22LED024OAF E22LED024ODF
Yellow E22LED024YN E22LED024YAF E22LED024YDF
Green E22LED024GN E22LED024GAF E22LED024GDF
Blue E22LED024BN E22LED024BAF E22LED024BDF
White E22LED024WN E22LED024WAF E22LED024WDF
48V Red E22LED048RN E22LED048RAF E22LED048RDF
Orange E22LED048ON E22LED048OAF E22LED048ODF
Yellow E22LED048YN E22LED048YAF E22LED048YDF
Green E22LED048GN E22LED048GAF E22LED048GDF
Blue E22LED048BN E22LED048BAF E22LED048BDF
White E22LED048WN E22LED048WAF E22LED048WDF
60V Red E22LED060RN E22LED060RAF E22LED060RDF
Orange E22LED060ON E22LED060OAF E22LED060ODF
Yellow E22LED060YN E22LED060YAF E22LED060YDF
Green E22LED060GN E22LED060GAF E22LED060GDF
Blue E22LED060BN E22LED060BAF E22LED060BDF
White E22LED060WN E22LED060WAF E22LED060WDF
120V Red E22LED120RN E22LED120RAF E22LED120RDF
Orange E22LED120ON E22LED120OAF E22LED120ODF
Yellow E22LED120YN E22LED120YAF E22LED120YDF
Green E22LED120GN E22LED120GAF E22LED120GDF
Blue E22LED120BN E22LED120BAF E22LED120BDF
White E22LED120WN E22LED120WAF E22LED120WDF
Standard LED Lamp
V7-T1-242 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
10250T Style Operator Replacement Parts
Two-Position
Joystick Operator
Flush Head
Pushbutton
Operator
Mushroom Head
Pushbutton
Operator
Four-Position Joystick
Operator (without Latch)
Illuminated
Pushbutton Operator
Full Voltage, Resistor
and Transformer Type
Illuminated Selector Switch
Transformer Type
Indicating Light
Mushroom Head
Operator with
Padlock Attachment
Jumbo Mushroom
Head Operator
Knob-Operated
Selector Switch
Operator
Potentiometers
Item
No. Description
No.
Req. Part Number
1Gasket 1 16-1548
2 Mounting nut 1 15-1530
3 Handle 1 24-5045
4Knob 1 53-3157
Knob (not shown) for joystick operator with latch 1 53-3159
5 Common gate (supplied with operator) 2 16-3400
6 Set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex) 2 11-2014
7 Mushroom head button (includes [2] Item 6) 1 As Req. Below
Black — 53-1317
Red — 53-1317-2
Yellow — 53-1317-3
Green — 53-1317-4
Blue — 53-1317-22
8 Set screw (#10-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex) 2 11-544
9 Jumbo mushroom head button
(aluminum—includes [2] Item 8)
1As Req. Below
Red — 53-1317-9
Black — 53-1317-10
Yellow — 53-1317-11
Green — 53-1317-12
10 Jumbo mushroom head button
(aluminum—red EMERG. STOP)
does not include Item 8
153-1349-18
11 Position gate:
Two-position 1 54-7278
Three-position 1 54-7173
Four-position 1 54-12278
Eight-position 1 54-12279
12 Mounting screw (#6-32 x 0.710 in long) 2 10250TA79
Washer 2 16-2038
13 Terminal screw and lug (captive) Req. 80-5502KIT
Item
No. Description
No.
Req. Part Number
14 Gasket (supplied with basic unit) 1 32-803
15 Round head screw (#4-40 x 0.344 in long)
(supplied with basic unit)
211-4553
16 Mounting screw 2 11-1632
17 Simple potentiometer
(does not include items 18, 28 or 29)
1As Req. Below
1,000 ohms — 41-782-2
2,500 ohms — 41-782-3
5,000 ohms — 41-782-10
10,000 ohms — 41-782-4
25,000 ohms — 41-782-5
50,000 ohms — 41-782-6
18 Connector (includes screw and lug) 2 25-1851
19 Indicating plate 1 As Req. Above
Standard size (without legend) — 30-4460
Large size (specify legend) — 10250TR30
20 Retaining nut 1 15-1547
21 Knob 1 53-1314
Socket set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long) 2 11-2014
22 Coupling 1 29-3749-2
23 Set screw (#6-32 x 0.188 in long) 1 11-1199
24 Spacer 2 56-1066-18
25 Connector (includes screw and lug) 1 25-1851-2
26 Mounting nut 1 15-1938
27 Four-position joystick operating mechanism
(complete)
124-6565
28 Four-position joystick operating mechanism
(not shown) (with latch) complete
124-6565-2
29 Spring loaded latch 1 52-1214-2
30 Hand operated latch 1 52-913-3
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-243
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Technical Data and Specifications
Mechanical Ratings
General Specifications
Description Specification
Frequency of Operation
All pushbuttons 6000 operations/hr.
Key and lever selection switches 3000 operations/hr.
Auto-latch devices 1200 operations/hr.
Life
Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations
Contact blocks 10 x 106 operations
PresTest units 10 x 106 operations
Lever and key selector switches 0.25 x 106 operations
Twist to release pushbuttons 0.3 x 106 operations
Shock Resistance
Duration 20 ms >5g
Description Specification
Climate Conditions
Operating temperature 1° to 150°F (–17° to 66°C)
Storage temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C)
Altitude 6,562 ft (2,000m)
Humidity Max. 95% RH at 60°C
Te rm i n a l s
Marking NC-NO on the contact block to meet the NEMA requirements. Dual marking system 1–2
for normally closed, 3–4 for normally open to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005).
Clamps Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2)
conductors
Torque 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Degree of protection against direct electrical contact IP2X with fingerproof shroud
Light Units
Transformers Will withstand short-circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60997-5-1
Bulbs—average life:
Transformer type 20,000 hrs.
Resistor/direct voltage type 2500 hrs. minimum at rated voltage
LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
V7-T1-244 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Electrical Ratings
Electrical Ratings—Contact Block
Description Specification
Insulation Ui = 660 Vac or Vdc
Thermal Ith = 10A
Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Rated conditional short circuit current 1 kA
Fuse type GE power controls TIA 10, red spot type gG, 10A, 660 Vac, 460 Vdc, BS88-2,
IEC 60269-2-1
UL rating A600, P600
AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour
10A 110V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
5A 250V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
2A 600V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
Switching capacity
AC 15 rated make/break (11 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
6A 120V pf 0.3
4A 240V pf 0.3
2A 660V pf 0.3
DC13 rated make/break (1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
1.0A 125V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
0.55A 250V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
0.1A 660V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
10A 110V pure resistive
Maximum ratings for logic level and
hostile atmosphere application
Maximum amperes 0.5A
Maximum volts 120 Vac/Vdc
Description
50 Vac or 60 Hz Vdc
120 240 480 600 24/28 125 250
Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp) 60 30 15 12 5.7 1.1 0.55
Normal load break (amp) 6 3 1.5 1.2 5.7 1.1 0.55
Thermal current (amp) 101010105.05.05.0
Voltamperes:
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity 7200 7200 7200 7200 138 138 138
Normal load break 720 720 720 720 138 138 138
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-245
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Mounting Options
Panel Thickness
●Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm)
●Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate
●Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut
●Indicating light: 10250TA30
●Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31
Mounting Matrix
Mounting Options in Inches (mm)
Horizontal mounting means terminals are located top and bottom of contact block.
Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block.
This allows close spacing of adjacent operators with easy access to terminals.
Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 in (3.6 mm) #29 drill.
Drilling Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Legend
Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
ABCD
Small 1.63 (41.3) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.63 (41.3)
Medium 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.75 (44.5)
Large 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2)
B
Min.
C
Min.
0.6
(15.2)
A
Min. 1.22
(31)
D
Min.
Horizontal Mounting Vertical Mounting
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
Terminals on Top
Terminals at Side
0.6
(15.2)
1.20
(30.5)
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
V7-T1-246 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators
Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable
in the Down Position
Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable
in the Up Position—Mushroom Head
Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable
in the Up Position—Jumbo Mushroom Head
Potentiometer
Two-Position Joystick Operator
Four-Position Joystick Operator
0.89
(22.6)
Adjustable
0.88 (22.4)
for Each
Additional
Contact Block 1.07
(27.2)
1.62 (41.1)
Min.
2.5 (63.5)
Max.
2.03
(51.6)
2.0
(50.8)
1.09
(27.7)
1.13
(28.7)
1.78
(45.2)
1.5
(38.1)
1.63
(41.4)
2.5 (63.5)
2.0 (50.8)
1.75
(44.5)
2.5 (63.5)
2.31
(58.7)
2.38
(60.5)
1.75
(44.5)
Potentiometer A B C
2 watt single 1.31 (33.3) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9)
25 watt—up to 25 mohms 2.38 (60.5) 1.19 (30.2) 0.81 (20.6)
50 mohms 2.56 (65) 1.69 (42.9) 1.25 (31.8)
1.88
(47.8)
1.31
(33.3)
1.09
(27.7) 1.0
(25.4)
0.75
(19.1)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
Std. Dial Plate
Large Dial Plate
2.06
(52.3) 2.5 (63.5)
main.
2.2 (55.9)
mom.
2.13
(54.1)
1.25
(31.8)
3.88
(98.6)
0.89
(22.6)
0.88 (22.4)
per Block
0.06 (1.5) to
0.26 (6.6)
Panel Thickness
Contact
Block
4.0
(101.6)
1.88
(47.8) 3.75
(95.3)
1.25
(31.8)
1.19
(30.2)
0.88 (22.4)
Per Unit
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-247
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Key Operated Pushbutton Operator
Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator
Only with Button
Operator and Cam
Special Rotor Latch
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
1.5
(38.1)
1.5
(38.1)
0.86
(21.8)
0.24 (6) 1.55 (39.3)
Spring Return
2.37 (60.3)
Auto-Latch
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
1.53
(38.9)
0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
1.53
(38.9)
0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only
V7-T1-248 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Surface Mounting
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Notes
1Depth given is for two contact block deep stations. One contact block deep stations subtract 3/4 in (19.1 mm).
2No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.
A
Surface
DC
B
E
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
Number of
Elements
Element
Arrangement
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting Conduit
EntranceDE
Die Cast
1 In-line 3.88 (98.6) 4.0 (101.6) 3.0 (76.3) 12.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 3/4
2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 3.0 (76.3) 12.69 (68.3) 5.13 (130.3)
3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 3.0 (76.3) 12.69 (68.3) 7.0 (177.8) 1
4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 3.0 (76.3) 12.69 (68.3) 8.88 (225.6)
Polyester
1 In-line 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 2
2 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0)
3 3.81 (96.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 7.13 (181.1)
4 3.81 (96.8) 11.13 (282.7) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 9.38 (238.3)
Stainless Steel
1 In-line 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0) 2
2 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 7.50 (190.5)
3 3.50 (88.9) 9.00 (228.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 9.00 (228.6)
4 3.50 (88.9) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8)
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-249
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Flush Mounting
Die Case and Stainless Steel Covers Only
Notes
1Depth given includes pull box.
2Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover is 3/4 in (19.1 mm) deeper.
A
Surface or Pendant
DC
B
E
4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size
for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20
Screw Size for 12 Element
and Larger
Number of
Elements
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
DE
Die Cast
1 3.88 (98.6) 4.0 (101.6) 0.25 (6.4) 23.50 (88.9) 3.63 (92.2)
2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 0.25 (6.4) 23.50 (88.9) 5.50 (139.7)
3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 0.25 (6.4) 23.50 (88.9) 6.0 (152.4)
4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 0.25 (6.4) 23.50 (88.9) 9.25 (235)
Stainless Steel
1 5.00 (127) 5.0 (127 2.50 (63.5) 23.25 (82.6) 1.88 (47.8)
2 5.00 (127) 6.88 (174.8) 2.50 (63.5) 23.25 (82.6) 3.63 (92.2)
3 5.00 (127) 8.63 (219.2) 2.50 (63.5) 23.25 (82.6) 5.50 (139.7)
4 5.00 (127) 10.50 (266.7) 2.50 (63.5) 23.25 (82.6) 7.25 (184.2)
V7-T1-250 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Flush and Long Pushbutton Half Shroud
Mushroom and Jumbo Head Pushbutton
Pushbutton with Cylinder Lock
Illuminated Pushbutton
Push-Pull Switch
Flush Pushbutton Operator with
Padlock Attachment
Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator
with Padlock Attachment
Indicating Light—Transformer Type
1.81
(46) 1.09
(27.7)
1.06
(26.9)
0.38
(9.7)
1.38
(35.1)
1.78
(45.2)
Long
Button
Only
Half Shroud Is Same as Long Pushbutton with
Lower Half of Guard Ring Cut Back
1.13
(28.7)
0.88 (22.4)
for Each
Additional
Contact Block
1.75
(44.5)
1.63
(41.4)
1.5
(38.1)
2.5
(63.5)
0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness
1.91
(48.5)
1.13
(28.7)
1.38
(35.1)
1.09
(27.7)
1.09
(27.7)
0.69
(17.5)
1.13
(28.7)
1.38
(35.1)
2.63
(66.8)
1.65
(41.9)
1.78
(45.2)
0.25
(6.4)
0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness
0.88
(22.4)
0.88
(22.4)
1.13
(28.7)
2.03
(51.6)
2.0
(50.8)
1.09
(27.7)
1.13
(28.7)
1.78
(45.2)
1.5
(38.1)
1.63
(41.4)
2.5
(63.5)
2.0
(50.8)
1.75
(44.5)
1.8
(45.7)
A
1.78
(45.2)
1.1
(27.9)
1.38
(35.1)
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-251
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
PresTest Indicating Light—Transformer Type
Jumbo Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator
with Padlock Attachment
Indicating Light—Resistor and Neon Type
PresTest Indicating Light—Resistor Type
Master Test Indicating Light
Potentiometer Shaft
Lens A
Plastic 1.38 (35.1)
Glass 1.56 (39.6)
2.19
(55.6)
1.94
(49.3)
1.56
(39.6)
1.38
(35.1)
1.78
(45.2)
2.5
(63.5)
2.31
(58.7)
2.38
(60.5)
1.75
(44.5)
1.81
(46) A
1.1
(27.9)
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
Description B C
Relay type 4.38 (111.2) 4.28 (108.7)
Solid-state type 2.94 (74.7) 2.88 (73.2)
Operator
Catalog Number A B
10250T330 0.38 (9.7) dia. x
0.38 (9.7) long
0.25 (6.4) dia. x
0.63 (16) long
1.88
(47.8)
1.88
(47.8)
1.56
(39.6)
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
1.63
(41.4)
B
Spade Terminal
A
Screw Terminal
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
Plastic 1.38 (35.1)
Glass 1.59 (40.4)
Shaft Dimensions of Potentiometer
That C-H Operator Will Accept
A
B
Shaft
Threaded
Bushing
V7-T1-252 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Coin Operated Selector Switch
Key Operated Selector Switch
Illuminated Selector Switch
Roto-Push
Wobble Stick Catalog No. 10250TA5
Lever Operator—For Use with Two
Vertically Mounted Flush Pushbuttons
Catalog No. 10250TA14
Flexible Boot—For Protecting
Flush or Long Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA3 Typical
Transparent Flexible Boot—
For Illuminated Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA25
Operator Dim. A
Knob 1.38 (35.1)
Lever 1.50 (38.1)
Coin slot 1.38 (35.1)
A
Lever
Knob
Coin Slot
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
1.75
(44.5)
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
1.09
(27.7) 1.96
(49.8)
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
1.53
(38.9)
0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only
1.38
(35.1)
1.44
(36.6)
1.22
(31)
2.44
(62)
21°
21°
1.88
(47.8)
3.75
(95.3)
2.19
(55.6) 3.59
(91.2)
Cam
1.59
(40.4)
1.47
(37.3)
1.33
(33.8)
1.59
(40.4)
1.88
(47.8)
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-253
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Padlock Attachment—For Knob Selector Switch
Catalog No. 10250TA11
Padlock Attachment—For Flush Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA2
Padlock Attachment—For Extended Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA26
Maintained Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA66 Typical
Maintained Contact Attachment
Catalog No. 10250TA17 Typical
Padlock Cover Guard for Flush Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA36
Padlock Attachment for Maintained Push-Pull Operator
Catalog No. 10250TA64
Protecting Shroud for Jumbo Mushroom Head Button
Catalog No. 10250TA56
1.63
(41.4)
0.44
(11.2)
0.75
(19.1) 0.84
(21.3)
0.94
(23.9)
1.63
(41.4)
0.25
(6.4)
2.06
(52.3)
0.38
(9.7)
0.84
(21.3) 1.5
(38.1)
1.06
(26.9)
0.89
(22.6)
Adjustable
0.88
(22.4)
for Each
Additional
Contact
Block
1.07
(27.2)
1.62 (41.1)
Min.
2.5 (63.5)
Max.
0.97
(24.6)
0.91
(23.1)
1.63 (41.4)
Min.
2.31 (58.7)
Max.
1.13
(28.7)
0.38
(9.7)
1.16
(29.5) 1.0
(25.4)
1.91
(48.5)
2.19
(55.6)
0.75
(19.1)
0.91
(23.1)
2.19
(55.6)
1.47
(37.3)
1.25
(31.8)
0.38
(9.7)
0.94
(23.9)
1.65
(41.9)
3.25
(82.6)
V7-T1-254 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Protecting Shroud for
Mushroom Head Button
Catalog No. 10250TA6
Protecting Shroud for
Illuminated Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA15
Padlock Hasp or
Flip-Up Guard
Catalog No. 10250TA38
Extended Retaining Nut
Catalog No. 10250TA12
Lever for
Roto-Push Operator
Catalog No. 10250TA13
1.53
(38.9)
1.69
(42.9)
1.75
(44.5)
1.50
(38.1)
0.84
(21.3) 1.50
(38.1)
1.75
(44.5)
1.38
(35.1)
1.31
(33.3)
1.25
(31.8)
0.44
(11.2)
1.81
(46)
Panel Drilling and Minimum Spacing
Notes
Locating nib hole or notch is 1.36–1.4 in (34.5–35.6 mm) #29 drill.
1If jumbo plates are to be placed one above the other vertically, add 0.13 (3.3) to minimum
dimensions listed.
Legend
Plate
A
Min.
B
Min.
1 or 2 Circuit Contact Blocks
Small or none 1.63 (41.4) 2.25 (57.2)
Standard 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2)
Jumbo 12.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2)
Extra large 2.50 (63.5) 2.60 (66)
4 Circuit Contact Block 10250T44
Small or none 1.88 (47.8) 2.25 (57.2)
Standard 1.88 (47.8) 2.25 (57.2)
Jumbo 12.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2)
Extra large 2.50 (63.5) 2.60 (66)
B
Min.
A
Min.
0.6
(15.2)
A
Min. 1.22
(31)
B
Min.
Horizontal Rows Vertical Rows
Terminals on Top
Terminals at
Side
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-255
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.8
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Multiple Button Guard
Master Test Module, Flasher Module and Legend Plate
Notes
Locating nib hole or notch is 1.36–1.4 in (34.5–35.6 mm) #29 drill.
1For plastic legend plate, Dimension B is 1.12 (28.4).
Chain Hook Bracket
Number of
Elements A
2 4.0 (101.6)
3 5.88 (149.4)
4 7.88 (200.2)
7 13.38 (339.9)
Legend
Plate AB
1/2 Round Legend Plates
Small 1.56 (39.6) 0.91 (23.1)
Standard 1.59 (40.4) 1.07 (27.2)
Jumbo 2.06 (52.3) 1.53 (38.9)
Square Legend Plates
Small 1.59 (40.4) sq. 0.90 (22.9)
Standard 1.75 (44.5) sq. 1.06 (26.9) 1
Jumbo 2.19 (55.6) sq. 1.50 (38.1)
Extra large 2.44 (62.0) sq. 1.63 (41.4)
2.16
(54.9)
1.31
(33.3)
1.88
(47.8)
0.75
(19.1)
A
1.63
(41.4)
1.14
(29)
6 Mounting Holes
1.78
(45.2) A
1.31
(33.3)
Master Test Module,
Flasher Module
Legend Plate
B
Enclosure Size
(No. of Elements)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
DE
2, 3 and 4 3.75
(95.3)
1.94
(49.3)
0.13
(3.3)
2.69
(68.3)
1.38
(35.1)
6 and 7 4.0
(101.6)
2.19
(55.6)
0.13
(3.3)
2.88
(73.2)
1.63
(41.4)
A C
D
BE
0.38 (9.7)
Dia. Hole
V7-T1-256 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Contents
Description Page
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-257
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-258
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-259
Ordering Complete Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-261
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Momentary
Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-262
Plastic Lens Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . V7-T1-262
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-263
Illuminated Pushbuttons and
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-264
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-266
Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-267
Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-269
Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-270
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-274
Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-275
Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-278
Key Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-278
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . . V7-T1-280
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-281
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-283
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-289
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-291
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-294
Product Description
Eaton’s E34 Series 30.5 mm
pushbutton line features the
same rugged die cast
construction of our 10250T
line with an additional
two-layer 100% solid
thermosetting cathodic epoxy
coating. This coating provides
a flat black smooth,
consistent, corrosion
resistant surface that has
passed a demanding 600
hour salt spray test. (The
industry standard for this 4X
test requires only 200 hours.)
Features
●Epoxy-coated metal
operators
●Corrosion resistant
●Integral ground screw
terminal on operators
●FDA approved for sanitary
chemical resistance
requirements
Standards and
Certifications
●CE EN60947-5-1 and
60947-5-5
●UL 508—File No. E131568
●CSA C22.2 No. 14—File No.
LR68551
●FDA 3-A Sanitary
Standards
Ingress Protection
When mounted in similarly
rated enclosure—
●Standard indicating lights
●UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●IEC IP65
●All other operators
●UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●IEC IP65
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-257
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Product Overview
Ultraviolet Light
E34 cathodic coating is not
recommended for use in
applications where exposure
to ultraviolet light exists—use
NEMA 4X 10250T operators.
Reliability Nibs
Eaton’s contact blocks
feature enclosed silver
contacts with pointed
“reliability nibs” for reliable
performance from logic level
up to 600V. To ensure reliable
switching, nibs bite through
oxide which can form on silver
contacts, eliminating the
need for expensive logic level
blocks for most applications.
Reliability Nibs
Dry Circuit
Medium Duty
Heavy-Duty
Diaphragm Seal with
Drainage Holes
Liquid Drainage
Eaton’s pushbutton operators
offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator
bushing. Hidden from view by
the mounting nut, these
holes prevent buildup of liquid
inside the operator, which
can prevent operation in
freezing environments. The
holes also provide a route for
escaping liquid in high
pressure washdowns,
effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm
seal, ensuring reliable sealing
in applications even beyond
NEMA 4.
Diaphragm Seal
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole
Drainage Hole
Flexible
Diaphragm
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
Mounting Nut
Colorfast
Molded
Button
V7-T1-258 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Product Identification
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Series
Octagonal Mounting Nut Self-Adjusts to
Panel Thickness—Eliminates Spacer Washers
and Set Screws
Internal Sealing Diaphragm
for Excellent Sealing
Terminal Clamps Shipped
Open Ready to Wire
Three Styles of Legend Plates
in Four Sizes Wide Variety of Operator
Types and Colors
Die Cast Construction with Thick,
Tough Corrosion Resistant Coating Stackable Contact Blocks up
to 12 Circuits per Operator
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-259
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Push-Pulls
Note
1Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory.
E34 PB 1–1 1
Operator
PB =Flush
EB = Extended
LB = 40 mm mushroom
JB = 65 mm mushroom
EVB = 1/2 shroud vertical mount
EHB = 1/2 shroud horizontal mount
Circuit
Blank = Operator only
1 = 1NO-1NC
2 =2NO
3 =2NC
51 =1NC
53 =1NO
Button Color
1 = Black
2 = Red
3 = Green
4 = Yellow
7 = Gray
5 = White
6 = Blue
8 = Orange
E34 GDB 63 M2 –1 1
Circuit
Blank = Operator only
1 = 1NO-1NC
2 =2NO
3 =2NC
51 =1NC
53 =1NO
Incandescent
Light Unit
LED
Light Unit
Blank = Non-illuminated
89 = 24V/XFR
63 = 120V/XFR
64 = 208V/XFR
65 = 240V/XFR
82 = 277V/XFR
66 = 380V/XFR
67 = 480V/XFR
68 = 600V/XFR
69 =6V/FV
70 = 12V/FV
79 = 24V/FV
83 = 32V/FV
80 = 120V/RES
81 = 240V/RES
Blank = Non-illuminated
89L =24V/XFR
63L = 120V/XFR
64L = 208V/XFR
65L = 240V/XFR
82L = 277V/XFR
66L = 380V/XFR
67L = 480V/XFR
68L = 600V/XFR
97L = Full voltage
Non-Illuminated Illuminated
Button Incandescent LED Lens Type
C1 = Black 40 mm
C2 = Red 40 mm
C2N8 = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
C3 = Green 40 mm
C6 = Blue 40 mm
— = Black 65 mm
J2 = Red 65 mm
J2N8 = Red 65 mm—“E” STOP
— = Green 65 mm
— = Yellow 65 mm
M2 =
M2N8 =
M3 =
M6 =
M9 =
M5 =
M0 =
RD =
ED =
GD =
LD =
AD =
WD =
— =
Red 40 mm
Red 40 mm—“E” STOP
Green 40 mm
Blue 40 mm
Amber 40 mm
White 40 mm
Clear 40 mm
LED Voltage
Blank = Non-illuminated
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
Operator
GDB = Two-position maintained
GEB = Three-position mom push-mom pull
GFB = Three-position mt push-mom pull
GHB = Three-position mom push-mom pull
V7-T1-260 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test
Note
1Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory.
Circuit
Blank = Operator only
1 = 1NO-1NC
2 =2NO
3 =2NC
51 =1NC
53 =1NO
Light Unit Type
XB = Transformer
CB = Full voltage
SB =Resistor
Incandescent Light Unit LED Light Unit
024 = 24V/XFR
120 = 120V/XFR
240 = 240V/XFR
277 = 277V/XFR
380 = 380V/XFR
480 = 480V/XFR
600 = 600V/XFR
06 =6V/FV
12 = 12V/FV
24 = 24V/FV
32 = 32V/FV
48 = 48V/FV
120 = 120V/RES
240 = 240V/RES
024L =24V/XFR
120L = 120V/XFR
240L = 240V/XFR
277L = 277V/XFR
380L = 380V/XFR
480L = 480V/XFR
600L = 600V/XFR
397L = Full voltage
LED Voltage
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
Incandescent Lens Color LED Lens Color
V2 =Red
V3 =Green
V4 = Yellow
V5 =White
V6 =Blue
V9 =Amber
V0 = Clear
RD =Red
GD =Green
YD = Yellow
WD =White
LD = Blue
AD =Amber
E34 XB 24 V2 –1 1
LED Voltage
Blank = Incandescent
06 = 6 Vac/Vdc
12 = 12 Vac/Vdc
24 = 24 Vac/Vdc
48 = 48 Vac/Vdc
60 = 60 Vac/Vdc
2A = 120 Vac
2D = 120 Vdc
Plastic Glass Lens Color Plastic Glass Lens Color
Standard/Master—Incandescent Standard/Master/PresTest—LED
H2 =
H3 =
H4 =
H5 =
H6 =
H9 =
H0 =
G2 =
G3 =
G4 =
G5 =
G6 =
G9 =
G0 =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
RP =
GP =
YP =
WP =
LP =
AP =
RG =
GG =
YG =
WG =
LG =
AG =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
PresTest—Incandescent
V2 =
V3 =
V4 =
V5 =
V6 =
V9 =
V0 =
P2 =
P3 =
P4 =
P5 =
P6 =
P9 =
P0 =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
Light Unit Type
Standard—Incandescent Standard—LED
TB120 =
TB240 =
TB277 =
TB380 =
TB480 =
TB600 =
FB06 =
FB12 =
FB24 =
FB32 =
FB48 =
RB120 =
RB240 =
NB120 =
NB240 =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
120V/neon
240V/neon
TB120L =
TB240L =
TB277L =
TB380L =
TB480L =
TB600L =
FB197L =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full voltage
PresTest—LED
TPB120L =
TPB240L =
TPB380L =
TPB480L =
TPB600L =
FPB297L =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full voltage
PresTest—Incandescent
TPB120 =
TPB240 =
TPB380 =
TPB480 =
TPB600 =
FPB06 =
FPB12 =
FPB24 =
FPB32 =
FPB48 =
RPB120 =
RPB240 =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
E34 FB06 H2 1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-261
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Ordering Complete Devices
Complete E34 pushbuttons,
indicating lights and/or
selector switch operators
including contact block(s) and
legend plate can be ordered
using a single composite
catalog number. The
individually packaged
components will be shipped
unassembled in a single
overpack carton marked with
the composite catalog
number.
Ordering Example
Illuminated Pushbutton
Device—Catalog Number
E34XB120V2-153SP90
For a complete Catalog
Number breakdown, see
Pages V7-T1-259 to
V7-T1-260.
For Complete E34 Device Ordering
Operator Legend Plate
E34;SP90
Insert Hyphen Before
Contact Block(s)
Lens
E34V2 Contact Blocks
10250T1 and 10250T53
E34XB120 V2 –153 SP90
V7-T1-262 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Product Selection
Non-Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Pushbutton Units
Plastic Lens Indicating Light Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Indicating Light Units
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255.
1 Anodized aluminum head—may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
Contact
Type Button Color
Flush Button
Catalog Number
Extended Button
Catalog Number
Mushroom Button
Catalog Number
Jumbo Mushroom 1
Catalog Number
1NO Black E34PB1-53X E34EB1-53X E34LB1-53X E34JB1-53X
Red E34PB2-53X E34EB2-53X E34LB2-53X E34JB2-53X
Green E34PB3-53X E34EB3-53X E34LB3-53X E34JB3-53X
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — E34JB2N8-53X
1NC Black E34PB1-51X E34EB1-51X E34LB1-51X E34JB1-51X
Red E34PB2-51X E34EB2-51X E34LB2-51X E34JB2-51X
Green E34PB3-51X E34EB3-51X E34LB3-51X E34JB3-51X
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — E34JB2N8-51X
1NO-1NC Black E34PB1-1X E34EB1-1X E34LB1-1X E34JB1-1X
Red E34PB2-1X E34EB2-1X E34LB2-1X E34JB2-1X
Green E34PB3-1X E34EB3-1X E34LB3-1X E34JB3-1X
Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP ———E34JB2N8-1X
Type Voltage Color
LED/Lamp
Number
Indicating Light 1
Catalog Number
LED Lamp;
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red Bayonet base E34FB197LRP24
Green E34FB197LGP24
Amber E34FB197LAP24
120 Vac Red E34FB197LRP2A
Green E34FB197LGP2A
Amber E34FB197LAP2A
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red #757 E34FB24H2X
Green E34FB24H3X
Amber E34FB24H9X
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 120MB E34RB120H2X
Green E34RB120H3X
Amber E34RB120H9X
Transformer 120 Vac
50/60 Hz
Red #755 E34TB120H2X
Green E34TB120H3X
Amber E34TB120H9X
Flush Button
Extended Button
Mushroom Button
Jumbo Mushroom
24V Full Voltage
Indicating Light
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-263
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Pushbuttons
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-Illuminated
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255.
1 Anodized aluminum head—may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
Button Color Catalog Number
Flush button Black E34PB1
Red E34PB2
Green E34PB3
Yellow E34PB4
White E34PB5
Blue E34PB6
Gray E34PB7
Orange E34PB8
Extended button Black E34EB1
Red E34EB2
Green E34EB3
Yellow E34EB4
White E34EB5
Blue E34EB6
Gray E34EB7
Orange E34EB8
Half shrouded button Vertical Horizontal
Black E34EVB1 E34EHB1
Red E34EVB2 E34EHB2
Green E34EVB3 E34EHB3
Yellow E34EVB4 E34EHB4
White E34EVB5 E34EHB5
Blue E34EVB6 E34EHB6
Gray E34EVB7 E34EHB7
Orange E34EVB8 E34EHB8
Mushroom button Black E34LB1
Red E34LB2
Green E34LB3
Yellow E34LB4
Blue E34LB6
Anodized aluminum jumbo
mushroom button 1
Black E34JB1
Red E34JB2
Red (Engraved EMERG. STOP) E34JB2N8
Green E34JB3
Yellow E34JB4
E34PB_
E34EB_
E34EHB_
E34LB_
E34JB_
V7-T1-264 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Operators without Lens
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255.
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color, see Page V7-T1-241 for LED Selection and Pages V7-T1-259 to V7-T1-260 for Catalog
Numbering Selection.
2 Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
Type Voltage Lamp Number
Illuminated
Pushbutton
Catalog Number
Indicating
Light
Catalog Number
PresTest
Catalog Number
LED Lamp (LEDs not included) 1
Full voltage — Bayonet
base
E34CB497L E34FB197L E34FPB297L
Transformer AC only 24 E34XB024L — —
120 E34XB120L E34TB120L E34TPB120L
240 E34XB240L E34TB240L E34TPB240L
277 E34XB277L E34TB277L —
380 E34XB380L E34TB380L E34TPB380L
480 E34XB480L E34TB480L E34TPB480L
600 E34XB600L E34TB600L E34TPB600L
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage AC/DC 6 #755 E34CB06 E34FB06 E34FPB06
12 #756 E34CB12 E34FB12 E34FPB12
24 #757 E34CB24 E34FB24 E34FPB24
32 #1828 E34CB32 E34FB32 E34FPB32
48 #1835 E34CB48 E34FB48 E34FPB48
Resistor AC/DC 2120 120MB E34SB120 E34RB120 E34RPB120
240 E34SB240 E34RB240 E34RPB240
Transformer AC only 24 #755 E34XB024 — —
120 E34XB120 E34TB120 E34TPB120
240 E34XB240 E34TB240 E34TPB240
277 E34XB277 E34TB277 —
380 E34XB380 E34TB380 E34TPB380
480 E34XB480 E34TB480 E34TPB480
600 E34XB600 E34TB600 E34TPB600
Neon AC/DC 120 NE51H-R-22 — E34NB120 —
240 NE51H-4-68 — E34NB240 —
Illuminated Pushbutton
Indicating Light
PresTest
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-265
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Indicating Light Lens
Illuminated Pushbutton Lens
PresTest Lens
Note
1 Glass lens has black anodized aluminum bezel.
Color
Plastic
Catalog Number
Glass 1
Catalog Number
Red E34H2 E34G2
Green E34H3 E34G3
Yellow E34H4 E34G4
White E34H5 E34G5
Blue E34H6 E34G6
Ambler E34H9 E34G9
Clear E34H0 E34G0
Color Catalog Number
Red E34V2
Green E34V3
Yellow E34V4
White E34V5
Blue E34V6
Ambler E34V9
Clear E34V0
Color
Plastic
Catalog Number
Glass 1
Catalog Number
Red E34V2 E34P2
Green E34V3 E34P3
Yellow E34V4 E34P4
White E34V5 E34P5
Blue E34V6 E34P6
Ambler E34V9 E34P9
Clear E34V0 E34P0
Plastic
Glass
E34V_
Plastic
Glass
V7-T1-266 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●Two- and three-position
●Non-illuminated
Two-Position Push-Pull Units, Non-Illuminated
Three-Position Push-Pull Units, Non-Illuminated
Button and Color Selection
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255.
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code
from the table. Example: E34GDBC6-1X.
3 Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications.
Operator Position 1
Button Type/Color 2
Contact
Type Catalog Number
Pull Push Mounting Location
AB
Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
O
X
X
O
40 mm/red 1NO E34GDBC2-1X
40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
1NC E34GDBC2N8-1X
65 mm aluminum engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
E34GDBJ2N8-1X
Operator Position 1
Button Type/Color 2
Contact
Type Catalog Number
Pull Intermediate Push Mounting Location
AB
Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
O
40 mm/black 1NC E34GFBC1-3X
40 mm/red 1NC E34GFBC2-3X
40 mm engraved
EMERG. STOP/red
E34GFBC2N8-3X
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
O
40 mm/black 1NC E34GEBC1-3X
40 mm/red 1NC E34GEBC2-3X
O
X
O
O
X
O
40 mm/black 1NO E34GHBC1-1X
40 mm/red 1NC E34GHBC2-1X
Color Suffix Code Catalog Number
Standard—40 mm
Black C1 E34C1
Red C2 E34C2
Red (EMERG. STOP) C2N8 E34C2N8
Green C3 E34C3
Blue C6 E34C6
Jumbo Mushroom Head 3
(Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm
Red J2 E34J2
Red (EMERG. STOP) J2N8 E34J2N8
Two-Position
Push-Pull Unit
Three-Position
Push-Pull Unit
Standard
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-267
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●Two-position maintained
●Illuminated
Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
Lens and Color Selection
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255.
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from Lens and Color Selection table above.
Example: E34GDB79M3 -1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-273.
Operator Position 1
Lamp Type Voltage
Contact
Type
LED/Lamp
Number
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number 2
Maintained—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate Mounting Location
AB
O
X
X
O
LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO Bayonet
base
E34GDB97LRD24-1X
120 Vac/Vdc 1NC E34GDB97LRD2A-1X
Transformer 24 Vac E34GDB89LRD06-1X
120 Vac E34GDB63LRD06-1X
O
X
X
O
Incan-
descent
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO #757 E34GDB79M2-1X
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 1NC 120MB E34GDB80M2-1X
Transformer 24 Vac #755 E34GDB89M2-1X
120 Vac E34GDB63M2-1X
Color
Incandescent
Suffix Code
LED
Suffix Code Catalog Number
Standard
Red M2 RD E34M2
Red (EMER. STOP) M2N8 ED E34M2N8
Green M3 GD E34M3
Blue M6 LD E34M6
Amber M9 AD E34M9
White M5 WD E34M5
Clear M0 CD E34M0
Illuminated Push-Pull
Unit
Standard
V7-T1-268 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●Three-position maintained
●Illuminated
Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255.
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from Lens and Color Selection table on the
bottom of Page V7-T1-267. Example: E34GEB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-273.
Operator Position 1
Lamp Type Voltage
Contact
Type
LED/Lamp
Number
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number 2
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Momentary—
Push Mounting Location
AB
O
X
O
O
X
O
LED Full
voltage
24 Vac/Vdc 1NO Bayonet
base
E34GHB97LRD24-1X
120 Vac 1NC E34GHB97LRD2A-1X
Trans-
former
24 Vac E34GHB89LRD06-1X
120 Vac E34GHB63LRD06-1X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full
voltage
24 Vac/Vdc 1NC Bayonet
base
E34GEB97LRD24-3X
120 Vac 1NC E34GEB97LRD2A-3X
Trans-
former
24 Vac E34GEB89LRD06-3X
120 Vac E34GEB63LRD06-3X
O
X
O
O
X
O
Incan-
descent
Full
voltage
24 Vac/Vdc 1NO #757 E34GHB79M2-1X
Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB E34GHB80M2-1X
Trans-
former
24 Vac #755 E34GHB89M2-1X
120 Vac E34GHB63M2-1X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full
voltage
24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 E34GEB79M2-3X
Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB E34GEB80M2-3X
Trans-
former
24 Vac #755 E34GEB89M2-3X
120 Vac E34GEB63M2-3X
Illuminated Push-Pull
Unit
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-269
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●Three-position—maintained push, momentary pull
●Illuminated
Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Potentiometers
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate—Linear Type ±10%
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255.
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table
on the bottom of Page V7-T1-267.
Example: E34GFB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-273.
3 Shown with standard aluminum dial plate.
4 Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to catalog number.
Example: E34PDB1F136. To order separately, see footnote 5 below.
5 Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 in high. For custom stamped legend plates, order legend plate
as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping.
6 For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing on Page V7-T1-246.
Operator Position 1
Lamp Type Voltage
Contact
Type
LED/Lamp
Number
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog Number 2
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Maintained—
Push Mounting Location
AB
X
X
O
X
O
O
LED Full
voltage
24 Vac/Vdc 1NC Bayonet
base
E34GFB97LRD24-3X
120 Vac 1NC E34GFB97LRD2A-3X
Trans-
former
24 Vac E34GFB89LRD06-3X
120 Vac E34GFB63LRD06-3X
X
X
O
X
O
O
Incan-
descent
Full
voltage
24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 E34GFB79M2-3X
Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB E34GFB80M2-3X
Trans-
former
24 Vac #755 E34GFB89M2-3X
120 Vac E34GFB63M2-3X
Potentiometer
Ohms Catalog Number
2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate 45
1000 E34PDB1F1
2500 E34PDB1F2
5000 E34PDB1F5
10000 E34PDB1F10
25000 E34PDB1F25
50000 E34PDB1F50
Operator only 6E34PDB1A0
Alternative—black plastic large legend with standard markings E34LP99
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-294.
Illuminated Push-Pull
Unit
Vertical or Horizontal
One-Hole Mounting 3
V7-T1-270 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Push-Pull Operators
An illuminated push-pull
pushbutton unit, arranged for
one-hole mounting, can
replace two pushbuttons and
a pilot light or the non-
illuminated form can replace
two pushbuttons. These units
are available in three basic
types:
●Maintained—(Two-
position). Maintains in the
pulled or pushed position
until manually actuated to
the opposite mode.
●Momentary—(Three-
position). Spring returns to
an intermediate position
when pulled or pushed and
released.
●Momentary Pull,
Maintained Push—(Three-
position). Spring returns to
intermediate position when
pulled. Maintains in pushed
position until manually
returned to intermediate
(ready to reset) position.
Maintained stop holds
circuit open and will
prevent other series
connected operators from
starting the system.
The operators, buttons,
contact blocks, etc., are
offered as building block
components that can be
intermixed to satisfy many
requirements. This minimizes
the need for a varied and
costly inventory.
Application Guide
To assist in the selection of
contact blocks, the sketch
below shows pictorially by
symbols A and B locations of
contact circuits after
assembly of contact blocks
and adapter to the operator.
The table below shows the
effect of the push and pull
operations on either NO or
NC contacts. (X = contact
closed, O = contact open).
Contact Circuit Locations
Push-Pull Operator Components
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255.
See Typical Applications on Page V7-T1-205.
1 Shown without button on lens.
2 Maximum of two blocks, four circuits. Special function contact blocks shown on Page V7-T1-288 CANNOT be used with
three-position push-pull operators E34GEB, E34GFB or E34GHB.
Locating Nib
A
B
Type of Operator
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
Contact Block 2Catalog Number
Out—Pull Intermediate In—Push
Contact Block Mounting Location
ABABAB
Two-Position Operator without Lens
Maintained push-pull O
Xor O
X
No intermediate
position
X
Oor X
O
1NO
1NC
E34GDB
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
Three-Position Operator without Lens
Momentary push-pull O
Xor O
X
O
Oor O
X
X
Oor O
O
1NO
1NC
E34GEB 2
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
2NO
2NC
Maintained push-momentary pull O
Xor O
X
O
Oor O
X
X
Oor O
O
1NO
1NC
E34GFB 2
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
2NO
2NC
Momentary push-pull O
Xor O
X
O
Oor O
O
X
Oor X
O
1NO
1NC
E34GHB 2
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
Two-Position Maint.
Push-Pull 1
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-271
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
Ordering Example with One Composite Number
Non-illuminated:
E34GDB + E34C2 + 10250T1 = E34GDBC2-1X
Incandescent:
E34GDB + 10250T79 + E34M2 + 10250T1 = E34GDB79M2-1X
LED:
E34GDB + 10250T97L + E34M2 + Voltage Code + 10250T1 = E34GDB97LRD24-1X
06—6 Vac/Vdc
12—12 Vac/Vdc
24—24 Vac/Vdc
48—48 Vac/Vdc
60—60 Vac/Vdc
2A—120 Vac
2D—120 Vdc
Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255.
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from chart on Page V7-T1-273.
Light Unit
Type Type Voltage
LED/Lamp
Number Catalog Number
LED
(LEDs not included) 1
Full voltage — Bayonet
base
10250T97L
Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz
24 10250T89L
120 10250T63L
208 10250T64L
240 10250T65L
277 10250T82L
380 10250T66L
480 10250T67L
600 10250T68L
Incandescent Full voltage
AC or DC
6#755
#756
#757
#1828
10250T69
12 10250T70
24/28 10250T79
32 10250T83
Resistor
AC or DC
120 120MB 10250T80
240 10250T81
Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz
24 #755 10250T89
120 10250T63
208 10250T64
240 10250T65
277 10250T82
380 10250T66
480 10250T67
600 10250T68
V7-T1-272 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255.
1 Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications.
2 Suffix codes should only be used for assembling composite catalog numbers. To order lens, order by catalog number.
Color
Incandescent
Suffix Code Catalog Number
Standard Button
Black C1 E34C1
Red C2 E34C2
Red (EMERG. STOP) C2N8 E34C2N8
Green C3 E34C3
Blue C6 E34C6
Jumbo Mushroom Head
Red 1J2 E34J2
Red (EMERG. STOP) J2N8 E34J2N8
Color
Incandescent
Suffix Code
LED
Suffix Code 2Catalog Number
Red M2 RD E34M2
Red (EMERG. STOP) M2N8 ED E34M2N8
Green M3 GD E34M3
Blue M6 LD E34M6
Amber M9 AD E34M9
White M5 WD E34M5
Clear M0 — E34M0
Standard
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
E34M_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-273
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
LED Selection
Voltage Color Catalog Number Voltage Color Catalog Number
6 Vac/Vdc
suitable for
use with
transformers
Red E22LED006RN 60 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED060RN
Orange E22LED006ON Orange E22LED060ON
Yellow E22LED006YN Yellow E22LED060YN
Green E22LED006GN Green E22LED060GN
Blue E22LED006BN Blue E22LED060BN
White E22LED006WN White E22LED060WN
12 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED012RN 120 Vac Red E22LED120RA
Orange E22LED012ON Orange E22LED120OA
Yellow E22LED012YN Yellow E22LED120YA
Green E22LED012GN Green E22LED120GA
Blue E22LED012BN Blue E22LED120BA
White E22LED012WN White E22LED120WA
24 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED024RN 120 Vdc Red E22LED120RD
Orange E22LED024ON Orange E22LED120OD
Yellow E22LED024YN Yellow E22LED120YD
Green E22LED024GN Green E22LED120GD
Blue E22LED024BN Blue E22LED120BD
White E22LED024WN White E22LED120WD
48 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED048RN
Orange E22LED048ON
Yellow E22LED048YN
Green E22LED048GN
Blue E22LED048BN
White E22LED048WN
Standard LED Lamp
V7-T1-274 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Selector Switch Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●Two-, three- and four-position—maintained
●Non-illuminated and illuminated
Two-Position Selector Switch
Three-Position Selector Switch
Four-Position Selector Switch
Color Selection, Non-Illuminated
Notes
For Light Unit Voltage Suffix and Knobs, Levers tables, see Page V7-T1-280.
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255.
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained.
3 To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate suffix code from
the Color Selection table. Example: E34VFBK2-X1.
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Cam
Code
Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Catalog Number 3
Black Lever
Catalog Number 3
Red Knob
Catalog Number 3
Red Lever
Catalog Number 3
AB
X
O
O
X
1NC 1 E34VFBK1-1X E34VFBL1-1X E34VFB120ER-1X E34VFB120FR-1X
1NO
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Cam
Code
Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Catalog Number 3
Black Lever
Catalog Number 3
Red Knob
Catalog Number 3
Red Lever
Catalog Number 3
AB
X
O
O
O
O
X
1NO 3 E34VHBK1-2X E34VHBL1-2X E34VHB120TER-2X E34VHB120TFR-2X
1NO
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
1NO 3 E34VHBK1-23X E34VHBL1-23X E34VHB120TER-23X E34VHB120TFR-23X
2NC
(Series)
1NO
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Cam
Code
Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer
Mounting Location Black Knob
Catalog Number 3
Black Lever
Catalog Number 3
Red Knob
Catalog Number 3
Red Lever
Catalog Number 3
AB
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
1NC 7 E34VTBK1-23X E34VTBL1-23X E34VRB120TER-23X E34VRB120TFR-23X
1NO
1NO
1NC
Color Code Letter Color Code Letter
Black 1White 5
Red 2Blue 6
Green 3Gray 7
Yellow 4Orange 8
Two-Position Maint.
Switch Knob
MM
Three-Position Maint.
Switch Knob
MM
M
Four-Position Maint.
Switch Lever
MM
MM
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-275
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Selector Switch Selection
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their
varied forms (two-position,
three-position and four-
position) are a big factor
contributing to the great
flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons”
can achieve. Because of their
flexibility, they tend to cause
difficulty with product
selection and application.
The following systematic
approach should simplify
that task.
Cam and contact block
selection is better understood
if you:
●Work with each incoming
and outgoing wire/circuit
separately.
●Recognize the terms NO
and NC only identify the
type of contact by its mode
before mounting to the
operator. The “X-O” chart
(Page V7-T1-277) shows
how that contact will act
after assembly to the
operator with the selected
cam shape. X = closed
circuit, O = open circuit.
●Up to six NO or NC
contacts may be mounted
behind each plunger
location for a total of
twelve contacts. Single
circuit contact blocks have
only one plunger with the
other side of the block
“open.” Therefore, single
circuit contact blocks
transmit motion to blocks
behind them only for the
position containing the
circuit.
●Each cam has two
separate lobes, each of
which operates one of the
two contact block plungers
independently of each
other. Those are identified
as position A (locating nib
side) and position B
(opposite of locating nib).
The position designations
give direction in selecting
and mounting of the
contact blocks.
Contact Circuit Locations
Locating Nib
A
B
Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFF-
AUTO selector switch. In this
circuit, one incoming line is
distributed to two other
outgoing circuits by the
switch. The two circuits can
be looked at individually.
Step 1: Elementary
Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your
mind, a simple elementary
diagram of the switching
scheme as follows:
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary
diagram, you can construct an
“X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts
are to be closed (X) or open
(O) in the various positions of
the switch. The “X-O” for the
HAND circuit looks like this:
In this circuit, you want a
contact closed on the left
(HAND) but open in the
center and right.
For the AUTO circuit, the
“X-O” diagram would look like
this:
Putting them together, the
complete “X-O” diagram is:
Once the “X-O” diagram has
been generated, the next
step is to select the cam
and contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the
desired “X-O” functions.
The selection tables on the
following pages list the
various types (shapes) of
cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact
and position to achieve the
function outlined in your
“X-O” diagram.
OFF
HAND Outgoing
Circuit
AUTO
Outgoing
Circuit
Incoming
Line
HAND OFF AUTO
XOO
HAND OFF AUTO
OOX
X O O
O O X
V7-T1-276 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select
determines the operation of
all contact blocks mounted to
the operator. It is selected on
the basis that it provides the
simplest circuitry for the
desired “X-O” diagram. The
selection tables show all the
“X-O” combinations. For the
purpose of this example, the
applicable portion of those
tables is shown on this page.
Now to make the cam
selection, make a simple
worksheet such as:
It becomes immediately
obvious that cam 3 is the
better choice for two
reasons, (1) the series
combination can be avoided
making it simpler to wire,
(2) only two contacts are
required, which is less
expensive than the three
contacts required by cam 2.
Step 4: Contact Block
Selection.
Having selected the cam,
contact block selection is
simply a matter of gathering
the A position and B position
circuits into pairs which make
up the most convenient contact
block arrangement. If there is
an imbalance in the number of
circuits under A or B, then
single circuit blocks must be
selected for these leftover
circuits.
Back to the worksheet,
having selected cam 3 do
this:
Step 5: Selector Switch
Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose
from the many types of
operators—knob and lever
in various colors or keyed.
Also what combinations
of maintained and spring
return functions are
required. Selection of these
operators can be found on
Page V7-T1-278. For the
example in step 4, you
may want a three-position
maintained black knob,
cam 3—Catalog Number
E34VHBK1.
The Complete Switch:
E34VHBK1 with one
10250T2 or, for one
composite catalog number,
E34VHBK1-Y1 found on
Page V7-T1-275.
Diagrams
Circuits shown illustrate
connections to obtain a
selector switch circuit
combination and are shown
with their appropriate line
diagrams. Field wiring of
jumper connections required
as shown.
X = Closed circuit
O = Open circuit
Wiring of Jumper
Connections
Four-position selector
switches are limited to four
contact blocks.
Contact Blocks
For selection and number
of available contact blocks
per operator, see Page
V7-T1-287.
Cam 2 Cam 3
X O O
O O X
(A)NO-(B)NC
(B)NO
(A)NO
(B)NO
X O X
O O X
ANO
BNO 10250T2
Parallel Connection
Series Connection
Example Selection Table
Two-Position Selector Switch Contact Block Selection
Note
1Wired in series.
No. “X-O” Pattern
Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3
Top A Bottom B Top A Bottom B
1XOO
NO NC NO
—
4 OOX—
NO
—
NO
No.
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Contact Blocks Required to
Accomplish Circuit Function
Top Plunger A Bottom Plunger B
1XO
NC or NC
2OX
NO
or
NO
a
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-277
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Three-Position Switch—Cam and Contact Block Selection
Four-Position Switch—Contact Block Selection
No.
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function
(Jumpers must be installed where indicated)
Operator with Cam Code #2 Operator with Cam Code #3
Mounting Location Mounting Location
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
1X O O
NO NC NO
2XXO
NC NC
3X O X
NO
NO NO
4OOX
NO NO
5O X X
NC NO
NC
6O X O
NC NC NC
No.
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Function
No.
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish Circuit
Function
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Mounting Location Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Mounting Location
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
Top
Plunger
A
Bottom
Plunger
B
1XOOO
NC
10XOXO
NC
NO
2OXOO
NO
3OOXO
NO
11XXXO
NC
NO NO
4OOOX
NC
5XOOX
NC NC
12OXXX
NO NC
NO
6OXXO
NO NO
7OOXX
NO NC
13XOXX
NO
NC NC
8XXOO
NC NO
9OXOX
NO
NC
14XXOX
NC NO
NC
V7-T1-278 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Selector Switch Operators
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operators with Knob Assembled
Key Operators
Key Operators with Cam and Cap
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255.
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R).
2 Field convertible to horizontal mounting.
3 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and
tables on Pages V7-T1-275 to V7-T1-277.
4 For other colors of either the knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the catalog number with the
appropriate suffix code from Alternate Knob and Lever table on Page V7-T1-279. Example: E34VFBL2.
5 Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page V7-T1-279. Add key removal code number to listed catalog number.
Example: E34KFB2.
Positions
Operator
Action 1
Black Knob Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 2
Cam Code 3Catalog Number 4
Two-position—60° throw 1 E34VFBK1
1E34VEBK1
Three-position—60° throw 2 E34VGBK1
3E34VHBK1
2E34VJBK1
3E34VKBK1
2E34VLBK1
3E34VMBK1
2E34VNBK1
3E34VPBK1
Four-position—40° throw 7 E34VTBK1
Positions
Operator
Action 1
Cam
Code 3
Key
Removal
Positions 5
Vertical
Mounting
Catalog Number
Horiz.
Mounting
Catalog Number
Two-position—60° throw 1 1, 2, 3 E34KFB_ E34KFHB_
12 E34KEB_ E34KEHB_
Three-position—60° throw 2 1–7 E34KGB_ E34KGHB_
3E34KHB_ E34KHHB_
21, 4, 5 E34KJB_ E34KJHB_
3E34KKB_ E34KKHB_
24 E34KLB_ E34KLHB_
3E34KMB_ E34KMHB_
22, 4, 6 E34KNB_ E34KNHB_
3E34KPB_ E34KPHB_
Four-position—40° throw 7 7 E34KTB_ E34KTHB_
Two-Position Knob
Selector Switch
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
Three-Position Keyed
Selector Switch
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-279
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Key Removal Positions 1 Dissimilar Locks and Keys
Listed operators have
identical locks and keys (Key
Code H661), Catalog Number
10250ED824. For dissimilar
lock and key combinations,
see Page V7-T1-214.
Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators 2
Notes
1 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
2 See operators on Page V7-T1-278.
3 For use on maintained operators only.
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
1Right only
2Left only
3Right and left
4Center only
6Left and center
7All positions
L
C
R
Color
Knob Lever
Lever Designed for
Added Ingress Protection 3
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
Black K1 E34K1 L1 E34L1 A1 E34A1
Red K2 E34K2 L2 E34L2 A2 E34A2
Green K3 E34K3 L3 E34L3 A3 E34A3
Yellow K4 E34K4 L4 E34L4 A4 E34A4
White K5 E34K5 L5 E34L5 A5 E34A5
Blue K6 E34K6 L6 E34L6 A6 E34A6
Gray K7 E34K7 L7 E34L7 A7 E34A7
Orange K8 E34K8 L8 E34L8 A8 E34A8
E34K_
E34L_
E34A_
V7-T1-280 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators
Operator without Knob or Lever
Knobs and Levers Light Unit Voltage Suffix
Add to operator Catalog Number listed in table above.
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-184 to V7-T1-255.
1 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-241.
2 120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators.
3 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
4 Add suffix code for light unit voltage to listed catalog number from Light Unit Voltage Suffix table above.
Example: For 24V transformer type light unit, order E34VFB024.
5 For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection tables on Pages V7-T1-275 to V7-T1-277.
6 120 and 240V transformer only.
7 120 full voltage only.
8 Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
9 Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (R). Red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (R).
Positions Operator Action
Transformer Type—50/60 Hz Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 1
6V #755 Lamp Lamps—#755, #757, #1835, 120MB 2
Catalog Number 34 Catalog Number 4
Two-position—60° throw Cam Code 1 5Cam Code 1 5
E34VFB_ E34SFB_
Three-position—60° throw Cam Code 2 5Cam Code 3 5Cam Code 2 5Cam Code 3 5
E34VGB_ E34VHB_ E34SGB_ E34SHB_
E34VNB_ 6E34VPB_ 6E34SNB_ 7E34SPB_ 7
E34VJB_ 6E34VKB_ 6E34SJB_ 7E34SKB_ 7
E34VLB_ E34VMB_ E34SLB_ E34SMB_
Four-position—40° throw E34VRB_ — E34SRB_ —
120 Vac Transformer
Selector Switch, Cam 1
MM
MM
M
MS
M
MS
M
SS
M
MM
MM
Color 9
Knob
Catalog Number
and Code Number
Lever
Catalog Number
and Code Number
Red 10250TER 10250TFR
Green 10250TEG 10250TFG
Yellow 10250TEA 10250TFA
Blue 10250TEL 10250TFL
Clear 10250TEC 10250TFC
White 10250TEW 10250TFW
Amber 10250TEM 10250TFM
Knob
Lever
Type of Light Unit
Transformer Type
50/60 Hz
Full Voltage Type
AC or DC 1
Voltage Suffix Code Voltage Suffix Code
24 024 606
120 120 12 12
208 208 24 24
240 240 48 48
380 380 120 120
480 480 240 8240
600 600
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-281
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Accessories
Accessories
Notes
1 Should not be used on flush button for STOP function.
2 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.
Description Catalog Number
Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators.
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock.
Will not lock NO contact.
E34TA2
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with flush pushbutton operators.
Clear 10250TA46
Black 10250TA47
Red 10250TA48
Green 10250TA49
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with button operators (extended
buttons preferred).
Black 10250TA3
Red 10250TA4 1
Green 10250TA10
Clear 10250TA85
Transparent Boot for regular, illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest. 10250TA25 2
Special Retaining Nut—to accommodate thick panel.
Indicating light E34TA30
PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches E34TA31
Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator—prevents accidental operation.
(Not for push-pull operators.)
E34TA6
Extended Retaining Nut—replaces standard nut and provides guard for
flush type pushbutton operators.
E34TA12
Guard for illuminated pushbutton E34TA15
Padlocking Attachment for non-illuminated knob selector switches—
accommodates up to five, 1/4 in padlocks.
E34TA11
E34TA2
10250TA_
E34TA3_
E34TA6
E34TA12
E34TA15
E34TA11
V7-T1-282 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Accessories, continued
Description Catalog Number
Thrust Washer—To meet Ford Motor Company mounting specifications. E34TK3
Contact Block Terminal Jumps—Available in multiples of 100 only.
Terminal to terminal—within block (short):
100 per package 10250TA70
1000 per package 10250TA70-2
Terminal to terminal—block to block (long):
100 per package 10250TA71
1000 per package 10250TA71-2
Master Test (Dual Input) Module—Internal Form C relay suitable for either
AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation between monitored and test circuit.
Fits all illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices.
48 Vdc 10250TMT8
Flasher Module—Internal Form C relay suitable for AC applications.
One unit required for each operator in master test circuit.
24 Vac 10250TFL2
120 Vac 10250TFL1
Panel Mounting Nut Wrench—E22, E30, E34 and octagonal 10250T. E22CW
Fingerproof Shroud—10 per package
Fits new style contact blocks and light units.
10250TA101
E34TK3
10250TA7_
10250TMT8
10250TFL_
E22CW
10250TA101
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-283
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Options
Legend Plates 1
Field Color
Legend plates can be
supplied printed on black, red,
silver or white field. To order
legend printed on a color
other than indicated—add
suffix code to the end of the
catalog number as follows:
“R” for Red field;
“W” for White field; or
“S” for Silver field.
Example: E34SP26R—
Standard plate with red field
marked OPEN.
For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights
Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square 3
Notes
1 For dimensions, see Page V7-T1-260.
2 3/32 in high lettering.
3 Legend plates with non-standard markings or aluminum legend plates see 10250T listing on Page V7-T1-234.
Legend
Color of
Field
Standard 2
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number Legend
Color of
Field
Standard 2
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High
CLAMP Black E34SP90 E34LP90 OFF Red E34SP24 E34LP24
CLOSE E34SP73 E34LP73 ON Black E34SP25 E34LP25
DOWN E34SP74 E34LP74 OPEN E34SP26 E34LP26
EMERG. STOP Red E34SP13 E34LP13 OUT E34SP27 E34LP27
FAST Black E34SP75 E34LP75 POWER ON E34SP80 E34LP80
FASTER E34SP87 E34LP87 RAISE E34SP28 E34LP28
FEEDER ON E34SP94 E34LP94 READY E34SP86 E34LP86
FEEDER OFF E34SP95 E34LP95 RESET E34SP29 E34LP29
FORWARD E34SP15 E34LP15 REVERSE E34SP30 E34LP30
HIGH E34SP16 E34LP16 RUN E34SP31 E34LP31
IN E34SP17 E34LP17 SAFE E34SP85 E34LP85
INCH E34SP18 E34LP18 SLOW E34SP32 E34LP32
JOG E34SP19 E34LP19 SLOWER E34SP88 E34LP88
JOG FOR. E34SP20 E34LP20 START E34SP33 E34LP33
JOG REV. E34SP21 E34LP21 STOP Red E34SP34 E34LP34
LOW E34SP22 E34LP22 TEST Black E34SP83 E34LP83
LOWER E34SP23 E34LP23 TRANSFER E34SP93 E34LP93
LUBE-FAIL E34SP92 E34LP92 TRIP E34SP84 E34LP84
MOTOR RUN E34SP81 E34LP81 UNCLAMP E34SP91 E34LP91
MOTOR STOP E34SP82 E34LP82 UP E34SP35 E34LP35
Color Field Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Extra Large
Catalog NumberLettering Side 1 Side 2
Black White Silver 10250TSP76 10250TLP76 10250TEP76
White Red Black 10250TSP77 10250TLP77 10250TEP77
Standard
Jumbo
V7-T1-284 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
For Selector Switch Operators
For Push-Pull Units
Notes
1 3/32 in (2.4 mm) high lettering.
2 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high lettering.
Legend
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number Legend
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Two-Position—3/16 in High Lettering Three-Position—3/16 in High Lettering
FOR. REV. Black E34SP38 E34LP38 AUTO OFF HAND Black E34SP49 E34LP49
HAND AUTO E34SP39 E34LP39 FOR. OFF REV. E34SP50 E34LP50
HIGH LOW E34SP40 E34LP40 FOR. SAFE REV. E34SP69 E34LP69
JOG RUN E34SP41 E34LP41 HAND OFF AUTO E34SP51 E34LP51
MAN. AUTO E34SP67 E34LP67 MAN. OFF AUTO E34SP68 E34LP68
OFF ON E34SP42 E34LP42 OPEN OFF CLOSE E34SP53 E34LP53
OPEN CLOSE E34SP43 E34LP43 RUN SAFE JOG E34SP70 E34LP70
RUN JOG E34SP44 E34LP44 UP OFF DOWN E34SP54 E34LP54
SAFE RUN E34SP45 E34LP45 ON STOP SAFE E34SP71 E34LP71
START JOG E34SP46 E34LP46
START STOP E34SP47 E34LP47
UP DOWN E34SP48 E34LP48
Legend
Color of
Field
Standard 1
Catalog Number
Jumbo 2
Catalog Number
PULL ON/PUSH OFF Black E34PP5 E34R5
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE Black E34PP8 E34R8
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Black E34PP11 E34R11
Standard
Jumbo
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-285
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Enclosures
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 1
Mounting Instructions
These E34 Die Cast
Enclosures feature a
corrosion resistant coating
identical to finish on the E34
operators except gray in
color. Not for use in
ultraviolet light applications.
One and Two Contact Block
Depth Enclosures Enclosure Layouts
Notes
1For spacing increments, see Page V7-T1-286.
2All die cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23.
See listing on Page V7-T1-229.
3When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used.
414 gauge, type 304.
Number of
Elements
One Contact Block Depth
Catalog Number
Two Contact Block Depth
Catalog Number
Die Cast Enclosure—In-Line 23 NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
1E34N1 E34N11
2E34N2 E34N12
3E34N3 E34N13
4— E34N14
Polyester—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1— E34N51
2— E34N52
3— E34N53
4— E34N54
Stainless Steel 4—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
1— 10250TN33
2— 10250TN34
3— 10250TN35
4— 10250TN36
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-294.
Die Cast Enclosure
Polyester Enclosure
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
One Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
Two Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
111
Top – For Vertical Mounting
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1
222
33
4
V7-T1-286 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Die Cast and Stainless Steel—Flush Mount, Covers Only 1
Covers Only—Flush Mounting
Spacing Increments
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Spacing Increments for
Enclosures Enclosure Layouts
Notes
1These E34 die cast covers feature a corrosion resistant coating identical to the finish on the E34 operators except gray in color.
2Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only.
Number of
Elements Catalog Number Catalog Number
Flush Die Cast Covers
In-Line Deep
Cover
In-Line Flat
Cover
1E34F11 E34F1
2E34F12 E34F2
3E34F13 E34F3
4E34F14 E34F4
In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates 2
With Pullbox Without Pullbox
110250TS10 10250TS1
210250TS11 10250TS2
310250TS12 10250TS3
410250TS14 10250TS4
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-295.
Type F G H
Die cast 2.44 (62) 2.5 (63.5) 1.88 (47.8)
Polyester 1.88 (47.8) Min. 2.13 (54.1) 2.25 (57.2)
Stainless steel 1.69 (42.9) Min. 1.73 (43.9) 2.25 (57.2)
Flush Mounting Covers
F
G
H
111
Top – For Vertical Mounting
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1
222
33
4
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-287
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks
●UL A600/P600 rated
●Color-coded plungers—red/
green for NC/NO circuits
●Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●Black (opaque) or amber
(translucent) housings
●Pressure plate or spade
terminals
●Fingerproof shrouds (for
pressure terminals only)
Logic Level Contact Blocks
●UL A600/P600 rated
●Black plungers
●Inert palladium knife-blade
contacts
●Black (opaque) housings
●Pressure plate or spade
terminals
●Fingerproof shrouds not
available
Special Function Contact Blocks
●UL A600/P600 rated
●Black plungers
●Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●Black (opaque) housings
●Pressure plate terminals
only
●Fingerproof shrouds not
available
Special Purpose Contact Block
●Maximum 300V rated
●Black plungers
●Silver contact tips with
“reliability nibs”
●Black (opaque) housings
●Pressure plate terminals
only
●Fingerproof shrouds not
available
Reliability Nibs
Reliability nibs are the
hallmark of Eaton’s contact
blocks. A pointed silver nib on
the contact tip ensures
reliable switching from logic
level (5V) up to 600V
applications. Therefore
standard contact blocks can
be used for most logic level
applications where the
contacts are not exposed to
any harsh environmental
conditions.
Palladium Contacts
Palladium, which is more
inert than gold, is well suited
for voltages and currents
approaching zero and is
recommended for
applications where
environmental conditions are
a factor.
Maximum Contact Block
Mounting per Operator Type
Operator
Max.
Stack
Pushbuttons 6
Push-pull operators 2
Roto-push operators 4
Two- or three-position
selector switches
6
Four-position selector
switches
4
Joysticks 4
V7-T1-288 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Contact Blocks
Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm).
Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds.
3 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
4 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
5 Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks are not suitable on selector switches or roto-push operators. Okay to use with three-position push-pull operators only
on low voltage (30V or less) circuits.
Symbol Circuit Description 1
Standard Logic Level
Pressure Terminal
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal 2
Catalog Number
Pressure Terminal
Catalog Number
Spade Terminal 2
Catalog Number
1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T51 10250T59 10250T51E 10250T59E
1NO Stack up to six blocks six circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T53 10250T60 10250T53E 10250T60E
NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T1 10250T40 10250T1E 10250T40E
2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T3 10250T42 10250T3E 10250T42E
2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T2 10250T41 10250T2E 10250T41E
Special Function Blocks 3
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six
blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71 3— 10250T71E 3—
ECNO-
NC
Early closing NO and standard NC.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T47 34 — 10250T47E 3—
ECNO-
NO
Early closing NO and standard NO.
Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T57 34 — 10250T57E 3—
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts.
Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T45 3— 10250T45E 3—
LONC-
ECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to
four blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T55 34 — 10250T55E 3—
Special Purpose Blocks 5
2NO-
2NC
Four circuits in single block depth.
Rated 300V max. Stack up to four
blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T44 5—
10250T1
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-289
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds
Replacement Parts
Replacement Lamps—For E34 Illuminated Operators
Notes
1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2
type 10250T or E34 devices.
2 To order contact blocks with translucent amber housing, change suffix P to CP in catalog number e.g. 10250T51CP.
3 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments.
4 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches.
Symbol Circuit Description 1
Standard
Pressure Terminal 2
Catalog Number
Logic Level
Pressure Terminal 2
Catalog Number
1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51P 10250T51EP
1NO Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53P 10250T53EP
NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1P 10250T1EP
2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3P 10250T3EP
2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2P 10250T2EP
Special Function Blocks 3
LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71P 410250T71EP 4
ECNO-NC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to six blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T47P 34 10250T47EP 4
ECNO-NO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to four blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T57P 34 10250T57EP 4
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to six blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T45P 410250T45EP 4
LONC-ECNO Overlapping contacts. Stack up to four blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T55P 34 10250T55EP 4
Mfg. Lamp Type Voltage Base Style Application Part Number
120MB 120V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T resistor indicating light 28-3044
#267 6.3V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T flasher 10250ED986-4
#755 6.3V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T transformer, PresTest and full voltage 28-2202
#756 12V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5184
#757 24V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5185
#1828 32V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5186
#1835 55V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T resistor 28-5187
NE48 120V T 4-1/2 bayonet 10250T neon 28-494
NE51H-R22 120V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T neon 28-3754
NE51H-R68 240V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T neon 28-3755
10250T1CP
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
Blank
No
Plunger
V7-T1-290 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
E34 Style Operator Replacement Parts
Flush Head
Pushbutton Operator
Mushroom Head
Pushbutton Operator
Jumbo Mushroom
Head Operator
Illuminated
Pushbutton Operator
Transformer Type
Indicating Light
Knob-Operated
Selector Switch
Operator
Full Voltage, Resistor
and Transformer Type
Illuminated Selector Switch
Potentiometers
Item
No. Description
No.
Req.
Part
Number
1Gasket 116-1548
2 Mounting nut 1 15-1530-4
3 Set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex) 2 11-2014
4 Mushroom head button (includes [2] item 5) 1 As Req. Below
Black — 53-1317
Red — 53-1317-2
Yellow — 53-1317-3
Green — 53-1317-4
Blue — 53-1317-22
5 Set screw (#10-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex) 2 11-544
6 Jumbo mushroom head button
(aluminum—includes [2] item 5)
1As Req. Below
Red — 53-1317-9
Black — 53-1317-10
Yellow — 53-1317-11
Green — 53-1317-12
7 Jumbo mushroom head button
(aluminum—red EMERG. STOP)
does not include item 5
153-1349-18
8 Mounting screw (#6-32 x 0.710 in long) 2 10250TA79
Washer 2 16-2038
9 Terminal screw and lug (captive) Req. 80-5502
10 Gasket (supplied with basic unit) 1 32-803
11 Round head screw (#4-40 x 0.344 in long)
(supplied with basic unit)
211-4553
Item
No. Description
No.
Req.
Part
Number
12 Mounting screw 2 11-1632
13 Simple potentiometer
(does not include items 18, 28 or 29)
1As Req. Below
1,000 ohms — 41-782-2
2,500 ohms — 41-782-3
5,000 ohms — 41-782-10
10,000 ohms — 41-782-4
25,000 ohms — 41-782-5
50,000 ohms — 41-782-6
14 Connector (includes screw and lug) 2 25-1851
15 Indicating plate 1 As Req. Above
Standard size (without legend) — 30-4460
Large size (specify legend) — 10250TR30
16 Retaining nut 1 15-1547-3
17 Knob 1 53-1314
Socket set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long) 1 11-2014
18 Coupling 1 11-2014
29-3749-2
19 Set screw (#6-32 x 0.188 in long) 1 11-1199
20 Spacer 2 56-1066-18
21 Connector (includes screw and lug) 1 25-1851-2
22 Mounting nut 1 15-1938-2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-291
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Technical Data and Specifications
Mechanical Ratings
General Specifications
Description Specification
Frequency of Operation
All pushbuttons 6000 operations/hr.
Key and lever selector switches 3000 operations/hr.
Auto-latch devices 1200 operations/hr.
Life
Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations
Contact blocks 10 x 106 operations
PresTest units 10 x 106 operations
Lever and key selector switches 0.25 x 106 operations
Twist to release pushbuttons 0.3 x 106 operations
Shock Resistance
Duration 210 ms >5g
Description Specification
Climate Conditions
Operating temperature 1° to 150°F (–17° to 66°C)
Storage temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C)
Altitude 6,562 ft (2,000m)
Humidity Max. 95% RH at 60°C
Te rm i n a l s
Marking NC-NO on the contact block to meet the NEMA requirements. Dual marking system 1–2
for normally closed, 3–4 for normally open to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005).
Clamps Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2)
conductors
Torque 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Degree of protection against direct electrical contact IP2X with fingerproof shroud
Light Units
Transformers Will withstand short-circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60947-5-1
Bulbs—average life:
Transformer type 20,000 hrs.
Resistor/direct voltage type 2500 hrs. minimum at rated V
LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
V7-T1-292 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Electrical Ratings
Electrical Ratings—Contact Block
Description Specification
Insulation Ui = 660 Vac or Vdc
Thermal Ith = 10A
Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Rated conditional short circuit current 1 kA
Fuse type GE power controls TIA 10, red spot type gG, 10A, 660 Vac, 460 Vdc, BS88-2,
IEC 60269-2-1
UL rating A600, P600
AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour
10A 110V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
5A 250V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
2A 600V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations
Switching capacity
AC 15 rated make/break (11 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
6A 120V pf 0.3
4A 240V pf 0.3
2A 660V pf 0.3
DC13 rated make/break (1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
1.0A 125V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
0.55A 250V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
0.1A 660V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms
10A 110V pure resistive
Maximum ratings for logic level and
hostile atmosphere application
Maximum amperes 0.5A
Maximum volts 120 Vac/Vdc
Low voltage switching Conical shaped points or “reliability nibs” improve performance in dry circuit,
corrosive, fine dust and other contaminated atmospheres. Under normal
environmental conditions, the minimum operational voltage is 5V and the minimum
operational current is 1 mA, Vac/Vdc.
Contact operation Slow make and break. All normally closed contacts have positive opening operation,
i.e., normally closed contacts are forced open in the event of contact weld or spring
breakage.
Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
Description
50 Vac or 60 H Vdc
120 240 480 600 24/28 125 250
Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp) 60 30 15 12 5.7 1.1 0.55
Normal load break (amp) 6 3 1.5 1.2 5.7 1.1 0.55
Thermal current (amp) 101010105.05.05.0
Voltamperes:
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity 7200 7200 7200 7200 138 138 138
Normal load break 720 720 720 720 138 138 138
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-293
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Mounting Options
Panel Thickness
●Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm)
●Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate
●Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut
●Indicating light: 10250TA30
●Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31
Mounting Matrix
Mounting Options in Inches (mm)
Horizontal mounting means terminals are located top and bottom of contact block.
Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block.
This allows close spacing of adjacent operators with easy access to terminals.
Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 in (3.6 mm) #29 drill.
Drilling Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Legend
Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
ABCD
Small 1.63 (41.3) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.63 (41.3)
Medium 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.75 (44.5)
Large 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2)
B
Min.
C
Min.
0.6
(15.2)
A
Min. 1.22
(31)
D
Min.
Horizontal Mounting Vertical Mounting
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
Terminals on Top
Terminals at Side
0.6
(15.2)
1.20
(30.5)
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
V7-T1-294 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Potentiometer Legend Plates
Surface Mounting
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Notes
1Depth given is for two contact block deep stations. One contact block deep stations subtract 3/4 in (19.1 mm).
2No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.
1.88
(47.8)
1.31
(33.3)
1.09
(27.7) 1.0
(25.4)
0.75
(19.1)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
Std. Dial Plate
Large Dial Plate
2.19
(55.6)
Jumbo
2.19
(55.6)
1.77
(45)
Standard
1.77
(45)
A
Surface
DC
B
E
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
Number of
Elements
Element
Arrangement
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting Conduit
EntranceDE
Die Cast
1 In-line 3.88 (98.6) 4.0 (101.6) 3.0 (76.3) 12.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 3/4
2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 3.0 (76.3) 12.69 (68.3) 5.13 (130.3)
3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 3.0 (76.3) 12.69 (68.3) 7.0 (177.8) 1
4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 3.0 (76.3) 12.69 (68.3) 8.88 (225.6)
Polyester
1 In-line 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 2
2 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0)
3 3.81 (96.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 7.13 (181.1)
4 3.81 (96.8) 11.13 (282.7) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 9.38 (238.3)
Stainless Steel
1 In-line 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0) 2
2 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 7.50 (190.5)
3 3.50 (88.9) 9.00 (228.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 9.00 (228.6)
4 3.50 (88.9) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8)
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-295
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Flush Mounting
Die Case and Stainless Steel Covers Only
Notes
1Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover is 3/4 in (19.1 mm) deeper.
2Depth given includes pull box.
A
Surface or Pendant
DC
B
E
4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size
for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20
Screw Size for 12 Element
and Larger
Number of
Elements
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
DE
Die Cast
1 3.88 (98.6) 4.0 (101.6) 0.25 (6.4) 13.50 (88.9) 3.63 (92.2)
2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 0.25 (6.4) 13.50 (88.9) 5.50 (139.7)
3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 0.25 (6.4) 13.50 (88.9) 6.0 (152.4)
4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 0.25 (6.4) 13.50 (88.9) 9.25 (235)
Stainless Steel
1 5.00 (127) 5.0 (127 2.50 (63.5) 23.25 (82.6) 1.88 (47.8)
2 5.00 (127) 6.88 (174.8) 2.50 (63.5) 23.25 (82.6) 3.63 (92.2)
3 5.00 (127) 8.63 (219.2) 2.50 (63.5) 23.25 (82.6) 5.50 (139.7)
4 5.00 (127) 10.50 (266.7) 2.50 (63.5) 23.25 (82.6) 7.25 (184.2)
V7-T1-296 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Padlocking Attachment for Flush
Pushbutton Operators
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot
Transparent Boot
Shroud for Mushroom
Head Operator
Extended Retaining Nut
Guard for Illuminated
Pushbutton
Contact Block Terminal Jumps
Master Test Module and
Flasher Module
Flush Pushbutton
Extended Pushbutton
Half Shroud Pushbutton
0.75
(19.1)
0.84
(21.3) 0.94
(23.9)
1.63
(41.4)
0.25
(6.4)
1.47
(37.3)
1.59
(40.4)
1.92
(48.8)
1.59
(40.4)
1.53
(38.9)
1.50
(38.1)
1.25
(31.8)
1.31
(33.3)
1.38
(35.1)
1.63
(41.4)
1.50
(38.1)
0.25
(6.4)
0.25
(6.4)
0.86
(21.8)
0.45
(11.4)
1.63
(41.4)
1.14
(29)
6 Mounting Holes
1.78
(45.2)
1.31
(33.3)
0.88
(22.4) 1.09
(27.7)
1.06
(26.9)
1.78
(45.2) 1.38
(35.1)
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
0.88
(22.4) 1.09
(27.7)
1.44
(36.6)
1.78
(45.2) 1.38
(35.1)
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
0.88
(22.4) 1.09
(27.7)
1.44
(36.6)
1.78
(45.2) 1.38
(35.1)
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-297
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.9
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mushroom Pushbutton
Jumbo Mushroom Pushbutton
Push-Pull Switch
Indicating Light
PresTest Indicating Light
Illuminated Pushbutton
Selector Switch
Key Selector Switch
Illuminated Selector Switch
0.88
(22.4) 1.09
(27.7)
1.63
(41.4)
1.78
(45.2)
1.50
(38.1)
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
0.88
(22.4) 1.09
(27.7)
1.75
(44.5)
1.78
(45.2)
2.50
(63.5)
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
2.63
(66.8)
1.65
(41.9)
1.78
(45.2)
0.25
(6.4)
0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness
0.88
(22.4)
0.88
(22.4)
1.13
(28.7)
Light
Unit
Contact
Block
1.38
(35.1)
1.1
(27.9)
1.78
(45.2) 1.38
(35.1)
1.9
(48.3) 1.09
(27.7) 0.69
(17.5)
1.78
(45.2) 1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1.09
(27.7)
1.09
(27.7) 0.69
(17.5)
1.78
(45.2) 1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
Light
Unit
1.58
(40.1)
Knob
1.58
(40.1)
Lever
1.09
(27.7)
0.88
(22.4)
Contact
Block
Each Additional
Contact Block
1.5
(38.1)
1.58 (40.1)
to Remove
Key
1.09
(27.7)
0.88
(22.4)
Contact
Block
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1.58
(40.1)
Knob
1.58
(40.1)
Lever
1.09
(27.7)
0.88
(22.4)
Light
Unit
Each Additional
Contact Block
V7-T1-298 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Contents
Description Page
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-299
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units,
Non-Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-300
Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-302
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-304
Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-306
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-308
Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-309
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-310
Selector Switch Contact Block
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-312
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-313
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-314
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-317
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-318
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-319
Product Description
The HT800 Series from
Eaton’s electrical sector is a
family of 30.5 mm pushbutton
devices which includes
momentary, illuminated
and mushroom head
pushbuttons, selector
switches, indicating lights
and push-pull switches. The
HT800 devices have a familiar
appearance found in most
industrial applications and are
suitable for replacement of
several other manufacturers’
30.5 mm pushbutton devices.
Features
●Anodized aluminum
mounting rings
●Watertight double V-gasket
seals
●Extended height bulbs
●Transparent housing
contact blocks
●Color-coded contact blocks
●Gold-plated contacts (on
low voltage contact block)
●Reliability ridge on movable
contact
●Stackable screw-mounted
contact blocks
●Contact blocks can be
mounted in left/right or top/
bottom positions
●Standard NC contact
opens before NO contact
closes (break before make
operation)
●Bright and long lasting LED
indicating lights in six
colors
●Field convertible maintained
selector switches—from
two- to three-position and
vice versa
●Field selectable knob/lever
mounting positions—at any
22.5° increment
Benefits
●Corrosion resistant NEMA
4X finish
●Watertight and oiltight
NEMA 4, 13 ingress
protection
●Increased side illumination
of indicating lights and
illuminated pushbuttons
●Easy visual inspection of
contact conditions
●Easily identifiable NO
(white) or NC (black)
contact blocks
●Gold-plated contacts
suitable for logic level
circuits
●Reliability ridge penetrates
contamination buildup on
stationary contacts
●Left/right or top/bottom
mounted contact blocks
allow correct positioning in
retrofit applications
●All-purpose selector
switches are convertible
and can rotate in 22.5°
increments to suit panel
layouts
Standards and
Certifications
●UL508 per File No.
E131568
●CSA C22.2 No. 14 per File
No. LR68551
Ingress Protection
●UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3,
3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 when
mounted in similarly rated
enclosures
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-299
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
HT800 Pushbuttons, Push-Pulls and Indicating Lights
HT800 Selector Switch
Notes
1Maximum of four contact blocks per side or a total of eight contact blocks recommended.
2Maximum of two contact blocks per side or a total of four contacts blocks recommended.
Style
Pushbuttons
AA = Flush
AB = Extended
AE = Mushroom head
Illuminated Pushbuttons
GB = Illuminated PB
Push-Pull Operators
CB = Two-position, maintained
Indicating Lights
HF = Full voltage/resistor type
HB = Transformer type
Push-to-Test Operators
GT = All types
Light Unit Type/Voltage
F3 = 24V FV, LED
F7 = 120V FV, LED
L1 = 120V transformer, LED
T1 = 120V transformer, incandescent
V3 = 24V FV, incandescent
V7 = 120V res., incandescent
Button Color
G = Green
H = Black
R = Red
Lens Color
A = Amber/Orange
B = Blue
C = Clear
G = Green
R = Red
W = White
Y = Yellow
Contact Block Location
(viewed from rear) 1
Left Side Right Side
A = NO
A2 = 2NO
B1 = NC
B2 = 2NC
C = NOEM
C2 = 2 NOEM
D1 = NCLB
D2 = 2NCLB
E1 = NOEM-NCLB
F1 = NO and NC
F4 = 1NO-1NC
A5 = NO
A6 = 2NO
B = NC
B6 = 2NC
C5 = NOEM
C6 = 2 NOEM
D = NCLB
D6 = 2NCLB
E5 = NOEM-NCLB
Q1 = NO and NC
HT8 GB RAB T1
Operator
JA = Two-pos., knob, maint.
JB = Three-pos., knob, maint.
JC = Four-pos., knob, maint.
JD = Two-pos., lever, maint.
JE = Three-pos., lever, maint.
JF = Four-pos., lever, maint.
JK = Two-pos., knob, spr. rtn., left
JL = Two-pos., lever, spr. rtn., left
JN = Two-pos., knob, spr. rtn., right
JP = Two-pos., lever, spr. rtn., right
JR = Three-pos., knob, spr. rtn., left
JS = Three-pos., lever, spr. rtn., left
JU = Three-pos., knob, spr. rtn., right
JV = Three-pos., lever, spr. rtn., right
JX = Three-pos., knob, spr. rtn., both
JY = Three-pos., lever, spr. rtn., both
LN = Four-pos., knob, spr. rtn., pos 1 to 2
LP = Four-pos., lever, spr. rtn., pos 1 to 2
LR = Four-pos., knob, spr. rtn., pos 4 to 3
LS = Four-pos., lever, spr. rtn., pos 4 to 3
Switch Color
H = Black Cam Location/Type
1D = For all three-pos.
3A = For all two-pos.
8E = For all four-pos.
Contact Block Location
(viewed from rear) 2
Left Side Right Side
A = NO
A2 = 2NO
B1 = NC
B2 = 2NC
C = NOEM
C2 = 2 NOEM
D1 = NCLB
D2 = 2NCLB
E1 = NOEM-NCLB
F1 = NO and NC
F4 = 1NO-1NC
A5 = NO
A6 = 2NO
B = NC
B6 = 2NC
C5 = NOEM
C6 = 2 NOEM
D = NCLB
D6 = 2NCLB
E5 = NOEM-NCLB
Q1 = NO and NC
HT8 JA H3A F1Q1
V7-T1-300 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units, Non-Illuminated
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
●Flush, extended or 40 mm mushroom head operators
HT800 Pushbuttons—Point-of-Purchase Units
Description Catalog Number
Two-position maintained selector switch 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend
plates: OFF ON, MAN. AUTO, UP DOWN
HT8JAH3AAB-POP
Three-position maintained selector switch, black knob, 1NO/1NC contact block,
three square legend plates: HAND OFF AUTO, FOR. OFF REV., OPEN OFF CLOSE
HT8JBH1DAB-POP
Three-position selector switch, spring return from left and right, black knob,
1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: UP OFF DOWN, FOR OFF REV.,
OPEN OFF CLOSE
HT8JXH1DAB-POP
Red push-pull emergency stop, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
STOP, EMERG. STOP, OFF
HT8CBRAB-POP
Illuminated push-pull maintained red pushbutton, 120V full voltage low profile LED,
three square legend plates: STOP, EMERG. STOP, OFF
HT8FBRABFL7-POP
Illuminated push-pull maintained red pushbutton, 24V full voltage low profile LED,
three square legend plates: STOP, EMERG. STOP, OFF
HT8FBRABFL3-POP
Green flush pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
START, ON, RUN
HT8AAGAB-POP
Black flush pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
RESET, JOG, OPEN
HT8AAHAB-POP
Red flush pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
STOP, CLOSE, OFF
HT8AARAB-POP
Red extended pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
STOP, CLOSE, OFF
HT8ABRAB-POP
Black extended pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates:
RESET, JOG, OPEN
HT8ABHAB-POP
Illuminated green pushbutton, 120V full voltage incandescent, 1NO/1NC contact block,
three square legend plates: START, ON, RUN
HT8GBGABV7-POP
Illuminated green pushbutton, 24V full voltage incandescent, 1NO/1NC contact block,
three square legend plates: START, ON, RUN
HT8GBGABV3-POP
HT800 Pushbuttons
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-301
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Momentary Contact Pushbutton Units, Non-Illuminated
Contact Type Button Color
Flush Head
Catalog Number
Extended Head
Catalog Number
Mushroom Head (40 mm)
Catalog Number
No contact Black HT8AAH HT8ABH HT8AEH
Red HT8AAR HT8ABR HT8AER
Green HT8AAG HT8ABG HT8AEG
1NO Black HT8AAHA HT8ABHA HT8AEHA
Red HT8AARA HT8ABRA HT8AERA
Green HT8AAGA HT8ABGA HT8AEGA
1NC Black HT8AAHB HT8ABHB HT8AEHB
Red HT8AARB HT8ABRB HT8AERB
Green HT8AAGB HT8ABGB HT8AEGB
1NO-1NC Black HT8AAHAB HT8ABHAB HT8AEHAB
Red HT8AARAB HT8ABRAB HT8AERAB
Green HT8AAGAB HT8ABGAB HT8AEGAB
2NO-2NC Black HT8AAHF1Q1 HT8ABHF1Q1 HT8AEHF1Q1
Red HT8AARF1Q1 HT8ABRF1Q1 HT8AERF1Q1
Green HT8AAGF1Q1 HT8ABGF1Q1 HT8AEGF1Q1
Flush Head Operator
Extended Head
Operator
40 mm Mushroom
Head Operator
V7-T1-302 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Illuminated Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
●Incandescent or LED
●Full voltage or transformer type
●24V and 120V
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
Type Volts Lens Color
Operator Only
Catalog Number
1NO
Catalog Number
1NC
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Catalog Number
2NO-2NC
Catalog Number
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1HT8GBFV————
Red HT8GBRV7 HT8GBRAV7 HT8GBRBV7 HT8GBRABV7 HT8GBRF1Q1V7
Green HT8GBGV7 HT8GBGAV7 HT8GBGBV7 HT8GBGABV7 HT8GBGF1Q1V7
Amber HT8GBAV7 HT8GBAAV7 HT8GBABV7 HT8GBAABV7 HT8GBAF1Q1V7
Clear HT8GBCV7 HT8GBCAV7 HT8GBCBV7 HT8GBCABV7 HT8GBCF1Q1V7
White HT8GBWV7 HT8GBWAV7 HT8GBWBV7 HT8GBWABV7 HT8GBWF1Q1V7
Yellow HT8GBYV7 HT8GBYAV7 HT8GBYBV7 HT8GBYABV7 HT8GBYF1Q1V7
Blue HT8GBBV7 HT8GBBAV7 HT8GBBBV7 HT8GBBABV7 HT8GBBF1Q1V7
24 Vac/Vdc No lens 1HT8GBFV————
Red HT8GBRV3 HT8GBRAV3 HT8GBRBV3 HT8GBRABV3 HT8GBRF1Q1V3
Green HT8GBGV3 HT8GBGAV3 HT8GBGBV3 HT8GBGABV3 HT8GBGF1Q1V3
Amber HT8GBAV3 HT8GBAAV3 HT8GBABV3 HT8GBAABV3 HT8GBAF1Q1V3
Clear HT8GBCV3 HT8GBCAV3 HT8GBCBV3 HT8GBCABV3 HT8GBCF1Q1V3
White HT8GBWV3 HT8GBWAV3 HT8GBWBV3 HT8GBWABV3 HT8GBWF1Q1V3
Yellow HT8GBYV3 HT8GBYAV3 HT8GBYBV3 HT8GBYABV3 HT8GBYF1Q1V3
Blue HT8GBBV3 HT8GBBAV3 HT8GBBBV3 HT8GBBABV3 HT8GBBF1Q1V3
Transformer 120 Vac No lens 1HT8GBT1————
Red HT8GBRT1 HT8GBRAT1 HT8GBRBT1 HT8GBRABT1 HT8GBRF1Q1T1
Green HT8GBGT1 HT8GBGAT1 HT8GBGBT1 HT8GBGABT1 HT8GBGF1Q1T1
Amber HT8GBAT1 HT8GBAAT1 HT8GBABT1 HT8GBAABT1 HT8GBAF1Q1T1
Clear HT8GBCT1 HT8GBCAT1 HT8GBCBT1 HT8GBCABT1 HT8GBCF1Q1T1
White HT8GBWT1 HT8GBWAT1 HT8GBWBT1 HT8GBWABT1 HT8GBWF1Q1T1
Yellow HT8GBYT1 HT8GBYAT1 HT8GBYBT1 HT8GBYABT1 HT8GBYF1Q1T1
Blue HT8GBBT1 HT8GBBAT1 HT8GBBBT1 HT8GBBABT1 HT8GBBF1Q1T1
Illuminated Pushbutton
Operator
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-303
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Illuminated Pushbuttons, continued
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
Type Volts Lens Color
Operator Only
Catalog Number
1NO
Catalog Number
1NC
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Catalog Number
2NO-2NC
Catalog Number
LED
Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1HT8GBFV————
Red HT8GBRF7 HT8GBRAF7 HT8GBRBF7 HT8GBRABF7 HT8GBRF1Q1F7
Green HT8GBGF7 HT8GBGAF7 HT8GBGBF7 HT8GBGABF7 HT8GBGF1Q1F7
Amber HT8GBAF7 HT8GBAAF7 HT8GBABF7 HT8GBAABF7 HT8GBAF1Q1F7
Clear HT8GBCF7 HT8GBCAF7 HT8GBCBF7 HT8GBCABF7 HT8GBCF1Q1F7
White HT8GBWF7 HT8GBWAF7 HT8GBWBF7 HT8GBWABF7 HT8GBWF1Q1F7
Yellow HT8GBYF7 HT8GBYAF7 HT8GBYBF7 HT8GBYABF7 HT8GBYF1Q1F7
Blue HT8GBBF7 HT8GBBAF7 HT8GBBBF7 HT8GBBABF7 HT8GBBF1Q1F7
24 Vac/Vdc No lens 1HT8GBFV————
Red HT8GBRF3 HT8GBRAF3 HT8GBRBF3 HT8GBRABF3 HT8GBRF1Q1F3
Green HT8GBGF3 HT8GBGAF3 HT8GBGBF3 HT8GBGABF3 HT8GBGF1Q1F3
Amber HT8GBAF3 HT8GBAAF3 HT8GBABF3 HT8GBAABF3 HT8GBAF1Q1F3
Clear HT8GBCF3 HT8GBCAF3 HT8GBCBF3 HT8GBCABF3 HT8GBCF1Q1F3
White HT8GBWF3 HT8GBWAF3 HT8GBWBF3 HT8GBWABF3 HT8GBWF1Q1F3
Yellow HT8GBYF3 HT8GBYAF3 HT8GBYBF3 HT8GBYABF3 HT8GBYF1Q1F3
Blue HT8GBBF3 HT8GBBAF3 HT8GBBBF3 HT8GBBABF3 HT8GBBF1Q1F3
Transformer 120 Vac No lens 1HT8GBT1————
Red HT8GBRL1 HT8GBRAL1 HT8GBRBL1 HT8GBRABL1 HT8GBRF1Q1L1
Green HT8GBGL1 HT8GBGAL1 HT8GBGBL1 HT8GBGABL1 HT8GBGF1Q1L1
Amber HT8GBAL1 HT8GBAAL1 HT8GBABL1 HT8GBAABL1 HT8GBAF1Q1L1
Clear HT8GBCL1 HT8GBCAL1 HT8GBCBL1 HT8GBCABL1 HT8GBCF1Q1L1
White HT8GBWL1 HT8GBWAL1 HT8GBWBL1 HT8GBWABL1 HT8GBWF1Q1L1
Yellow HT8GBYL1 HT8GBYAL1 HT8GBYBL1 HT8GBYABL1 HT8GBYF1Q1L1
Blue HT8GBBL1 HT8GBBAL1 HT8GBBBL1 HT8GBBABL1 HT8GBBF1Q1L1
Illuminated Pushbutton
Operator
V7-T1-304 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
●Incandescent or LED
●Full voltage or transformer type
●24V and 120V
Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
Type Volts Lens Color
Operator Only
Catalog Number
1NO
Catalog Number
1NC
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Catalog Number
2NO-2NC
Catalog Number
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1HT8GDFV————
Red HT8GDRV7 HT8GDRAV7 HT8GDRBV7 HT8GDRABV7 HT8GDRF1Q1V7
Green HT8GDGV7 HT8GDGAV7 HT8GDGBV7 HT8GDGABV7 HT8GDGF1Q1V7
Amber HT8GDAV7 HT8GDAAV7 HT8GDABV7 HT8GDAABV7 HT8GDAF1Q1V7
Clear HT8GDCV7 HT8GDVAV7 HT8GDCBV7 HT8GDCABV7 HT8GDCF1Q1V7
White HT8GDWV7 HT8GDWAV7 HT8GDWBV7 HT8GDWABV7 HT8GDWF1Q1V7
Yellow HT8GDYV7 HT8GDYAV7 HT8GDYBV7 HT8GDYABV7 HT8GDYF1Q1V7
Blue HT8GDBV7 HT8GDBAV7 HT8GDBBV7 HT8GDBABV7 HT8GDBF1Q1V7
24 Vac/Vdc No lens 1HT8GDFV————
Red HT8GDRV3 HT8GDRAV3 HT8GDRBV3 HT8GDRABV3 HT8GDRF1Q1V3
Green HT8GDGV3 HT8GDGAV3 HT8GDGBV3 HT8GDGABV3 HT8GDGF1Q1V3
Amber HT8GDAV3 HT8GDAAV3 HT8GDABV3 HT8GDAABV3 HT8GDAF1Q1V3
Clear HT8GDCV3 HT8GDVAV3 HT8GDCBV3 HT8GDCABV3 HT8GDCF1Q1V3
White HT8GDWV3 HT8GDWAV3 HT8GDWBV3 HT8GDWABV3 HT8GDWF1Q1V3
Yellow HT8GDYV3 HT8GDYAV3 HT8GDYBV3 HT8GDYABV3 HT8GDYF1Q1V3
Blue HT8GDBV3 HT8GDBAV3 HT8GDBBV3 HT8GDBABV3 HT8GDBF1Q1V3
Transformer 120 Vac No lens 1HT8GDT1————
Red HT8GDRT1 HT8GDRAT1 HT8GDRBT1 HT8GDRABT1 HT8GDRF1Q1T1
Green HT8GDGT1 HT8GDGAT1 HT8GDGBT1 HT8GDGABT1 HT8GDGF1Q1T1
Amber HT8GDAT1 HT8GDAAT1 HT8GDABT1 HT8GDAABT1 HT8GDAF1Q1T1
Clear HT8GDCT1 HT8GDCAT1 HT8GDCBT1 HT8GDCABT1 HT8GDCF1Q1T1
White HT8GDWT1 HT8GDWAT1 HT8GDWBT1 HT8GDWABT1 HT8GDWF1Q1T1
Yellow HT8GDYT1 HT8GDYAT1 HT8GDYBT1 HT8GDYABT1 HT8GDYF1Q1T1
Blue HT8GDBT1 HT8GDBAT1 HT8GDBBT1 HT8GDBABT1 HT8GDBF1Q1T1
Guarded Illuminated
Pushbutton Operator
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-305
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons, continued
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
Type Volts Lens Color
Operator Only
Catalog Number
1NO
Catalog Number
1NC
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Catalog Number
2NO-2NC
Catalog Number
LED
Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1HT8GDFV————
Red HT8GDRF7 HT8GDRAF7 HT8GDRBF7 HT8GDRABF7 HT8GDRF1Q1F7
Green HT8GDGF7 HT8GDGAF7 HT8GDGBF7 HT8GDGABF7 HT8GDGF1Q1F7
Amber HT8GDAF7 HT8GDAAF7 HT8GDABF7 HT8GDAABF7 HT8GDAF1Q1F7
Clear HT8GDCF7 HT8GDCAF7 HT8GDCBF7 HT8GDCABF7 HT8GDCF1Q1F7
White HT8GDWF7 HT8GDWAF7 HT8GDWBF7 HT8GDWABF7 HT8GDWF1Q1F7
Yellow HT8GDYF7 HT8GDYAF7 HT8GDYBF7 HT8GDYABF7 HT8GDYF1Q1F7
Blue HT8GDBF7 HT8GDBAF7 HT8GDBBF7 HT8GDBABF7 HT8GDBF1Q1F7
24 Vac/Vdc No lens 1HT8GDFV————
Red HT8GDRF3 HT8GDRAF3 HT8GDRBF3 HT8GDRABF3 HT8GDRF1Q1F3
Green HT8GDGF3 HT8GDGAF3 HT8GDGBF3 HT8GDGABF3 HT8GDGF1Q1F3
Amber HT8GDAF3 HT8GDAAF3 HT8GDABF3 HT8GDAABF3 HT8GDAF1Q1F3
Clear HT8GDCF3 HT8GDCAF3 HT8GDCBF3 HT8GDCABF3 HT8GDCF1Q1F3
White HT8GDWF3 HT8GDWAF3 HT8GDWBF3 HT8GDWABF3 HT8GDWF1Q1F3
Yellow HT8GDYF3 HT8GDYAF3 HT8GDYBF3 HT8GDYABF3 HT8GDYF1Q1F3
Blue HT8GDBF3 HT8GDBAF3 HT8GDBBF3 HT8GDBABF3 HT8GDBF1Q1F3
Transformer 120 Vac No lens 1HT8GDT1————
Red HT8GDRL1 HT8GDRAL1 HT8GDRBL1 HT8GDRABL1 HT8GDRF1Q1L1
Green HT8GDGL1 HT8GDGAL1 HT8GDGBL1 HT8GDGABL1 HT8GDGF1Q1L1
Amber HT8GDAL1 HT8GDAAL1 HT8GDABL1 HT8GDAABL1 HT8GDAF1Q1L1
Clear HT8GDCL1 HT8GDCAL1 HT8GDCBL1 HT8GDCABL1 HT8GDCF1Q1L1
White HT8GDWL1 HT8GDWAL1 HT8GDWBL1 HT8GDWABL1 HT8GDWF1Q1L1
Yellow HT8GDYL1 HT8GDYAL1 HT8GDYBL1 HT8GDYABL1 HT8GDYF1Q1L1
Blue HT8GDBL1 HT8GDBAL1 HT8GDBBL1 HT8GDBABL1 HT8GDBF1Q1L1
Guarded Illuminated
Pushbutton Operator
V7-T1-306 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Indicating Light Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
●Incandescent or LED
●Full voltage or transformer
type
●Standard and PresTest
types
●24V and 120V
PresTest—This device
incorporates a press-to-test
feature whereby depressing
the lens disconnects
the light from the source
being monitored
and connects the lamp to a
continuously energized
circuit for immediate
detection of faulty lamps.
Indicating Light Units
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
Type Volts Lens Color
Indicating Light
Catalog Number
PresTest
Catalog Number
Incandescent
Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1HT8HFFV HT8GTFV
Red HT8HFRV7 HT8GTRV7
Green HT8HFGV7 HT8GTGV7
Amber HT8HFAV7 HT8GTAV7
Clear HT8HFCV7 HT8GTCV7
White HT8HFWV7 HT8GTWV7
Yellow HT8HFYV7 HT8GTYV7
Blue HT8HFBV7 HT8GTBV7
24 Vac/Vdc No lens 1HT8HFFV HT8GTFV
Red HT8HFRV3 HT8GTRV3
Green HT8HFGV3 HT8GTGV3
Amber HT8HFAV3 HT8GTAV3
Clear HT8HFCV3 HT8GTCV3
White HT8HFWV3 HT8GTWV3
Yellow HT8HFYV3 HT8GTYV3
Blue HT8HFBV3 HT8GTBV3
Transformer 120 Vac
50/60 Hz
No lens 1HT8HBT1 HT8GTT1
Red HT8HBRT1 HT8GTRT1
Green HT8HBGT1 HT8GTGT1
Amber HT8HBAT1 HT8GTAT1
Clear HT8HBCT1 HT8GTCT1
White HT8HBWT1 HT8GTWT1
Yellow HT8HBYT1 HT8GTYT1
Blue HT8HBBT1 HT8GTBT1
Indicating Light Unit
PresTest Light Unit
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-307
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Indicating Light Units, continued
Note
1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
Type Volts Lens Color
Indicating Light
Catalog Number
PresTest
Catalog Number
LED
Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1HT8HFFV HT8GTFV
Red HT8HFRF7 HT8GTRF7
Green HT8HFGF7 HT8GTGF7
Amber HT8HFAF7 HT8GTAF7
Clear HT8HFCF7 HT8GTCF7
White HT8HFWF7 HT8GTWF7
Yellow HT8HFYF7 HT8GTYF7
Blue HT8HFBF7 HT8GTBF7
24 Vac/Vdc No lens 1HT8HFFV HT8GTFV
Red HT8HFRF3 HT8GTRF3
Green HT8HFGF3 HT8GTGF3
Amber HT8HFAF3 HT8GTAF3
Clear HT8HFCF3 HT8GTCF3
White HT8HFWF3 HT8GTWF3
Yellow HT8HFYF3 HT8GTYF3
Blue HT8HFBF3 HT8GTBF3
Transformer 120 Vac
50/60 Hz
No lens 1HT8HBT1 HT8GTT1
Red HT8HBRL1 HT8GTRL1
Green HT8HBGL1 HT8GTGL1
Amber HT8HBAL1 HT8GTAL1
Clear HT8HBCL1 HT8GTCL1
White HT8HBWL1 HT8GTWL1
Yellow HT8HBYL1 HT8GTYL1
Blue HT8HBBL1 HT8GTBL1
Indicating Light Unit
PresTest Light Unit
V7-T1-308 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
●40 mm mushroom head
●Two-position maintained
●Non-illuminated
Two-Position Push-Pull, Maintained, Non-Illuminated
Note
1 NCLB = normally closed late break.
Contact Type
Operator Position—Maintained
Button
Color
Round Head
Mushroom Head
Button
Flat Head
Mushroom Head
Button
Out In Catalog Number Catalog Number
No contact — — Black HT8CBH HT8DBH
Red HT8CBR HT8DBR
Green HT8CBG HT8DBG
NO O X Black HT8CBHA HT8DBHA
Red HT8CBRA HT8DBRA
Green HT8CBGA HT8DBGA
NC X O Black HT8CBHB HT8DBHB
Red HT8CBRB HT8DBRB
Green HT8CBGB HT8DBGB
NO-NC O
X
X
O
Black HT8CBHAB HT8DBHAB
Red HT8CBRAB HT8DBRAB
Green HT8CBGAB HT8DBGAB
NCLB 1
NC
X
X
O
O
Black HT8CBHD1B HT8DBHD1B
Red HT8CBRD1B HT8DBRD1B
Green HT8CBGD1B HT8DBGD1B
NCLB 1
NCLB 1
X
X
O
O
Black HT8CBHD1D HT8DBHD1D
Red HT8CBRD1D HT8DBRD1D
Green HT8CBGD1D HT8DBGD1D
Round Head Two-
Position Push-Pull Unit
Flat Head Two-Position
Push-Pull Unit
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-309
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
●Incandescent or LED
●Full voltage or transformer type
●24V and 120V
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Note: Complete illuminated push-pull switches will not fit in a standard 3 in deep enclosure.
Illuminated Push-Pull Units with Low Profile Light Units
Type Volts
Lens
Color
Operator Only
Catalog Number
1NO
Catalog Number
1NC
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Catalog Number
2NCLB
Catalog Number
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc Red HT8FBRV7 HT8FBRAV7 HT8FBRBV7 HT8FBRABV7 HT8FBRD1DV7
Green HT8FBGV7 HT8FBGAV7 HT8FBGBV7 HT8FBGABV7 HT8FBGD1DV7
24 Vac/Vdc Red HT8FBRV3 HT8FBRAV3 HT8FBRBV3 HT8FBRABV3 HT8FBRD1DV3
Green HT8FBGV3 HT8FBGAV3 HT8FBGBV3 HT8FBGABV3 HT8FBGD1DV3
Transformer 120 Vac Red HT8FBRT1 HT8FBRAT1 HT8FBRBT1 HT8FBRABT1 HT8FBRD1DT1
Green HT8FBGT1 HT8FBGAT1 HT8FBGBT1 HT8FBGABT1 HT8FBGD1DT1
LED Lamp
Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc Red HT8FBRF7 HT8FBRAF7 HT8FBRBF7 HT8FBRABF7 HT8FBRD1DF7
Green HT8FBGF7 HT8FBGAF7 HT8FBGBF7 HT8FBGABF7 HT8FBGD1DF7
24 Vac/Vdc Red HT8FBRF3 HT8FBRAF3 HT8FBRBF3 HT8FBRABF3 HT8FBRD1DF3
Green HT8FBGF3 HT8FBGAF3 HT8FBGBF3 HT8FBGABF3 HT8FBGD1DF3
Transformer 120 Vac Red HT8FBRL1 HT8FBRAL1 HT8FBRBL1 HT8FBRABL1 HT8FBRD1DL1
Green HT8FBGL1 HT8FBGAL1 HT8FBGBL1 HT8FBGABL1 HT8FBGD1DL1
Type Voltage Color Fingersafe
Operator Only
Catalog Number
1NO
Catalog Number
1NC
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC
Catalog Number
2NCLB
Catalog Number
1NO-1NCLB
Catalog Number
LED Lamp
Full
voltage
120
Vac/Vdc
Red Yes HT8FBRFL7P HT8FBRAFL7P HT8FBRBFL7P HT8FBRABFL7P HT8FBRD1DFL7P HT8FBRD1BFL7P
Red No HT8FBRFL7 HT8FBRAFL7 HT8FBRBFL7 HT8FBRABFL7 HT8FBRD1DFL7 HT8FBRD1BFL7
24
Vac/Vdc
Red Yes HT8FBRFL3P HT8FBRAFL3P HT8FBRBFL3P HT8FBRABFL3P HT8FBRD1DFL3P HT8FBRD1BFL3P
Red No HT8FBRFL3 HT8FBRAFL3 HT8FBRBFL3 HT8FBRABFL3 HT8FBRD1DFL3 HT8FBRD1BFL3
Incandescent
Full
voltage
120
Vac/Vdc
Red Yes HT8FBRVL7P HT8FBRAVL7P HT8FBRBVL7P HT8FBRABVL7P HT8FBRD1DVL7P HT8FBRD1BVL7P
Red No HT8FBRVL7 HT8FBRAVL7 HT8FBRBVL7 HT8FBRABVL7 HT8FBRD1DVL7 HT8FBRD1BVL7
24
Vac/Vdc
Red Yes HT8FBRVL3P HT8FBRAVL3P HT8FBRBVL3P HT8FBRABVL3P HT8FBRD1DVL3P HT8FBRD1BVL3P
Red No HT8FBRVL3 HT8FBRAVL3 HT8FBRBVL3 HT8FBRABVL3 HT8FBRD1DVL3 HT8FBRD1BVL3
Illuminated
Push-Pull Unit
V7-T1-310 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Selector Switch Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
●Two-, three- and four-position
●Non-illuminated
Two-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-Illuminated
Three-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-Illuminated
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained, S = Momentary.
3 For OXO, NC contacts must be wired in series—see Three-Position Selector Switch table on Page V7-T1-312.
Contact
Type
Operator Position 1Operating Mode 2Standard
Black Knob
Catalog Number
Standard
Black Lever
Catalog Number
No contacts — — M M HT8JAH3A HT8JDH3A
SM
HT8JKH3A HT8JLH3A
MS HT8JNH3A HT8JPH3A
1NO O X M M HT8JAH3AA5 HT8JDH3AA5
SM
HT8JKH3AA5 HT8JLH3AA5
MS HT8JNH3AA5 HT8JPH3AA5
2NO X
O
O
X
MMHT8JAH3AAA5 HT8JDH3AAA5
SM
HT8JKH3AAA5 HT8JLH3AAA5
MS HT8JNH3AAA5 HT8JPH3AAA5
2NO-2NC X
O
O
X
O
X
X
O
MMHT8JAH3AF1Q1 HT8JDH3AF1Q1
SM
HT8JKH3AF1Q1 HT8JLH3AF1Q1
MS HT8JNH3AF1Q1 HT8JPH3AF1Q1
Contact
Type
Operator Position 1Operating Mode 2Standard
Black Knob
Catalog Number
Standard
Black Lever
Catalog Number
No contacts — — — M M M HT8JBH1D HT8JEH1D
SMM
HT8JRH1D HT8JSH1D
MMS HT8JUH1D HT8JVH1D
SMSHT8JXH1D HT8JYH1D
2NO X
O
O
O
O
X
MMMHT8JBH1DAA5 HT8JEH1DAA5
SMM
HT8JRH1DAA5 HT8JSH1DAA5
MMS HT8JUH1DAA5 HT8JVH1DAA5
SMSHT8JXH1DAA5 HT8JYH1DAA5
2NO-2NC 3X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
MMMHT8JBH1DF1Q1 HT8JEH1DF1Q1
SMM
HT8JRH1DF1Q1 HT8JSH1DF1Q1
MMS HT8JUH1DF1Q1 HT8JVH1DF1Q1
SMSHT8JXH1DF1Q1 HT8JYH1DF1Q1
2NO-2NC X
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
MMMHT8JBH1DF1Q1 HT8JEH1DF1Q1
SMM
HT8JRH1DF1Q1 HT8JSH1DF1Q1
MMS HT8JUH1DF1Q1 HT8JVH1DF1Q1
SMSHT8JXH1DF1Q1 HT8JYH1DF1Q1
Standard Knob
Operator
Standard Lever
Operator
Standard Knob
Operator
Standard Lever
Operator
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-311
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Four-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-Illuminated
Notes
1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained, S = Momentary.
Contact
Type
Operator Position 1Operating Mode 2Standard
Black Knob
Catalog Number
Standard
Black Lever
Catalog Number
No contacts ————MMMMHT8JCH8E HT8JFH8E
S MMMHT8LNH8E HT8LPH8E
MMMS HT8LRH8E HT8LSH8E
2NO-2NC X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
MMMMHT8JCH8EF1Q1 HT8JFH8EF1Q1
S MMMHT8LNH8EF1Q1 HT8LPH8EF1Q1
MMMS HT8LRH8EF1Q1 HT8LSH8EF1Q1
Standard Knob
Operator
Standard Lever
Operator
V7-T1-312 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Selector Switch Contact Block Selection
For Two-, Three- and Four-Position Selector Switches
Two-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 3A)
Three-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 1D)
Four-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 8E)
Operator Position
Left Right
XO
NO
or
NC
OX
NC
or
NO
Operator Position
Left Right
XOO
NO
—
OXO
NC NC
OOX—
NO
OXX
NC
—
XXO—
NC
Operator Position
Left Right
XOOO
NO
—
OXOO
NC
—
OOXO—
NO
OOOX—
NC
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-313
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Accessories
HT800 Accessories
Light Units
Description Catalog Number
Illuminated Pushbutton Guard HT8A15
Wrench Tool HT8WRENCH
Lamp/Bulb Removal Tool HT8LAMPTOOL
Thrust Washer (Anti-rotation)
(Included with every operator)
HT8X1
Trim Ring
(Included with every operator)
HT8X2
Sealing/Spacer Washer
(Five included with every operator)
HT8X3
Grounding Kit for Pushbuttons and Selector Switches
(Included with every operator)
HT8GR1
Grounding Kit for Indicating Lights
(Included with indicating lights)
HT8GR2
Type Voltage Catalog Number
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc HT8F3V3
120 Vac/Vdc HT8F7V8
Transformer 120 Vac HT8L1T1
HT8A15
HT8WRENCH
HT8LAMPTOOL
HT8X3
HT8GR2
HT8GR1
HT8X2
HT8X1
Light Unit
V7-T1-314 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Options
Legend Plates 1
For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights
For Selector Switch Operators
For Push-Pull Units Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square
Notes
1For dimensions, see Page V7-T1-322.
23/32 in high lettering.
31/8 in high lettering.
Legend
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number Legend
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High
CLAMP Black HT8SP90 HT8LP90 OFF Red HT8SP24 HT8LP24
CLOSE HT8SP73 HT8LP73 ON Black HT8SP25 HT8LP25
DOWN HT8SP74 HT8LP74 OPEN HT8SP26 HT8LP26
EMERG. STOP HT8SP13 HT8LP13 OUT HT8SP27 HT8LP27
FAST HT8SP75 HT8LP75 POWER ON HT8SP80 HT8LP80
FASTER HT8SP87 HT8LP87 RAISE HT8SP28 HT8LP28
FEEDER ON HT8SP94 HT8LP94 READY HT8SP86 HT8LP86
FEEDER OFF HT8SP95 HT8LP95 RESET HT8SP29 HT8LP29
FORWARD HT8SP15 HT8LP15 REVERSE HT8SP30 HT8LP30
HIGH HT8SP16 HT8LP16 RUN HT8SP31 HT8LP31
IN HT8SP17 HT8LP17 SAFE HT8SP85 HT8LP85
INCH HT8SP18 HT8LP18 SLOW HT8SP32 HT8LP32
JOG HT8SP19 HT8LP19 SLOWER HT8SP88 HT8LP88
JOG FOR. HT8SP20 HT8LP20 START HT8SP33 HT8LP33
JOG REV. HT8SP21 HT8LP21 STOP Red HT8SP34 HT8LP34
LOW HT8SP22 HT8LP22 TEST Black HT8SP83 HT8LP83
LOWER HT8SP23 HT8LP23 TRANSFER HT8SP93 HT8LP93
LUBE-FAIL HT8SP92 HT8LP92 TRIP HT8SP84 HT8LP84
MOTOR RUN HT8SP81 HT8LP81 UNCLAMP HT8SP91 HT8LP91
MOTOR STOP HT8SP82 HT8LP82 UP HT8SP35 HT8LP35
Legend
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number Legend
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Two-Position—3/16 in High Lettering Three-Position—3/16 in High Lettering
FOR. REV. Black HT8SP38 HT8LP38 AUTO OFF HAND Black HT8SP49 HT8LP49
HAND AUTO HT8SP39 HT8LP39 FOR. OFF REV. HT8SP50 HT8LP50
HIGH LOW HT8SP40 HT8LP40 FOR. SAFE REV. HT8SP69 HT8LP69
JOG RUN HT8SP41 HT8LP41 HAND OFF AUTO HT8SP51 HT8LP51
MAN. AUTO HT8SP67 HT8LP67 MAN. OFF AUTO HT8SP68 HT8LP68
OFF ON HT8SP42 HT8LP42 OPEN OFF CLOSE HT8SP53 HT8LP53
OPEN CLOSE HT8SP43 HT8LP43 RUN SAFE JOG HT8SP70 HT8LP70
RUN JOG HT8SP44 HT8LP44 UP OFF DOWN HT8SP54 HT8LP54
SAFE RUN HT8SP45 HT8LP45 ON STOP SAFE HT8SP71 HT8LP71
START JOG HT8SP46 HT8LP46
START STOP HT8SP47 HT8LP47
UP DOWN HT8SP48 HT8LP48
Standard
Jumbo
Standard
Jumbo
Legend
Color of
Field
Standard 2
Catalog Number
Jumbo 3
Catalog Number
ON/OFF Black HT8PP5 HT8R5
OPEN/CLOSE HT8PP8 HT8R8
UP/DOWN HT8PP11 HT8R11
Legend
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Black White/Silver HT8SP76 HT8LP76
White Red/ Black HT8SP77 HT8LP77
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-315
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Legend Plates with Non-Standard Markings
When Ordering Specify
●Catalog number of blank
plate.
●Insert the following into
Order Notes: legend, letter
size and locations. See
information below.
Ordering Example:
Catalog no.: HT85P76STAMP
Letter size: 3/32 in (2.4 mm)
Pos. A—POWER HOUSE
Pos. B—START PUMP 1
Legend Characters
Available
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
P Q R S T U V W X Y Z / - . , 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Legend Positions
Blank Plastic Legend Plates for Non-Standard Markings—Plastic
Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions
Note
1Can be used on top row only of any enclosure.
Legend
Color of
Field
Standard
Catalog Number
Jumbo
Catalog Number
Black White/Silver HT8SP76STAMP HT8LP76STAMP
White Red/Black HT8SP77STAMP HT8LP77STAMP
Top
(Aluminum
and Plastic) Style
Character Size
3/32 in High 1/8 in High 3/16 in High
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Standard Square 2 18 2 13 1 9
Jumbo 1Square 5 23 3 18 2 12
Jumbo Size
HT8LP Series
A
C
K
D
B
Standard Size
HT8SP Series
AB
B
A
GF
AE
GH
A
I
AF
D4
C4B4
A4
V7-T1-316 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks 12
Contact Block Location (Viewed from Rear)
Suffix Codes 34
Notes
1 See Page V7-T1-318 for contact block electrical ratings.
2 Maximum of four contact blocks per side or a total of eight contact blocks recommended.
3 Maximum of two contact blocks per side or a total of four contact blocks recommended.
4 Standard contact blocks without fingerproof protection.
Description/Function
Contact
Type
Without Guard
Catalog Number
Fingerproof
Catalog Number
Standard normally open contact NO HT8A HT8AP
Standard normally closed contact NC HT8B HT8BP
Normally open early make contact will
make circuit before standard NO contact.
DC ratings do not apply.
NOEM HT8C HT8CP
Normally closed late break contact will
open after standard NC contact.
DC ratings do not apply.
NCLB HT8D HT8DP
Logic level, low voltage NO contact.
Gold plated contacts.
NO HT8E HT8EP
Left Side Right Side
A=NO A5 =NO
A2 =2NO A6 =2NO
B1 =NC B=NC
B2 =2NC B6 =2NC
C=NOEM C5 = NOEM
C2 = 2 NOEM C6 = 2 NOEM
D1 = NCLB D= NCLB
D2 =2 NCLB D6 =2 NCLB
E1 =NOEM-NCLB E5 = NOEM-NCLB
F1 = NO and NC Q1 = NO and NC
F4 = 1NO-1NC
NO Contact Block
NC Contact Block
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-317
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Replacement Parts
Replacement Bulbs and LEDs
Replacement Lenses
Voltage Color Catalog Number
Incandescent
6V — HT8BULBV1
24V — HT8BULBV3
120V — HT8BULBV7
LED
6–12V
(For use with transformers with 6V
secondary winding)
Red HT8LEDRF1
Green HT8LEDGF1
Amber/orange HT8LEDAF1
White/clear HT8LEDWF1
Yellow HT8LEDYF1
Blue HT8LEDBF1
24V Red HT8LEDRF3
Green HT8LEDGF3
Amber/orange HT8LEDAF3
White/clear HT8LEDWF3
Yellow HT8LEDYF3
Blue HT8LEDBF3
120V Red HT8LEDRF7
Green HT8LEDGF7
Amber/orange HT8LEDAF7
White/clear HT8LEDWF7
Yellow HT8LEDYF7
Blue HT8LEDBF7
Color
Indicating Lights
Catalog Number
PresTest Lights
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Catalog Number
Amber HT8LA HT8BA
Blue HT8LB HT8BB
Clear HT8LC HT8BC
Green HT8LG HT8BG
Red HT8LR HT8BR
White HT8LW HT8BW
Yellow HT8LY HT8BY
Incandescent Bulb
LED Bulb
V7-T1-318 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Technical Data and Specifications
HT800—Specifications
Electrical Ratings—HT800 Standard Contact Blocks, UL Rating
UL A600 and P600 Ratings
Notes
1Heavy-duty.
2Standard duty.
3DC ratings do not apply to NOEM (Normally Open Early Make) and NCLB (Normal Closed Late Break) contact blocks HT8C and HT8D.
4Maximum make or break volt-amperes at 300V or less.
Description Specification
Mechanical Ratings
Frequency of operation
Pushbuttons 6,000 operations per hour
Selector switches 3,000 operations per hour
Push-pull operators 3,000 operations per hour
Mechanical endurance/life
Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations 6K ops/hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right
Selector switches 250 x 103 operations 3K ops/hr with 2 NO on left and 2 NC on right
Push-pull operators 250 x 103 operations 3K ops/hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right
Climatic Conditions
Operating temperature 10° to 140°F (–12° to 60°C)
Storage temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C)
Altitude 6,562 ft (2,000m)
Humidity 95% RH at 60°C
Te rm i n a l s
Contact blocks #6-32 posidrive saddle clamp type, 1 x 16 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG, 12 in-lbs max.
Light units #6-32 posidrive saddle clamp type, 1 x 22 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG, 7 in-lbs max.
Electrical Ratings
Standard contact blocks UL (NEMA) rating See table below.
Logic level contact block power rating 5V 1 mA (minimum)
28V 500 mA (maximum)
Description/Function
Contact
Type AC DC Catalog Number
Standard normally open contact NO A600 1P600 2HT8A
Standard normally closed contact NC A600 1P600 2HT8B
Normally open early make contact will make circuit before standard
NO contact. DC ratings do not apply.
NOEM A600 1—HT8C
Normally closed late break contact will open after standard NC
contact. DC ratings do not apply.
NCLB A600 1—HT8D
Logic level, low voltage NO contact. Gold plated contacts. NO 5V 1 mA (minimum)
28V 500 mA (maximum)
HT8E
Description
50 Vac or 60 Hz Vdc 3
120 240 480 600 125 250 600
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp) 60 30 15 12 1.1 0.55 0.2
Normal load break (amp) 6 3 1.5 1.2 1.1 0.55 0.2
Thermal current (amp) 101010105 5 5
Voltamperes:
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity 7200 7200 7200 7200 138 4138 4138 4
Normal load break 720 720 720 720 138 138 138
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-319
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Momentary Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated
Back, side and bottom views of pushbutton operator with attached contact blocks.
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Back, side and bottom views of pushbutton operator with attached contact blocks.
Note
1Recommended maximum of four tandem stacks of contact blocks behind operator. At users’ discretion, two additional tandem stacks may be added.
4.60 (116.8)
Side View
Back View
Bottom View
1.40
(35.6)
Panel
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
3.70 (94.0)
2.90 (73.7) 0.90 (22.9)
Extended
0.75 (19.1)
Flush
2.00 (50.8)
1.0 0
(25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Optional
2 Stacks
1
Panel
Light Unit #6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
7 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
Contact Block
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
5.15 (130.8)
1.40
(35.6)
Side View
4.35 (110.5)
3.55 (90.2) 1.50
(38.1)
2.75 (69.9)
Back View
1.0 0
(25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Bottom View
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Optional
2 Stacks
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
1
V7-T1-320 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons and Round Head MRH Push-Pull Operators
Back, side and bottom views of mushroom head operator with attached contact blocks.
Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Flat Head MRH Push-Pull Operators
Back, side and bottom views of push-pull operator with attached contact blocks.
Notes
1Recommended maximum of four tandem stacks of contact blocks behind operator. At users’ discretion, two additional tandem stacks may be added.
2Contact blocks mount directly to operator adaptor in non-illuminated version.
4.60 (116.8)
Side View
1.40
(35.6)
Panel
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
3.70 (94.0)
2.90 (73.7)
1.50
(38.1)
2.00 (50.8)
Back View
1.0 0
(25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Bottom View
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Optional
2 Stacks
1
4.35 (110.5)
Side View
Back View
Bottom View
1.40
(35.6)
Panel
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Contact Block
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
Light Unit
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x22 AWG to 2x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
7 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
3.55 (90.2)
2.75 (69.9)
1.30
(33.0)
1.0 0
(25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Optional
2 Stacks
5.15 (130.8)
1 2
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-321
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Indicating Lights
Back, side and bottom views of indicating light operator with attached contact blocks.
Selector Switches
Back, side and bottom views of selector switch operator with attached contact blocks.
Side View
Back View
Bottom View
1.30
(33.0)
Panel
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x22 AWG to 2x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
7 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
1.67
(42.4)
Light Unit
Assembly
1.26
(32.0)
1.68
(42.7)
Side View
Back View
Bottom View
1.40
(35.6)
Panel
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
2.90 (73.7) 1.20
(38.1)
2.00 (50.8)
1.0 0
(25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Recommended
2 Stacks
(4 Contact Blocks Total)
V7-T1-322 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.10
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Mounting Matrix and Minimum Panel Spacing Requirements Legend Plates
0.68
(17.3)
Optional Notch
Locations
1.20 (30.5)
Diameter
2.50
(63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
0.18 (4.6)
2.19
(55.6)
Jumbo
1.77
(45)
Standard
2.19
(55.6)
1.77
(45)
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-323
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Contents
Description Page
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—
10250T/E34
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-324
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-325
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-325
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-326
Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . V7-T1-330
Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-332
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . V7-T1-333
Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-334
Illuminated Pushbuttons and
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-335
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-337
Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-339
Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-342
Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-346
Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-348
Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-351
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . . V7-T1-354
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-356
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-359
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-361
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-362
Product Description
All the Industry-Proven
Quality of Eaton’s 10250T and
E34 Series of Logic Devices,
plus Class I Division 2
Certification
The 10250T1H consists of a
normally open-normally
closed factory sealed contact
block that is UL Listed for use
in Class I, Division 2, Groups
B, C and D (NEC 500–503)—
Class I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 (NEC
505) hazardous locations and
is rated for both NEMA A600
and NEMA Q300. 10250T and
E34 illuminated components
have also been UL Listed for
use in Class I, Division 2,
Groups B, C and D (NEC 500–
503)—Class I, Zone 2, IIB +
H2 (NEC 505).
This, combined with the
industry-proven Eaton
10250T 30.5 mm pushbutton
line, offers a complete
solution to Division 2
hazardous location
requirements.
Single composite catalog
numbers for complete
assembled stations and
operators for use in Division 2
hazardous locations are
featured throughout this
section.
Features
●Factory sealed contact
blocks
●Heavy-duty zinc die cast
construction
●NEMA rated 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4,
4X, 12, 13
●Front-of-panel drainage
holes
●Grounding nibs on the
operator casing
●Solid thermosetting
cathodic epoxy coating on
E34
●Corrosion resistance in E34
Benefits
●Pushbutton for hazardous
locations
●Drainage holes prevent
buildup of liquid inside the
operator which can prevent
operation in freezing
environments
●Grounding nibs bite
through paint and other
coatings to provide secure
ground
●Suitable for corrosive
environments (E34 only)
●Earth terminal provides
additional grounding point
and allows for daisy chain
grounding (E34 line)
Standards and
Certifications
●UL 508—File No. E131568
●UL 1604—File No. E10323
●CSA Certified C22.2
No.14—File No. LR 68551
●CSA Certified C22.2 No.
213-M1987—File No. LR
20713
Ingress Protection
●Standard indicating lights
●UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R,
3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
●IEC IP65
●All other operators
●UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R,
4, 4X, 12, 13
●IEC IP65
V7-T1-324 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Product Overview
Operator
The 30.5 mm 10250T
pushbutton line features a
zinc die cast construction with
chrome-plated housing and
mounting nut.
Eaton’s E34 Series 30.5 mm
pushbutton line features the
same rugged die cast
construction of our 10250T
line with an additional two-
layer 100% solid thermosetting
cathodic epoxy coating. This
coating provides a flat black
smooth, consistent, corrosion
resistant surface that has
passed a demanding 600 hour
salt spray test. (The industry
standard for this 4X test
requires only 200 hours.)
Ultraviolet Light
E34 epoxy coating is not
recommended for use in
applications where exposure
to ultraviolet light exists—use
NEMA 4X 10250T operators.
Ratings
Our Class I Division 2 line of
pushbuttons are UL Listed
(NEMA type) 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4,
4X, 12 and 13. Our Class I
Division 2 E34 line meets IEC
947-1 IP66 standards and the
cathodic coating meets FDA
3A sanitary chemical
resistance requirements.
For a complete listing of all
applicable ratings see
Pages V7-T1-359 to
V7-T1-360.
10250T Grounding Nibs
10250T line operators have
“grounding nibs”—four metal
points on the operator casting
designed to bite through
most paints and other
coatings on metal panels to
enhance the grounding
connection when the
operator is securely
tightened.
10250T Grounding Nibs
E34 Grounding Nibs
E34 line of operators is
equipped with a ground
screw terminal as part of its
die cast construction. This
earthing terminal provides an
easily accessible point for
grounding operators when
used in a painted or
nonmetallic enclosure and
eliminates the need for extra
kits when daisy chain
grounding is required.
E34 Grounding Nibs
Nib
Earth
Term i n a l
Diaphragm Seal with
Drainage Holes
Liquid Drainage
Eaton’s pushbutton operators
offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator
bushing. Hidden from view by
the mounting nut, these
holes prevent buildup of liquid
inside the operator, which
can prevent operation in
freezing environments. The
holes also provide a route for
escaping liquid in high
pressure washdowns,
effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm
seal, ensuring reliable sealing
in applications even beyond
NEMA 4.
Diaphragm Seal
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole
Drainage Hole
Flexible
Diaphragm
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
Mounting Nut
Colorfast
Molded
Button
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-325
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Product Identification
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
Catalog Number Selection
Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers.
Non-Illuminated Assembled Operators
ACC/SS Type
Blank = None
J = JMB push-pull
B = Booted-FL/EXT
G = Guarded-FL
K = Knob-SS
L = Lever-SS
A = Lever W/IP-SS
C = Coin-SS
Keyed-SS
——
Cam
1
2
3
7
Button Color
B= Black
R= Red
G= Green
Y= Yellow
W= White
L= Blue
N= Orange
E= Red EMERG. STOP
T= Keyed-SS
Key Removal
1 = RT only
2 = LT only
3 = RT and LT
4 = CT only
5 = RT and CT
6 = LT and CT
7 = All
Operator and Contact Block
706 = Flush 1NO-1NC
707 = Flush 2NO-2NC
708 = Extended 1NO-1NC
709 = Extended 2NO-2NC
710 = Mushroom 1NO-1NC
711 = Mushroom 2NO-2NC
712 = JMB mushroom 1NO-1NC
713 = JMB mushroom 2NO-2NC
714 = 2P MT push-pull 1NO-1NC
715 = 2P MT push-pull 2NO-2NC
716 = 3P MT push-mom pull 1NO-1NC
717 = 3P MT push-mom pull 2NO-2NC
718 = 3P mom push-pull 1NO-1NC
721 = 3P mom push-pull 2NO-2NC
722 = 2P SS MT XO,OX-CAM1
723 = 2P SS MT XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1
724 = 2P SS SPR-R XO,OX-CAM1
725 = 2P SS SPR-R XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1
726 = 3P SS MT XOO,OOX-CAM3
727 = 3P SS MT XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
728 = 3P SS SPR-L XOO,OOX-CAM3
729 = 3P SS SPR-L XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
730 = 3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OOX-CAM3
731 = 3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
732 = 3P SS SPR-R XOO,OOX-CAM3
733 = 3P SS SPR-R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
743 = 4P SS MT XOOO,OXOO,OOXO,OOOX-CAM7
Operator Type
10250T = Heavy-duty oiltight
E34EX = Corrosion resistant oiltight
10250T 718 E J
V7-T1-326 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Non-Illuminated Flush and Extended Pushbuttons
Color Selection
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with
appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T710Y.
2 Blue not available on jumbo mushroom pushbutton.
3 Orange is only available on flush or extended pushbuttons.
4 Red with EMERG. STOP engraved on button head for jumbo mushroom pushbutton only.
Contact Type
Button
Color 1
Flush Button Extended Button
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC Black 10250T706B E34EX706B 10250T708B E34EX708B
Red 10250T706R E34EX706R 10250T708R E34EX708R
Green 10250T706G E34EX706G 10250T708G E34EX708G
2NO-2NC Black 10250T707B E34EX707B 10250T709B E34EX709B
Red 10250T707R E34EX707R 10250T709R E34EX709R
Green 10250T707G E34EX707G 10250T709G E34EX709G
Color Suffix Code Color Suffix Code
Black BWhite W
Red RBlue L 2
Green GOrange 3N
Yellow YRed (EMERG. STOP) 4E
10250T Flush Button
E34 Flush Button
10250T Extended
Button
E34 Extended Button
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-327
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Non-Illuminated Mushroom and Jumbo Mushroom Pushbuttons
Color Selection
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with
appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T710Y.
2 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet applications.
3 Blue not available on jumbo mushroom pushbutton.
4 Orange is only available on flush or extended pushbuttons.
5 Red with EMERG. STOP engraved on button head for jumbo mushroom pushbutton only.
Contact Type
Button
Color 1
Mushroom Button Jumbo Mushroom Button
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
10250T 2
Catalog Number
E34 2
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC Black 10250T710B E34EX710B 10250T712B E34EX712B
Red 10250T710R E34EX710R 10250T712R E34EX712R
Green 10250T710G E34EX710G 10250T712G E34EX712G
2NO-2NC Black 10250T711B E34EX711B 10250T713B E34EX713B
Red 10250T711R E34EX711R 10250T713R E34EX713R
Green 10250T711G E34EX711G 10250T713G E34EX713G
Color Suffix Code Color Suffix Code
Black BWhite W
Red RBlue L 3
Green GOrange 4N
Yellow YRed (EMERG. STOP) 5E
10250T Mushroom
Button
E34 Mushroom Button
10250T Jumbo
Mushroom Button
E34 Jumbo Mushroom
Button
V7-T1-328 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●Momentary contact
●Non-illuminated
●Booted or guarded
10250T Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded
Color Selection
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with
appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T706YG.
2 Red booted flush pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function.
Contact Type Button Color
Booted Flush Button
Catalog Number
Booted Extended Button
Catalog Number
Guarded Extended Button 1
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC Black 10250T706BB 10250T708BB 10250T706BG
Red 10250T706RB 210250T708RB 10250T706RG
Green 10250T706GB 10250T708GB 10250T706GG
2NO-2NC Black 10250T707BB 10250T709BB 10250T707BG
Red 10250T707RB 210250T709RB 10250T707RG
Green 10250T707GB 10250T709GB 10250T707GG
Color Suffix Code Color Suffix Code
Black BWhite W
Red RBlue L
Green GOrange N
Yellow Y
Guarded Extended
Button
Booted Extended
Button
Booted Flush Button
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-329
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●Momentary contact
●Non-illuminated
●Booted or guarded
E34 Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded
Color Selection
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with
appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T706YG.
2 Red booted flush pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function.
Contact Type Button Color
Booted Flush Button
Catalog Number
Booted Extended Button
Catalog Number
Guarded Extended Button 1
Catalog Number
1NO-1NC Black E34EX706BB E34EX708BB E34EX706BG
Red E34EX706RB 2E34EX708RB E34EX706RG
Green E34EX706GB E34EX708GB E34EX706GG
2NO-2NC Black E34EX707BB E34EX709BB E34EX707BG
Red E34EX707RB 2E34EX709RB E34EX707RG
Green E34EX707GB E34EX709GB E34EX707GG
Color Suffix Code Color Suffix Code
Black BWhite W
Red RBlue L
Green GOrange N
Yellow Y
Booted Flush Button
Booted Extended
Button
Guarded Extended
Button
V7-T1-330 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, and 13
Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 To order operator with factory assembled extended retaining nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications, add suffix letter E to listed catalog number.
Color
Half Shrouded Button
Flush Button Extended Button 10250T E34
10250T 1
Catalog
Number
E34
Catalog
Number
10250T
Catalog
Number
E34
Catalog
Number
Vertical
Catalog
Number
Horizontal
Catalog
Number
Vertical
Catalog
Number
Horizontal
Catalog
Number
Black 10250T101 E34PB1 10250T111 E34EB1 10250T501 10250T511 E34EVB1 E34EHB1
Red 10250T102 E34PB2 10250T112 E34EB2 10250T502 10250T512 E34EVB2 E34EHB2
Green 10250T103 E34PB3 10250T113 E34EB3 10250T503 10250T513 E34EVB3 E34EHB3
Yellow 10250T104 E34PB4 10250T120 E34EB4 10250T504 10250T514 E34EVB4 E34EHB4
Gray 10250T105 E34PB5 — E34EB5 10250T505 10250T515 E34EVB5 E34EHB5
White 10250T106 E34PB6 10250T116 E34EB6 10250T506 10250T516 E34EVB6 E34EHB6
Blue 10250T108 E34PB7 10250T118 E34EB7 10250T508 10250T518 E34EVB7 E34EHB7
Orange 10250T109 E34PB8 10250T119 E34EB8 10250T509 10250T519 E34EVB8 E34EHB8
10250T Flush Button
E34 Flush Button
10250T Extended
Button
E34 Extended Button
10250T Half Shrouded
Button
E34 Half Shrouded
Button
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-331
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, and 13
Mushroom Head Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
2 Anodized aluminum head may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
Color
Mushroom Button Anodized Aluminum Jumbo Mushroom Button
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
10250T 1
Catalog Number
E34 2
Catalog Number
Black 10250T121 E34LB1 10250T171 E34JB1
Red 10250T122 E34LB2 10250T172 E34JB2
Red (EMERG. STOP) — — 10250T17213 E34JB2N8
Green 10250T123 E34LB3 10250T173 E34JB3
Yellow 10250T124 E34LB4 10250T174 E34JB4
Blue 10250T129 E34LB6 — —
10250T Mushroom
Button
E34 Mushroom Button
10250T Jumbo
Mushroom Button
E34 Jumbo Mushroom
Button
V7-T1-332 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Illuminated Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●Momentary contact
●Illuminated
●Plastic lenses
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Lens Selection
Note
1 To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the catalog number with appropriate
suffix code from Lens Selection table above. Example: 10250T828YD24.
Type Voltage Color Contact
10250T E34
LED/Lamp
Number Catalog Number 1
LED/Lamp
Number Catalog Number 1
LED Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red 1NO-1NC Bayonet
base
10250T828RD24 Bayonet
base
E34EX828RD24
Green 10250T828GD24 E34EX828GD24
Amber 10250T828AD24 E34EX828AD24
120 Vac Red 1NO-1NC 10250T828RD2A E34EX828RD2A
Green 10250T828GD2A E34EX828GD2A
Amber 10250T828AD2A E34EX828AD2A
Transformer 120 Vac Red 1NO-1NC 10250T802RD06 Bayonet
base
6 Vac
E34EX802RD06
Green 10250T802GD06 E34EX802GD06
Amber 10250T802AD06 E34EX802AD06
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red 1NO-1NC #757 10250T818RD#757 E34EX818RD
Green 10250T818GD E34EX818GD
Amber 10250T818AD E34EX818AD
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 1NO-1NC 120MB 10250T824RD120MB E34EX824RD
Green 10250T824GD E34EX824GD
Amber 10250T824AD E34EX824AD
Transformer 120 Vac Red 1NO-1NC #755 10250T802RD#755
6 Vac
E34EX802RD
Green 10250T802GD E34EX802GD
Amber 10250T802AD E34EX802AD
Color
Suffix
Code Catalog Number Color
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
10250T E34
Red R 10250TC21 Red R E34V2
Green G 10250TC22 Green G E34V3
Yellow Y 10250TC23 Yellow Y E34V4
Amber A 10250TC43 Amber A E34V9
Blue L 10250TC24 Blue L E34V6
Clear C 10250TC25 Clear C E34V0
White W 10250TC26 White W E34V5
10250T8_
E34EX8_
10250TC_
E34V _
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-333
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●Momentary contact
●Guarded illuminated
●Plastic lenses
Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons
Lens Selection
Note
1 To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the catalog number with appropriate
suffix code from Lens Selection table above. Example: 10250T828YD24.
Type Voltage Color Contact
10250T E34
LED/Lamp
Number Catalog Number 1
LED/Lamp
Number Catalog Number 1
LED Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red 1NO-1NC Bayonet
base
10250T828RG24 Bayonet
base
E34EX828RG24
Green 10250T828GG24 E34EX828GG24
Amber 10250T828AG24 E34EX828AG24
120 Vac Red 1NO-1NC 10250T828RG2A E34EX828RG2A
Green 10250T828GG2A E34EX828GG2A
Amber 10250T828AG2A E34EX828AG2A
Transformer 120 Vac Red 1NO-1NC 10250T802RG06 E34EX802RG06
Green 10250T802GG06 E34EX802GG06
Amber 10250T802AG06 E34EX802AG06
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red 1NO-1NC #757 10250T818RG#757 E34EX818RG
Green 10250T818GG E34EX818GG
Amber 10250T818AG E34EX818AG
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 1NO-1NC 120MB 10250T824RG120MB E34EX824RG
Green 10250T824GG E34EX824GG
Amber 10250T824AG E34EX824AG
Transformer 120 Vac Red 1NO-1NC #755 10250T802RG#755
6 Vac
E34EX802RG
Green 10250T802GG E34EX802GG
Amber 10250T802AG E34EX802AG
Color
Suffix
Code Catalog Number Color
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
10250T E34
Red R 10250TC21 Red R E34V2
Green G 10250TC22 Green G E34V3
Yellow Y 10250TC23 Yellow Y E34V4
Amber A 10250TC43 Amber A E34V9
Blue L 10250TC24 Blue L E34V6
Clear C 10250TC25 Clear C E34V0
White W 10250TC26 White W E34V5
10250T8_
E34EX8_
10250TC2_
E34V_
V7-T1-334 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Indicating Light Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●Standard
●Plastic lenses
Indicating Lights
Lens Selection
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters in the catalog number with appropriate suffix code from the Lens Selection table above.
Example: 10250T201HYP.
Type Voltage Color
LED/Lamp
Number
10250T E34
Catalog Number 1Catalog Number 1
LED Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red Bayonet
base
10250T197HLRP24 E34FB197HLRP24
Green 10250T197HLGP24 E34FB197HLGP24
Amber 10250T197HLAP24 E34FB197HLAP24
120 Vac Red 10250T197HLRP2A E34FB197HLRP2A
Green 10250T197HLGP2A E34FB197HLGP2A
Amber 10250T197HLAP2A E34FB197HLAP2A
Transformer 120 Vac Red 10250T181HLRP06 E34TB120HLRP06
Green 10250T181HLGP06 E34TB120HLGP06
Amber 10250T181HLAP06 E34TB120HLAP06
Incandescent Lamp
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red #757 10250T206HRP E34FB24HRP
Green 10250T206HGP E34FB24HGP
Amber 10250T206HAP E34FB24HAP
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 120MB 10250T201HRP E34RB120HRP
Green 10250T201HGP E34RB120HGP
Amber 10250T201HAP E34RB120HAP
Transformer 120 Vac Red #755 10250T181HRP E34HB120HRP
Green 10250T181HGP E34HB120HGP
Amber 10250T181HAP E34HB120HAP
Color
Plastic Glass
Color
Plastic Glass
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
10250T E34
Red RP 10250TC1N RG 10250TC7N Red RP E34H2 RG E34G2
Green GP 10250TC2N GG 10250TC8N Green GP E34H3 GG E34G3
Amber AP 10250TC19N AG 10250TC9N Amber AP E34H9 AG E34G9
Yellow YP 10250TC3N — — Yellow YP E34H4 YG E34G4
Blue LP 10250TC4N LG 10250TC10N Blue LP E34H6 LG E34G6
Clear CP 10250TC5N CG 10250TC11N Clear CP E34H0 CG E34G0
White WP 10250TC6N WG 10250TC12N White WP E34H5 WG E34G5
10250T_
E34_
Glass
Plastic
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-335
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Operators without Lenses
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from the LED Selection table on Page V7-T1-345.
2 Resister units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
Illuminated Pushbutton Indicating Light
Type Voltage
LED/Lamp
Number
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
LED Light Unit Type (LEDs not included) 1
Full voltage — Bayonet
base
10250T397HL E34CB497HL 10250T197HL E34FB197HL
Transformer
AC only
24 10250T416HL E34XB024HL — —
120 10250T411HL E34XB120HL 10250T181HL E34TB120HL
240 10250T412HL E34XB240HL 10250T182HL E34TB240HL
277 10250T419HL E34XB277HL 10250T198HL E34TB277HL
380 10250T413HL E34XB380HL 10250T183HL E34TB380HL
480 10250T414HL E34XB480HL 10250T184HL E34TB480HL
600 10250T415HL E34XB600HL 10250T185HL E34TB600HL
Incandescent Light Unit Type
Full voltage
AC/DC
6#75510250T473H E34CB06H 10250T203H E34FB06H
12 #756 10250T474H E34CB12H 10250T204H E34FB12H
24 #757 10250T476H E34CB24H 10250T206H E34FB24H
32 #1828 10250T477H E34CB32H 10250T207H E34FB32H
48 #1835 10250T478H E34CB48H 10250T208H E34FB48H
Resistor 2
AC/DC
120 120MB 10250T471H E34SB120H 10250T201H E34RB120H
240 120MB 10250T472H E34SB240H 10250T202H E34RB240H
Transformer
AC only
24 #755 10250T416H E34XB024H — —
120 10250T411H E34XB120H 10250T181H E34TB120H
240 10250T412H E34XB240H 10250T182H E34TB240H
277 10250T419H E34XB277H 10250T198H E34TB277H
380 10250T413H E34XB380H 10250T183H E34TB380H
480 10250T414H E34XB480H 10250T184H E34TB480H
600 10250T415H E34XB600H 10250T185H E34TB600H
Neon
AC/DC
120 NE51H-R-22 — — 10250T226H E34NB120H
240 NE51H-4-68 — — 10250T227H E34NB240H
10250T Illuminated
Pushbutton
E34 Illuminated
Pushbutton
10250T Indicating Light
E34 Indicating Light
V7-T1-336 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Indicating Light Lenses
Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses
Color
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Plastic
Red 10250TC1N E34H2
Green 10250TC2N E34H3
Amber 10250TC19N E34H9
Yellow 10250TC3N E34H4
Blue 10250TC4N E34H6
Clear 10250TC5N E34H0
White 10250TC6N E34H5
Glass
Red 10250TC7N E34G2
Green 10250TC8N E34G3
Amber 10250TC9N E34G9
Yellow — E34G4
Blue 10250TC10N E34G6
Clear 10250TC11N E34G0
White 10250TC12N E34G5
Color
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Red 10250TC21 E34V2
Green 10250TC22 E34V3
Yellow 10250TC23 E34V4
Amber 10250TC43 E34V9
Blue 10250TC24 E34V6
Clear 10250TC25 E34V0
White 10250TC26 E34V5
Plastic
Glass
10250TC_
E34H_
10250TC_
E34G_
10250TC_
E34V_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-337
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●Two- and three-position
●Non-illuminated
Two-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
Three-Position Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Button and Color Selection
table on Page V7-T1-338. Example: 10250T714G.
3 To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Button and Color Selection
table on Page V7-T1-338. Example: 10250T716G.
Operator Function (Position) 1
Contact
Type
Maintained—
Pull
Maintained—
Push Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Mounting Location 110250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number12
O
X
X
O
1NO
1NC
10250T714R E34EX714R
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
10250T715R E34EX715R
10250T71_
E34EX71_
Operator Function (Position) 1
Contact
Type
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Maintained—
Push Red Standard Push-Pull 3
Mounting Location 110250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number12
O
X
O
O
X
O
1NO
1NC
10250T716R E34EX716R
X
X
O
X
O
O
1NC
1NC
10250T717R E34EX717R
10250T71_
E34EX71_
V7-T1-338 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●Two- and three-position
●Non-illuminated
Three-Position Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
Button and Color Selection
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the
Button and Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T718G.
Operator Function (Position) 1
Contact
Type
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Momentary—
Push Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Mounting Location 110250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number12
O
X
O
O
X
O
1NO
1NC
10250T718R E34EX718R
X
X
O
X
O
O
1NC
1NC
10250T721R E34EX721R
Color
Suffix
Code
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Standard
Red R 10250TB62 E34C2
Red (EMERG. STOP) E 10250TB63 E34C2N8
Green G 10250TB61 E34C3
Black B 10250TB60 E34C1
Blue L 10250TB64 E34C6
Jumbo Mushroom Head
(Anodized) Aluminum
Red RJ 10250TJ62 E34J2
Red (EMERG. STOP) EJ 10250TJ63 E34J2N8
Green GJ 10250TJ61 —
Black BJ 10250TJ60 —
Yellow YJ 10250TJ64 —
10250T7_
E34EX7_
Standard
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-339
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●Two-position maintained
●Illuminated
Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
Lens and Color Selection
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the
Lens and Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T851GS.
Operator Function (Position) 1
Type Voltage
Contact
Type
Maintained—
Pull
Maintained—
Push Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Mounting Location 110250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number12
LED Lamp
O
X
X
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO
1NC
10250T853RD24 E34EX853RD24
120 Vac 10250T853RD2A E34EX853RD2A
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T843RD06 E34EX843RD06
120 Vac 10250T844RD06 E34EX844RD06
Incandescent Lamp
O
X
X
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO
1NC
10250T849RD E34EX849RD
Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T851RD E34EX851RD
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T843RD E34EX843RD
120 Vac 10250T844RD E34EX844RD
10250T E34
Color Suffix Code Catalog Number Suffix Code Catalog Number
Standard
Red RD 10250TC47 RD E34M2
Red (EMERG. STOP) ED 10250TC53 ED E34M2N8
Green GD 10250TC48 GD E34M3
Blue LD 10250TC49 LD E34M6
Amber AD 10250TC50 AD E34M9
White WD 10250TC51 WD E34M5
Clear CD 10250TC52 CD E34M0
Side-Lighted (Anodized) Aluminum
Red RS 10250TC57 — —
Red (EMERG. STOP) ES 10250TC63 — —
Green GS 10250TC58 — —
Blue LS 10250TC59 — —
Amber AS 10250TC64 — —
Yellow YS 10250TC60
White WS 10250TC61 — —
Clear CS 10250TC62 — —
Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center
Red RH 10250TC65 — —
Green GH 10250TC66 — —
Amber AH 10250TC67 — —
10250T8_
E34EX8_
Standard
Side-Lighted
(Anodized) Aluminum
HD Aluminum with
Transparent Center
V7-T1-340 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●Three-position—maintained push, momentary pull
●Illuminated
Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the Lens and
Color Selection table on the bottom of Page V7-T1-339. Example: 10250T862AS.
Operator Function (Position) 1
Type Voltage
Contact
Type
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Maintained—
Push Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Mounting Location 110250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number12
LED Lamp
O
X
O
O
X
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO
1NC
10250T864RD24 E34EX864RD24
120 Vac 10250T864RD2A E34EX864RD2A
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T854RD06 E34EX854RD06
120 Vac 10250T855RD06 E34EX855RD06
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC
1NC
10250T875RD24 E34EX875RD24
120 Vac 10250T875RD2A E34EX875RD2A
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T865RD06 E34EX865RD06
120 Vac 10250T866RD06 E34EX866RD06
Incandescent Lamp
O
X
O
O
X
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO
1NC
10250T860RD E34EX860RD
Resistor 120 Vac 10250T862RD E34EX862RD
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T854RD E34EX854RD
120 Vac 10250T855RD E34EX855RD
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC
1NC
10250T871RD E34EX871RD
Resistor 120 Vac 10250T873RD E34EX873RD
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T865RD E34EX865RD
120 Vac 10250T866RD E34EX866RD
E34EX8_
10250T8_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-341
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●Three-position—momentary
●Illuminated
Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the Lens and
Color Selection table on the bottom of Page V7-T1-339. Example: 10250T862AS.
Operator Function (Position) 1
Type Voltage
Contact
Type
Momentary—
Pull
Maintained—
Intermediate
Maintained—
Push Red Standard Push-Pull 2
Mounting Location 110250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number12
LED Lamp
O
X
O
O
X
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO
1NC
10250T886RD24 E34EX886RD24
120 Vac 10250T886RD2A E34EX886RD2A
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T876RD06 E34EX876RD06
120 Vac 10250T877RD06 E34EX877RD06
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC
1NC
10250T897RD24 E34EX897RD24
120 Vac 10250T897RD2A E34EX897RD2A
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T887RD06 E34EX887RD06
120 Vac 10250T888RD06 E34EX888RD06
Incandescent Lamp
O
X
O
O
X
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO
1NC
10250T882RD E34EX882RD
Resistor 120 Vac 10250T884RD E34EX884RD
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T876RD E34EX876RD
120 Vac 10250T877RD E34EX877RD
X
X
O
X
O
O
Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC
1NC
10250T893RD E34EX893RD
Resistor 120 Vac 10250T895RD E34EX895RD
Transformer 24 Vac 10250T887RD E34EX887RD
120 Vac 10250T888RD E34EX888RD
E34EX8_
10250T8_
V7-T1-342 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Push-Pull Operators
An illuminated push-pull
pushbutton unit, arranged for
one-hole mounting, can
replace two pushbuttons and
a pilot light or the non-
illuminated form can replace
two pushbuttons. These units
are available in three basic
types:
●Maintained—(Two-
position). Maintains in the
pulled or pushed position
until manually actuated to
the opposite mode.
●Momentary—(Three-
position). Spring returns to
an intermediate position
when pulled or pushed and
released.
●Momentary Pull,
Maintained Push—(Three-
position). Spring returns to
intermediate position when
pulled. Maintains in pushed
position until manually
returned to intermediate
(ready to reset) position.
Maintained stop holds
circuit open and will
prevent other series
connected operators from
starting the system.
The operators, buttons,
contact blocks, etc., are
offered as building block
components that can be
intermixed to satisfy many
requirements. This minimizes
the need for a varied and
costly inventory.
Application Guide
To assist in the selection of
contact blocks, the sketch
below shows pictorially by
symbols 1 and 2 locations of
contact circuits after
assembly of contact blocks
and adapter to the operator.
The table below shows the
effect of the push and pull
operations on either NO or
NC contacts. (X = contact
closed, O = contact open).
Locating Nibs
Push-Pull Operator Components
Note
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
Locating Nib
12
Type of Operator
Contact
Block
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Out—Pull Intermediate In—Push
Contact Block Mounting Location
121212
Two-Position Operator without Lens
Maintained push-pull 1NO
1NC
O
Xor O
X
No intermediate
position
X
Oor X
O
10250T5 E34GDB
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
Three-Position Operator without Lens
Momentary push-pull
Maintained push-momentary pull
1NO
1NC
O
Xor O
X
O
Oor O
X
X
Oor O
O
10250T4
10250T9
E34GEB
E34GFB
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
Momentary push-pull 1NO
1NC
O
Xor O
X
O
Oor O
O
X
Oor X
O
10250T10 E34GHB
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
10250T_
E34G_
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-343
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D
Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Note
1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from table on Page V7-T1-345.
Light Unit
Type Type Voltage
LED/Lamp
Number Catalog Number
LED
(LEDs not included) 1
Full voltage — Bayonet
base
10250T97HL
Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz
24 10250T89HL
120 10250T63HL
208 10250T64HL
240 10250T65HL
277 10250T82HL
380 10250T66HL
480 10250T67HL
600 10250T68HL
Incandescent Full voltage
AC or DC
6#755
#756
#757
#1828
10250T69H
12 10250T70H
24/28 10250T79H
32 10250T83H
Resistor
AC or DC
120 120MB 10250T80H
240 10250T81H
Transformer
AC only
50/60 Hz
24 #755 10250T89H
120 10250T63H
208 10250T64H
240 10250T65H
277 10250T82H
380 10250T66H
480 10250T67H
600 10250T68H
V7-T1-344 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
1 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use with ultraviolet light applications.
Color
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Standard
Red 10250TC47 E34M2
Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250TC53 E34M2N8
Green 10250TC48 E34M3
Blue 10250TC49 E34M6
Amber 10250TC50 E34M9
White 10250TC51 E34M5
Clear 10250TC52 E34M0
Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring
Red 10250TC57 —
Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250TC63 —
Green 10250TC58 —
Blue 10250TC59 —
Amber 10250TC64 —
Yellow 10250TC60 —
White 10250TC61 —
Clear 10250TC62 —
Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center
Red 10250TC65 —
Green 10250TC66 —
Amber 10250TC67 —
Color
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Standard
Red 10250TB62 E34C2
Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250TB63 E34C2N8
Green 10250TB61 E34C3
Black 10250TB60 E34C1
Blue 10250TB64 E34C6
Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum 1
Red 10250TJ62 E34J2
Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250TJ63 E34J2N8
Green 10250TJ61 —
Black 10250TJ60 —
Yellow 10250TJ64 —
Standard
Side-Lighted
(Anodized) Aluminum
HD Aluminum with
Transparent Center
Standard
Jumbo Mushroom
Head
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-345
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
LED Selection
Note
For a complete listing of all LEDs available, see Page V7-T1-241.
Voltage Color Catalog Number Voltage Color Catalog Number
6 Vac/Vdc
suitable for
use with
transformers
Red E22LED006RN 60 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED060RN
Orange E22LED006ON Orange E22LED060ON
Yellow E22LED006YN Yellow E22LED060YN
Green E22LED006GN Green E22LED060GN
Blue E22LED006BN Blue E22LED060BN
White E22LED006WN White E22LED060WN
12 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED012RN 120 Vac Red E22LED120RA
Orange E22LED012ON Orange E22LED120OA
Yellow E22LED012YN Yellow E22LED120YA
Green E22LED012GN Green E22LED120GA
Blue E22LED012BN Blue E22LED120BA
White E22LED012WN White E22LED120WA
24 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED024RN 120 Vdc Red E22LED120RD
Orange E22LED024ON Orange E22LED120OD
Yellow E22LED024YN Yellow E22LED120YD
Green E22LED024GN Green E22LED120GD
Blue E22LED024BN Blue E22LED120BD
White E22LED024WN White E22LED120WD
48 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED048RN
Orange E22LED048ON
Yellow E22LED048YN
Green E22LED048GN
Blue E22LED048BN
White E22LED048WN
Standard LED Lamp
V7-T1-346 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Selector Switch Units
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●Two- and three-position
●Non-illuminated
Two-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated
Three-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated
Notes
1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (W).
3 To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate
suffix code from the table on Page V7-T1-347.
Example: 10250T722LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with
T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T722T13.
4 To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate
suffix code from the Switch and Color Selection table on Page V7-T1-347.
Example: 10250T726LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with
T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T726T13.
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Cam
Code
Black Knob—Selector Switch 3
Mounting Location 110250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number12
X
O
O
X
1NC
1NO
110250T722BK E34EX722BK
10250T724BK E34EX724BK
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
1NC
1NO
1NC
1NO
110250T723BK E34EX723BK
10250T725BK E34EX725BK
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Cam
Code
Black Knob—Selector Switch 4
Mounting Location 110250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number12
X
O
O
O
O
X
1NO
1NO
310250T726BK E34EX726BK
10250T728BK E34EX728BK
10250T730BK E34EX730BK
10250T732BK E34EX732BK
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
1NO
1NC-1NC
(Series)
1NO
310250T727BK E34EX727BK
10250T729BK E34EX729BK
10250T731BK E34EX731BK
10250T733BK E34EX733BK
10250T72_
E34EX72_
MM
MS
MM
MS
10250T_
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-347
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
●Four-position maintained
●Non-illuminated
Four-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated
Switch and Color Selection
Key Operated Selection Key Removal Positions 7
Notes
1Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
2M = Maintained.
3To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the
Switch and Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T743LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with
T_ (cam) + _ (key removal position). Example: 10250T743T77.
4Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only.
510250T only.
6M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (W).
7Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
Operator Position 1
Operator
Action 2
Contact
Type
Cam
Code
Black Knob—Selector Switch 3
Mounting Location 110250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number12
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
1NC
1NO
1NO
1NC
710250T743BK E34EX743BK
Color
Knob
Suffix Code
Lever
Suffix Code
Lever 4
Suffix Code
Coin Slot 5
Suffix Code
Black BK BL BA BC
Red RK RL RA RC
Green GK GL GA GC
Yellow YK YL YA YC
White WK WL WA WC
Gray AK AL AA AC
Blue LK LL LA LC
Orange NK NL NA NC
10250T743_
E34EX743_
MM
MM
Knob
Lever
Coin Slot 5
Number of
Position
Operator
Action 6
Suffix and
Removal
Position
2 M M T1 + 1, 2, 3
M Q ST1 + 2
3 M M M T3 + 1–7
S W M M T3 + 1, 4, 5
S W M Q ST3 + 4
M M Q S T3 + 2, 4, 6
4 MMMM T7 + 7
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
1Right only
2Left only
3Right and left
4Center only
6Left and center
7All positions
L
C
R
V7-T1-348 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Selector Switch Selection
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their
varied forms (two-position,
three-position, and four-
position) are a big factor
contributing to the great
flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons”
can achieve. Because of their
flexibility, they tend to cause
difficulty with product
selection and application.
The following systematic
approach should simplify
that task.
Cam and contact block
selection is better understood
if you:
●Work with each incoming
and outgoing wire/circuit
separately.
●Recognize the terms NO
and NC only identify the
type of contact by its mode
before mounting to the
operator. The “X-O” table
(Page V7-T1-350) shows
how that contact will act
after assembly to the
operator with the selected
cam shape. X = closed
circuit, O = open circuit.
●One NO-NC contact block
may be mounted behind
each plunger of the
mounting adapter for a
total of four circuits.
●Each cam has two
separate lobes, each of
which operates one of the
two contact block plungers
independently of each
other. Those are identified
as position 1 (locating nib
side) and position 2
(opposite of locating nib).
The position designations
give direction in selecting
and mounting of the
contact blocks.
Contact Circuit Locations
10250T E34
Locating Nib
12
Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFF-
AUTO selector switch. In this
circuit, one incoming line is
distributed to two other
outgoing circuits by the
switch. The two circuits can
be looked at individually.
Step 1: Elementary
Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your
mind, a simple elementary
diagram of the switching
scheme as follows:
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary
diagram, you can construct an
“X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts
are to be closed (X) or open
(O) in the various positions of
the switch. The “X-O” for the
HAND circuit looks like this:
In this circuit, you want a
contact closed on the left
(HAND) but open in the
center and right.
For the AUTO circuit, the “X-
O” diagram would look like
this:
Putting them together, the
complete “X-O” diagram is:
Once the “X-O” diagram has
been generated, the next
step is to select the cam and
contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the
desired “X-O” functions. The
selection tables on the
following pages list the
various types (shapes) of
cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact
and position to achieve the
function outlined in your
“X-O” diagram.
OFF
HAND Outgoing
Circuit
AUTO
Outgoing
Circuit
Incoming
Line
HAND OFF AUTO
XOO
HAND OFF AUTO
OOX
X O O
O O X
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-349
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select
determines the operation of
all contact blocks mounted to
the operator. It is selected on
the basis that it provides the
simplest circuitry for the
desired “X-O” diagram. The
selection tables show all the
“X-O” combinations. For the
purpose of this example, the
applicable portion of those
tables is shown on this page.
Now to make the cam
selection, make a simple
worksheet such as below.
(1) or (2) = mounting location
from chart above:
It becomes obvious that
cam 3 is the better choice
because the series
connection can be avoided,
making it simpler to wire.
Step 4: Contact Block
Selection.
Having selected the cam,
contact block selection is
simply a matter of determining
if you require one NO-NC
contact block (Cat. No
10250T1H) or two. Given the
limitations of the factory
sealed contact block and the
desired “X-O” application,
you may have circuits that
will not be needed—as seen
here with the two additional
NC circuits. (1) or (2) =
mounting location from chart
above.
Step 5: Selector Switch
Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose
from the many types of
operators—knob and lever
in various colors or keyed.
Also what combinations of
maintained and spring
return functions are
required. Selection of these
operators can be found on
Page V7-T1-351. For the
example in step 4, you may
want a three-position
maintained black knob,
cam 3—Catalog Number
10250T1323 (or 34VHBK1).
The Complete Switch:
10250T1323 (or 34VHBK1)
with two 10250T1H or for
one composite catalog
number—10250T726BK (or
E34EX726BK) found on
Page V7-T1-346.
Diagrams
Circuits shown illustrate
connections to obtain a
selector circuit combination
and are shown with their
appropriate line diagrams in
BOLD. Field wiring of jumper
connections required as
shown.
X = Closed circuit
O = Open circuit
Cam 2 Cam 3
X O O
O O X
(1)NO-(2)NC
(2)NO
(1)NO
(2)NO
1
Qty Catalog No. Cam 3
2 10250TIH (1)NO (2)NC
(1)NC (2)NO
Example Selection Table
Note
1Wired in series.
No.
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Cam Code #2
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
Cam Code #3
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
1212
1XOO
NO NC 1 NO
—
4 OOX—
NO
—
NO
V7-T1-350 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Two-Position Selector Switch
Three-Position Selector Switch
Four-Position Selector Switch
Number
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Cam Code #1
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
12
1XO
NC NC
2OX
NO NO
No.
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Cam Code #2
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
Cam Code #3
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
12 1 2
1X O O
NO (Series) NC NO
—
2XXO—
NC
—
NC
3X O X
NO
—
NO (Parallel) NO
4OOX—
NO
—
NO
5O X X
NC (Parallel) NO NC
—
6O X O
NC
—
NC (Series) NC
Number
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Cam Code #7
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
12
1XOOO
NC
—
2OXOO—
NO
3OOXO
NO
—
4OOOX—
NC
5XOOX
NC (Parallel) NC
6OXXO
NO (Parallel) NO
7OOXX
NO (Parallel) NC
8XXOO
NC (Parallel) NO
9 OXOX—
NO/NC
(Parallel)
10 XOXO
NO/NC
(Parallel)
—
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-351
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Selector Switch Operators
10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps
10250T Key Operators with Cam
Key Removal Positions 5Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Above Key Operators
Listed operators have identical locks and keys (Key Code H661)
Catalog Number 10250ED824.
Replacement Keys
Notes
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (W).
2 Field convertible to horizontal mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap.
3 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages V7-T1-348 to V7-T1-350.
4 Choose key removal position required for application from table above. Add key removal code no. to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T15112.
5 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
Positions Operator Action 1
Black Knob Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 2
Black Lever Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 2
Cam Code 3Catalog Number Cam Code 3Catalog Number
Two-position—60° throw 1 10250T1311 110250T3011
110250T1371 110250T3071
Three-position—60° throw 2 10250T1322 210250T3022
310250T1323 310250T3023
210250T1332 210250T3032
310250T1333 310250T3033
210250T1342 210250T3042
310250T1343 310250T3043
210250T1352 210250T3052
310250T1353 310250T3053
Four-position—40° throw 7 10250T1367 710250T3067
Positions Operator Action 1Cam Code 3
Optional Key
Removal Positions 4
Vertical Mounting
Catalog Number 4
Horizontal Mounting
Catalog Number 4
Two-position—60° throw 1 1, 2, 3 10250T1511_ 10250T1611_
12 10250T1571_ 10250T1581_
Three-position—60° throw 2 1–7 10250T1522_ 10250T1622_
310250T1523_ 10250T1623_
21, 4, 5 10250T1532_ 10250T1632_
310250T1533_ 10250T1633_
24 10250T1542_ 10250T1642_
310250T1543_ 10250T1643_
22, 4, 6 10250T1652_ 10250T1662_
310250T1653_ 10250T1663_
Four-position—40° throw 7 7 10250T1677_ 10250T1687_
Black Knob Selector
Switch
Black Lever Selector
Switch
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
Horizontal Mounting
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
1Right only 5Right and center
2Left only 6Left and center
3Right and left 7All positions
4Center only
L
C
R
Key Removal Positions
Description Catalog Number
Replacement keys (code H661)10250ED824
V7-T1-352 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
E34 Selector Switch Operators with Knob Assembled
E34 Key Operators with Cam and Cap
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page V7-T1-351.
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (W).
2 Field convertible to horizontal mounting.
3 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages V7-T1-348 to V7-T1-350.
4 For other colors of either knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the catalog number with the appropriate suffix code from Alternate Knobs and Levers table on
Page V7-T1-353. Example: E34VFBL2.
5 Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page V7-T1-353. Add key removal code no. to listed catalog number. Example: E34KFB2.
Positions Operator Action 1
Black Knob Selector Switch—
Vertical Mounting 2
Cam Code 3Catalog Number 4
Two-position—60° throw 1 E34VFBK1
1E34VEBK1
Three-position—60° throw 2 E34VGBK1
3E34VHBK1
2E34VJBK1
3E34VKBK1
2E34VLBK1
3E34VMBK1
2E34VNBK1
3E34VPBK1
Four-position—40° throw 7 E34VTBK1
Positions Operator Action 1Cam Code 3
Key Removal
Positions 5
Vertical Mounting
Catalog Number
Horizontal Mounting
Catalog Number
Two-position—60° throw 1 1, 2, 3 E34KFB_ E34KFHB_
12 E34KEB_ E34KEHB_
Three-position—60° throw 2 1–7 E34KGB_ E34KGHB_
3E34KHB_ E34KHHB_
21, 4, 5 E34KJB_ E34KJHB_
3E34KKB_ E34KKHB_
24 E34KLB_ E34KLHB_
3E34KMB_ E34KMHB_
22, 4, 6 E34KNB_ E34KNHB_
3E34KPB_ E34KPHB_
Four-position—40° throw 7 7 E34KTB_ E34KTHB_
Black Knob Selector
Switch
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
E34KFB_
MM
MS
MM
M
MS
M
SS
M
MS
M
MM
MM
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-353
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Key Removal Positions
Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators 1
Notes
1 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
2 For use on maintained operators only.
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Position
1Right only 5Right and center
2Left only 6Left and center
3Right and left 7All positions
4Center only
Color
Knob Lever
Lever Designed for
Added Ingress Protection 2
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
Suffix
Code Catalog Number
Black K1 E34K1 L1 E34L1 A1 E34A1
Red K2 E34K2 L2 E34L2 A2 E34A2
Green K3 E34K3 L3 E34L3 A3 E34A3
Yellow K4 E34K4 L4 E34L4 A4 E34A4
White K5 E34K5 L5 E34L5 A5 E34A5
Blue K6 E34K6 L6 E34L6 A6 E34A6
Gray K7 E34K7 L7 E34L7 A7 E34A7
Orange K8 E34K8 L8 E34L8 A8 E34A8
L
C
R
Key Removal Positions
Knob
Lever
Lever for Added
Ingress Protection
V7-T1-354 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators
10250T Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever
Knobs and Levers
Notes
1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (W).
2 For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection table on Page V7-T1-350.
3 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
4 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-241.
5 Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
6 Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer), red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
Position Operator Action 1
Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 4
Transformer Type—50/60 Hz
6V #755 Lamp
Lamps: 6V—#755, 12V—#756, 24V—#757,
48V—#1835, 120/240V—120MB
Cam
Code 3Voltage
Catalog and
Code Number 2
Cam
Code 3Voltage
Catalog and
Code Number 2
Two-position—60° throw 1 24 10250T5961H 1610250T6201H
120 10250T5971H 12 10250T6211H
208 10250T6511H 24 10250T6221H
240 10250T5981H 48 10250T6231H
380 10250T5991H 120 10250T6361H
480 10250T6001H 240 510250T6371H
600 10250T6011H
Three-position—60° throw + 2 or 3 24 10250T602_H + 2 or 3 6 10250T624_H
120 10250T603_H 12 10250T625_H
208 10250T652_H 24 10250T626_H
240 10250T604_H 48 10250T627_H
380 10250T605_H 120 10250T638_H
480 10250T607_H 240 510250T639_H
600 10250T607_H
+ 2 or 3 120 10250T620_H + 2 or 3 120 10250T622_H
240 10250T656_H
+ 2 or 3 120 10250T621_H + 2 or 3 120 10250T623_H
240 10250T662_H
+ 2 or 3 24 10250T614_H + 2 or 3 6 10250T628_H
120 10250T615_H 12 10250T629_H
208 10250T653_H 24 10250T630_H
240 10250T616_H 48 10250T631_H
380 10250T617_H 120 10250T640_H
480 10250T618_H 240 510250T641_H
600 10250T619_H
Four-position—40° throw 7 24 10250T6087H 7610250T6327H
120 10250T6097H 12 10250T6337H
208 10250T6547H 24 10250T6347H
240 10250T6107H 48 10250T6357H
380 10250T6117H 120 10250T6427H
480 10250T6127H 240 510250T6437H
600 10250T6137H
Color 6
Knob
Catalog and
Code Number
Lever
Catalog and
Code Number Color 6
Knob
Catalog and
Code Number
Lever
Catalog and
Code Number
Red 10250TER 10250TFR Clear 10250TEC 10250TFC
Green 10250TEG 10250TFG White 10250TEW 10250TFW
Yellow 10250TEA 10250TFA Amber 10250TEM 10250TFM
Blue 10250TEL 10250TFL
Two-Position Maint.
Selector Switch
MM
MM
M
MS
M
MS
M
SS
M
MM
MM
Knob
Lever
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-355
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever
Knobs and Levers Light Unit Voltage Suffix
Add to operator catalog number listed in table above.
Notes
Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page V7-T1-354.
1 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
2 Replace underscore with proper voltage suffix code from Light Unit Voltage Suffix table above. Example: three-position maintained with 120V transformer type light unit:
E34VGB120H.
3 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-241.
4 120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators.
5 For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection table on Page V7-T1-350.
6 120 and 240V transformer only.
7 120 full voltage only.
8 Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
9 Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer). Red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
Positions Operator Action
Transformer Type—50/60 Hz Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 3
6V #755 Lamp Lamps—#755, #757, #1835, 120MB 4
Catalog Number 12 Catalog Number
2
Two-position—60° throw Cam Code 1 5Cam Code 1 5
E34VFB_H E34SFB_H
Three-position—60° throw Cam Code 2 5Cam Code 3 5Cam Code 2 5Cam Code 3 5
E34VGB_H E34VHB_H E34SGB_H E34SHB_H
E34VNB_H 6E34VPB_H 6E34SNB_H 7E34SPB_H 7
E34VJB_H 6E34VKB_H 6E34SJB_H 7E34SKB_H 7
E34VLB_H E34VMB_H E34SLB_H E34SMB_H
Four-position—40° throw E34VRB_H — E34SRB_H —
120 Vac Transformer
Selector Switch, Cam 1
MM
MM
M
MS
M
MS
M
SS
M
MM
MM
Color 9
Knob
Catalog Number
and Code Number
Lever
Catalog Number
and Code Number
Red 10250TER 10250TFR
Green 10250TEG 10250TFG
Yellow 10250TEA 10250TFA
Blue 10250TEL 10250TFL
Clear 10250TEC 10250TFC
White 10250TEW 10250TFW
Amber 10250TEM 10250TFM
Knob
Lever
Type of Light Unit
Transformer Type
50/60 Hz
Full Voltage Type
AC or DC 3
Voltage Suffix Code Voltage Suffix Code
24 024 606
120 120 12 12
208 208 24 24
240 240 48 48
380 380 120 120
480 480 240 8240
600 600
V7-T1-356 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Options
Contact Blocks and Mounting Adapters
NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Contact Block
Mounting Adapter
Mounting Adapters with Contact Block(s)—Overpacked
Description Catalog Number
Class I Division 2 factory sealed contact block with 1NO-1NC 10250T1H
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-361.
Description Catalog Number
Mounting adapter for pushbuttons 10250TD2
Mounting adapter for selector switches 10250TD3
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-361.
Description Catalog Number
Pushbutton adapter with 1NO-1NC 10250TD21H
Pushbutton adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC) 10250TD21H1H
Selector switch adapter with 1NO-1NC 10250TD31H
Selector switch adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC) 10250TD31H1H
Contact Block
Mounting Adapter
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-357
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Mounting and Assembly
Panel Thickness
●Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm)
●Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate
●Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using
optional retaining nut
●Indicating light: 10250TA30/E34TA30
●Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31/E34TA31
Mounting Matrix
Panel Spacing and Drilling
Operator Assembly
Legend
Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
ABCD
Small 2.87 (72.6) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.87 (72.6)
Jumbo 2.87 (72.6) 2.32 (58.6) 2.32 (58.6) 2.87 (72.6)
Extra large 2.87 (72.6) 2.56 (65.2) 2.52 (64.1) 2.87 (72.6)
Notch for
Locating Nib
Notch for
Locating Nib
.60
(15.2)
ø.14
(ø3.4)
ø1.2
(ø30.5)
“B” Min.
“A” Min.
Terminals for
Light Unit
Drilling for One Hole Mounting
and Dimensions for Minimum
Spacing in Vertical Rows.
“D” Min.
“C” Min.
Terminals for
Light Unit
Drilling for One Hole Mounting
and Dimensions for Minimum
Spacing in Horizontal Rows.
.19
(5.0)
.67
(17.0) ø1.2
(ø30.5)
NOTE: Suitable for Use
in This Alternate
Mounting Hole.
Nameplate
Retaining Nut
5 lb-ft (6.8 Nm)
Panel
0.06" – 0.25"
(1.6 – 8 mm)
with Optional
Retaining Nut
Up to 0.375"
(15.9 mm)
Thrust
Washer
(Optional)
Lens
Washer
Illuminated
Pushbutton
Indicator
Light
Push/Pull
Light Unit
Lamp
E34 Earth
Terminal
Operator
Gasket
Operator
Terminal Clamp:
One or Two Copper Conductors
22 – 12 AWG (0.34 – 4.0 mm2)
7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Contact Block
Mounting Adapter
RATINGS ARE STAMPED
ON LIGHT UNIT
AND CONTACT BLOCK
Terminal Clamp:
Single Copper Conductor
18 – 14 AWG (0.75 – 2.5 mm2)
9 lb-in (1.0 Nm)
Contact Block
V7-T1-358 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Enclosures
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 1
Notes
1 For spacing increments, see Page V7-T1-236.
2 14 gauge, type 304.
Application Notes:
1. Operators need to be
mounted in their
horizontal orientation for
all enclosures. For die
cast enclosures remove
locating nib on operators
and use thrust washer
(Catalog Number
10250TK3).
2. Polyester enclosures
must be used when
mounting illuminated
operators.
Enclosure Layouts
Number of
Elements
10250T
Catalog Number
E34
Catalog Number
Die Cast Enclosure—Deep Cover—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
110250TN11 E34N11
210250TN12 E34N12
310250TN13 E34N13
410250TN14 E34N14
Polyester—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1— E34N51
2— E34N52
3— E34N53
4— E34N54
Stainless Steel 2—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
1— 10250TN33
2— 10250TN34
3— 10250TN35
4— 10250TN36
Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-361.
Die Cast Enclosure
Polyester Enclosure
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
111
Top – For Vertical Mounting
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1
222
33
4
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-359
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Technical Data and Specifications
Mechanical Ratings
Climatic Conditions
Te rm i n a l s
Electrical Ratings
Description Specification
Frequency of Operation
All pushbuttons 6000 operations/hr.
Key and lever selector switches 3000 operations/hr.
Life
Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations
Contact block 10 x 106 operations
Key and lever selector switches 0.25 x 106 operations
Shock Resistance
Duration/force 20 ms >5g
Description Specification
Operating temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 66°C)
Storage temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C)
Altitude 6,562 ft (2,000m)
Humidity Max. 95% RH at 60°C
Description Specification
Light Units
Clamps Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (4.0 mm2)
conductors
Torque 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Degree of protection against direct electrical contact IP2X with fingerproof shroud
Contact Blocks
Clamps Terminals are stainless steel saddle clamp type for 1 x 18–14 AWG (0.75–2.5 mm2)
solid or stranded copper conductor
Torque 9 lb-in (1.0 Nm) with size 2 Phillips screwdriver
Degree of protection against direct electrical contact IP2X with fingerproof shroud
Description Specification
Light Units
Bulbs—average life:
Transformer type 20,000 hrs.
Resistor/direct voltage type 2500 hrs. minimum at rated voltage
LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
V7-T1-360 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Electrical Ratings—Contact Block
Temperature Codes
All illuminated devices have operating temperatures below
100°C except for the following catalog numbers with
temperature codes per NEC table 500-5(d) and UL 1604:
Note: For additional technical information, see Publication Number
TD.7.4.T.E.04.
Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designations A600 and Q300
Description
A600 (AC) Q300 (DC)
120V 240V 480V 600V 125V 250V
Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amps) 60 30 15 12 0.55 0.27
Normal load break (amps) 6 3 1.5 1.2 0.55 0.27
Thermal current (amps) 10 10 10 10 2.5 2.5
Voltamperes:
Maximum make 7200 7200 7200 7200 69 69
Maximum break 720 720 720 720 69 69
10250T E34 Temp. Code
10250T201H E34RB120H T3C
10250T202H E34RB240H T3A
10250T471H E34SB120H TC3
10250T472H E34SB240H T3B
10250T80H — T3C
10250T81H — T3B
All selector switches w/120MB lamp T3C
All illuminated devices with lamp 1835 T4A
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-361
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Surface Mounting
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Contact Block Mounting Adapter
Note
1No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.
A
Surface
DC
B
E
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
Number of
Elements
Element
Arrangement
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting Conduit
EntranceDE
Die Cast
1 In-line 3.88 (98.6) 4.0 (101.6) 3.0 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 3/4
2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 3.0 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 5.13 (130.3)
3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 3.0 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 7.0 (177.8) 1
4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 3.0 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 8.88 (225.6)
Polyester
1 In-line 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 1
2 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0)
3 3.81 (96.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 7.13 (181.1)
4 3.81 (96.8) 11.13 (282.7) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 9.38 (238.3)
Stainless Steel
1 In-line 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0) 1
2 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 7.50 (190.5)
3 3.50 (88.9) 9.00 (228.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 9.00 (228.6)
4 3.50 (88.9) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8)
1.43
(36.3)
1.70
(43.2)
1.02
(25.9)
1.72
(43.7)
0.84
(21.3)
0.44
(11.2)
1.23
(31.2)
1.85
(47.0)
1.86
(47.2)
1.88
(47.8) 0.25
(6.4)
2.57
(65.3)
V7-T1-362 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Ratings
Summary of NEC Article 500
The NEC Article 500 explains
in great detail the
requirements for the
installation of wiring and
electrical equipment in
hazardous locations. The
purpose of this summary is
for general reference only,
the National Electric Code
along with other applicable
authorities having jurisdiction
over the site should be the
installer’s guidelines when
wiring or installing electrical
equipment in any hazardous
or potentially hazardous
location.
Class I, Division 2 Definition
Class I, Division 2 covers
hazardous locations where
flammable gases, vapors or
volatile liquids are handled
either in a closed system, or
confined within suitable
enclosures, or where
hazardous concentrations are
normally prevented by
positive mechanical
ventilation. Areas adjacent to
Division 1 locations, into
which gases might
occasionally flow, would
also belong to Division 2
(NEC (500-5[b])).
Hazardous Location
Any area where there is the
possibility of explosion and
fire resulting from the
presence of flammable
vapors, liquids or gas, or
combustible dust or fibers.
Summary of NEC Article 505
The NEC also classifies
hazardous locations for
flammable gases and vapors
into zones under NEC 505.
This system is more in line
with the European
Standards, CENELEC and
IEC, with the major
difference being that NEC
505 only classifies gases and
vapors while CENELEC and
IEC also include dusts.
Summary of Classifications
NEC 500–503
NEC 505
Note
For additional information on grouping of compounds, see NFPA 497M-1991 and NFPA 325-1994.
Class Division Group
I. Gas 1. Hazard may exist—May exist in
atmosphere under normal operating
conditions
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing 30% hydrogen by
volume (e.g. butadiene, ethylene oxide, propylene oxide)
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether, ethylene, hydrogen
sulfide, morpholine, cyclopropane)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane, propane, acetone,
ammonia, vinyl chloride)
2. Potential hazard—May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal
circumstances OR location adjacent to
Class I, Division 1 location
A. Acetylene
B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing 30% hydrogen by
volume (e.g. butadiene, ethylene oxide, propylene oxide)
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether, ethylene, hydrogen
sulfide, morpholine, cyclopropane)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane, propane, acetone,
ammonia, vinyl chloride)
II. Dust 1. Hazard may exist—May exist in
atmosphere under normal operating
conditions
E. Conductive and combustible dust (resistivity <105 ohm/cm)
(metal dusts)
F. Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm but <108 ohms/cm) (e.g.
carbon black, coke dust, coal)
G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity >105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain
dust, flour, starch, sugar, plastics)
2. Potential hazard—May be present in
atmosphere only under abnormal
circumstances
F. Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm but <108 ohms/cm) (e.g.
carbon black, coke dust, coal)
G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity >105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain
dust, flour, starch, sugar, plastics)
III. Fibers 1. Production areas Easily ignitable fibers or flyings
2. Handling and storage areas Easily ignitable fibers or flyings
Class Zone Group
I. Gas 0. Continuously present or present for long
periods of time
IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or
equivalent hazard
IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard1. Likely to exist under normal operating or
maintenance conditions or adjacent to
Zone 0 IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or
equivalent hazard
2. Not likely to occur in normal operation
and if they do occur will only exist for
short period or adjacent to Zone 1
IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or
equivalent hazard
Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2013 www.eaton.com V7-T1-363
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.11
Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34
Summary of Basic Methods Available for Class I, Division 2 Locations
Factory Sealed Contact Blocks Hermetically Sealed Reed Contact Block
Explosion Proof Enclosure
Method
Features
Configuration Advantages Disadvantages
Factory sealed contact block Closed-ended labyrinth contact block with an
incendive circuit incapable of external ignition
Higher continuous carrying amperages—up to 10A
Direct drive contacts—contacts can be forced open
Suitable for use in all enclosures
Best suited for motor control applications
May not be suitable for logic level circuits
Hermetically sealed block Reed switch sealed against an external
atmosphere
Suitable for low energy level circuits
Suitable for use in all enclosures
Lower continuous carrying amperages are not
suitable for motor control applications
(typically 3A to 5A rated)
Contacts cannot be forced open
Permanent magnet attracts metallic dust and
filings that can reduce the electrical creepage
distance between live terminals
Explosion proof enclosures
(Class I, Division 1 and 2)
Enclosures capable of withstanding an internal
explosion while preventing external ignition.
Enclosures designed for Class I, Division 1 can
safely be used in Class I, Division 2
Higher level of protection than required for Class I
Division 2
Higher material and installation costs
Conduit sealing is still required
Time consuming maintenance
Direct Drive Contacts
Contacts can be
mechanically forced
apart if subject to an
arch/fault current.
Cooled
Escaping
Gas
Internal
Ignition
•
Hermetically sealed
reed does not allow
external atmosphere to
enter switching chamber.
Depression of plunger
rotates magnet and either
opens/closes contacts.
Contacts can not be
forced apart if subject to
arch/fault current, because no
mechanical connection exists.
Cooled
Escaping
Gas
Threaded Joint Flat Joint
Internal
Ignition Internal
Ignition Cooled
Escaping
Gas